JP7159962B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that a lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the lottery. In addition, it is common that an effect is performed to make the player predict or recognize the result of the lottery. These game machines are equipped with display devices, speakers, light emitting devices, movable objects, etc., and depending on the progress of the game, effects such as visual effects, sound effects, light effects, and movable objects are executed. be.

Specifically for the slot machine, the effect selected by lottery is executed by operating the start lever. Also, an opening effect is executed when a predetermined game state is started, and an ending effect is executed when a predetermined end opportunity occurs (see Patent Document 1, for example).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2013-192800

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately control the execution of effects, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of suitably controlling the execution of effects.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the invention according to claim 1 is a game machine provided with an effect control means for controlling the execution of an effect,
The production control means is
A predetermined unit performance is started based on the occurrence of a performance start opportunity, and when the performance start opportunity occurs in a situation where the predetermined unit performance is being executed, the predetermined unit performance being executed is terminated and the predetermined unit performance is performed. production start means for newly starting a unit production;
When the predetermined unit performance is newly started by the occurrence of the performance start opportunity in a situation where the specific performance is executed in the predetermined unit performance, a specific corresponding performance corresponding to the specific performance in the predetermined unit performance. a specific response measure that causes the
with
When the specific effect is being executed, at least both the first specific effect and the second specific effect are executed,
The second specific effect is executed as the specific corresponding effect, and the first specific effect is not executed,
The specific response means is configured to provide the specific response performance as the specific response performance when the performance start opportunity is generated and the predetermined unit performance is newly started in a situation where the specific performance is being executed in the predetermined unit performance. When executing the specific performance, the progress speed of the second specific performance is changed from the previous progress speed of the second specific performance .

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to perform execution control of production suitably.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern and a combination line that can be visually recognized through the display window; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; (a) It is a front view of a common display area, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on a combined display part. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order on the image display device and the display content of the stop order on the combined display unit; FIG. It is a front view of a ratio indicator. 1 is an electrical configuration diagram of a slot machine; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a lottery process for a winning combination executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining a lottery table for normal mode. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the reel stop order and the winning mode established when the normal mode lottery table is selected; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for the first RT mode; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the order of stopping reels and the winning mode established when the lottery table for the first RT mode is selected; It is an explanatory view for explaining a lottery table for the second RT mode. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the order of stopping reels and the winning mode established when the lottery table for the second RT mode is selected; (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining index values with different winning probabilities among set values "1" to "6". FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an offset table; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing winning data acquisition processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a stop operation handling process executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game state and the game section that exist in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st control processing of the game area performed by main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a corresponding process at the end of a game, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd control processing of the game area performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for addition performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the preparation state process performed by main side MPU. 4 is a flowchart showing ART state processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing bonus processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing bonus processing at the start of a game, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing ending handling processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the freeze setting process performed by main side MPU. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a display layer; (a) to (h) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of various effects executed in the normal game state. (a) to (e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the first expected effect and the second expected effect; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between the type of the second expected effect and the degree of expectation for BB winning when bonus winning occurs. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an effect-side ROM for executing various effects in a normal game state, and (b) an explanation for explaining the structure of an effect-side RAM for executing various effects. It is a diagram. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of each layer, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a setting area for sound output, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a setting area for display. is an explanatory diagram of . (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how the effect table is read when neither the bonus notification effect nor the re-variation effect is to be executed. (a) and (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how the effect table is read in the case where the bonus notification effect or the re-variation effect is to be executed in the game. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a second synthetic effect table; FIG. It is a time chart showing how the second expected effect is started based on the second synthetic effect table. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation execution process performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the display control processing performed by production|presentation side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus notification processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing effect content determination processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control processing for normals performed by production|presentation side MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing first effect information setting processing executed by the effect side MPU; 10 is a flowchart showing second effect information setting processing executed by the effect side MPU; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing readout processing executed by the effect-side MPU; FIG. (a) is a flow chart showing winning result handling processing executed by the effect side MPU, and (b) is a flow chart showing effect setting processing at the time of bonus start, which is executed by the effect side MPU. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device in the ART base effect and the ART normal effect; (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device in the additional main effect and the additional sub effect in the ART state. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device in the additional main effect and the additional sub effect in the ART state. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an effect-side ROM for executing various effects in the ART state, and (b) for explaining the configuration of an effect-side RAM for executing various effects in the ART state. is an explanatory diagram of . It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a high-speed first addition sub effect table. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control processing for extraordinary which is performed by production|presentation side MPU. (a) A flowchart showing an effect setting process at the start of ART executed by the effect side MPU, and (b) a flowchart showing a game start process during ART executed by the effect side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation adjustment process performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for addition effects performed by MPU on the effect|presentation side. (a) A flow chart showing a flag clearing process executed by the MPU on the effect side, and (b) a flow chart showing a process for updating the number of games executed by the MPU on the effect side. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how the additional main effect and the additional sub effect are executed in the ART state. It is a flow chart which shows the role product management processing which is executed in the production side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the accessory initializing process which is executed in the production side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing origin setting processing executed by the effect-side MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing accessory origin return processing executed by the MPU on the production side; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a correction action start setting process executed by the effect-side MPU; FIG. (a) It is a flowchart which shows the standby|standby setting process performed by production|presentation side MPU, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the standby|standby management process which is performed by production|presentation side MPU. (a) to (f) are time charts showing how the correction operation standby state and the accessory error state are set. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a bonus notification drive table; (a) It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for a character product drive performed by the production|presentation side MPU, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the role product drive control process which is performed by the production|presentation side MPU. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a role product flag setting process executed by an MPU on the production side; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the role setting process at the time of bonus prize winning performed by production|presentation side MPU. (a) to (i) are time charts showing how the role product error state is canceled and the role product action presentation is executed. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a history image displayed on an image display device, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between the generation trigger of history configuration data and the types of images included in the history image. It is an explanatory diagram for. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an effect-side RAM for displaying history images, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a configuration data storage area. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing history image processing executed by the effect-side MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the history information storage process performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of number-of-sheets information performed by production|presentation side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a process of generating history configuration data executed by an MPU on the production side; FIG. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between the types of selection condition tables and wording specification data set in the selection condition tables, and (b) Reference destinations set in each selection condition table. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a history storage area; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a second selection condition table when ART ends; It is a flowchart which shows the wording selection process performed by production|presentation side MPU. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a headline setting process executed by the MPU on the production side; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the point calculation process performed by production|presentation side MPU. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a headline point table; (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an additional point table; It is a flowchart which shows the plate setting process performed by production|presentation side MPU. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of a plate lottery table. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a game start handling process executed by the effect-side MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing history image management processing executed by the effect-side MPU; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows end production correspondence processing which is executed in production side MPU. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents of a history menu screen displayed on the image display device; 10 is a flowchart showing display operation corresponding processing executed by the MPU on the production side; It is a flowchart which shows the selection correspondence process performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during mode selection performed by production|presentation side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing past history selection processing executed by the effect-side MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device in the ART base effect and the ART normal effect in the second embodiment, and (b) and (c) image display in the ART state additional effect FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents of the device; (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the image display apparatus in reduction additional effect. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an effect-side ROM for executing various effects in the ART state, and (b) for explaining the configuration of an effect-side RAM for executing various effects in the ART state. is an explanatory diagram of . FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a game start process during ART executed by an MPU on the production side; FIG. (a) It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation adjustment process performed by the production|presentation side MPU, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the process for addition effects which is performed by the production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the flag clear processing performed by production|presentation side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing game number update processing executed by the effect-side MPU; FIG. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how an additional effect is executed in the ART state. 13 is a flow chart showing past history selection processing executed by the effect-side MPU in the third embodiment.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine 10, which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 opened, and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. A plurality of wooden panels are fixed to the housing 11 so that the housing 11 is formed into a box-like shape that is open forward as a whole.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 as shown in FIGS. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so as to be able to open and close the internal space of the housing 11 with a shaft portion 12a provided on the left side of the front door 12 as a rotation axis. The front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 13 provided on the rear side thereof.

A game panel 20 is provided near the upper center portion of the front door 12 as shown in FIG. The game panel 20 has three vertically long display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R arranged side by side. The display windows 21L, 21M and 21R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be viewed through the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 11a, and the reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 11a. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are each formed in a cylindrical shape. Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that its center axis coincides with the rotation axis of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R one-to-one. there is Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected through the respective display windows 21L, 21M, 21R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

A start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 20 as shown in FIG. When the start lever 41 is operated while game media such as medals and virtual medals are bet, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating all at once.

On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The respective stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively. Each of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44 is in a state in which it can be stopped after a predetermined time has passed since the left reel 32L started rotating.

The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating based on the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44. One game (game cycle) is performed until the execution of various processes such as the granting of and the management of the game state is completed.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals as an investment value is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. As shown in FIG. 2, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to the hopper device 53 by the selector 52 provided on the back of the front door 12 when reception is permitted, and are guided to the hopper device 53 when reception is prohibited. The medals are led to a medal receiving tray 59 from a medal discharge port 58 provided in the front lower portion of the front door 12 (see FIG. 1). The hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal receiving tray 59 through the medal discharge port 58 when a winning corresponding to the awarding of the game media is established on the activated line. there is

Below the medal slot 45, as shown in FIG. 1, a return button 46 is provided to be pushed when the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are stuck in the selector 52. As shown in FIG. Further, on the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R, there is a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum amount of credited virtual medals that can be betted at once, and two virtual medals are inserted at once. and a third credit insertion button 49 for inserting one virtual medal at a time.

A settlement button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the checkout button 51 is operated under the stored condition, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 58 as real medals.

A power supply device 54 is provided inside the housing 11 to the left of the hopper device 53 as shown in FIGS. The power supply device 54 includes a power switch 55 operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and a setting state of the slot machine 10 from "setting 1" to "setting 1". A setting key insertion hole 57 operated to change within the range of setting 6” is provided.

Next, the symbols attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 4 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and these numbers can be viewed by the main controller 70, which will be described later, through the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. It is a number for recognizing the symbol in the state of being in a bad state, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the numbers will be used.

The symbols include a “bell” symbol (eg, 20th on the left reel 32L), a “replay” symbol (eg, 19th on the left reel 32L), a “watermelon” symbol (eg, 18th on the left reel 32L), and “ Red 7" symbol (e.g., 15th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (e.g., 10th on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (e.g., 9th on left reel 32L), "White 7" symbol (for example, the 5th on the left reel 32L). The number and arrangement order of various symbols are different for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

FIG. 5 is a front view of the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R. Each of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R.

In this slot machine 10, one main line ML is set so as to connect positions where symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible. The main line ML is a line connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 32L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbols of the right reel 32R. The rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started in a state where a prescribed number of game media are betted, and when a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, the profit of giving the game media, Either the benefit of replay or the transition of the game state is provided.

That is, in this slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line on which a prize can be established. The main line ML is set as a straight line. Therefore, a subline SL1 connecting the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, and the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the upper pattern of the middle reel 32M and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R. A subline SL3 connecting a connected subline SL2, a lower pattern of the left reel 32L, a lower pattern of the middle reel 32M, and a lower pattern of the right reel 32R, a lower pattern of the left reel 32L, a middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R. Winning is not established even if a combination of symbols to be a winning target is established on a straight line such as a sub-line SL4 connecting the upper symbols of .

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 6, the correspondence relationship between the combination of winning symbols and the privilege given when winning will be described. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between the combination of winning symbols and the privilege given when winning.

The small prizes for which game media are awarded include the first supplementary prize, the second supplementary prize, the third supplementary prize, the first bell prize, the second bell prize, the first watermelon prize, the second watermelon prize, and the cherry prize. There is Specifically, on the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, It will be the first supplementary prize. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the second supplementary prize is won. becomes. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the third supplementary prize is won. becomes. If any one of the first to third supplementary prizes is won, the number of game media to be awarded becomes “1”.

When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the first bell wins. becomes. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second bell wins. becomes. If any one of the first to second bell wins, the number of game media to be given becomes “11”.

When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "watermelon" symbol on the main line ML, the first watermelon wins. becomes. On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, the second watermelon wins. becomes. When one of the first and second watermelon prizes is won, the number of game media to be given becomes “5”. When the stopped symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "cherry" symbol, the cherry prize is won regardless of whether the stopped symbol of the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is. In the case of winning a cherry prize, the number of game media to be given becomes “2”.

Winnings that give the benefit of replaying the next game without betting game media include normal replay winning prize, first special replay winning prize, second special replay winning prize, first RT replay winning prize, and first replay winning prize. There are 2RT replay wins, first fall replay wins, and second fall replay wins. Specifically, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, On the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, or the main line ML In the above case, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the normal replay wins.

When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the first special replay. Win a prize. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second special replay. Win a prize.

When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the first RT replay wins. becomes. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second RT replay wins. becomes.

When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the first fall replay. Win a prize. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the second drop replay. Win a prize.

If any of the above replay wins are made, a replay privilege is given that allows the player to play the next game without betting the game medium. Specifically, if any of the replay wins in the game in which "3" game media are betted, the betting of the game media is not required, and the next game is started with the "3" game media being betted. A game can be started.

Of the above various replay prizes, the first RT replay prize, the second RT replay prize, the first fall replay prize, and the second fall replay prize not only trigger the provision of the privilege of the replay prize, but also trigger the transition to the lottery mode. In the slot machine 10, a plurality of types of lottery modes are set so that the types of winnings to be selected and the winning probability of each winning combination differ in the winning lottery process (FIG. 14). Occurs when the replay winning that triggers the transition to the lottery mode is established. Details of each lottery mode and conditions for transition to each lottery mode will be described later in detail.

As state transition prizes in which only game state transition is performed, there are a 1st BB prize, a 2nd BB prize, a 3rd BB prize, a 4th BB prize, a 1st RB prize and a 2nd RB prize. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "Red 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "Red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "Red 7" symbol. If there is, it will be the first BB prize. On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "white 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white 7" symbol, 2BB prize. On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "red 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white 7" symbol, 3BB prize. On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "white 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol, 4BB prize. On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "red 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, the first RB Win a prize. On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "WHITE 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "WHITE 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol, the second RB. Win a prize.

When the 1st BB prize, the 2nd BB prize, the 3rd BB prize or the 4th BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the BB state. Further, when the first RB prize or the second RB prize is established, the game state shifts to the RB state. Both the BB state and the RB state correspond to the bonus state. The bonus state is a gaming state in which the expected number of game media to be awarded per unit number of games is higher than in gaming states other than the bonus state. Specifically, the winning combination that enables the establishment of the first bell prize is won with a higher probability (for example, about 1/1.5) than in other gaming states, and if the winning combination is won, each The first bell prize is established regardless of the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. On the other hand, the number of game media required to start one game in the bonus state is the same as in other game states. Therefore, in the bonus state, the net increase expected value of the game media per unit number of games is higher than in the game states other than the bonus state. Note that the number of game media required to start one game in the bonus state may be smaller than in other game states, and the number of game media per unit game number in the bonus state may be lower than in the game states other than the bonus state. If the net increase expected value is high, the number of game media required to start one game in the bonus state may be larger than in other game states.

Of the bonus states, the BB state continues over a plurality of games, and ends when an end condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of an event according to the content of the game execution. The termination condition is arbitrary, but in the slot machine 10, the total number of game media given after the BB state is started is equal to or greater than the BB termination reference number (specifically, "350"). is set as It should be noted that the termination condition may be established when the number of games executed in the BB state reaches the BB termination reference number of games.

Of the bonus states, the RB state continues over a plurality of games, and ends when an end condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of an event according to the content of the game execution. The termination condition is arbitrary, but in the slot machine 10, the total number of game media given after the RB state is started is equal to or greater than the RB termination reference number (specifically, "150"). is set as This RB end reference number is smaller than the BB end reference number. Therefore, the BB state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the RB state. It should be noted that the termination condition may be satisfied when the number of games executed in the RB state reaches the RB termination reference number of games. In this case, by setting the RB end reference game number to be smaller than the BB end reference game number, the BB state is more advantageous for the player than the RB state.

Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

As shown in FIG. 1 , an upper lamp 61 , an image display device 63 and an accessory 75 are provided above the front door 12 , and a speaker 62 is provided below the front door 12 . When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, light emission of the upper lamp 61 is controlled in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and light emission is controlled in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light so that a light emission effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed. The speakers 62 are provided as a pair of left and right speakers, and when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the sound output is controlled so that a sound or voice corresponding to the abnormality is output, and a sound or voice corresponding to the winning result is output. Sound output is controlled so that Further, the speaker 62 is controlled to output sound so that a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed.

The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. It may be another display device having a display surface, or it may be a dot matrix display. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, display control is performed so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. Further, the image display device 63 is controlled to display on the display surface images corresponding to the winning result of the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game. That is, the image display device 63 executes a display effect.

As shown in FIG. 1, the accessory 75 includes an accessory main body portion 76 fixed to the front side of the game panel 20, and an accessory movable portion protruding downward from the accessory main body portion 76 and capable of moving up and down. 77 and . The accessory body portion 76 is a hollow housing, and the accessory drive portion 78 that allows the accessory movable portion 77 to move up and down is housed inside the accessory body portion 76 . The role product drive unit 78 is electrically connected to the performance control device 90 described later, and moves the role product movable unit 77 up and down based on drive data output from the performance control device 90 .

The accessory movable portion 77 includes a rod-shaped support portion 77a extending vertically downward from the lower end of the accessory drive portion 78 . A through-hole (not shown) penetrating vertically through the bottom portion of the accessory main body portion 76 is provided. The support portion 77a is inserted through the through hole and extends below the bottom portion. The accessory movable portion 77 includes a spherical effect portion 77b provided at the free end (lower end) of the supporting portion 77a on the side opposite to the accessory driving portion 78. As shown in FIG.

A detection protrusion 79 that enables detection of the position of the accessory movable portion 77 is provided on the outer peripheral surface of the support portion 77a. The accessory movable portion 77 shifts from a state in which the spherical effect portion 77b stays at the initial position, which is the upper end of the range of motion of the spherical effect portion 77b, to a displaced position, which is the lower end of the range of motion of the spherical effect portion 77b. It can be moved up and down until it is The accessory main body 76 has an initial position sensor 75a for detecting the detection projection 79 in a state where the spherical effect portion 77b stays at the initial position, and a state where the spherical effect portion 77b stays at the displaced position. A displacement position sensor 75b is provided for detecting the detection projection 79 in the .

The role product drive unit 78 moves the role product movable unit 77 upward when receiving first drive data from the production control device 90 described later, and when receiving second drive data from the production control device 90 . , the accessory movable portion 77 is moved downward. The first driving data is output to the accessory driving section 78 on condition that the initial position sensor 75a is in the OFF state. When the accessory movable portion 77 has already stayed at the initial position, the initial position sensor 75a is turned on. In this case, since the output of the first drive data is canceled, the first drive data is not additionally output. Also, the second driving data is output to the accessory driving section 78 on condition that the displacement position sensor 75b is in the OFF state. When the accessory movable portion 77 has already stayed at the displacement position, the displacement position sensor 75b is turned on. In this case, since the output of the second drive data is cancelled, no additional second drive data is output.

The spherical effect part 77b exists in front of the game panel 20 and is exposed to the outside, and the player can touch the spherical effect part 77b. When an upward external force is applied to the spherical effect portion 77b, the spherical effect portion 77b can move upward to the initial position, which is the upper end of the movable range of the spherical effect portion 77b. Further, when a downward external force is applied to the spherical effect portion 77b, the spherical effect portion 77b can move downward to the displacement position which is the lower end of the movable range of the spherical effect portion 77b.

As shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the return button 46 on the front door 12, there is provided an operation device 64 for presentation that is manually operated by the player to change the display contents on the image display device 63. FIG. The production operating device 64 includes a central button 64a, an upper button 64b arranged above the central button 64a, and a lower button 64c arranged below the central button 64a. By performing predetermined operations on the center button 64a, the upper button 64b, and the lower button 64c, the display contents of the image display device 63 are changed. The relationship between the operation of the production operating device 64 and the display contents on the image display device 63 will be described later in detail.

On the game panel 20 of the front door 12, below the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, there is a credit display section 65 for displaying the number of virtual medals stored, and a credit display section 65 for displaying the number of virtual medals to be given when a small winning combination is won. A dual-use display unit 66 that displays the number of game media and, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified on the image display device 63, performs display corresponding to the content of the notification, and a game interval is an advantageous interval. An advantageous section display section 67 is provided in which a display corresponding to is performed. The credit display section 65 is composed of a 7-segment display, and each segment uses a single-color LED such as green.

FIG. 7A is a front view of a common display area 68 provided with a combined display section 66 and an advantageous section display section 67. FIG. In the common display area 68, as shown in FIG. 7(a), two 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are arranged side by side in a dual-use display section 66, and one light emitting section Advantageous section display section 67 is aggregated.

If any of the small wins corresponding to the provision of game media (1st to 3rd supplemental wins, 1st to 2nd bell wins, 1st to 2nd watermelon wins or cherry wins) is established, that small win At the end of a game in which a winning combination has been established, the number of game media to be given corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66.例文帳に追加Specifically, when any one of the first to third supplementary prizes is established, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and "1" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. , it is notified that a game medium of "1" has been provided. When one of the first and second bell wins is established, "1" is displayed on each of the left 7-segment display 66a and the right 7-segment display 66b. You will be notified that it has been granted. Further, when any one of the first and second watermelon wins is established, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and "5" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b, thereby displaying "5". ” is provided. Further, when a cherry win is established, the left 7-segment display 66a is not displayed, and '2' is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b, thereby providing the game medium of '2'. is notified. On the other hand, even if a winning such as one of replay winning, one of BB winning, and one of RB winning is established, the display corresponding to the winning is not performed on the combined display unit 66. In this case, the 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are maintained in a non-display state. The display of the number of given game media on the dual-use display unit 66 is ended when the game media are betted to start the next game after the game in which the display is performed, and each 7-segment display is displayed at this bet timing. The devices 66a and 66b are in a non-display state.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is reported on the image display device 63, information corresponding to the reported stop order is displayed on the combined display section 66. FIG. FIG. 7(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the dual-use display section 66. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7B, in the slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order indicated by the image display device 63. The first stop is the left reel 32L, and the second stop is the middle reel. 32M and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop. is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is The stop order is the left reel 32L, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop is the right reel 32R and the third stop. The stop order where the second stop is the middle reel 32M and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the stop order where the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest are optional, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the rest are There is a stop order that is arbitrary and a stop order where the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary.

The notification of the stop order in the image display device 63 includes the second RT replay winning data if the winning combination including the first bell winning data is won in the winning lottery process, and if the winning combination including the first RT replay winning data is won. It can be executed when winning a role, when winning a role including the first replay winning data, or when winning a role including the second replay winning data. Specifically, when a winning combination including the winning data of the first bell is won, the first bell is won when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above-described stopping orders. holds. Then, when the first bell win is established, the game medium "11" is given to the player as already explained.

When a winning combination including the 1st replay winning data is won, the 1st replay winning is established when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the winning combination of this time among the above-mentioned stopping orders. Then, when the 1RT replay winning is established, the lottery mode shifts to the 1RT mode in which it is easier to win a role including any replay winning data than in the normal mode (that is, it is easier to establish any replay winning). . In addition, when a winning combination including the 2nd RT replay winning data is won, the 2nd RT replay winning is established when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the winning combination of this time among the above-mentioned stopping orders. . Then, when the 2nd replay winning prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the 2RT mode where it is easier to win a role containing any replay winning data than in the 1st RT mode (that is, it is easier to establish any replay winning prize). do.

When a winning combination including the first falling replay winning data is won, the winning of the first falling replay is avoided when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. be. When the first fall replay winning prize is established, the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the normal mode, but this shift to the normal mode can be avoided by avoiding establishment of the first fall replay winning prize. . In addition, when a winning combination including the second falling replay winning data is won, the second falling replay winning prize is awarded when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. Avoided. To avoid the transition to the first RT mode by avoiding establishment of the second fall replay prize although the lottery mode shifts from the second RT mode to the first RT mode when the second fall replay prize is established. can be done.

When any one of the stop orders is notified by the image display device 63, the left 7-segment display 66a in the dual-use display unit 66 is maintained in a non-display state, while the right 7-segment display 66b is maintained. , a display corresponding to the stop order of the notification targets is performed. The contents of this display are as shown in FIG. 7(b), and the display contents of the stop order on the combined display unit 66 are set in correspondence with the notification contents of the stop order on the image display device 63 on a one-to-one basis. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of display contents on the dual-purpose display unit 66 are set so as to correspond to part or all of the notification contents of the stop order on the image display device 63. good too.

The display content of the stop order on the dual-purpose display portion 66 differs from the display content to be displayed when the dual-purpose display portion 66 displays a display corresponding to the provision of game media. This makes it easy to distinguish whether the content displayed on the dual-use display unit 66 corresponds to the number of game media provided or to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the content of notification of the order of stopping on the image display device 63 and the content of display of the order of stopping on the dual-use display section 66. FIG.

When the image display device 63 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed, and image display corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed in each of the unit display images G1 to G3. Specifically, a left unit display image G1 corresponding to the left reel 32L, a middle unit display image G2 corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and a right unit display image G3 corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. FIG. 8(a) shows how the stop order is notified when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The left unit display image G1 displays an image "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L, and the middle unit display image G2 displays an image "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M. , an image of "3" corresponding to the stop order of the right reel 32R is displayed on the right unit display image G3. The unit display images G1 to G3 are set in a second notification display layer 108 (FIG. 38), which will be described later, and are displayed in such a manner that they are present on the front side of the screen relative to the effect images. The unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed in a transparent manner. As a result, even in a situation where the unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed, it is possible to visually recognize the images set on the far side of the screen from the unit display images G1 to G3.

While the image display device 63 displays an image notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as described above, the combined display unit 66 displays the reels as shown in FIG. 8(b). An "L" is displayed corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, and 32R. That is, on the image display device 63, the unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the number of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed in the stopping order. While the corresponding image display is performed, the combined display section 66 performs display irrelevant to the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. As a result, even if the shared display unit 66 displays the content of notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the player can be made to pay attention to the display content on the image display device 63. FIG.

The display range of the combined display unit 66 is narrower than the display range of the image display device 63 . Also from this point, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display unit 66 compared to the image display device 63 . In addition, the dual-purpose display section 66 is located on the side opposite to the image display device 63 with the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R that make the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R visible. As a result, the combined display section 66 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the image display device 63 , and this also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display section 66 .

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 and corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display device 63 This display is started after the winning lottery process is performed and before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is validated. In this case, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the combined display unit 66 is started earlier than the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63. However, these displays may start at the same time or substantially at the same time, and the display start order may be reversed. The display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the image display device 63 is a stop command for all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game for which the display is executed. is terminated when

The combined display section 66 is arranged on the central side of the common display area 68 , whereas the advantageous section display section 67 is arranged on the corner side of the common display area 68 . The advantageous section display portion 67 is a display section for notifying that the game section is the advantageous section among the normal section and the advantageous section. The advantageous section is a stoppage of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables establishment of a winning advantageous to the player when a winning combination to be established is different according to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The section corresponds to either the section in which the order is notified or the section in which the probability of transition to the ART state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is higher than in the normal section. On the other hand, the normal section refers to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of a winning that is advantageous to the player when a winning combination to be established is different according to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. This is a section in which the order of stopping is not notified, and a section in which the probability of transition to the ART state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is lower than that in the advantageous section, or a section in which transition to the ART state does not occur.

When the transition condition to the advantageous section is established in the normal section and the transition to the advantageous section is made, the advantageous section display section 67 is turned on to start notification of the advantageous section. Further, when the transition condition to the normal section is satisfied in the advantageous section and the transition to the normal section is made, the advantageous section display section 67 is turned off, thereby ending the notification of the advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall or the like that the section is advantageous. Further, the dual-purpose display section 66, which is collectively provided in the common display area 68, is turned on when a game medium is given and turned off when the next game is started, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are turned on. is displayed on the image display device 63, and is turned off at the end of the game. Therefore, in a configuration in which the advantageous section display section 67 is arranged in the common display area 68 to prevent the player from becoming too conspicuous, the advantageous section display section 67 is displayed in the common display area 68 in the situation of the advantageous section. It is possible to positively create a situation in which only 67 is in a lighting state, so that the manager of the game hall can easily check the advantageous section display portion 67 .

Instead of maintaining the lighting state of the advantageous interval display unit 67 during the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval display unit 67 may blink at a predetermined cycle during the advantageous interval. Further, as the combined display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67, other displays such as a liquid crystal display device may be used.

The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main controller 70 is provided above the reel unit 31 . The main controller 70 is attached to a back plate 11 b that forms the rear portion of the housing 11 . The main controller 70 is constructed by housing a main control board 71 in a board box 81 . An element mounting surface, which is one board surface of the main control board 71, is mounted with an MPU 72 and a ratio indicator 85 for displaying a display for notifying the management result of the game history. The substrate box 81 is formed transparent so that the MPU 72 and the ratio indicator 85 accommodated in the substrate box 81 can be visually observed from the outside of the substrate box 81 . Although the board box 81 is formed colorless and transparent, it may be formed colored and transparent if the MPU 72 and the ratio indicator 85 accommodated in the board box 81 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 81. may be The main control device 70 is mounted on the back plate 11b of the housing 11 in the board box 81 so that the facing wall portion 82 facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 faces the front of the slot machine 10 . Therefore, by opening the front door 12 to the front of the slot machine 10 with respect to the housing 11 to expose the internal space of the housing 11, it becomes possible to see the opposing wall portion 82 of the board box 81 and The MPU 72 and the ratio indicator 85 can be seen through the opposing wall portion 82 .

9 is a front view of the ratio indicator 85. FIG. As shown in FIG. 9, an identifier display portion 86 and a ratio display portion 87 are arranged side by side on the display surface of the ratio display device 85 . The identifier display section 86 includes a left 7-segment display 86a, a right 7-segment display 86b, and an identifier auxiliary display section 86c. The ratio display section 87 includes a left 7-segment display 87a, a right 7-segment display 87b, and a ratio auxiliary display 87c. In each of the 7-segment displays 86a, 86b, 87a and 87b, not only numbers "0" to "9" but also various characters including alphabetic characters are displayed. In the slot machine 10, the management result of the game history is reported using the ratio indicator 85. Details of this report will be described later. The display of the management result of the game history performed on the display surface of the ratio indicator 85 can be visually recognized through the facing wall portion 82 of the board box 81 . Note that the ratio display device 85 may be a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display.

As shown in FIG. 3, the circuit board box 81 is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies in the front and back. A connecting portion 83 is provided to leave an impression of it. A plurality of coupling portions 83 are arranged side by side on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped board box 81 . As a result, even if the case body is separated by destroying the part of the joints 83 in a state in which the separation of the case body is prevented by using the part of the joints 83, another joint 83 can be used after that. are connected, it is possible to prevent the separation of the case body again. In addition, when the case body is separated, the connecting portion 83 is destroyed and a trace remains, so that it is possible to grasp whether or not the case body is being separated illegally by visually checking the connecting portion 83. Become. A sealing seal 84 is attached to a side of the substrate box 81 other than the side on which the coupling portions 83 are arranged so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies. When the sealing seal 84 is peeled off, the adhesive layer remains on the case body. As a result, when the sealing seal 84 is peeled off when the case body is separated, it is possible to leave a trace of it.

The slot machine 10 is provided with an effect control device 90 in addition to the main control device 70, as shown in FIG. The effect control device 90 is arranged behind the image display device 63 on the front door 12 . The effect control device 90 controls the upper lamp 61 , the speaker 62 , the image display device 63 and the accessory 75 based on commands received from the main control device 70 . In addition, the production control device 90, like the main control device 70, has a control board housed in a board box.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 10, the MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71 of the main controller 70 as already explained. The MPU 72 includes a ROM 73 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 72, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 73. A RAM 74, a clock circuit for outputting a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, etc. are incorporated. It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 72, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 72 includes the reel unit 31, a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, and 44a that individually detect the operation of each of the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44, and a medal insertion sensor. A inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the mouth 45; credit insertion detection sensors 47a, 48a, 49a for individually detecting the operation of each credit insertion button 47, 48, 49; A settlement detection sensor 51a, a payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, a reset detection sensor that detects operation of a reset button 56 provided in the power supply device 54, and a setting that detects insertion of a setting key into a setting key insertion hole 57. Various sensors such as a key detection sensor are connected, and signals from these sensors are input to the MPU 72 .

On the output side of the MPU 72, the reel unit 31, the selector drive section 52a provided in the selector 52, the payout motor of the hopper device 53, the credit display section 65, the combined display section 66, the advantageous section display section 67, the production control device 90, and the like. is connected. In each game, the MPU 72 controls the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R of the reel unit 31. FIG. The selector 52 guides the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 to the hopper device 53 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a if reception is permitted, and to the inserted medal detection sensor 45a if reception is prohibited. It has a function of ejecting to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the The selector drive unit 52a has a function of switching the state of the selector 52 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state. and a position for prohibiting reception. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state by switching the output state and the stop state of the driving signal to the selector driving section 52a.

Further, the MPU 72 executes drive control of the hopper device 53 when a small winning combination is established and medals are to be paid out. The MPU 72 also controls the display of the credit display section 65 so that the number of game media stored as virtual medals is displayed. Further, the MPU 72 controls display of the combined display unit 66 so that the number of game media to be awarded is displayed when game media are awarded. In addition, the MPU 72 controls the display of the advantageous section display unit 67 so that the advantageous section is notified when it is an advantageous section. Further, the MPU 72 controls the dual-use display unit 66 so that a display corresponding to the game management result is displayed. Further, the MPU 72 transmits a command to the effect control device 90 at each timing of each game, and also transmits a command to the effect control device 90 for notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the image display device 63. In this case, display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed so that the display corresponding to the content to be notified is performed. In this case, the direct display control of the image display device 63 is performed by the performance control device 90 , while the direct display control of the combined display section 66 is performed by the MPU 72 . That is, for the image display device 63, which is subject to relatively complicated display control, direct display control is performed by the effect control device 90, and the combined display unit 66, which is subject to relatively simple display control. Direct display control is executed in the MPU 72 for . As a result, it is possible to perform both a display that emphasizes the improvement of attention to the presentation and a display that emphasizes reliability while reducing the processing load of the MPU 72 .

An input side of the MPU 72 is connected to a power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply 54 (not shown). The power supply device 54 is equipped with a power supply unit that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit. A power failure signal is output to the MPU 72 when the voltage is below the reference voltage. The MPU 72 executes power failure processing upon receiving the power failure signal, and after the power is restored, it is possible to return to the processing state before the power failure. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power-off power supply unit for supplying backup power to the RAM 74 as power-off power when the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted. As a result, even when the supply of operating power from the external power source is interrupted, data is stored and retained in the RAM 74 in a situation where backup power can be supplied to the power supply unit during a power failure (for example, for one or two days). be done. However, the data stored in the RAM 74 is initialized by turning on the slot machine 10 while pressing the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54 .

The performance control device 90 includes a performance control board 91 for controlling execution of various notifications and various performances. An MPU 92 is mounted on the effect control board 91 . The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 92, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 93. A RAM 94 is built in, and a clock circuit for outputting a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are also built in.

Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips. In addition, the RAM 94 is not supplied with backup power from the power supply section of the power supply unit 54 when the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted, but the RAM 94 is supplied with backup power. good too.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the MPU 72 ( FIG. 10 ) of the main control device 70 as already described, and receives various commands from the MPU 72 . On the input side of the MPU 92, an initial position sensor 75a for detecting the detection projection 79 of the accessory 75 existing at the initial position described above, and a displacement position sensor 75b for detecting the detection projection 79 moved to the displacement position described above. , a central operation sensor 64d for detecting the operation of the central button 64a of the production operating device 64, an upper operation sensor 64e for detecting the operation of the upper button 64b, and a lower operation sensor 64f for detecting the operation of the lower button 64c are connected. , and signals from these sensors are input to the MPU 92 . An upper lamp 61, a speaker 62, an image display device 63, and a character product driving section 78 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. FIG. The MPU 92 executes light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62, display control of the image display device 63, and drive control of the accessory 75 based on commands received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70. To perform various notifications and various performances.

As shown in FIG. 10, the RAM 94 is provided with a readout area 94a from which data tables for performing various notifications and effects are read. Although the details will be described later, the readout area 94a is provided with 11 layers, and data tables for performing various notifications and effects are read out to corresponding layers in the readout area 94a. The MPU 92 controls the light emission of the upper lamp 61, the sound output control of the speaker 62, the display control of the image display device 63, and the drive control of the accessory 75 based on the data table read out in each layer of the readout area 94a. Various notifications and various effects are executed by performing.

In the slot machine 10, game history data is stored in the RAM 94 during the progress of the game, and history image display is performed on the image display device 63 based on the game history data stored in the RAM 94. - 特許庁The player can check the game history by causing the image display device 63 to display the history image displayed based on the game history data at any timing.

As shown in FIG. 10, the RAM 94 includes a history storage area 94b for storing game history data used for displaying history images, and an image area 94b for storing history configuration data representing the configuration of history images generated in the past. A reproduction storage area 94c is provided. The MPU 92 generates history configuration data based on the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b. The history composition data is data that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp the types of the plurality of images that constitute the history image, and the history composition data includes a plurality of designation data that designates the plurality of images that constitute the history image. I'm in. The image reproduction storage area 94c is a storage area capable of storing a plurality of (specifically, 32) pieces of history configuration data. Details of the history image, the history storage area 94b, the image reproduction storage area 94c, and various designation data will be described later.

In addition to the MPU 92, the effect control board 91 is equipped with a video display processor 95 (VDP 95), a character ROM (not shown), a video RAM 96, and the like. The VDP 95 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the image display device 63 . The VDP 95 intervenes in the reading and writing of data in the video RAM 96 , reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 96 from the character ROM at a predetermined timing, and causes the image display device 63 to display the image data. The character ROM serves as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the image display device 63 . This character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM 96 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the image display device 63 . When the MPU 92 determines the execution contents of the effect based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 provides the VDP 95 with a drawing list indicating the contents of the image corresponding to each update timing according to the determined execution contents of the effect. Output. The VDP 95 reads the image data from the character ROM according to the drawing list received from the MPU 92 and creates display data in the video RAM 96 using the read image data. The display data is created in the frame area of the video RAM 96 . The video RAM 96 is provided with two frame areas, and display data is alternately created in the two frame areas. The VDP 95 outputs an image signal corresponding to the generated display data to the image display device 63 to cause the image display device 63 to display an image corresponding to the display data.

Since the video RAM 96 is provided with two frame areas, in a situation where display data created in one frame area is used for drawing (output of an image signal) to the image display device 63, other display data to be used in the future for the frame area of . In other words, the double-buffer system is adopted, and the output of the image signal to the image display device 63 is performed in parallel with the creation of the display data corresponding to the update timing one frame later than the frame related to the output. done.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73 and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 will be referred to as the main MPU 72, main ROM 73 and main RAM 74 respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93 and RAM 94 of the effect control device 90 will be referred to as the effect side. They are referred to as an MPU 92, an effect-side ROM 93, and an effect-side RAM 94.

Next, processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the main processing executed by the main MPU 72 when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 11 .

In the main process, first, an initialization process is executed (step S101). In the initialization processing, interrupts by the timer interrupt processing are permitted, and various initial settings are made for the registers and I/O devices in the main MPU 72 .

Thereafter, a role product initialization command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S102). The role product initialization command is a command for causing the effect side MPU 92 to execute processing for returning the spherical effect portion 77b of the role product 75 to the initial position. The effect-side MPU 92 that has received the role product initialization command executes a role product initialization process (FIG. 69), which will be described later.

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and the power is turned on (step S103). If the power is turned on with the setting key inserted (step S103: YES), if the reset button 56 is not turned on when the power is turned on (step S104: NO), the probability of winning remains unchanged. A setting process is executed (step S106). On the other hand, if the reset button 56 is turned on when the power is turned on (step S104: YES), the winning probability setting process is executed (step S106) after executing the clear process (step S105).

In the clear processing, all areas in the main RAM 74 are initialized. In this case, the main RAM 74 stores an area for storing the setting values of the slot machine 10, an area for storing data indicating whether or not the bonus state is set, and data indicating the total number of given game media in the bonus state. An area storing data indicating the game state, an area storing data for specifying the end condition of the ART state, an area storing data indicating the game interval, and storing the data of the management result of the game history. Each area of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" including the area where the data has been changed. As a result, when the clear process is executed, the game is in the normal game state and becomes the normal section regardless of the state before the power is cut off. If it is in the regulated state, the abnormal state is cancelled. It should be noted that the areas in which the game history management result data (specifically, the total game number counter 74a and the advantageous game number counter 74b, which will be described later) are excluded from the targets for clearing to "0" during the clearing process. good too.

In the winning probability setting process, the current set value is read and the current set value is displayed on the credit display section 65 on condition that the setting key is inserted and turned on. When the clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, a display corresponding to "setting 1" is displayed on the credit display section 65 at the start of the winning probability setting process, and the clearing process (step S105) is performed. is not executed, a display corresponding to the setting value in the state before the power shutdown is performed. In the winning probability setting process, the set value is updated by 1 each time the reset button 56 is operated, and the updated set value is displayed on the credit display section 65 . If the reset button 56 is operated while the setting value is "setting 6", the setting value is updated to "setting 1". When the ON operation of the setting key is canceled after the start lever 41 is operated, a setting end command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92, and processing for ending the display of the set value on the credit display section 65 is performed. , ends the winning probability setting process. The setting end command is a command for causing the effect-side MPU 92 to recognize that the updating of the set values has ended. Numerical information indicating the current setting value is set in the setting end command, and the effecting side MPU 92 grasps the current setting value based on the numerical information set in the received setting end command.

After executing the winning probability setting process, the advantageous section initialization process is executed (step S107). In the advantageous section initialization processing, processing for initializing information relating to the advantageous section is executed. The contents of the initialization process for the advantageous section are the same as those in steps S1007 and S1014, which will be described later. As a result, when the winning probability setting process is executed, the game section becomes the normal section without fail. The specific processing contents of the advantageous section initialization processing will be described later. After executing the initialization process of the advantageous section, the process shifts to the normal process (step S108). The normal processing will be explained later in detail.

If the ON operation of the setting key has not been performed in the main process (step S103: NO), the power restoration process from step S109 onwards is executed. The power restoration process is a process for restoring the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power shutdown. In the power recovery process, it is determined whether or not the setting values of the slot machine 10 are normal by checking the main RAM 74 (step S109). Specifically, if the setting value is any one of "setting 1" to "setting 6", it is determined to be normal, and if it is "0" or "7" or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the set value is normal, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S110). A power failure flag is provided in the main side RAM 74, and when the predetermined power failure processing is normally executed when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is stopped, the power failure flag is set to "1". will be set. If the power failure flag is set to "1", it is checked whether the RAM determination value is normal (step S111). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 74 is examined to confirm whether or not the value is normal.

If affirmative determination is made in all of steps S109 to S111, it means that the power failure processing at the time of the previous power failure was normally executed. In this case, by writing the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 74 to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 and returning the data saved in the main RAM 74 to the register of the main MPU 72, the register of the main MPU 72 The state is restored to the state before the power was cut off (step S112). Also, the power failure flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S113). After that, after transmitting a power recovery command for recognizing the execution of the power recovery process to the effect side MPU 92 (step S114), the address before the power shutdown is restored (step S115).

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in any of steps S109 to S111, operation prohibition processing is executed. In the operation prohibition process, execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is prohibited (step S116), and all the output ports of the main MPU 72 are cleared to "0", thereby all actuators connected to the output ports are cleared. is turned off (step S117), and error notification processing is executed to notify the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S118). Then it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing the clear process (step S105).

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the timer interrupt process is activated, for example, every 1.49 milliseconds.

In the register saving process (step S201), the values of all the registers in the main MPU 72 used in the normal process described later are saved in the main RAM 74. FIG. In step S202, it is checked whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1", and if the power failure flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S203, and the power failure processing is executed.

The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply 54 is input to the main MPU 72 . In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is saved in the main RAM 74 . After that, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the main RAM 74 is normal is calculated and stored in the main RAM 74, and subsequent access to the RAM is prohibited. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

If the power failure flag is not set to "1" in step S202, various processes after step S204 are performed. In step S204, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S205, the main MPU 72 performs an interrupt termination declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S206, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors provided for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In step S207, sensor monitoring processing is performed to read the states of various sensors connected to the input port and to monitor whether the read results are normal.

In step S208, when one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to one of the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R is operated, a command corresponding to the operation is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92. Corresponding processing (FIG. 25) is performed. The effect-side MPU 92 grasps that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have been stopped based on the command received from the main-side MPU 72 . The stop operation handling process (FIG. 25) will be described later in detail.

In step S209, timer subtraction processing is performed to subtract the value of each counter or timer. In step S210, a counter process for outputting the result of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts to the outside is performed. In step S211, command output processing for transmitting various commands to the MPU 92 on the production side is performed. In step S212, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port. In step S213, the values of each register saved in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S201 are returned to the corresponding registers in the main MPU 72, respectively. In step S214, a management process (FIG. 102) is executed for managing the game history and displaying the content corresponding to the management result on the combined display section 66. FIG. After that, in step S215, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated. The management processing (FIG. 102) in step S214 will be described later in detail.

Next, normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, interrupt permission processing is performed to permit the next timer interrupt (step S301). After that, start waiting processing is executed (step S302). In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has occurred in the previous game. If any replay winning has occurred, a replay process of setting the same number of bets as the previous bet number is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. When no replay win has occurred, it is determined whether or not a settlement button 51 has been operated, and when the settlement button 51 has been operated, the same number of medals as credited virtual medals are paid out. Perform medal return processing. After completion of the medal return process or when the settlement button 51 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if both the insertion of medals and the operation of the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 are not performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After execution of the start waiting process in step S302, it is determined whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached a specified number (specifically, "3") (step S303), and if the number of bets has not reached the specified number Then, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S302). If the number of bets has reached the specified number (step S303: YES), it is determined whether the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304), and if the start lever 41 has not been operated (step S304: NO ), the process returns to the start waiting process (step S302). On the other hand, if the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304: YES), after activating the main line ML, reception prohibition processing is executed (step S305). By executing the reception prohibiting process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal slot 45, the medal is ejected to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a. After that, the lottery process for the lottery for the role in the current game is executed (step S306), and on the condition that the value of the freeze counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is "0" (step S307: YES), a reel control process is executed to drive and control the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the current combination (step S308).

After that, medium application processing is executed (step S309). In the medium awarding process, when a minor winning combination has been established in the current game, a process for awarding the player with a number of game media corresponding to the winning of the minor winning combination is executed. Specifically, when virtual medals are awarded, a value corresponding to the current minor winning combination is added to the credit counter provided in the main RAM 74, and when the value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit stored number, drives and controls the hopper device 53 so that the number of medals exceeding the upper limit stored number is paid out to the medal receiving tray 59 . In addition, in the medium provision process, display control is performed on the combined display unit 66 so that a display corresponding to the number of game media to be provided this time is performed. The display corresponding to the number of game media on the combined display section 66 continues until a new bet of game media is made.

After that, a corresponding process at the end of the game is executed to enable the setting of the game state and the game section corresponding to the result of the current game (step S310). Also, an external output setting process for outputting the state of the slot machine 10 to the management computer of the game hall is executed (step S311).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the second expected effect flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S312), and if the second expected effect flag is set to "1" (step If S312: YES), the process of step S312 is repeated until the second expected effect flag is cleared to "0". The second expected effect flag is a flag that allows the main side MPU 72 to grasp that the game is an execution target game of the second expected effect described later. If a negative determination is made in step S312, it is determined whether or not the re-fluctuation effect flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S313), and the re-fluctuation effect flag is set to "1". If it is set (step S313: YES), the process of step S313 is repeated until the re-fluctuation effect flag is cleared to "0". The re-fluctuation effect flag is a flag that enables the main side MPU 72 to grasp that the game is an execution object game of the re-fluctuation effect described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S313, on the condition that the value of the freeze counter of the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S314: YES), acceptance permission processing is executed (step S315). ), and the process returns to step S301. By executing the acceptance permission process, the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 are collected by the hopper device 53 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

<Lottery process for roles>
Next, the winning lottery process executed in step S306 of the normal process (FIG. 13) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S401). In the random number acquisition process, a random number to be used when judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is acquired. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the main MPU 72 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the main RAM 74. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After executing the random number acquisition process in step S401, the lottery table for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not is read out from the main ROM 73 (step S402). In the slot machine 10, six stages of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and the user inserts the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57, turns it on, and performs a predetermined operation. , it is possible to set on which winning probability the lottery process of the winning combination is to be executed. "Setting n+1" is more advantageous winning probability for the player than "setting n". Specifically, since the winning probability of the role that triggers the transition to the BB state is higher in "setting n+1" than in "setting n", the player is more likely to win "setting n+1" than "setting n". be advantageous for In addition, there are three types of lottery modes, a normal mode, a first RT mode, and a second RT mode, in which the main MPU 72 has different lottery tables even if the set values are at the same stage. In addition, as a game state, there is a bonus state (BB state and RB state) apart from the state of each lottery mode. In step S402, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current set value, the current lottery mode, and the current game state is selected.

A lottery table corresponding to each of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode in the non-bonus state will be described, taking the case of "setting 3" as an example. First, the normal mode lottery table selected in the normal mode will be described. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal mode lottery table. In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 16 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 15, index values IV are set in the normal mode lottery table, and each index value IV is associated with a winning combination and set with a point value PV. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery combination in relation to the maximum value ("65535") of the free run counter.

Specifically, the index value IV=1 is set with the first bell winning data and the first complementary winning data. When the winning is made with the index value IV=1, as shown in FIG. Regardless of the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the first bell prize is surely generated, and in other cases, the first compensation prize is surely generated.

In the present slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled so that the reels 32L, 32M and 32R can slide up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. In other words, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop within a specified time (190 milliseconds) after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated. By performing such reel control, it becomes possible to facilitate establishment of a prize corresponding to a winning combination, and to avoid establishment of a prize corresponding to a non-winning combination. becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, only one reel 32L, 32M, 32R constitutes a combination of symbols for establishing a prize. If there are 5 or more symbols between the constituent symbols, depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML (this phenomenon is also known as "dropout"). Say). The first to third supplementary prizes, the first bell prize, the second bell prize, and various replay prizes are prize modes in which no loss occurs when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the corresponding order, 1st Watermelon Winning, 2nd Watermelon Winning, Cherry Winning, 1BB Winning, 2BB Winning, 3BB Winning, 4BB Winning, 1RB Winning and 2RB Winning are stop buttons 42 for the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. This is a winning mode in which a failure may occur depending on the timing of the stop operation of 1 to 44.

As shown in FIG. 15, the index value IV=2 is set with first bell winning data and second complementary winning data. When the winning is made with the index value IV=2, as shown in FIG. Regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the first bell winning is surely established, and in the other cases, the second compensation winning is surely established.

As shown in FIG. 15, the index value IV=3 is set with the first bell winning data and the third complementary winning data. When the winning is made with the index value IV=3, as shown in FIG. Regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the first bell winning is surely established, and in the other cases, the third compensating winning is surely established.

As shown in FIG. 15, only the first bell winning data is set for the index value IV=4. When winning with the index value IV=4, as shown in FIG. 16, the winning of the first bell is surely achieved regardless of the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44. . As shown in FIG. 15, only the second bell winning data is set to the index value IV=17. When winning with the index value IV=17, as shown in FIG. 16, the winning of the second bell is surely established regardless of the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44. .

As shown in FIG. 15, only the first watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV=5. If a win is made with the index value IV=5, as shown in FIG. 16, the first watermelon win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the first watermelon prize will not be established. As shown in FIG. 15, only the second watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV=18. If a win is made with the index value IV=18, as shown in FIG. 16, the second watermelon win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the second watermelon prize will not be established.

As shown in FIG. 15, only cherry winning data is set to the index value IV=6. If a win is made with the index value IV=6, as shown in FIG. 16, a cherry win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotation position of the left reel 32L, there is a possibility that the cherry winning will not be established.

As shown in FIG. 15, only the third BB winning data is set to the index value IV=7. If a win is made with the index value IV=7, as shown in FIG. 16, the 3BB win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the third BB winning will not be established. Also, as shown in FIG. 15, only the 4th BB winning data is set to the index value IV=8. If a win is made with the index value IV=8, as shown in FIG. 16, the 4th BB win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the 4th BB prize will not be established. Also, as shown in FIG. 15, only the first RB winning data is set to the index value IV=9. If a win is made with the index value IV=9, as shown in FIG. 16, the first RB win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the first RB winning will not be established.

As shown in FIG. 15, only the first BB winning data is set to the index value IV=19. When winning with index value IV=19, as shown in FIG. 16, the first BB winning can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the first BB winning will not be established. Also, as shown in FIG. 15, only the second BB winning data is set to the index value IV=20. If a win is made with the index value IV=20, as shown in FIG. 16, the second BB win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the 2nd BB prize will not be established. Also, as shown in FIG. 15, only the second RB winning data is set to the index value IV=21. If a win is made with the index value IV=21, as shown in FIG. 16, the second RB win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44, there is a possibility that the second RB winning will not be established.

Winning data other than the bonus winning data including the 1st to 4th BB winning data and the 1st to 2nd RB winning data are erased in the winning game regardless of whether or not the winning is established. It is not carried over to the game after the game that became. On the other hand, the above-mentioned bonus winning data is stored and held until the corresponding bonus winning is established even in the game following the winning game, except when the main side RAM 74 is cleared. . In this case, in a game in which bonus winning data is carried over, index values IV corresponding to all bonus winning data are excluded from the lottery. This makes it possible to prevent bonus winning data from being newly stored in spite of the fact that the bonus winning data has already been stored, and prevents a plurality of bonus winning data from being accumulated and stored. It becomes possible to do so.

As shown in FIG. 15, only the first special replay winning data is set to the index value IV=10. When winning with index value IV=10, as shown in FIG. 16, the first special replay winning prize is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44. do. Also, as shown in FIG. 15, only the second special replay winning data is set to the index value IV=22. When winning with index value IV=22, as shown in FIG. 16, the second special replay winning is surely established regardless of the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44. do.

As shown in FIG. 15, normal replay winning data and first RT replay winning data are set to index values IV=11-16. In this case, when the winning is made with the index value IV=11, as shown in FIG. 16, the first stop is the left reel 32L, and the second stop (the reel for which the second stop command is generated) is the middle reel 32M. , and when the third stop (reel where the last stop command is generated) is the right reel 32R, the 1st replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, otherwise , normal replay winning is established without fail regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=12, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. 1RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44 in other cases. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=13, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. 1RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44 in other cases. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=14, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. 1RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44 in other cases. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=15, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. 1RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44 in other cases. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=16, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. 1RT replay winning is surely established irrespective of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44.

When the normal mode lottery table of FIG. 15 is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV=1, the probability of winning when the index value IV=2, and the winning when the index value IV=3 is about 1/6.6, respectively. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=4 is about 1/13.1. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=5 is about 1/164. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=6 is about 1/423. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=7 and the probability of winning when the index value IV=8 are approximately 1/437. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=9 is about 1/328. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=10 is about 1/655. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=11, the probability of winning when the index value IV=12, the probability of winning when the index value IV=13, and the winning when the index value IV=14. , the probability of winning when the index value IV=15, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=16 are each about 1/41. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=17 is about 1/16.4. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=18 is about 1/146. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=19 and the probability of winning when the index value IV=20 are approximately 1/437. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=21 is about 1/328. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=22 is about 1/655.

Here, in the normal mode lottery table, 1RT replay winning data is set as the winning data with index values IV=11 to 16 in addition to the normal replay winning data, as already described. The probability of winning one of these index values IV=11 to 16 is about 1/41. If a win is made with any of the index values IV=11 to 16, the stop order of the first stop, second stop and third stop of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R corresponds to the winning combination. When the order is established, the first RT replay prize is established, and the lottery mode shifts from the normal mode to the first RT mode. When shifting to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 14) is the lottery table for the first RT mode.

Next, the lottery table for the first RT mode, which is selected in the case of "setting 3" and the first RT mode, will be described. 17 and 18 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the lottery table for the first RT mode.

In the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in FIG. 17, the winning data set to index values IV=1 to 10 and the winning probability of each index value IV are shown in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 15). ) is the same as In addition, the winning data and the winning probability of each index value IV set in each of the index values IV=23 to 28 in the first RT mode lottery table are the same as those of the index values IV=17 to 22 in the normal mode lottery table. is the same as

In this case, the index values IV=1 to 6 and 23 to 24 are set with combinations that enable the awarding of game media, and the index values IV=1 to 6 and 23 to 24 are set respectively. Since the winning data and each winning probability are the same as the index values IV=1 to 6 and 17 to 18 in the lottery table for the normal mode, the types of wins and their wins for which game media can be given are provided. winning probability is the same in each of the normal mode and the first RT mode.

Also, index values IV=7 to 9 and 25 to 27 in the first RT mode lottery table are set with bonus winning data in the same manner as index values IV=7 to 9 and 19 to 21 in the normal mode lottery table. , the winning probability is the same as that of the normal mode lottery table. That is, the probability of winning each bonus combination is the same in the normal mode and the first RT mode. In addition, index values IV=10 and 28 in the first RT mode lottery table are set with special replay winning data in the same way as index values IV=10 and 22 in the normal mode lottery table, and their winning probabilities are set in the normal mode. It is the same as the lottery table for That is, the probability of winning each special replay combination is the same in the normal mode and the first RT mode.

Winning combination data set to index values IV=11 to 22 are different from those in the normal mode. Specifically, in the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in FIG. 17, second RT replay winning data is set as winning data with index values IV=11 to 16 in addition to normal replay winning data. The probability of winning one of these index values IV=11 to 16 is about 1/6.8.

When winning with index value IV=11, as shown in FIG. 18, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. 2RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44 in other cases. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=12, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. The 2nd RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=13, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The 2nd RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=14, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The 2nd RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=15, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. The 2nd RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=16, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The 2nd RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44.

In the 1st RT mode, any one of the index values IV=11 to 16 is won, and the stop order of the first stop, second stop and third stop of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is the stop order corresponding to the winning combination. If so, the second RT replay prize is established and the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. When shifting to the second RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 14) becomes the lottery table for the second RT mode.

In the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in FIG. 17, as winning data with index values IV=17 to 22, in addition to normal replay winning data, first drop replay winning data is set. The probability of winning one of these index values IV=17 to 22 is about 1/10.9.

When the lottery table for the first RT mode wins with the index value IV=17, as shown in FIG. 18, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is When it is the right reel 32R, the normal replay winning prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning prize is generated according to the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. It definitely happens regardless. Also, when winning with the index value IV=18, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay prize is won. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. Also, when winning with the index value IV=19, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the normal replay wins are each. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. Also, when winning with the index value IV=20, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay prize is awarded. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. Also, when winning with the index value IV=21, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay prize is won. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. Also, when winning with the index value IV=22, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay prize is won. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. When the first falling replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode. When shifting to the normal mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 14) is the normal mode lottery table.

In the lottery table for the first RT mode, a combination that enables establishment of a replay winning prize is set for index values IV=10 to 22,28. Since the winning probabilities of these roles are set to the probabilities already explained, the winning probability of the winning role that enables establishment of a replay prize in the first RT mode (hereinafter also referred to as replay probability) is about 1/ 4.1. On the other hand, the replay probability in normal mode is approximately 1/6.7. That is, the first RT mode is a lottery mode with a higher replay probability than the normal mode.

Next, the lottery table for the second RT mode, which is selected in the case of "setting 3" and the second RT mode, will be described. 19 and 20 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the lottery table for the second RT mode.

In the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 19, the winning data set to the index values IV=1 to 10 and the winning probability of each index value IV are shown in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 15). ) and the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 17). In addition, the winning data set for the index values IV=18 to 23 in the second RT mode lottery table and the winning probability of each index value IV are the same as the index values IV=17 to 22 and the winning probability of each index value IV in the normal mode lottery table. These are the same as the index values IV=23 to 28 in the 2RT mode lottery table.

In this case, the index values IV=1 to 6 and 18 to 19 are set with combinations that enable the awarding of game media, and the index values IV=1 to 6 and 18 to 19 are set respectively. The winning data and each winning probability are the same as the index values IV=1 to 6 and 17 to 22 in the normal mode lottery table, and the index values IV=1 to 6 and 1 in the first RT mode lottery table. 23 and 24, the types of wins for which game media can be awarded and the winning probabilities of those wins are the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. It's becoming

The index values IV=7-9 and 20-22 in the lottery table for the second RT mode are the index values IV=7-9 and 19-21 in the lottery table for the normal mode, and the index values IV in the lottery table for the first RT mode. =7 to 9, 25 to 27, bonus winning data is set, and the winning probability is the same as in the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery table. That is, the probability of winning each bonus combination is the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode and the second RT mode. In addition, the index values IV=10 and 23 in the second RT mode lottery table have special values similar to the index values IV=10 and 22 in the normal mode lottery table and the index values IV=10 and 28 in the first RT mode lottery table. Replay winning data is set, and its winning probability is the same as that of the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery table. That is, the probability of winning each special replay combination is the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode and the second RT mode.

Winning combination data set to index values IV=11 to 17 are different from those in the normal mode and the first RT mode. Specifically, in the lottery table for the second RT mode, as shown in FIG. 19, in addition to the normal replay winning data, the second fall replay winning data is set as the winning data of the index values IV=11 to 16. . The probability of winning one of these index values IV=11 to 16 is about 1/6.8.

When the lottery table for the second RT mode wins with the index value IV=11, as shown in FIG. 20, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is In the case of the right reel 32R, the normal replay prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the second fall replay prize is generated at the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. It definitely happens regardless. Also, when winning with the index value IV=12, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay prize is awarded. It certainly occurs irrespective of the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning prizes certainly occur irrespective of the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44. Also, when winning with the index value IV=13, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the normal replay winning prize is each. It certainly occurs irrespective of the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning prizes certainly occur irrespective of the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44. Also, when winning with the index value IV=14, if the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay prize is awarded. It certainly occurs irrespective of the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning prizes certainly occur irrespective of the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=15, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay prize is won. It certainly occurs irrespective of the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning prizes certainly occur irrespective of the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44. Also, when winning with the index value IV=16, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay prize is won. It certainly occurs irrespective of the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning prizes certainly occur irrespective of the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44. When the second falling replay winning prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode. When shifting to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 14) is the lottery table for the first RT mode.

In the lottery table for the second RT mode, only the normal replay winning data is set for the index value IV=17. The probability of winning with the index value IV=17 is set higher than the probability of winning other roles, specifically about 1/5.5. If a win is made with this index value IV=17, the normal replay prize is established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44.

In the lottery table for the second RT mode, a combination that enables establishment of a replay winning prize is set for index values IV=10 to 17,23. Since the winning probabilities of these roles are set to the probabilities already described, the winning probability of the winning role that enables establishment of a replay prize in the second RT mode (hereinafter also referred to as replay probability) is about 1. /3.0. On the other hand, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1/6.7 and the replay probability in the first RT mode is about 1/4.1. Therefore, the second RT mode is a lottery mode with a higher replay probability than the normal mode and the first RT mode. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured such that the replay probability is the same in the first RT mode and the second RT mode, and the replay probability is slightly different between the first RT mode and the second RT mode. It is good also as a structure which is the same.

In addition to the normal mode lottery table, the 1st RT mode lottery table, and the 2nd RT mode lottery table, the main ROM 73 also contains the lottery table for the winning combination in the BB state or RB state (Fig. 14). and an internal lottery table referred to in the lottery process (Fig. 14) for a combination when a bonus combination has been won but the corresponding bonus prize has not been established. is stored.

In the bonus lottery table, a winning combination that enables establishment of the first bell prize is won at a rate of about 1/1.5. , 32M, and 32R regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational positions of 32M and 32R. In addition, on the bonus lottery table, the winning combination that enables the establishment of the first watermelon prize is won at about 1/6.6, and the winning combination that enables the establishment of the cherry prize is won at about 1/7.8. These first watermelon winning prize and cherry winning prize are not established depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational positions of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Since the bonus lottery table is set as described above, in the BB state or RB state, basically the first bell prize is established in each game and the game medium of "11" is provided. However, the first watermelon winning prize or the cherry winning prize may be established, and if the first watermelon winning prize is established, the game medium of "5" is awarded, and if the cherry winning prize is established, the game medium of "2" is awarded. Granted. On the other hand, the BB state ends when the total number of game media given since the BB state started becomes equal to or greater than the BB end reference number (for example, "350"), and the RB state ends when the RB state The game ends when the total number of game media awarded since the start becomes equal to or greater than the RB end reference number (for example, "150"). Therefore, the number of games required to end the BB state and RB state varies depending on the result of the lottery process (FIG. 14) of the combination and whether or not there is a failure to win. Incidentally, the bonus lottery table is common among set values "1" to "6" for varying the advantage of the slot machine 10. FIG.

In the internal lottery table, winning data corresponding to index values IV=1 to 6, 10, 17, 18, and 22 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 15) are set with the winning probabilities of those index values IV. , and in addition to this, an index value in which only normal replay winning data is set is set so as to be the total winning probability of the index values IV=11 to 16 in the normal mode lottery table. Therefore, when the bonus combination is internally won, the combination that allows the award of game media and the winning probability of the combination are the same as in the normal mode, and the replay probability is the same as in the normal mode. A bonus combination is not won, and a combination that triggers a shift to the normal mode, the first RT mode and the second RT mode is not won.

Here, in any of the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, the index value IV with the same winning probability among the setting values "1" to "6" and " There are index values IV with different winning probabilities between set values of 1” to “6”. FIGS. 21(a) to 21(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the index values IV with different winning probabilities between the set values "1" to "6", and FIG. 21(a) is for the normal mode. FIG. 21(b) shows the case of the lottery table for the first RT mode, and FIG. 21(c) shows the case of the lottery table for the second RT mode.

As shown in FIG. 21(a), in the normal mode lottery table, index values IV=17 to 22 are index values IV with different winning probabilities between set values "1" to "6." =1 to 16 is the index value IV with the same winning probability among the set values "1" to "6". As shown in FIG. 21(b), in the lottery table for the first RT mode, index values IV=23 to 28 are index values IV with different winning probabilities between set values "1" to "6". IV=1 to 22 is the index value IV with the same winning probability among the setting values "1" to "6". As shown in FIG. 21(c), in the second RT mode lottery table, index values IV=18 to 23 are index values IV with different winning probabilities between set values "1" to "6". IV=1 to 17 is the index value IV with the same winning probability among the setting values "1" to "6".

In other words, in any lottery table, the index value IV with the same winning probability between the set values "1" to "6" is the index value IV in the front range that is consecutively numbered from index value IV=1. , and the index values IV with different winning probabilities between the setting values "1" to "6" are from the index value IV next to the last index value IV in the front range to the last index value IV. It is summarized in the index value IV of the rear range which is a serial number. In this way, the index values IV with the same winning probability among the setting values "1" to "6" are collected in the front range, and the index values with different winning probabilities among the setting values "1" to "6". Setting the index value IV with the same winning probability and the index value IV with different winning probability among the setting values "1" to "6" in the design stage of the slot machine 10 by concentrating the IVs in the rear range. and make corrections easier.

In each lottery table, the set values of "1" to "6" have different winning probabilities, and although the index values IV included in the rear range are different, they are set for each of the index values IV included in the rear range. Winning data and winning probability are common among the lottery tables. Specifically, in the normal mode lottery table, the index values IV=17 to 22 are included in the rear range as shown in FIG. ), the index values IV=23 to 28 are included in the rear range, and in the lottery table for the second RT mode, the index values IV=18 to 23 are included in the rear range as shown in FIG. included in In this case, the index value IV=17 in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV=23 in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV=18 in the second RT mode lottery table are set winning data and The winning probabilities are the same, and the index value IV=18 in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV=24 in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV=19 in the second RT mode lottery table. The set winning data and winning probability are the same, and the index value IV=19 in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV=25 in the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table With index value IV=20, the set winning data and winning probability are the same, and index value IV=20 in the normal mode lottery table and index value IV=26 in the first RT mode lottery table. The index value IV=21 in the second RT mode lottery table has the same winning data and winning probability, and the index value IV=21 in the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery table. The index value IV=27 in the second RT mode lottery table and the index value IV=22 in the second RT mode lottery table have the same set winning data and winning probability, and the index value IV=22 in the normal mode lottery table. and index value IV=28 in the first RT mode lottery table and index value IV=23 in the second RT mode lottery table have the same winning data and winning probability. As a result, it is possible to make common the types of hands that have different winning probabilities between the set values of "1" to "6" in each lottery table, and to make it possible to use the same kind of hand in each lottery table. It is possible to make the winning probability for each set value the same.

By the way, an index value with only the 2nd bell winning data set, an index value with only the 2nd watermelon winning data set, an index value with only the 1st BB winning data set, and an index with only the 2nd BB winning data set. , the index value in which only the second RB winning data is set, and the index value IV in which only the second special replay winning data is set. It is set to have a tendency to be high. However, it is not limited to this, and if a larger set value is more advantageous to the player than a smaller set value, a larger set value is more likely to win than a smaller set value for some index values. The configuration may be set so that the probability tends to be low.

As already explained, in each lottery table, the same winning data is set to the index values IV=1 to 10 included in the front range, and the winning probabilities are also the same. As a result, the winning probabilities are made the same for the combinations in which the winning probabilities are the same between the set values '1' to '6' in each lottery table and the types of winning data set are the same. becomes possible.

In the configuration in which the front side range and the rear side range are set as described above, the front side range includes a combination that allows the award of game media, a combination that enables replay winning, and a combination that enables bonus winning. In addition to being set, in the rear range, there are also set a combination that enables awarding of game media, a combination that enables replay winning, and a combination that enables bonus winning. In other words, the combinations to which game media can be awarded are mixed in the front range and the back range, and the index values IV of these combinations lose continuity between the front range and the back range. Similarly, the combinations that allow replay winning are mixed in the front range and the back range, and the index values IV of these combinations lose continuity between the front range and the back range. Similarly, the combinations that allow bonus prizes are mixed in the front range and the back range, and the index values IV of these combinations lose continuity between the front range and the back range. In that case, there is a risk that the processing configuration for ascertaining the winning combination in various processes after execution of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 14) will become complicated.

In the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, the index values set in the latter half of the front range include the winning data and Since winning data for changing the replay probability is set, the first index value IV in the rear range is different in each lottery table. For example, the index value IV in which only the second bell winning data is set is "17" in the normal mode lottery table, "23" in the first RT mode lottery table, and "18" in the second RT mode lottery table. Become. Also, for example, the index value IV in which only the first BB winning data is set is "19" in the normal mode lottery table, "25" in the first RT mode lottery table, and "20" in the second RT mode lottery table. becomes. Also, for example, the index value IV in which only the second special replay winning data is set is "22" in the normal mode lottery table, "28" in the first RT mode lottery table, and "28" in the second RT mode lottery table. 23”. In this case, if an attempt is made to treat different index values IV in spite of the same winning combination in various processes after execution of the winning lottery process (Fig. 14), the index value will be It becomes necessary to grasp the current lottery mode in addition to the IV, which may complicate the processing configuration.

in order to eliminate the inconveniences mentioned above. In this slot machine 10, an offset table 97 is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 at the design stage of the slot machine 10. FIG. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the offset table 97. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 22, information on winning numbers is set in the offset table 97 . Numerical information from "1" to "41" is set in serial numbers as the winning number information. In the offset table 97, each index value IV for the normal mode lottery table, each index value IV for the first RT mode lottery table, and each index value IV for the second RT mode lottery table are from "1" to "41". It is associated with any winning number information. This association includes a group of small wins that allow the award of game media, a group of bonus wins that allow the establishment of a bonus prize, and a group of bonus wins that allow the establishment of a replay prize. Each of the groups of replay hands is formed by winning number information which is a sequential number. Further, this association is performed so that even between lottery modes with different winning combinations in which the same type of winning data is set, the same winning number information can be handled.

Specifically, the group of winning number information with consecutive numbers from "1" to "8" will be a group of small winning numbers, and the group of information on winning numbers with consecutive numbers from "9" to "14" will be a bonus. The offset table 97 is set so that a winning number information group, which is a winning number that is a consecutive number after "15", becomes a group for a replay winning combination. In addition, in the group of replay hands, replay hands for which normal replay winning data is not set are aggregated in the winning number information of "15" and "16", and normal replay winning numbers are in the information of winning numbers after "17". The replay combination for which winning data is set is aggregated.

In each lottery table, the index value IV of "1" is set to the first bell winning data and the first supplemental winning data. Winning number information is set. In each lottery table, the index value IV of "2" is set to the first bell winning data and the second supplemental winning data. Winning number information is set. In each lottery table, the index value IV of "3" is set to the first bell winning data and the third compensation winning data. Winning number information is set. In each lottery table, only the first bell winning data is set for the index value IV of "4", but the information of the winning number of "4" is set for the index value IV=4 in any lottery table. It is

The index value IV of "17" in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV of "23" in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV of "18" in the second RT mode lottery table are the second bell winning data. is set, but information of the winning number "5" is set for these index values IV. As a result, it becomes possible to treat the winning data set as the same but having different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the winning lottery process (FIG. 14).

In each lottery table, only the first watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV of "5", but the information of the winning number of "6" is set to the index value IV=5 in any lottery table. It is

The index value IV of "18" in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV of "24" in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV of "19" in the second RT mode lottery table are the second watermelon winning data. is set, but information of the winning number "7" is set for these index values IV. As a result, it is possible to treat the winning data set as the same but having different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the winning lottery process (FIG. 14).

In each lottery table, only cherry winning data is set for the index value IV of "6". there is In each lottery table, only the 3rd BB winning data is set to the index value IV of "7", but the information of the winning number of "9" is set to the index value IV=7 in any lottery table. ing. In each lottery table, only the 4th BB winning data is set to the index value IV of "8", but the information of the winning number of "10" is set to the index value IV=8 in any lottery table. ing.

The index value IV of "19" in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV of "25" in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV of "20" in the second RT mode lottery table are only the first BB winning data. are set, but the information of the winning number "11" is set for these index values IV. As a result, it is possible to treat the winning data set as the same but having different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the winning lottery process (FIG. 14).

The index value IV of "20" in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV of "26" in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV of "21" in the second RT mode lottery table are only the second BB winning data. are set, but the information of the winning number "12" is set for these index values IV. As a result, it becomes possible to treat the winning data set as the same but having different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the winning lottery process (FIG. 14).

In each lottery table, only the first RB winning data is set to the index value IV of "9", but the information of the winning number of "13" is set to the index value IV=9 in any lottery table. ing.

The index value IV of "21" in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV of "27" in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV of "22" in the second RT mode lottery table are only the second RB winning data. are set, but the information of the winning number "14" is set for these index values IV. As a result, it is possible to treat the winning data set as the same but having different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the winning lottery process (FIG. 14).

In each lottery table, only the first special replay winning data is set for the index value IV of "10", but the index value IV=10 does not include the winning number information of "15" in any lottery table. is set.

The second special replay is won for the index value IV of "22" in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV of "28" in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV of "23" in the second RT mode lottery table. Although only data is set, information of winning number "16" is set for these index values IV. As a result, it is possible to treat the winning data set as the same but having different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the winning lottery process (FIG. 14).

The winning numbers after "17" do not share the index value IV in each lottery table, and individual winning number information is set for each index value IV of each lottery table. This is because the types of winning data set in the index values IV associated with the winning numbers after "17" are not common among the lottery tables. Specifically, the index values IV=11 to 16 for which the normal replay winning data and the 1RT replay winning data are set in the normal mode lottery table are set to the winning number information of "17" to "22" respectively. ing. In addition, in the lottery table for the 1st RT mode, the index values IV=11 to 16 in which the normal replay winning data and the 2nd RT replay winning data are set are set with winning number information of "23" to "28" respectively. In addition, the index values IV=17 to 22 in which the normal replay winning data and the first drop replay winning data are set are set to winning number information of "29" to "34", respectively. In addition, in the second RT mode lottery table, the index values IV=11 to 16 in which the normal replay winning data and the second fall replay winning data are set are set with winning number information of "35" to "40", respectively. In addition, the index value IV=17, in which only the normal replay winning data is set, is set with the information of the winning number "41".

Since the offset table 97 is provided as described above, the combination that allows the award of game media, the combination that enables replay winning, and the combination that enables bonus winning are mixed in the front range and the back range. In the various processes after the lottery process (FIG. 14) for the winning combination that was previously held, it is possible to handle the combination in the same group for each winning combination. In addition, a combination for which different index values IV are set between the respective lottery tables although the same winning data is set is treated as the same information in various processes after the combination lottery process (FIG. 14). becomes possible. Furthermore, when the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 14) is to be transmitted to the effect side MPU 92, the winning number information can be set in the command for transmitting the result. can be suppressed.

Although the detailed explanation is omitted, the index values IV of the bonus lottery table and the internal lottery table are also stored in the offset table 97 in the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table. Each index value IV is associated with the winning number information in common. In the bonus lottery table, there are an index value IV set with only the first bell winning data, an index value IV with only the first watermelon winning data set, and an index value IV with only cherry winning data set. However, the index value IV set only with the first bell winning data is associated with the winning number information of "4", and the index value IV with only the first watermelon winning data is set as " The index value IV in which only the cherry winning data is set is associated with the winning number information of "8". In the case of the internal lottery table, the winning data corresponding to the index values IV=1 to 6, 10, 17, 18, and 22 in the normal mode lottery table are set with the winning probabilities of those index values IV, as already described. In addition, the index value in which only the normal replay winning data is set is set so as to be the total winning probability of the index values IV=11 to 16 in the normal mode lottery table. Therefore, the index values IV corresponding to the index values IV=1 to 6, 10, 17, 18, and 22 in the normal mode lottery table correspond to the winning number information corresponding to those index values IV in the normal mode lottery table. In the second RT mode lottery table for the second RT mode, the index value IV in which only the normal replay winning data is set is the same as the index value IV=17 in which only the normal replay winning data is set. information is associated.

Returning to the description of the winning lottery process (FIG. 14), after selecting the lottery table (step S402), the first round flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S403). In the winning lottery process, the index value IV in the front range has the same winning probability between the set values "1" to "6", and the winning probability differs between the set values "1" to "6". A lottery is performed from the index values IV in the front range out of the index values IV in the rear range. In this case, the first round flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the current lottery target is the front range.

After that, the first reference value is set in the target index counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S404). The target index counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the type of winning combination targeted for the lottery. Also, the first reference value is set as the number of index values IV included in the front range in each lottery table. Specifically, in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV=1 to 16 corresponds to the front range, so the first reference value is "16", and in the case of the first RT mode lottery table, the index value IV= Since 1 to 22 correspond to the front range, the first reference value is "22", and in the case of the lottery table for the second RT mode, the index value IV=1 to 17 corresponds to the front range, so the first reference value is "17". ”.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, only three index values IV are set in the bonus lottery table, and all of these index values IV have a winning probability between set values of "1" to "6". Since they are the same, the first reference value is "3". Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the case of the internal lottery table, the number of index values IV corresponding to the front range is set as the first reference value.

After that, a judgment value DV used for judging whether the winning combination is right or wrong is set (step S405). In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding to the current determination value DV the point value PV set for the current index value IV to be selected by lottery. Note that in the initial determination value setting process, the random number acquired in step S401 is used as the current determination value DV, and the point value PV set to the index value IV corresponding to the first reference value is added to this random number to create a new value. is a judgment value DV. For example, since the first reference value is "16" in the normal mode lottery table, the point value PV set to the index value IV=16 in the normal mode lottery table is added to the random number obtained in step S401. The resulting value is defined as a judgment value DV.

After that, it is determined whether or not the winning combination that is the current lottery target is determined (step S406). Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds "65535" is judged in the winning judgment. If it does not exceed "65535", after subtracting 1 from the value of the target index counter (step S407), it is determined whether or not the value of the target index counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" ( step S408). If the value of the target index counter is not "0" (step S408: NO), the process returns to step S405 to determine whether the winning combination corresponding to the value of the target index counter after updating is correct.

If the value of the target index counter is "0" (step S408: YES), it is determined whether or not the current state is the bonus state (step S409). Since the bonus lottery table does not set the index value IV in the rear range, if the current status is the bonus state (step S409: YES), it is assumed that no role has been won in this game. The process proceeds to step S414 as it is.

If the current situation is not the bonus state (step S409: NO), it is determined whether or not the first round flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S410). In other words, it is determined whether or not the group of index values IV for which the determination of whether the winning combination has been completed is in the front range. If the first round flag is set to "1" (step S410: YES), after clearing the first round flag to "0" (step S411), the target index counter is set to the second reference value ( step S412). The second reference value is set as the number of index values IV included in the rear range in each lottery table. Specifically, the index values IV=17 to 22 correspond to the rear range for the normal mode lottery table, and the index values IV=23 to 28 correspond to the rear range for the lottery table for the first RT mode. However, in the case of the lottery table for the second RT mode, the index value IV=18 to 23 corresponds to the rear range, so the second reference value is "6" in any lottery table. In the case of the bonus lottery table, the second reference value is not set because there is no index value IV included in the rear range. Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the case of the internal lottery table, the number of index values IV corresponding to the rear range is set as the second reference value. After setting the second reference value, the process returns to step S405, and the winning combination corresponding to the second reference value is determined. Also, if a negative determination is made in step S410, it is assumed that no combination has been won in this game, and the process proceeds to step S414.

On the other hand, if it exceeds "65535" in step S406, information on the winning number corresponding to the current lottery role is acquired, and the winning data corresponding to the current lottery role is acquired. to the main RAM 74 (step S413). FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing processing for obtaining winning data.

First, by determining whether or not the first round flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", it is determined whether or not the hand won this time is the index value IV included in the front range ( step S501). If the first round flag is set to "1" (step S501: YES), the value of the target index counter in the main side RAM 74 corresponds to the index value IV that won the lottery this time. process.

On the other hand, if the value of the first round flag is "0", it means that the winning combination this time has an index value IV that is included in the rear range. When judging the validity of the index value IV included in the rear range, the second reference value is set in the target index counter, and the second reference value is the number of index values IV included in the rear range. Therefore, the index value IV of the combination actually won this time does not match the value of the target index counter. Then, the difference between the index value IV of the combination actually won this time and the value of the target index counter matches the first reference value of the lottery table that is the target of the lottery this time. Therefore, if a negative determination is made in step S501, the first reference value of the lottery table that is the object of this lottery is added to the value of the object index counter (step S502). The first reference value added in this case is "16" for the normal mode lottery table, "22" for the first RT mode lottery table, and "17" for the second RT mode lottery table. becomes.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S501, or if the process of step S502 is executed, the offset table 97 is read from the main ROM 73 (step S503). Then, the type of the lottery table that is the lottery target this time and the winning number information corresponding to the current target index counter value are read from the offset table 97, and the winning number information in the current game is read. is stored in the main RAM 74 (step S504). It should be noted that, as a matter of course, the winning number information is not stored in the main-side RAM 74 when neither winning combination is won.

After that, the winning data information included in the winning combination this time is developed in the main side RAM 74 (step S505). The main side RAM 74 is set with the same number of winning corresponding areas as the number of winning data existing in the slot machine 10, and in step S505, the winning data included in the winning combination of the winning corresponding areas. "1" is set in the area corresponding to the winning data other than various bonus winning data such as 1st BB winning data, 2nd BB winning data, 3rd BB winning data, 4th BB winning data, 1st RB winning data and 2nd RB winning data , and the winning corresponding area corresponding to the winning data not included in the combination won this time is cleared to "0". The value of the winning corresponding area corresponding to various bonus winning data is set to "1" when winning a combination containing the corresponding winning data, and the clearing process of the main side RAM 74 is not executed until the corresponding winning is established. The state in which "1" is set is maintained for as long as possible. The winning corresponding area corresponding to the bonus winning data set with "1" is cleared to "0" when the corresponding winning is established or when the main side RAM 74 is cleared. Note that the winning corresponding area corresponding to the winning data other than various bonus winning data is cleared to "0" even when no winning combination is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 14).

Returning to the description of the winning lottery process (FIG. 14), when the determination is affirmative in step S409, when the determination is negative in step S410, or when the process of step S413 is executed, stop information for reel stop control (step S414), effect content determination processing (FIG. 51) is executed (step S415). In the effect content determination process, a process for determining the outline of the effect to be executed in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, the image display device 63, and the accessory 75 in the current game is executed. Details of the effect content determination process (FIG. 51) will be described later.

After that, a game start command transmission process is executed (step S416). In the transmission process, information corresponding to the general content determined in the effect content determination process (step S415) and the lottery process (FIG. 14) for the current combination, if the winning is won, is determined. The winning number information corresponding to the win and the information corresponding to the current lottery mode and current game state are set in a game start command, and the game start command is transmitted to the performance side MPU 92. - 特許庁The game start command is a command for making the effect side MPU 92 recognize that a new game has started. This is a command to recognize

When receiving the game start command, the effect-side MPU 92 grasps the outline of the effect in the current game from the game start command. Then, the effect-side MPU 92 displays the details of the effect in a manner corresponding to the content of the outline of the effect that has been comprehended, the winning number information set in the game start command, the information corresponding to the current lottery mode, and the current status. It is decided based on the information corresponding to the game state of . Then, the data table corresponding to the content of the determined effect is read from the effect-side ROM 93 to the corresponding layer in the read-out area 94a (FIG. 10) of the effect-side RAM 94, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is performed according to the read data table. Sound output control of the speaker 62, display control of the image display device 63, and drive control of the accessory 75 are executed.

After that, in step S417, the first control process of the game section is executed, in step S418, the bonus process at the start of the game is executed, in step S419, the addition process is executed, and in step S420, the information control process is executed. to run. In the notification control process, although the details will be described later, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is to be notified, display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed so that the display corresponding to the stop order to be notified is performed. Along with execution, processing for causing the image display device 63 to perform notification of the stop order to be notified is executed. Details of the processing in steps S418 to S420 will be described later.

Next, the reel control process executed in step S308 of the normal process (FIG. 13) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, a rotation start process for starting rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed (step S601). In the rotation start process, a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 14) in the previous game started. If the wait time has not passed, wait until the wait time has passed. When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and rotation start information is set in the motor control storage area provided in the main RAM 74 . By performing such processing, stepping motor acceleration processing is started in the stepping motor control processing of step S206 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12), and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R reaches a constant speed, the main MPU 72 can generate a stop command by lighting a lamp (not shown) of each stop button 42-44. Players and the like are notified of this.

After executing the rotation start process in step S601, the constant speed rotation flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S602). The constant-speed rotating flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to grasp that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant speed, and corresponds to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on a one-to-one basis. Let it be. Thereafter, a constant speed rotation start command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S603). The constant-speed rotation start command is a command that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to recognize that the rotation speed of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has become constant and that a stop command can be generated.

After transmitting the constant-speed rotation start command in step S603, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to any of the stop operation detection flags provided in the main RAM 74 (step S604). The stop operation detection flag is a flag that enables the main side MPU 72 to grasp that the ON operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are rotating at a constant speed has been performed. They are provided in one-to-one correspondence with 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Here, the stop operation handling process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 25 . The stop operation handling process is executed in step S208 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

In the stop operation handling process, first, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to any one of the left third stop flag, the middle third stop flag, and the right third stop flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S701). The third left stop flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to recognize that the left stop button 42 has been turned ON to stop the rotation of the left reel 32L as the third (last) stop operation. , Middle third stop flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to grasp that the middle stop button 43 has been turned on to stop the rotation of the middle reel 32M as the third stop operation. The third stop flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to recognize that the right stop button 44 has been turned ON to stop the rotation of the right reel 32R as the third stop operation.

When none of the left third stop flag, the middle third stop flag, and the right third stop flag is set to "1" (step S701: NO), the left reel 32L is set as the target reel, and the The processing of steps S703 to S712 is executed for the target reel. Specifically, when the constant speed rotation flag corresponding to the current target reel is set to "1" (step S703: YES), the detection signals of the stop detection sensors 42a, 42b, 42c corresponding to the target reel is stored in the main RAM 74 (step S704). The main-side RAM 74 is provided with a signal storage area capable of storing the past two detection signals of the respective stop detection sensors 42a, 42b, 42c. In step S703, the detection signals of the stop detection sensors 42a, 42b, 42c corresponding to the target reel are stored in the signal storage area.

After that, it is determined whether or not the ON operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the target reel has been detected (step S705). In step S705, the signal storage area in the main side RAM 74 is referred to, and when the detection signal of the stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, and 44a corresponding to the target reel is detected to rise from the LOW signal to the HI signal, the target reel corresponds to the target reel. It is determined that the ON operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been detected.

When the ON operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the target reel is detected (step S705: YES), it is determined whether or not the current stop operation was the stop operation corresponding to the third stop (step S706 ). Specifically, when the constant speed rotation flags corresponding to the two reels other than the target reel in the main RAM 74 are "0", it is determined that the stop operation corresponds to the third stop. If the current stop operation is a stop operation corresponding to the third stop (step S706: YES), it corresponds to the current target reel among the left third stop flag, middle third stop flag, and right third stop flag. "1" is set to the third stop flag (step S707).

After that, it is determined whether or not the second expected effect flag or the re-fluctuation effect flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S708). As already described, the second expected effect flag is a flag that enables the main side MPU 72 to grasp that the game is the object of execution of the second expected effect described later, and the re-fluctuation effect flag is a flag of the re-variable effect described later. This is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to recognize that it is a game to be executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S708, the execution period (specifically, one second) of the middle stop effect, which will be described later, and the first expectation, which will be described later, are stored in the timer counter for the main effect provided in the main RAM 74. Numerical information corresponding to the total period (specifically 2.5 seconds) of the performance execution period (specifically 1.5 seconds) is set (step S709). The main side effect timer counter is a timer counter that enables the main side MPU 72 to grasp the remaining execution period of the middle stop effect and the first expected effect, which will be described later, in the game targeted for execution of the second expected effect or re-variable effect. be. The numerical value set in the timer counter for main side effect in step S709 is decremented by 1 each time the timer subtraction process (step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12)) is performed. Details of the middle stop effect, the first expected effect, the second expected effect, and the re-fluctuation effect will be described later.

When a negative determination is made in step S706, when a negative determination is made in step S708, or when the process of step S709 is performed, "1" is set to the stop operation detection flag corresponding to the current target reel. set (step S710). As already explained, the stop operation detection flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to recognize that the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotating at a constant speed have been turned ON. They are provided in the main RAM 74 in one-to-one correspondence with each of the stop buttons 42-44. When the ON operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotating at a constant speed is detected, the corresponding stop operation detection flag is set to "1".

When the stop operation detection flag is set to "1" in step S710, the constant speed rotation flag corresponding to the target reel is cleared to "0" in the main RAM 74 (step S711). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the current target reel is the right reel 32R (step S712), and if the target reel is not the right reel 32R (step S712: NO), the target reel is updated (step S713). , the process returns to step S703. In step S713, when the current target reel is the left reel 32L, the target reel is updated to the middle reel 32M, and when the current target reel is the middle reel 32M, the target reel is updated to the right reel 32R. . Further, when it is determined in step S712 that the target reel is the right reel 32R, the stop operation handling process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S701 that one of the third stop flags is set to "1", the stop detection sensor 42a corresponding to the third stop flag set to "1", The detection signals of 43a and 44a are stored in the signal storage area of the main RAM 74 (step S714). Then, it is determined whether or not the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop has been detected (step S715). Specifically, in the signal storage area of the main RAM 74, when the detection signals of the stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, and 44a corresponding to the third stop are detected to fall from the HI state to the LOW state, the third stop is detected. It is determined that the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 have been turned off.

When the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop is detected (step S715: YES), the third stop flag corresponding to the third stop is cleared to "0" (step S716), An OFF operation command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S717). The OFF operation command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop has been performed. The OFF operation command is set with data that allows the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp the type of the third stop (the reel for which the last stop command was issued). After that, the process proceeds to step S718. The processing of steps S718 to S723 will be described later.

Returning to the description of the reel control process (FIG. 24), when it is determined in step S604 that none of the stop operation detection flags is set to "1", one of the stop operation detection flags is set to "1". is set, the process of step S604 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined that one of the stop operation detection flags is set to "1" (step S604: YES), it means that a stop command has been issued, so the process of transmitting the stop command is executed. (step S605). The stop instruction command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize which of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been turned ON to generate the stop instruction. In the stop instruction command transmission process in step S605, the stop instruction command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92, and the stop operation detection flag determined to be set to "1" in step S604 is cleared to "0". When the stop instruction command transmission process is performed in step S605, the stop control process shown in steps S606 to S612 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In the stop control process, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position (specifically, the lower row) at the timing when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is confirmed (step S606). Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. After that, based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74, the number of slips of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time is calculated (step S607).

In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are slid by one symbol and then stopped, a stop mode in which the reels are stopped after being slid by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reels are stopped after being slid by three symbols, and four symbols. There are 5 patterns of stop modes, including a stop mode of stopping after sliding. Therefore, in step S607, any value from "0" to "4" is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the main side RAM74.

After that, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to be actually stopped at the base position (step S608). Then, it is determined whether or not the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped this time and the symbol numbers of the stop symbols are equal (step S609), and if they are equal (step S609: YES) A reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed (step S610). After that, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped (step S611). If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed (step S612), and the process returns to step S604.

Here, the stop information is information for making the stop mode of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R correspond to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 14). , it is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") with respect to the arrival symbol that has reached the base position when each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated to stop. As the stop information, sliding number data indicating the correspondence between each symbol and the sliding number is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in association with each lottery result and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sliding number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be derived while the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating. .

As the processing for setting the stop information, the stop information first setting processing executed in step S414 of the combination lottery processing (FIG. 14) and the reel control processing (FIG. 24) executed in step S612. There is a stop information second setting process. In the first stop information setting process, stop information is set according to the result of the lottery process for the combination. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information stored in the main side RAM 74 in the first stop information setting process or the previous second stop information setting process is changed after the reel is stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R, and the stop numbers of the stopped reels 32L, 32M and 32R. do.

When it is determined in step S611 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, winning determination processing is executed in step S613. In the winning determination process, the types of symbols stopped on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are grasped. Then, based on the contents of the winning data developed in the main side RAM 74, the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes the winning combination in the winning combination lottery process. It is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponds to each other, and if the combination of symbols corresponds to the winning combination, it is determined that the winning combination has been won and the winning handling process is executed.

In the winning handling process, information on the number of game media to be awarded is set in the main RAM 74 so that game media can be awarded in the medium awarding process if the winning is a minor win. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process is executed in the main side RAM 74 so that the replay setting process is executed in the next start waiting process (step S302 in the normal process (FIG. 13)). do.

When the winning determination process is executed in step S613, a bonus notification process (FIG. 50), which will be described later, is executed (step S614), and a winning result command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S615). The winning result command includes data indicating whether or not the current winning has been established, and, if the winning has been established, data indicating the type of the winning.

<About game status and game section>
Next, the game state and game section will be described. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining game states and game intervals that exist in the slot machine 10. FIG.

In this slot machine 10, as game states, there are a normal game state ST1, a bonus internal state ST2, a BB state ST3, an RB state ST4, a preparation state ST5, and an ART state ST6. These game states ST1 to ST6 do not overlap each other.

The normal game state ST1 is a game state in which the main-side RAM 74 is cleared by execution (step S105). Further, when the transition to the preparation state ST5 does not occur when the BB state ST3 ends, when the transition to the preparation state ST5 does not occur when the RB state ST4 ends, and when the transition to the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 does not occur When the ART state ST6 ends without being triggered by the transition, the game state changes to the normal game state ST1. The normal game state ST1 is a game state with a lower advantage than the BB state ST3, RB state ST4, preparation state ST5 and ART state ST6 in terms of the expected value of the game medium given in one game, and is more advantageous than the bonus internal state ST2. degree is approximately the same. Also, as already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode and the second RT mode as the lottery mode, but the player can stay in any of these lottery modes in the normal game state ST1. It should be noted that when the clearing process (step S105) of the main side RAM 74 is executed, the normal game state ST1 and the normal mode are entered.

The bonus internal state ST2 is a game state in which the game stays when a bonus winning corresponding to any bonus winning data is not established in a game in which any bonus winning data is set, and the bonus winning corresponding to the bonus winning data. It is a game state that ends when is established. In the bonus internal state ST2, the internal lottery table is referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 14) as already described. In this case, since the internal lottery table does not set a combination (that is, index value IV) for shifting the lottery mode, the lottery mode does not shift in the bonus internal state ST2. Since the replay probability in the bonus internal state ST2 is the same as when the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 15) is referred to, it can be said that the bonus internal state ST2 is a gaming state in which the replay probability is maintained in the normal mode. In addition, without being limited to this, the replay probability in the bonus internal state ST2 may be configured to be higher than in the normal mode, for example, may be configured to be the same as the replay probability in the first RT mode, or in the second RT mode. The configuration may be the same as the replay probability, the configuration may be the replay probability between the normal mode and the first RT mode, or the configuration may be the replay probability between the first RT mode and the second RT mode, A configuration may be adopted in which the replay probability is higher than in the second RT mode. Also, the replay probability in the bonus internal state ST2 may be lower than in the normal mode.

The contents of the BB state ST3 and RB state ST4 have already been explained. In the BB state ST3 and RB state ST4, no transition to the lottery mode occurs.

The preparation state ST5 is a game state in which the player stays before shifting to the ART state ST6, and can shift from the BB state ST3 and RB state ST4. As already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as the lottery mode, and the player can stay in any of these lottery modes in the preparation state ST5. In the preparation state ST5, when winning numbers "1" to "3" are set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables establishment of the first bell winning is notified. Then, when the first bell win is established, the game medium of "11" is provided. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media to be given in one game in the preparation state ST5. In addition, in the preparation state ST5, when winning numbers of "17" to "22" are set, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enables establishment of the 1RT replay winning prize is notified, and "23" to When the winning number "28" is set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the 2nd replay prize is notified, and the winning numbers "29" to "34" are set. If so, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to avoid establishment of the first falling replay winning prize is notified. When the second RT replay prize is established in the preparation state ST5 and the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode, the game state shifts to the ART state ST6. Although the lottery mode may shift to the preparation state ST5 in a situation where the lottery mode is the second RT mode, in this case the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode, and then shifts to the second RT mode. If so, it shifts to ART state ST6.

The ART state ST6 is a game state that shifts to when the second RT replay winning is established in the preparation state ST5 as described above. The ART state ST6 ends when the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 becomes "0". In this case, the game state becomes the normal game state ST1. Further, when a bonus win is won in the middle of ART state ST6, the game moves to bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3 or RB state ST4. In this case, after the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 ends, the state shifts to the preparation state ST5, and finally returns to the ART state ST6.

As already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as the lottery mode, and the player can stay in any of these lottery modes in the ART state ST6. In the ART state ST6, when winning numbers of "1" to "3" are set, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell winning is notified. Then, when the first bell win is established, the game medium of "11" is provided. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media to be given in one game in the ART state ST6. In addition, in the ART state ST6, when winning numbers of "17" to "22" are set, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the 1RT replay winning prize is notified, and "23" to When the winning number "28" is set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the 2nd replay prize is notified, and the winning numbers "29" to "34" are set. If so, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid establishment of the first fall replay prize is notified, and if the winning numbers "35" to "40" are set, the second fall replay prize is set. The stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to avoid the establishment of . As a result, the lottery mode is basically maintained in the second RT mode in the ART state ST6. The second RT mode is a mode with a higher replay probability than the normal mode and the first RT mode. That is, the ART state ST6 is a game state in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize is announced, and basically a game state in which the replay probability is maintained high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expected net addition of game media in the ART state ST6. Even if the lottery mode shifts from the second RT mode to the first RT mode or shifts from the first RT mode to the normal mode in the ART state ST6, the ART state ST6 is maintained and the ART state is not in the second RT mode. The number of remaining continuous games in ST6 is subtracted.

In the configuration in which various game states ST1 to ST6 exist as described above, game sections are set separately from these game states ST1 to ST6. A normal section SC1 and an advantageous section SC2 are set as game sections. In other words, in the slot machine 10, the setting values "1" to "6", the lottery modes of the normal mode, the first RT mode and the second RT mode, various game states ST1 to ST6, and There are game sections of normal section SC1 and advantageous section SC2.

The normal section SC1 refers to reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable establishment of a winning that is advantageous to the player when a winning combination to be established is different depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This is a section in which the stop order is not notified, and the probability that the condition for shifting to the ART state ST6, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is met is lower than in the advantageous section SC2. More specifically, the conditions for shifting to the ART state ST6 are not satisfied in the normal section SC1. When the clearing process (step S105) of the main side RAM 74 is executed, the game state is the normal game state ST1 and the normal mode, which is the normal section SC1. In addition, when the initialization process for the advantageous section SC2 is executed in the advantageous section SC2, the normal section SC1 also occurs.

The advantageous section SC2 is the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of a winning that is advantageous to the player when a winning combination that is to be established according to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is won. This section corresponds to at least one of the section in which the stop order is notified and the section in which the probability of shifting to the ART state ST6, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is higher than in the normal section SC1. The advantageous section SC2 is the reel 32L that enables establishment of the winning with the largest number of game media awarded among the types of winnings included in the wins to be established that differ according to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. , 32M and 32R are reliably continued until the notification of the stop order is performed at least once. Specifically, in the advantageous section SC2, reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set with the winning numbers "1" to "3" in the winning lottery process (FIG. 14) to enable establishment of the first bell winning. is reliably continued until the notification of the stop order of is executed at least once. In addition, the minimum termination condition is satisfied when the notification of the stop order is executed at least once, and the minimum termination condition is satisfied regardless of whether the first bell win is actually established. do. Then, when the notification is executed at least once, the advantageous interval SC2 is set to the end condition determined according to the situation in which the advantageous interval SC2 is set, and the number of continuous games of the advantageous interval SC2 is the upper limit number of games ( Specifically, it continues until one of the conditions of reaching 1500 games is satisfied.

As shown in FIG. 26, the normal game state ST1, the bonus internal state ST2, the BB state ST3 and the RB state ST4 can be stayed in both the normal section SC1 and the advantageous section SC2. On the other hand, the preparation state ST5 and the ART state ST6 do not stay in the normal section SC1, but only in the advantageous section SC2.

Next, a specific processing configuration that enables setting of the game states ST1 to ST6 and the game sections SC1 and SC2 as described above will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the first control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72. As shown in FIG. The first control process for the game section is executed at step S417 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 14). The process of step S417 is executed after the determination of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game.

First, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the internal bonus state ST2, bonus state (BB state ST3, RB state ST4), preparation state ST5, or ART state ST6 (step S801). If a negative determination is made in step S801, the processing from step S802 onwards is executed.

In step S802, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The advantageous section flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether or not the game section is the advantageous section SC2. The normal section SC1 is when the section flag value is "0".

If the game section is the normal section SC1 (step S802: NO), any winning number of "4", "6", "8", and "15" is selected in the lottery process (FIG. 14) for this combination. It is determined whether or not it has been set (step S803). If an affirmative determination is made in step S803, an advantageous transition lottery process is executed to determine whether or not a transition to the advantageous section SC2 will occur (step S804).

In the advantageous transition lottery process (step S804), first, the advantageous transition table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 14) for the current combination is read from the main side ROM73. In this case, the advantageous transition table is set so that the winning number with the lower winning probability has a higher probability of winning the transition to the advantageous section SC2. Incidentally, the advantageous transition table is common regardless of the set values of "1" to "6". The fact that the table is common regardless of the setting value applies to all lottery processes other than the combination lottery process (FIG. 14). After that, the numerical information of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74 is read, and the read numerical information is checked against the read advantageous transition table. Thereby, it is specified whether or not the transition to the advantageous section SC2 has been won.

If the transition to the advantageous section SC2 is won (step S805: YES), the advantageous section flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", and the value of the advantageous continuation counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Then, the unnotified flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S806). The advantageous continuation counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of games continuously played in the advantageous section SC2. After shifting to the advantageous section SC2, the unreported flag is set to the winning numbers "1" to "3" in the combination lottery process (FIG. 14), and the reels 32L, which enable establishment of the first bell winning, This is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 whether or not the notification of the stop order of 32M and 32R has already occurred.

As already explained, the first control process for the game section is executed at the start of the game. In this case, when the transition to the advantageous section SC2 is won in the advantageous transition lottery process (step S804), the advantageous section flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" in the first control processing of the game section. be. As a result, the transition to the advantageous section SC2 occurs at the start of the game in which the player wins the transition to the advantageous section SC2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the transition to the advantageous section SC2 occurs in the next game of the game in which the transition to the advantageous section SC2 is won, and the game in which the transition to the advantageous section SC2 is won. A configuration may be adopted in which the transition to the advantageous section SC2 occurs in the game two or more games later than that.

After setting the transition to the advantageous interval SC2, an advantageous interval start command is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 (step S807). The advantageous interval start command is a command for causing the effect-side MPU 92 to recognize that it is time to start the advantageous interval SC2. After that, the advantageous section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state (step S808). As a result, the advantageous section display section 67 starts to notify that the current section is the advantageous section SC2.

The stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be notified by the advantageous section SC2. Here, the notification control process executed in step S420 of the combination lottery process (FIG. 14) will be described. This notification control process is executed after the determination of whether the winning combination has been completed at the start of the game.

In the notification control process, in a situation where the advantageous zone flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", any winning number from "1" to "3" is set in the winning lottery process (FIG. 14). In this case, if either the game state is the preparation state ST5 or the ART state ST6 or the non-report flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", the first A process for notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of a bell prize is executed.

Specifically, first, information on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize corresponding to the winning number of this time is grasped. Then, the dual-purpose display section 66 is controlled so that the display corresponding to the grasped stop order information is started on the dual-purpose display section 66 . This display on the dual-purpose display section 66 continues until all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the current game. After that, a bell winning command is transmitted to the MPU 92 on the production side. Information is set in the bell winning command so that the production side MPU 92 can specify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning in this game.

After that, the unnotified flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In this case, if the value of the non-notification flag is already "0", that state is maintained, and if the value of the non-notification flag is "1", it is changed to "0". As a result, it becomes possible for the main MPU 72 to specify that the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which enables the first bell winning, has already been announced in the current advantageous section SC2.

In the notification control process, if any winning number from "17" to "28" is set in the winning lottery process (FIG. 14), the condition is that the game state is the preparation state ST5 or the ART state ST6. , a process for notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables establishment of the first RT replay winning prize or the second RT replay winning prize.

Specifically, first, information on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first RT replay winning prize or the second RT replay winning prize corresponding to the current winning number is grasped. Then, the dual-purpose display section 66 is controlled so that the display corresponding to the grasped stop order information is started on the dual-purpose display section 66 . This display on the dual-purpose display section 66 continues until all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the current game. After that, a command for promotion replay is transmitted to the MPU 92 on the production side. Information is set in the promotion replay command so that the MPU 92 on the production side can specify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the 1st replay prize or the 2nd RT replay prize in this game. be done.

In the notification control process, if any winning number from "29" to "40" is set in the winning lottery process (FIG. 14), the first fall is performed under the condition that the game state is the ART state ST6. A process for notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to avoid establishment of a replay winning prize or a second fall replay winning prize is executed.

Specifically, first, information on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables avoidance of the establishment of the first falling replay winning prize or the second falling replay winning prize corresponding to the current winning number is grasped. Then, the dual-purpose display section 66 is controlled so that the display corresponding to the grasped stop order information is started on the dual-purpose display section 66 . This display on the dual-purpose display section 66 continues until all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the current game. After that, a fall replay avoidance command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 . The fall replay avoidance command is provided so that the production side MPU 92 can specify the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can avoid the establishment of the first fall replay prize or the second fall replay prize in this game. information is set.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, if any winning number of "29" to "34" is set in the winning lottery process (FIG. 14) in the case where the game state is the preparation state ST5, the first A process for notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to avoid establishment of a falling replay prize is executed. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the preparation state ST5, even if any winning number of "35" to "40" is set in the winning lottery process (FIG. 14), the establishment of the second falling replay winning prize. The stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables avoidance is not reported. Since the condition for transitioning from the preparation state ST5 to the ART state ST6 is that the second RT replay prize is established, when the transition to the preparation state ST5 occurs in the second RT mode, establishment of the second fall replay prize is not avoided. By doing so, it is possible to provide an opportunity to once fall to the first RT mode and establish a second RT replay winning prize.

Next, the notification processing executed by the effect-side MPU 92 will be described. Note that the processing for notification is executed by interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed in a comparatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the effect side MPU 92 .

In the notification process, when a bell prize winning command, a promotion replay command, or a fall replay avoidance command is received from the main MPU 72, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the command received this time among these commands is determined. (the unit display images G1 to G3 already described with reference to FIG. 8A) are read out to the readout area 94a of the effect side RAM 94 in order to display them on the image display device 63. The unit display images G1 to G3 can be displayed on the image display device 63 by performing notification execution control in the effect-side MPU 92 according to the notification table. As a result, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current stop order command is displayed on the image display device 63, for example, as shown in FIG. 8(a). This display on the image display device 63 continues until all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the current game.

Returning to the description of the first control process (FIG. 27) of the game section SC2, if the advantageous section flag is set to "1" in the game prior to the current game (step S802: YES), the current role It is determined whether or not any winning number of "4", "6", "8" and "15" has been set in the lottery process (FIG. 14) (step S809). When an affirmative determination is made in step S809, ART transition lottery processing is executed to determine whether or not transition to ART state ST6 occurs (step S810).

In the ART transition lottery process (step S810), first, the ART transition table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 14) for the current combination is read from the main ROM73. In this case, the ART transition table is set so that a winning number with a low winning probability has a higher probability of winning a transition to the ART state ST6. Also, the ART transition table is common regardless of the setting values "1" to "6". After that, the numerical information of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74 is read, and the read numerical information is checked against the read ART transition table. As a result, it is determined whether or not the player has won the transition to the ART state ST6.

Shift to ART state ST6 When winning is made (step S811: YES), the ART winning flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S812). The ART winning flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that it is necessary to shift to the preparation state ST5.

As described above, the advantage transition lottery process (step S804) and the ART transition lottery process (step S810) are any of "4", "6", "8" and "15" in the role lottery process (FIG. 14). Executed when any winning number is set. All of the combinations corresponding to these winning numbers have the same winning probability within the set values "1" to "6". That is, the advantageous transition lottery process and the ART transition lottery process are executed when a winning combination in which there is no set difference in winning probability is won. As a result, it is possible to prevent the set values of "1" to "6" from being advantageous or disadvantageous with respect to the probability of transition to the advantageous section SC2 and the probability of transition to the ART state ST6.

Next, referring to the flow chart of FIG. 28, the handling process at the end of the game executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. Incidentally, the corresponding process at the end of the game is executed at step S310 in the normal process (FIG. 13). Since the process of step S310 is executed after the reel control process (step S308), it is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped rotating in one game.

First, a bonus process is executed for performing transition control and progress control for the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 (step S901). The bonus processing will be described later in detail. After that, on the condition that none of the bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, and RB state ST4 (step S902: NO), control processing of the lottery mode is executed (step S903). In the control process of the lottery mode, when the 1st replay winning is established in the current game, the normal mode is shifted to the 1st RT mode, and when the 2nd replay winning is established in the current game, the second RT mode is entered. If the 1RT mode is shifted to the 2nd RT mode and the first fall replay prize is established in this game, the first RT mode is shifted to the normal mode, and the second fall replay prize is established in the current game. If so, the second RT mode is changed to the first RT mode.

After that, the process jumps to the process corresponding to the current game state (step S904). Specifically, when the game state is the normal game state ST1, normal processing is executed (step S905), and when the game state is the preparation state ST5, the preparation state processing is executed (step S906), When the gaming state is ART state ST6, ART state processing is executed (step S907). Also, when the affirmative determination is made in step S902, or when one of the processes of steps S905 to S907 is executed, the second control process of the game section is executed (step S908). In the second control process for the game section, a process for shifting the game section to the normal section SC1 is executed when the conditions for shifting from the advantageous section SC2 to the normal section SC1 are satisfied.

FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the second control process of the game section. As described above, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped rotating in one game. is executed after all rotations of

In steps S1001 to S1011, when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, a process for ending the advantageous section SC2 is executed. Details of these processes will be described later.

If it is the advantageous section SC2 (step S1003: YES) and a negative determination is made in step S1006, the game state is the normal game state ST1 and the value of the advantage maintenance counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is "0". It is determined whether or not there is (step S1012). When the ART state ST6 ends and the game state shifts to the normal game state ST1, the advantage maintenance counter maintains the advantageous section SC2 over the number of games to maintain the advantage even after shifting to the normal game state ST1. This is a counter for specifying the number of remaining games in the number of games for maintaining the advantage in the main MPU 72 .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1012, it is determined whether or not the value of the unnotified flag in the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S1013). As already explained, the unreported flag is set to a winning number from "1" to "3" in the role lottery process (Fig. 14) after the transition to the advantageous section SC2, enabling establishment of the first bell winning. This is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 whether or not notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has already occurred. Then, when the notification of the stop order has already occurred, the value of the non-notification flag is "0".

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1013, initialization processing for the advantageous section SC2 is executed (step S1014). In the initialization process of the advantageous section SC2, the advantageous section flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In addition, in the initialization process of the advantageous section SC2, even if the player stays in either the preparation state ST5 or the ART state ST6, the number of games to be played in the game state (preparation state ST5 or ART state ST6) is stored. By clearing the various data indicating the game state (preparation state ST5 or ART state ST6) including the counter, the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1. Since the process of step S1014 is executed under the condition that it is in the normal game state ST1, the process of clearing the advantageous interval flag to "0" is executed without executing the process of clearing the various data.

After that, the advantageous section display section 67 is switched from the lit state to the unlit state (step S1015). As a result, the notification of the advantageous section SC2 in the advantageous section display section 67 ends.

As described above, even in the normal game state ST1, if the non-report flag is set to "1", the advantageous section SC2 is not terminated. As a result, the advantageous interval SC2 is continued from the start of the advantageous interval SC2 until the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R enabling establishment of the first bell prize is notified once. . If the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 starts while this advantageous section SC2 continues, the degree of expectation for transition to the ART state ST6 increases. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize is informed, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Next, normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Incidentally, the normal process is executed in step S905 of the corresponding process (FIG. 28) at the end of the game. Since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped rotating in one game, the normal processing is also executed after all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped rotating in one game. executed.

In the normal process, first, it is determined whether or not the ART winning flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1101). When "1" is set to the ART winning flag (step S1101: YES), the transition to ART state ST6 is won in the ART transition lottery process (step S811 of the first control process (FIG. 27) of the game section). means it happened. In this case, the ART winning flag is cleared to "0" (step S1102), and the initial number of continuous games setting process for setting the number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 to "50" is executed (step S1103).

After that, the ready state flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", and the game state is shifted to the ready state ST5 (step S1104). As a result, the preparation state process of step S906 is executed in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 28). After that, a preparation start command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1105). The preparation start command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the preparation state ST5 is started. When the production side MPU 92 receives the preparation start command, the production side MPU 92 starts the production corresponding to the preparation state ST5.

If a negative determination is made in step S1101, or if the process of step S1105 is performed, it is determined whether or not the value of the advantage maintenance counter in the main RAM 74 is "1" or more (step S1106). As already explained, when the ART state ST6 ends and the game state shifts to the normal game state ST1, the advantage maintenance counter continues the advantageous interval SC2 over the number of games to maintain the advantage even after the transition to the normal game state ST1. This is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of games remaining in the number of games for which the advantage is maintained when the number of games is maintained. When the value of the advantage maintenance counter is 1 or more, the main MPU 72 specifies that it is an advantage maintenance section, and when the value of the advantage maintenance counter becomes "0" after subtracting 1, the advantage maintenance section ends. Identify things. If the value of the advantage maintenance counter is equal to or greater than "1" (step S1106: YES), the value of the advantage maintenance counter is decremented by 1 (step S1107), and the normal processing ends.

Next, the addition processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The addition process is executed in step S419 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 14). The processing of this step S419 is executed after the determination of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game.

In the add-on process, if the gaming state is the preparation state ST5 or the ART state ST6 (step S1201: YES), "4" to "8", "15", " 16” is set (step S1202). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, an additional lottery process is executed (step S1203).

In the add-on lottery process (step S1203), first, the add-on table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 14) for the current combination is read from the main side ROM73. In the present embodiment, as the additional winning in which the number of continuous games is added in the ART state ST6, the first additional winning in which the number of continuous games is added by "50" and the second additional winning in which the number of continuous games is added by "100" There are two types of The add-on table is set so that the probability of occurrence of add-on win (either the first add-on win or the second add-on win) is higher for a winning number with a lower winning probability. The addition table is common between set values of "1" to "6". At least one of the additional expected number of games may be different. After that, the numerical value information of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74 is read, and the read numerical value information is collated with the read addition table. As a result, whether or not the additional winning (either the first additional winning or the second additional winning) is achieved, and the type of the additional winning in the case of the additional winning is specified.

If an additional winning is made (step S1204: YES), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the ART state ST6 (step S1205). When the gaming state is the ART state ST6 (step S1205: YES), an addition setting process during ART is executed (step S1206). In the add-on setting process during ART, the add-on game number value ("50" or "100") corresponding to the lottery result selected this time is added to the ART game number counter provided in the main side RAM74. The ART game number counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST6.

Thereafter, "1" is set in the ART medium add-on flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1207), and this add-on process ends. The add-on flag during ART is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to specify that an add-on win has occurred in the ART state ST6.

If it is determined in step S1205 that the game state is not the ART state ST6, it means that the game state is the preparation state ST5, so the addition setting process during the preparation state is executed (step S1208). In the add-on setting process in the preparation state, the add-on game number value ("50" or "100") corresponding to the lottery result selected this time is added to the ART game number counter provided in the main side RAM 74. FIG.

After that, the addition flag during preparation provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1209), and the processing for addition is ended. The in-preparation addition flag is a flag that enables the main side MPU 72 to specify that an addition winning has occurred in the preparation state ST5.

Next, the preparation state processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The preparation state process is executed at step S906 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 28). Since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped rotating in one game, the preparation state processing is also executed after all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped rotating in one game. executed.

In the preparation state process, if the addition flag during preparation in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1301: YES), the addition winning ( Since it means that the first add-on win or the second add-on win), an add-on-preparation command is transmitted to the production-side MPU 92 (step S1202), and the add-on-preparation flag is cleared to "0" (step S1203). ). The addition command during preparation is a command indicating that the number of games to be continued in the ART state ST6 is added in the preparation state ST5. When the performance-side MPU 92 receives the addition command during preparation, the performance side MPU 92 executes the addition performance indicating that the current number of additional games set in the addition command during preparation is given.

When a negative determination is made in step S1301, or when the processing of step S1303 is performed, it is determined whether or not the second RT replay winning has been established in the current game (step S1304). If the 2nd RT replay winning has been established (step S1304: YES), it means that an opportunity to shift from the preparation state ST5 to the ART state ST6 has occurred, so ART start processing is executed (step S1305). In the ART start process, information is set in the master side RAM 74 so that the ART state process of step S907 is executed in the corresponding process (FIG. 28) at the end of the game. As a result, the game state becomes ART state ST6.

In addition, in the ART start processing (step S1305), if the game state before the preparation state ST5 is started is the bonus state and the game state immediately before the bonus state is the ART state ST6, the game returns to the ART state ST6. Since it means that the game has been played, the setting for returning to the game state in the ART state ST6 immediately before shifting to the bonus state is performed. However, when the number of continuous games of ART state ST6 is added in the bonus state, the state in which the number of games to be continued is added is returned to ART state ST6. In addition, in the ART start process (step S1305), if the current preparation state ST5 is triggered by winning the transition to the ART state ST6 in the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4, the ART state ST6 Information on 50 games, which is the number of starting games, is added to the ART game number counter of the main side RAM 74 . In this case, when the game state before the preparation state ST5 is the bonus state and in the bonus state, not only the transition winning to the ART state ST6 but also the additional winning of the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 are generated. , the ART state ST6 is started in a state in which the number of continuous games awarded due to the extra winning is added. Further, in the ready state ST5, when the additional winning of the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST6 has occurred, the number of continued games awarded due to the additional winning is added, and the ART state ST6 is added. will be started.

After executing the ART start process in step S1305, an ART start command indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 has occurred is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1306), and this preparation state process ends. The ART start command is set with information indicating whether or not the transition to the ART state ST6 this time corresponds to a return to the ART state ST6. Information indicating that 50 games have been awarded is set as the number of games to be started in ST6.

Next, the ART state processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The ART state process is executed at step S907 in the corresponding process (FIG. 28) at the end of the game. Since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped rotating in one game, the ART state processing is also executed after all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped rotating in one game. executed.

In the ART state process, if the ART medium addition flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1401: YES), the addition winning ( 1st add-on win or second add-on win), an add-on command during ART is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1402), and the add-on flag during ART is cleared to "0" (step S1403 ). The addition command during ART is a command indicating that the number of continuous games in ART state ST6 is added in ART state ST6. When the MPU 92 on the performance side receives the add-on command during ART, the add-on performance indicating that the number of add-on games set in the add-on command during ART is given is executed. The details of the effect for addition will be described later.

When a negative determination is made in step S1401, or when the processing of step S1403 is performed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the ART game number counter in the main side RAM 74 (step S1404). Then, under the condition that the value of the ART game number counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S1405: YES), the processing of steps S1406 and S1407 is executed.

Specifically, first, end processing of the ART state ST6 is executed (step S1406). In the end processing, data setting is performed for shifting the game state from the ART state ST6 to the normal game state ST1. As a result, the normal process of step S905 is executed in the corresponding process (FIG. 28) at the end of the game, for example. Also, in the end processing of the ART state ST6, the advantage maintenance processing is executed. In the advantage maintenance process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the advantage continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is equal to or less than the number of games that can be continued (specifically, "1200"). The number of games that can be continued is set to be less than the upper limit number of games (specifically, "1500") for the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2, and the continuous game in which the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 is started. The number of games is set to less than the number. If the value of the advantage continuation counter is equal to or less than the number of games that can be continued, the advantage maintenance lottery table is read from the main ROM 73 . Winning values corresponding to advantageous maintenance winning are set in the advantage maintaining lottery table. Thereafter, numerical information of the random number counter, which is periodically updated in the main RAM 74, is read out, and the read numerical information is collated against the read-out advantage maintenance lottery table, thereby determining whether or not an advantage maintenance lottery has been won. judge. In the event that an advantage is won, a value (specifically "10") corresponding to the number of games to be maintained in the advantage is set in the advantage maintenance counter of the main side RAM 74 . As a result, even after the ART state ST6 ends, the game section is maintained in the advantageous section SC2 until the number of games for maintaining the advantage is completed.

After that, an ART end command indicating that the ART state ST6 has ended is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1407), and this ART state processing ends. The effect side MPU 92 receives the ART end command so that the effect corresponding to the end of the ART state ST6 is executed, and after the end of the effect, the effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 which is not the advantageous maintenance section is executed. is executed. It should be noted that, in the event that winning is won with the advantage maintained in step S1406, information indicating that the winning has been won with the advantage maintained is set in the ART end command.

Next, the bonus processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the bonus process is executed in step S901 of the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 28). Since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped rotating in one game, the bonus processing is also executed after all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped rotating in one game. executed.

In the bonus processing, when the BB prize corresponding to the BB winning data stored in the main RAM 74 is established (step S1501: YES), the BB flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1502). The BB flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that it is in the BB state ST3.

If the BB winning established this time is the 3rd BB winning or the 4th BB winning (step S1503: YES), the specific bonus flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1504). The 3BB winning data that enables establishment of the 3BB winning prize is any of the normal mode lottery table (Fig. 15), the 1st RT mode lottery table (Fig. 17) and the 2nd RT mode lottery table (Fig. 19). is set to the index value IV=7, and the 4th BB winning data that enables establishment of the 4th BB prize is set to the index value IV=8 in any of these lottery tables. These index values IV=7 and 8 are set as a combination with the same winning probability between the setting values "1" to "6". In other words, the specific bonus flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether or not a bonus winning with no set difference in winning probability has been established. When a bonus prize with a set difference in the winning probability is established, the game section is not set to shift from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 at the start of the bonus state. When a bonus prize winning with no set difference is established, setting is made to shift the game section from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 at the start of the bonus state.

On the other hand, when the RB prize corresponding to the RB winning data stored in the main RAM 74 is established (step S1501: NO, step S1505: YES), the RB flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". (Step S1506). The RB flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that it is in the RB state ST4.

Also, if the RB winning achieved this time is the first RB winning (step S1507: YES), the specific bonus flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1508). The 1st RB winning data that enables establishment of the 1st RB prize is any of the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 15), the 1st RT mode lottery table (FIG. 17), and the 2nd RT mode lottery table (FIG. 19). is also set to the index value IV=9. The index value IV=9 is set as a combination with the same winning probability among the setting values "1" to "6". Therefore, in order for the main MPU 72 to specify that the current RB win corresponds to the establishment of a bonus win in which there is no set difference in the winning probability, the specific bonus flag is set to "1" in step S1508. set.

When a negative determination is made in step S1503, when the process of step S1504 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S1507, or when the process of step S1508 is executed, the total payout counter provided in the main RAM 74 is "0" is cleared (step S1509). The total payout counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the total number of game media given to the player in the bonus state. The main MPU 72 determines whether or not the condition for ending the bonus state is satisfied based on the value of the total payout counter.

After that, a bonus start command indicating that the bonus state is started is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1510). Information indicating the type of bonus state (1st BB winning, 2nd BB winning, 3rd BB winning, 4th BB winning, 1st RB winning or 2nd RB winning) to be started this time is set in the bonus start command. When the performance side MPU 92 receives the bonus start command, the performance side MPU 92 executes the performance corresponding to the type of the bonus state to be started.

After that, it is determined whether or not the main ending effect flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1511). The main ending effect flag, which will be described in detail later, is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that the ending effect is being executed when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 approaches the upper limit number of games. be. If a negative determination is made in step S1511, freeze counter setting processing is executed (step S1512).

In the freeze counter setting process, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 10 seconds) at the start of the bonus is set in the freeze counter provided in the main RAM 74 . Numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically decremented in the timer subtraction process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). If a value is set in the freeze counter in the bonus process, the process waits in step S314 in the normal process (FIG. 13). As a result, the start of a new game is awaited. In this state where the start of a new game is awaited, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute an effect corresponding to the start of the bonus state, thereby shifting to the bonus state. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize that a has occurred, and to give satisfaction to the player by emphasizing the transition to the bonus state. The state of waiting in step S314 in the normal processing (FIG. 13) is canceled when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0".

When the BB flag or RB flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1501: NO, step S1505: NO, step S1513: YES), a bonus state that controls the progress of BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 processing is executed (step S1514).

Now, the bonus state processing (step S1514) will be described. In the bonus state processing, when game media have been awarded in the current game, a value corresponding to the number of game media awarded this time is added to the total payout counter of the main side RAM 74 . Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the total payout counter after the addition is equal to or greater than the end reference number corresponding to the current bonus state. Specifically, when the current bonus state is the BB state ST3, it is determined whether or not the BB end reference number (for example, "350") is exceeded, and when the current bonus state is the RB state ST4, is greater than or equal to the RB termination reference number (for example, "150").

When it is determined that the value of the total payout counter after the addition is equal to or greater than the end reference number corresponding to the current bonus state, the game state at the timing of winning the bonus combination that triggered the bonus state this time is the ready state. On the condition that it is ST5 or ART state ST6, or on the condition that the ART winning flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", the setting processing of the preparation state ST5 is executed. In the setting process of the preparation state ST5, the ART winning flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Also, the information of the main side RAM 74 is set so that the preparation state process of step S906 is executed in the corresponding process (FIG. 28) at the end of the game. As a result, the game state after the end of the bonus state this time becomes the preparation state ST5.

When it is determined that the ART winning flag is not set to "1" or when the setting processing of the preparation state ST5 is performed, a bonus end command indicating the end of the bonus state is transmitted to the performance side MPU 92. - 特許庁Information indicating whether the game state after the end of the bonus state is the normal game state ST1 or the preparation state ST5 is set in the bonus end command. Upon receiving the bonus end command, the effect-side MPU 92 starts an effect indicating that the bonus state ends, and after the end of the effect, an effect corresponding to the game state after the bonus state ends. let it start.

After transmitting the bonus end command, it is determined whether or not the main side ending effect flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". The main ending effect flag, which will be described in detail later, is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that the ending effect is being executed when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 approaches the upper limit number of games. be. When it is determined that the main side ending effect flag is not set to "1", a freeze counter setting process is executed, and this bonus state process ends.

In the freeze counter setting process, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 10 seconds) at the end of the bonus is set in the freeze counter provided in the main RAM 74 . Numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically decremented in the timer subtraction process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). If a value is set in the freeze counter in the bonus state process, the process waits in step S314 in the normal process (FIG. 13). As a result, the start of a new game is awaited. In this state where the start of a new game is awaited, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute an effect corresponding to the end of the bonus state, thereby ending the bonus state. can be clearly recognized by the player. The state of waiting in step S314 in the normal processing (FIG. 13) is canceled when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0".

Next, the bonus processing executed by the main MPU 72 at the start of the game will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the bonus process at the start of the game is executed in step S418 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 14). The process of step S418 is executed after the determination of whether the winning combination is correct or not at the start of the game.

In the bonus processing at the start of the game, if the advantageous interval flag of the main RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S1601: NO), the bonus game, which is the first game to be executed after the transition to the bonus state, is performed. It is determined whether or not it is the start game of the state (step S1602). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, it means that the bonus state of this time was started in the normal section SC1, so the processing of steps S1603 to S1606 is executed.

Specifically, when the specific bonus flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1603: YES), the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the specific bonus flag is set to " 0” is cleared (step S1604). Then, an advantageous interval start command is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 (step S1605), and lighting processing of the advantageous interval display section 67 is executed (step S1606). In the lighting process, the advantageous section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. When the specific bonus flag is set to "1", as already explained, the current bonus state is triggered by a bonus combination in which there is no set difference in winning probability. That is, in the case of a bonus state corresponding to a bonus combination in which there is no set difference in winning probability, the game in which the bonus state is started even if the game section before the bonus state is the normal section SC1. is set to the advantageous section SC2. Then, by setting the advantageous section SC2 in the game in which the bonus state is started, the processing for providing the player with the profit related to the ART state ST6 after step S1607 is executed. Therefore, the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination in which there is no set difference in the winning probability may be a more advantageous bonus state than the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination in which there is a set difference in the winning probability. It becomes possible.

If it is determined in step S1601 that the advantageous interval flag is set to "1", it is determined whether or not the game state is the bonus state (step S1607). If the process of step S1606 has been performed, or if the determination in step S1607 is affirmative, it is determined whether or not the lottery trigger role has been won in the current game (step S1608). Specifically, if any winning number of "4", "6", "8", and "15" is set in the lottery process (Fig. 14) for the current role, the player wins the lottery trigger role. It is determined that

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1608, an advantageous lottery process is executed (step S1609). In the advantageous lottery process, first, the add-on table in the bonus is read from the main ROM 73 . The addition table in the bonus is common irrespective of the type of the bonus state this time, but at least one of the probability of winning additional winning and the expected number of additional games differs according to the type of bonus state. may be In addition, the addition table in the bonus is common regardless of the type of the lottery trigger role that was won this time, but the probability of winning extra and the game that expects to be added according to the type of the lottery trigger role that was won this time A configuration in which at least one of the numbers is different may be adopted. In addition, the add-on table in the bonus is common between the set values of "1" to "6", but at least one of the add-on winning probability and the add-on expected number of games differs depending on the set value. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which After that, the numerical value information of the random number counter which is periodically updated in the main side RAM 74 is read, and the read numerical value information is collated with the read addition table in the bonus. Thereby, it is specified whether or not the winning is advantageous.

If an advantageous lottery is won in the advantageous lottery process (step S1609) (step S1610: YES), is there an opportunity to shift to the current bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) in the preparation state ST5 or ART state ST6? It is determined whether or not (step S1611). If the opportunity to shift to the current bonus state has not occurred in the preparation state ST5 or the ART state ST6 (step S1611: NO), it is determined whether or not the ART winning flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". Determine (step S1612).

If the determination in step S1611 is affirmative, or if the determination in step S1612 is affirmative, a bonus setting process is executed (step S1613). In the add-on setting process during the bonus, the value of the add-on game number corresponding to the lottery result selected this time is added to the ART game number counter provided in the main side RAM 74 . The ART game number counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST6.

After that, a bonus middle add-on command indicating that the number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 has been added in the bonus state is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1614). Information on the number of additional games that have occurred this time is set in the bonus-in-addition command. The effect side MPU 92 executes the effect indicating that the number of added games selected this time has been awarded by receiving the add-on command during the bonus.

On the other hand, if the gaming state at the timing of winning the bonus combination that triggered the bonus state this time is neither the ready state ST5 nor the ART state ST6, and the ART winning flag is not set to "1" (steps S1611 and Step S1612: NO), the ART winning flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1615), and an ART winning command indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 has been won is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1616). By receiving the ART winning command, the effect side MPU 92 causes the effect indicating that the ART state ST6 will be entered after the bonus state of this time ends is executed in the game of this time.

Next, the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 will be described. First, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 29 again, the processing of steps S1001 to S1011 in the second control processing of the game section will be described.

First, it is determined whether or not the freeze standby flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1001). The freeze standby flag is set to the ending effect until the end of the bonus state when the bonus state is entered in the middle of the ending effect and the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games during the bonus state. This is a flag for specifying that the main MPU 72 is in a state of waiting for freeze setting at the end of .

If the freeze standby flag is set to "1" (step S1001: YES), freeze setting processing is executed (step S1002). The freeze setting process will be described later in detail. If the freeze standby flag is not set to "1" (step S1001: NO), it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". (step S1003). If the advantageous interval flag is set to "1" (step S1003: YES), 1 is added to the value of the advantageous continuation counter in the main RAM 74 (step S1004). After that, ending correspondence processing is executed (step S1005).

FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the ending handling process executed by the main MPU 72. As shown in FIG. Incidentally, the ending correspondence process is executed in step S1005 in the second control process (FIG. 29) of the game section. As already explained, the second control process for the game section is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped rotating in one game. Executed after stopping.

In the ending correspondence process, first, it is determined whether or not the main side ending effect flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1701). The main ending effect flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that the execution period of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 has arrived.

If the main-side ending effect flag is not set to "1" (step S1701: NO), the value of the advantageous continuation counter, which is a counter for measuring the number of continuation games in the advantageous section SC2 in the main-side RAM 74, It is determined whether or not the number is greater than or equal to the number (specifically, "1450") (step S1702). If the determination in step S1702 is affirmative, the sum of the value of the advantage continuation counter in the main RAM 74 and the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 74 is the upper limit number of games in the advantage section SC2 (specifically, "1500"). It is determined whether or not the above is satisfied (step S1703). That is, it is determined whether or not the sum of the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous interval SC2 and the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST6 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous interval SC2.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1703, it means that the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 will reach the upper limit number of games in relation to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST6. In this case, the main side ending effect flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1704).

Thereafter, an ending effect command indicating that the ending effect should be started is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1705). By receiving the ending effect command, the effect side MPU 92 starts the ending effect even if another effect is being executed. Further, information corresponding to the remaining number of games until the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games is set in the ending effect command. As a result, it becomes possible for the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp the remaining number of games until the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games.

Due to the above configuration, when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the ending, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 is the upper limit number of games in relation to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST6. When it is confirmed to reach , it is the execution period of the ending effect. In this case, the execution period of the ending effect is set on the condition that the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more. The bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) generated in ART state ST6 or the preparation state ST5 after the bonus state generated in the middle of ART state ST6 ends.

Returning to the description of the second control process (FIG. 29) for the game section, after the ending handling process is executed in step S1005, the value of the advantageous continuation counter in the main RAM 74 reaches the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2 (specifically, is "1500") (step S1006). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1006, initialization processing for the advantageous section SC2 is executed (step S1007). In the initialization process of the advantageous section SC2, the advantageous section flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Further, in the initialization process of the advantageous section SC2, even if the player stays in either the preparation state ST5 or the ART state ST6, the number of games to be played in the game state (preparation state ST5 or ART state ST6) is stored. By clearing the various data indicating the game state (preparation state ST5 or ART state ST6) including the counter, the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1. After that, the advantageous section display section 67 is switched from the lit state to the unlit state (step S1008). As a result, the notification of the advantageous section SC2 in the advantageous section display section 67 ends.

After that, it is determined whether or not the main side ending effect flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1009). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1009, freeze setting processing is executed (step S1010).

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1009, a forced end command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1011). When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the forced end command, it executes normal effect start setting processing. In the start setting process, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 are caused to execute a normal return effect indicating a return to the normal game state ST1. In addition, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 after the end of the normal return effect.

Next, the freeze setting process executed in step S1002 or step S1010 in the second control process (FIG. 29) of the game section will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Since the second control process for the game section is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped rotating in one game, the freeze setting process is also performed after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped rotating in one game. executed later.

In the freeze setting process, if the freeze standby flag of the main RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S1801: NO), the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games while the ending effect is being executed. means reached. In this case, first, the main side ending effect flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1802). After that, if the gaming state at the timing when the current game is started is BB state ST3 (step S1803: YES), it is determined whether or not the current game is the final game in BB state ST3 (step S1804). If the current game is not the final game in BB state ST3 (step S1804: NO), it is determined whether or not the total number of game media given to the player in BB state ST3 is equal to or less than a specific reference number ( step S1805). The specific reference number is set to a number smaller than the BB end reference number, specifically, the specific reference number is set to "100" which is less than half the BB end reference number.

When the affirmative determination is made in step S1804, or when the affirmative determination is made in step S1805, ending effect setting processing is executed (step S1806). In the ending ending effect setting process, an ending end command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 . The ending ending command is a command for making the effect-side MPU 92 recognize that it is time to end the ending effect. When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the ending command, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the ending effect for a predetermined period (specifically, 15 seconds). In addition, the effect-side MPU 92 generates history configuration data with the reception of the ending end command as a trigger. Details of the history configuration data will be described later. In the ending effect setting processing, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 15 seconds) at the end of the ending is set in the freeze counter of the main RAM 74 . Numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically decremented in the timer subtraction process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). If a value is set in the freeze counter at step S1806, the process waits at step S314 in the normal process (FIG. 13). As a result, the start of a new game is awaited. By executing the ending effect while waiting for the start of a new game in this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the ending effect. The state of waiting in step S314 in the normal processing (FIG. 13) is canceled when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0".

On the other hand, if negative determinations are made in both steps S1804 and S1805, the freeze standby flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" without executing the ending effect setting process (step S1807). If the total given number of game media given to the player in the BB state ST3 is not the final game of the BB state ST3 and is not equal to or smaller than the specific reference number, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games and is advantageous. Even after the initialization process of the section SC2 is executed, the execution of the ending effect in the effect side MPU 92 is extended in the situation of the normal section SC1 and the BB state ST3. Therefore, in such a situation, the freeze setting at the end of the ending effect waits until the timing when the extension of the ending effect ends, that is, until the timing when the BB state ST3 ends. The freeze standby flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that it is in the freeze setting standby state.

If the gaming state at the timing when the current game is started is not the BB state ST3 (step S1803: NO), it is determined whether or not the current game was other than the final game in the RB state ST4 (step S1808). If the current game is not in the RB state ST4, or if the current game is the final game in the RB state ST4 (step S1808: NO), the ending effect setting process is executed (step S1809). In the setting processing of the ending effect, an ending end command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 in the same manner as in step S1806. The ending ending command is a command for making the effect-side MPU 92 recognize that it is time to end the ending effect. When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the ending command, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the ending effect for a predetermined period (specifically, 15 seconds). Also, the effect-side MPU 92 generates history configuration data with the reception of the ending end command as a trigger. Details of the history configuration data will be described later. In the ending effect setting processing, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 15 seconds) at the end of the ending is set in the freeze counter of the main RAM 74 . Numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically decremented in the timer subtraction process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). If a value is set in the freeze counter at step S1806, the process waits at step S314 in the normal process (FIG. 13). As a result, the start of a new game is awaited. By executing the ending effect while waiting for the start of a new game in this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the ending effect. The state of waiting in step S314 in the normal processing (FIG. 13) is canceled when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0".

By executing the ending effect setting processing in each of steps S1806 and S1809 as described above, when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the maximum number of games during the execution period of the ending effect, the game is not in the bonus state, if it is in the bonus state but is the final game in the bonus state, or if the total number of game media given to the player in the BB state ST3 is equal to or less than a specific reference number, A freeze period at the end of the ending occurs at the end of the game. Then, the ending effect is executed during the freeze period at the end of the ending.

If the current game is in the RB state ST4 and is not the final game in the RB state ST4 (step S1808: YES), the freeze standby flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" without executing the ending effect setting process. set (step S1810). When the RB state ST4 is not the final game of the RB state ST4, the normal section is executed even after the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games and the advantageous section SC2 is initialized. In the situation of SC1 and RB state ST4, the execution of the ending effect in the effect side MPU 92 is extended. Therefore, in such a situation, the freeze setting at the end of the ending effect waits until the timing when the extension of the ending effect ends, that is, until the timing when the RB state ST4 ends. The freeze standby flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that it is in the standby state of such freeze setting.

If the freeze standby flag is set to "1" (step S1801: YES), it is determined whether it is the final game in BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 (step S1811). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1811, the state in which the ending effect is extended in this game ends. Therefore, after the freeze standby flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1812), the ending effect setting process is executed (step S1813).

In the ending effect setting process (step S1813), an ending end command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 in the same manner as in steps S1806 and S1809. The ending ending command is a command for making the effect-side MPU 92 recognize that it is time to end the ending effect. When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the ending command, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the ending effect for a predetermined period (specifically, 15 seconds). In addition, the effect-side MPU 92 generates history configuration data with the reception of the ending end command as a trigger. Details of the history configuration data will be described later. In the ending effect setting processing, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 15 seconds) at the end of the ending is set in the freeze counter of the main RAM 74 . Numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically decremented in the timer subtraction process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). If a numerical value is set in the freeze counter at step S1813, the process waits at step S314 in the normal process (FIG. 13). As a result, the start of a new game is awaited. By executing the ending effect while waiting for the start of a new game in this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the ending effect. The state of waiting in step S314 in the normal processing (FIG. 13) is canceled when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0".

Next, prior to the description of the performance execution control in the normal game state ST1, the configuration of the display layer for displaying a picture for one frame of the image display device 63 (FIG. 1) will be described. A picture for one frame on the image display device 63 is displayed by superimposing and synthesizing a plurality of (specifically, eight types) display layers. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the display layers 101-108. As shown in FIG. 38, as display layers for displaying a picture for one frame, a background display layer 101 in which a background image is mainly set, and a first effect display in which images for various effects are set. There are layers 102 to 5th rendering display layer 106 and first notification display layer 107 to second notification display layer 108 in which images for various notifications are set. The background display layer 101 is arranged on the farthest side of the screen. From the background display layer 101 toward the front side of the screen, the first effect display layer 102→second effect display layer 103→third effect display layer 104→fourth effect display layer 105→fifth effect display. Five production display layers 102 to 106 are arranged in the order of layer 106 . Also, two notification display layers 107 to 108 are arranged in the order of the first notification display layer 107→the second notification display layer 108 from the fifth effect display layer 106 toward the front side of the screen. Therefore, the background image is displayed on the farthest side of the screen, the effect image is displayed on the front side of the screen from the background image, and the notification image is displayed on the frontmost side of the screen.

As already explained, the production side MPU 92 outputs to the VDP 95 a drawing list indicating the content of the image to be displayed on the image display device 63 . The VDP 95 follows the drawing list received from the MPU 92 on the production side, the image on the background display layer 101 → the image on the first production display layer 102 → the image on the second production display layer 103 → the image on the third production display layer 104 . These display layers 101 to 108 in the order of →image of the fourth effect display layer 105→image of the fifth effect display layer 106→image of the first notification display layer 107→image of the second notification display layer 108. Display data for one synthesized image generated in such a manner that the images are sequentially superimposed from the back side of the screen toward the front side of the screen is created in the frame area of the video RAM 96 . As already explained, the VDP 95 outputs the image signal for one frame corresponding to the display data created in the frame area to the image display device 63, thereby displaying the image corresponding to the display data on the image display device 63. Let As a result, the image of the background display layer 101, the image of the first effect display layer 102, the image of the second effect display layer 103, the image of the third effect display layer 104, and the image of the fourth effect display layer 105 are displayed. , the image of the fifth effect display layer 106, the image of the first notification display layer 107, and the image of the second notification display layer 108 are generated in such a manner that they are sequentially superimposed from the back side of the screen toward the front side of the screen 1. One composite image is displayed on the image display device 63 as a picture for one frame.

<Regarding the execution control of the effect in the normal game state ST1>
Next, the execution control of the effect in the normal game state ST1 will be explained. In the normal game state ST1, based on the occurrence of the first to sixth opportunities, an effect corresponding to the generated opportunity is performed. First, the first to sixth triggers will be explained. The 1st opportunity to the 6th opportunity are opportunities generated when the production side MPU 92 receives a command from the main side MPU 72 . Specifically, the first trigger is reception of a game start command, and the second trigger is reception of a constant speed rotation start command. The third trigger is reception of a stop instruction command set with information indicating that the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the first stop have been turned on, and the fourth trigger is the stop button corresponding to the second stop. 42 to 44 are set with information indicating that the ON operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been performed. This is reception of a stop instruction command in which information indicating is set. The sixth trigger is reception of an OFF operation command indicating that the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop have been turned OFF.

As already explained, the game start command is a command transmitted in step S416 of the winning lottery process (FIG. 14), and the constant speed rotation start command is a command transmitted in step S603 of the reel control process (FIG. 24). The stop instruction command is a command sent in step S605 of the reel control process (FIG. 24), and the OFF operation command is a command sent in step S717 of the stop operation handling process (FIG. 25). As already explained, the constant-speed rotation start command is transmitted after the game start command is transmitted, and the stop instruction command is transmitted after the constant-speed rotation start command is transmitted. Also, an OFF operation command is transmitted after transmission of stop instruction commands corresponding to the first to third stops. Therefore, the 1st to 6th triggers occur in the order of 1st trigger→2nd trigger→3rd trigger→4th trigger→5th trigger→6th trigger.

In the normal game state ST1, a normal base effect in which a background image corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is displayed and base music is output, and the image display device 63 performs variable display of left symbols, right symbols and middle symbols. A pattern variation effect, an effective notification effect indicating that the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is effective, a left stop effect in which the left pattern that is changing on the image display device 63 stops, and a changing effect on the image display device 63 The right stop effect that the right pattern stops, the reach notification effect that performs reach notification according to the timing when the right symbol stops during fluctuation, and the long press notification that matches the timing when the right symbol stops during fluctuation A push notification effect, a medium stop effect in which the middle pattern in the process of being changed on the image display device 63 stops, a bonus notification effect informing that a bonus winning has occurred, and a first expectation effect informing the degree of expectation of the bonus winning. A second expectation performance for informing the degree of expectation of BB winning when bonus winning occurs and a re-variation performance for re-varying the stopped medium symbols are performed. The left, right, and middle symbols displayed on the image display device 63 in the normal game state ST1 are displayed on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. Aside from the variation, it is performed as an effect indicating the presence or absence of bonus winning and the type of bonus winning.

Of the above-mentioned various effects, the normal base effect, the symbol change effect, the effective notification effect, the left stop effect, the right stop effect, and the middle stop effect are the lottery results of the lottery process (Fig. 14) for the role. Even if it is, it is a production that will be executed. In this embodiment, neither the ready-to-reach notification effect nor the long-press notification effect is performed in correspondence with the right stop effect, or either the reach-to-reach notification effect or the long-press notification effect is performed in response to the right stop effect. There are cases where it is When neither the ready-to-win notification effect nor the long-pressing notification effect is performed in correspondence with the right stop effect, the effect of one game ends when the middle stop effect ends. On the other hand, when either the ready-to-win notification effect or the long-press notification effect is performed in correspondence with the right stop effect, the first expectation effect may be performed after the middle stop effect ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the presence or absence of the effect performed corresponding to the right stop effect and the type of the effect.

When the ready-to-win notification effect is performed in correspondence with the right stop effect, the first expectation effect is performed after the middle stop effect ends, and the effect of one game ends when the middle stop effect ends. be. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the first expectation effect is performed after the end of the middle stop effect. When the ready-to-win notification effect and the first expected effect are performed, there are cases where the bonus notification effect is performed after the first expected effect ends, and when the first expected effect ends, the effect of one game ends. . Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the bonus notification effect is performed after the end of the first expected effect.

When the long press notification effect is performed corresponding to the right stop effect, the first expectation effect is performed after the middle stop effect is finished. After that, there are a case where the second expected effect is performed after the first expected effect is finished, and a case where the effect of one game ends when the first expected effect is finished. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the second expected effect is performed after the first expected effect is finished. When the long press notification effect, the first expected effect and the second expected effect are performed, the case where the re-fluctuation effect is performed after the end of the second expected effect and the occurrence of the bonus winning is announced, and the second expected effect There is a case where the effect of one game ends when the effect ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the re-variation effect is performed after the second expected effect ends.

FIGS. 39(a) to 39(h) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of various effects executed in the normal game state ST1. In the normal game state ST1, when the first opportunity occurs, that is, when the effect side MPU 92 receives the game start command, the normal base effect and the symbol variation effect are started. As already explained, the normal base effect and the pattern variation effect are applied regardless of whether or not bonus winning (1st to 4th BB winnings and 1st to 2nd RB winnings) occurs in the role lottery process (Fig. 14). executed.

As shown in FIG. 39( a ), in the normal bass effect, a background image G<b>4 is displayed on the image display device 63 and normal bass music is output from the speaker 62 . Further, in the symbol variation effect, the variation display of the left symbol, the right symbol and the middle symbol is performed in the left area, the right area and the central area of the image display device 63 . In the pattern variation effect, the left pattern, the right pattern and the middle pattern are displayed to scroll from the upper part of the screen of the image display device 63 toward the lower part of the screen. In the image display device 63, the normal base effect and the symbol variation effect progress at the same time.

The background image G4 is set in the background display layer 101 (FIG. 38). An image showing how the left pattern changes is set in the first effect display layer 102 (Fig. 38), and an image showing how the right pattern changes is set in the second effect display layer 103 (Fig. 38). An image showing how the medium symbols change is set in the third effect display layer 104 (FIG. 38). As already explained, in the display data created by the VDP 95 in the frame area of the video RAM 96, the images of the first effect display layer 102, the second effect display layer 103, and the third effect display layer 104 are displayed in the background display layer. It is set on the front side of the screen from the image of 101 . Therefore, in the image display device 63, the changing left pattern, right pattern and middle pattern are displayed on the front side of the screen rather than the background image G4. While the normal base effect and the pattern variation effect are being executed, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed so that the normal bass music is output, and the light is emitted in a light emission mode corresponding to the normal base effect. Light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is performed.

After that, when the second opportunity occurs, that is, when the effect side MPU 92 receives the constant speed rotation start command, the effective notification effect is started. In the effective notification effect, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed so that the effective notification sound is output to notify that the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is effective. The effective notification effect is simultaneously executed in parallel with the normal base effect and the symbol variation effect. The speaker 62 can output two sounds at the same time, and the normal bass music and the effective notification sound are output at the same time. It is possible to stop the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R by operating the stop buttons 42 to 44 by starting the constant-speed rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R by performing the effective notification effect. Players can be made aware of this.

After that, when the third trigger occurs, that is, when the effect side MPU 92 receives a stop instruction command in which information indicating that the ON operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the first stop is performed, the left A stop performance is performed. As shown in FIG. 39(b), in the left stop effect, the variable display of the left symbol that has been performed in the left area of the image display device 63 is terminated, and one left symbol image G5 is started to be stopped. The left pattern image G5 is set in the first effect display layer 102 (FIG. 38) in which the image showing how the left pattern changes is set, and is displayed closer to the screen than the background image G4. The left pattern image G5 that is statically displayed in the left area of the image display device 63 is an image showing any number "1" to "9". The type of the left symbol image G5 to be stopped and displayed is determined in a left stop effect lottery, which will be described later. In the right area and the central area of the image display device 63, the variable display of the right symbol and the middle symbol is continued even after the stop display of the left symbol image G5 is started. In the left stop effect, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed so that the stop effect sound is output in the left area of the image display device 63 at the timing when the left pattern image G5 stops. As described above, the speaker 62 can output two sounds at the same time, and the normal bass music and the stop effect sound are output at the same time.

After that, when the fourth opportunity occurs, that is, when the effect-side MPU 92 receives a stop instruction command set with information indicating that the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the second stop have been turned on, the right A stop effect is executed. In the right stop effect, the variable display of the right symbol that has been performed in the right area of the image display device 63 is terminated, and the stop display of one right symbol image G6 is started. In the right stop effect, the right symbol image G6 indicating the same number as the number indicated by the left symbol image G5 stops in the right area of the image display device 63, and the ready-to-win state occurs. There is a case where the right symbol image G6 indicating different numbers stops and the ready-to-win state does not occur.

First, the case where the right stop effect is performed in a state in which the ready-to-win state does not occur will be described. When the ready-to-win state does not occur, as shown in FIG. 39(c), in the right stop effect, the variable display of the right symbol that has been performed in the right area of the image display device 63 ends and the left symbol image G5 is different. Stop display of the right pattern image G6 showing numbers is started. As the right pattern image G6, there are 9 types of images representing any of the numerals "1" to "9". The right symbol image G6 is set in the second effect display layer 103 (FIG. 38) in which an image showing how the right symbol changes is set, and is displayed closer to the screen than the background image G4. In the central area of the image display device 63, the variable display of the middle symbol is continued even after the stop display of the right symbol image G6 is started. In the right stop effect, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed so that the stop effect sound is output in the right area of the image display device 63 at the timing when the right pattern image G6 stops. As described above, the speaker 62 can output two sounds at the same time, and the normal bass music and the stop effect sound are output at the same time. When the ready-to-win state does not occur, the ready-to-win notification effect and the long-pressing notification effect are not performed.

After that, when the fifth trigger occurs, that is, when the effect-side MPU 92 receives a stop instruction command set with information indicating that the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop have been turned ON, A stop performance is performed. As shown in FIG. 39(d), in the intermediate stop effect, the variable display of the intermediate symbol that has been performed in the central region of the image display device 63 ends, and the stationary display of the intermediate symbol image G7 is started. The middle pattern image G7 is set in the third effect display layer 104 (FIG. 38) in which an image showing how the middle pattern changes is set, and is displayed closer to the screen than the background image G4. As the medium pattern image G7, there are 9 types of images showing any of the numerals "1" to "9". The type of the medium symbol image G7 to be stopped and displayed is determined in a medium stop effect lottery to be described later. By starting the stop display of the middle pattern image G7, the left pattern image G5, the right pattern image G6 and the middle pattern image G7 are stopped on the image display device 63. FIG. In the middle stop effect, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed so that the stop effect sound is output in accordance with the timing when the middle pattern image G7 is stopped in the center region of the image display device 63. As described above, the speaker 62 can output two sounds at the same time, and the normal bass music and the stop effect sound are output at the same time. When the ready-to-win state does not occur, the effect of one game ends by ending the intermediate stop effect.

On the other hand, when the right stop effect is performed in a manner in which the ready-to-win state occurs, either the ready-to-win notification effect or the long press notification effect is performed in correspondence with the right stop effect. When the ready-to-win state occurs, as shown in FIG. 39(e), in the right stop effect, the number of the left symbol image G5 stopped and displayed in the left area of the image display device 63 ("1" in FIG. 39(e)). ”) and the same number (“1” in FIG. 39(e)) as the right symbol image G6 stops in the right area, thereby generating a ready-to-win state. As in the case where the ready-to-win state does not occur, the right symbol image G6 is set in the second effect display layer 103 (FIG. 38) in which the image showing the variation of the right symbol is set, and is set to the background image G4. displayed in front of the screen.

In the ready-to-win notification effect performed in correspondence with the right stop effect, the speaker 62 sounds the sound of the speaker 62 so that the ready-to-win notification sound "reach" is output in accordance with the timing when the right symbol image G6 stops in the right area of the image display device 63. Output control is performed. The reach notification sound is output from the speaker 62 preferentially over the stop effect sound in the right stop effect. As described above, the speaker 62 can output two sounds at the same time, and the normal bass music and the reach notification sound are output at the same time. In this case, the stop sound effect is not output. By outputting the ready-to-win notification sound, it is possible to make the player recognize that the ready-to-win state in which the numbers indicated by the left pattern image G5 and the right pattern image G6 match has occurred, thereby increasing attention to the performance contents. can. When the bonus notification effect is performed, the ready-to-win notification effect is always performed, but the bonus notification effect is not necessarily performed even if the ready-to-win notification effect is performed.

In the long-press notification effect performed in correspondence with the right stop effect, the long-press notification sound "press and hold" is output in the right area of the image display device 63 at the timing when the right symbol image G6 stops. Sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed. The long press notification sound is output from the speaker 62 preferentially over the stop effect sound in the right stop effect. As described above, the speaker 62 can output two sounds at the same time, and the normal bass music and the long-press notification sound are output at the same time. In this case, the stop sound effect is not output. By outputting the long-press notification sound, it is possible to heighten expectations that the second expected effect may be started by long-pressing the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop. Note that the long-press notification effect is always performed when the second expectation effect is performed, but the second expectation effect is not necessarily performed even if the long-press notification effect is performed.

After that, the middle stop effect is performed based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity. As already explained, in the intermediate stop effect, the variable display of the intermediate symbol that has been performed in the central region of the image display device 63 ends, and the stationary display of the intermediate symbol image G7 is started. In the variable display of the middle pattern, the number displayed in the central area of the image display device 63 increases by one from "1" to "9" in ascending order, and after reaching "9", it returns to "1" (1 → 2 → ... 8 → 9 → 1), and in the middle stop effect when the ready-to-win state occurs, the number one before the number indicated by the left pattern image G5 and the right pattern image G6 is displayed. Stop display of the middle pattern image G7 shown is started. For example, as shown in FIG. 39(f), when the numbers of the left symbol image G5 and the right symbol image G6 are all "1", the number "9", which is one before "1", is displayed in the middle stop effect. The stop display of the middle pattern image G7 showing the numbers is started.

Here, the first expected effect and the second expected effect will be described. In the first expectation effect, the image display device 63 displays an expectation effect image indicating the degree of expectation for bonus winning (first to fourth BB winning and first to second RB winning). In addition, in the second expectation effect, the image display device 63 displays an expectation effect image indicating the degree of expectation of the BB win when the bonus win occurs. FIGS. 40(a) to 40(e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the first expected effect and the second expected effect, and FIG. 40(f) shows the types of the first expected effect and bonus winning. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship with the degree of expectation, and the correspondence relationship between the type of the second expected effect and the degree of expectation for BB winning when bonus winning occurs.

Expected effect images displayed on the image display device 63 in the first expected effect and the second expected effect include a bubble image G8 (FIG. 40(a)), a water stream image G9 (FIG. 40(b)), and a swirl image G10 (FIG. 40(c)), fish school image G11 (FIG. 40(d)), and giant character image G12 (FIG. 40(e)). These expected effect images are displayed on the image display device 63 for 1.5 seconds in the first expected effect and the second expected effect.

As shown in FIG. 40(f), in the first expectation effect, a bubble image G8 or a water stream image G9 is displayed as the expected effect image, indicating that the expectation of bonus winning is low, and By displaying the swirl image G10 or the fish school image G11, it is shown that there is a high degree of expectation for winning the bonus. In addition, by displaying the giant character image G12 as the expected effect image, it is shown that the expectation of winning the bonus is very high. The player can grasp the degree of expectation for bonus winning based on the type of the expected effect image displayed on the image display device 63 in the first expected effect.

In the second expected effect, a bubble image G8 or a swirl image G10 is displayed as an expected effect image to indicate that the expectation of BB winning is low when a bonus win occurs, and a water stream image G9 is displayed as an expected effect image. Alternatively, the fish school image G11 is displayed to indicate that the BB win is highly expected when the bonus win occurs. Also, by displaying the giant character image G12 as the expected effect image, it is shown that the expectation of the BB win is very high when the bonus win occurs. The player can grasp the degree of expectation of BB winning when bonus winning occurs based on the type of the expected effect image displayed on the image display device 63 in the second expected effect.

The type of expected effect image displayed in the first expected effect does not affect the type of expected effect image displayed in the second expected effect, and the type of expected effect image displayed in the second expected effect is the first. It does not affect the kind of expected performance image displayed in the expected performance. Therefore, it is possible to produce a large number (specifically, 25 types) of variations as a combination of the contents of the first expected effect and the second expected effect, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Since there are many combinations of the contents of the effects of the first expected effect and the second expected effect, it is possible to complicate the contents that can be notified to the player. For example, if the giant character image G12 is displayed in the second expected effect after the bubble image G8 is displayed in the first expected effect, the expectation of the bonus win is low, but if the bonus win occurs, It can be shown that the expectation that the bonus win is a BB win that is more advantageous to the player than the RB win is very high. In this case, the player can expect the occurrence of the BB win even though the expectation of the bonus win is low.

Returning to the description of the flow of effects in the normal game state ST1, as shown in FIG. After entering the stopped state, one of five types of expected effect images is displayed on the image display device 63 in the first expected effect. In the first expected effect, a bubble image G8 (FIG. 40(a)), a water flow image G9 (FIG. 40(b)), a swirl image G10 (FIG. 40(c)), a school of fish image G11 (FIG. 40(d)) and The giant character image G12 (FIG. 40(e)) is set in the fourth display layer 105 for effect. As already explained, in the display data created by the VDP 95 in the frame area of the video RAM 96, the image of the fourth effect display layer 105 is composed of the background display layer 101, the first effect display layer 102, and the second effect display layer. 103 and the image of the third effect display layer 104 are set to the front side of the screen. Therefore, regardless of which image is the expected effect image displayed on the image display device 63 in the first expected effect, the expected effect image includes the background image G4, the left symbol image G5, the right symbol image G6, and the middle symbol. It is displayed closer to the screen than the image G7. In the first expectation effect, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed so as to output the first expectation effect sound that makes the player expect the winning of the bonus corresponding to the display of the expectation effect image. As described above, the speaker 62 can output two sounds at the same time, and the normal bass music and the first expected sound effect are output at the same time.

As already explained, the degree of expectation for bonus winning is indicated by the type of expected effect image displayed in the first expected effect. When the swirl image G10 (FIG. 40(c)) or the fish school image G11 (FIG. 40(d)) indicating that the expectation of bonus winning is high in the first expected effect is displayed, the first expected effect ends. A player can be made to recognize in advance that there is a high possibility that a bonus notification performance or a second expected performance will be performed later. Further, when the giant character image G12 (FIG. 40(e)) indicating that the expectation of bonus winning is very high is displayed in the first expected effect, the bonus notification effect or the first expected effect is displayed after the first expected effect ends. 2. The player can be made to recognize in advance that the possibility of performing the expected performance is very high.

The bonus notification effect is started after the end of the first expected effect. In the bonus notification effect, a bonus notification image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 39(g). The bonus notification image G13 is set in the fifth effect display layer 106 (FIG. 38) after the image display device 63 finishes displaying the expected effect image in the first expected effect. As already explained, in the display data created by the VDP 95 in the frame area of the video RAM 96, the images of the fifth effect display layer 106 are the background display layer 101, the first effect display layer 102, the second effect display layer 103 and the image of the third effect display layer 104 are set on the front side of the screen. Therefore, the bonus notification image G13 is displayed closer to the screen than the background image G4, the left design image G5, the right design image G6, and the middle design image G7. In addition, in the bonus notification effect, the speaker 62 is operated to output a confirmation notification sound "bonus confirmed" indicating that the bonus has been won in correspondence with the timing when the bonus notification image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63. Sound output control is performed, and light emission control is performed for causing the upper lamp 61 to emit light in a manner informing that a bonus win has occurred. As described above, the speaker 62 can output two sounds at the same time, and the normal bass music and the confirmation notification sound are output at the same time. Further, in the bonus notification effect, the driving control of the accessory 75 is performed so that the accessory action effect in which the spherical effect portion 77b (FIG. 1) of the accessory 75 operates is performed. The player can be made to recognize that the bonus winning has occurred by performing the bonus notification effect. Details of drive control of the accessory 75 will be described later.

The second expected effect is started when both the condition that the execution period of the first expected effect reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second) and the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs are met. be. As already explained, in the second expected effect, the image display device 63 displays the bubble image G8 (FIG. 40(a)), the water flow image G9 (FIG. 40(b)), the swirl image G10 (FIG. 40(c)), and the school of fish. Either the image G11 (FIG. 40(d)) or the giant character image G12 (FIG. 40(e)) is displayed. Like the expected effect image in the first expected effect, the expected effect image in the second expected effect is set in the display layer 105 for the fourth effect, and includes a background image G4, a left symbol image G5, a right symbol image G6 and a middle symbol image. It is displayed on the front side of the screen from G7. In the second expectation performance, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed so that the second expectation effect sound expected to win the BB is output corresponding to the display of the expectation performance image. As described above, the speaker 62 can output two sounds at the same time, and the normal bass music and the second expected sound effect are output at the same time.

As already explained, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop are turned on, the fifth trigger occurs, and when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are turned off, the sixth trigger is triggered. Opportunity occurs. Also, the first expected effect is started at the timing when the execution period (specifically, one second) of the middle stop effect started based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity ends. When the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop are pressed for a long time according to the long press notification sound output from the speaker 62, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are turned OFF after the first expected effect is completed. , the second expected effect is started based on the occurrence of the sixth opportunity. Further, after the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second), if the sixth opportunity occurs before the first expected performance ends, the sixth opportunity occurs. The second expected performance is started while the first expected performance ends in the middle.

On the other hand, when the period from the occurrence of the fifth opportunity to the occurrence of the sixth opportunity is short, when the sixth opportunity occurs in the middle of the middle stop effect, and when the execution period of the first expected effect is predetermined. It is conceivable that the sixth trigger occurs at a timing that is less than the period (specifically, one second). In these cases, after the occurrence of the sixth opportunity, the second expected effect is started on condition that the execution period of the first expected effect reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second). The second expected effect is not started until the execution period of the first expected effect reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second). 1 second) can be secured.

When the second expected performance is started only on the condition of the occurrence of the sixth opportunity, the second expected performance is started before the first expected performance when the sixth opportunity occurs during execution of the middle stop performance. end up The order of the first expected performance and the second expected performance in a configuration in which the first expected performance indicates the degree of expectation for winning the bonus and the degree of expectation for winning the BB when the bonus winning occurs in the second expected performance is indicated. If the positions are reversed, the player may be confused. Further, if the configuration is such that the second expected effect is started only on the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs, the sixth opportunity will occur in a situation where the execution period of the first expected effect is less than a predetermined period (specifically, one second). If this occurs, there is a risk that the execution period of the first expected effect will become so short that the content of the effect cannot be understood. To address these problems, in the present embodiment, both the condition that the execution period of the first expected effect reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second) and the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs are satisfied. The configuration is such that the second expected effect is started based on the fact that the second expected effect is performed. This makes it possible to prevent the second expected effect from starting earlier than the first expected effect. Also, a predetermined period (specifically, one second) is secured as an execution period of the first expected effect, and the first expected effect can be performed in a manner in which the contents of the effect can be understood.

Returning to the description of the flow of effects in the normal game state ST1, when the second expected effect is executed in a game that is not subject to execution of the re-variation effect, the effect of one game ends when the second expected effect ends. do. On the other hand, in the execution target game of the re-variation effect, the re-variation effect is performed after the second expected effect ends. In this slot machine 10, no bonus notification performance is performed in a game in which a bonus prize is won, and a game started in a state where 5 games have been completed without establishing a bonus winning becomes a game to be executed for re-variation performance. In addition, when the bonus winning is established before the re-variation effect is performed, the re-variation effect is cancelled. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the performance by making the player expect that the re-variation performance will be performed after the second expected performance is finished.

The re-fluctuation effect is started at the timing when the second expected effect ends. In the re-fluctuation effect, as shown in FIG. 39(h), after the variation of the middle symbol stopped and displayed in the central area of the image display device 63 is resumed, the numbers of the left symbol image G5 and the right symbol image G6 ( Stop display of the medium pattern image G7 showing the same number as "1" in FIG. 39(h) is started. By making the image display device 63 have all the numbers indicated by the left pattern image G5, the right pattern image G6 and the middle pattern image G7, the player can be made aware that the bonus winning is confirmed. The variation of the middle symbol in the re-variation effect and the still display of the middle symbol image G7 after the variation are performed in the third effect display layer 104 (FIG. 38) where the middle symbol image G7 was still displayed. Therefore, the medium pattern image G7 after the re-variation is displayed closer to the screen than the background image G4. In the re-fluctuation effect, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed so that the effect sound during the re-fluctuation is output in addition to the normal bass music. As described above, the speaker 62 is capable of outputting two sounds at the same time, and outputs the normal bass music and the re-fluctuation sound effect at the same time. Further, in the re-variation performance, the upper lamp 61 emits light at the timing when the numbers of the left pattern image G5, the right pattern image G6 and the middle pattern image G7 are aligned in the image display device 63 and the occurrence of bonus winning is announced. While the control is executed, the driving control of the accessory 75 is performed so that the accessory action presentation in which the spherical effect portion 77b (FIG. 1) of the accessory 75 operates is started. Details of drive control of the accessory 75 will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the effect-side ROM 93 and the effect-side RAM 94 for executing various effects in the normal game state ST1 will be described. First, the configuration of the rendering-side ROM 93 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 41(a). FIG. 41(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the effect-side ROM 93 for executing various effects in the normal game state ST1. The effect side MPU 92 uses various effect tables pre-stored in the effect side ROM 93 when executing various effects in the normal game state ST1.

The effect side ROM 93 is provided with a normal base effect table storage area 93a. In the slot machine 10, six types of normal base effects with different background images G4 and normal base music exist as normal base effects corresponding to the normal game state ST1, and the normal base effect table storage area. 93a stores six types of normal base effect tables for executing these normal base effects. The normal bass performance table includes address information for display data for displaying the background image G4 on the image display device 63, setting destination information for designating the setting destination of the display data, and normal bass music for speakers. Sound data for outputting from 62 and light emission data for causing the upper lamp 61 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the normal base effect are set. Here, the display data is a data table in which information (display time, enlargement/reduction, display order, etc.) regarding the display mode of individual images such as the background image G4 is set. Information for a plurality of frames regarding the display mode of the individual image is set in the display data, and a series of effects are displayed on the image display device 63 according to the display data. The details of the configuration for displaying the picture of each frame on the image display device 63 according to the display data will be described later.

The effect-side ROM 93 is provided with a symbol variation effect table storage area 93b, and in the symbol variation effect table storage area 93b, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are displayed on the image display device 63. A change performance table is stored. The symbol variation effect table contains display data for varying the left symbol in the left area of the image display device 63, display data for varying the right symbol in the right area, and medium symbols in the central area. address information of display data for performing the variable display and setting destination information of these display data are set.

The effect-side ROM 93 is provided with an effective notification effect table storage area 93c, and an effective notification effect table for performing an effective notification effect is stored in the effective notification effect table storage area 93c. Sound data for outputting the above-described effective notification sound from the speaker 62 is set in the effective notification effect table.

A left stop effect table storage area 93d is provided in the effect side ROM 93, and a left stop effect table for performing a left stop effect is stored in the left stop effect table storage area 93d. As already explained, there are 9 types of left pattern images G5 representing numbers "1" to "9" as images to be stopped and displayed in the left area of the image display device 63 in the left stop effect. The left stop effect table storage area 93d stores 9 types of left stop effect tables for stopping and displaying these 9 types of left symbol images G5. In the left stop effect table, address information of display data for stopping and displaying the left symbol image G5 in the left area of the image display device 63, setting destination information of the display data, and the stop effect sound described above are stored. Sound data to be output from the speaker 62 is set.

A right stop effect table storage area 93e is provided in the effect side ROM 93, and a right stop effect table for performing a right stop effect is stored in the right stop effect table storage area 93e. As already explained, there are 9 types of right symbol images G6 representing any number from "1" to "9" as images to be stopped and displayed in the right area of the image display device 63 in the right stop effect. In the right stop effect table storage area 93e, nine types of right stop effect tables for stopping and displaying these nine types of right symbol images G6 are stored. The right stop effect table contains address information of display data for stopping and displaying the right symbol image G6 in the right area of the image display device 63, setting destination information of the display data, and the aforementioned stop effect sound. Sound data to be output from the speaker 62 is set.

The performance-side ROM 93 is provided with a ready-to-win notification performance table storage area 93f, and a ready-to-reach notification performance table for carrying out the ready-to-win notification performance is stored in the ready-to-reach notification performance table storage area 93f. Sound data for outputting the above-described reach notification sound from the speaker 62 is set in the reach notification effect table.

A long-press notification effect table storage area 93g is provided in the effect-side ROM 93, and a long-press notification effect table for performing a long-press notification effect is stored in the long-press notification effect table storage area 93g. Sound data for outputting the above-described long-press notification sound from the speaker 62 is set in the long-press notification effect table.

The performance side ROM 93 is provided with a medium stop performance table storage area 93h, and a medium stop performance table for performing a medium stop performance is stored in the medium stop performance table storage area 93h. As already explained, there are 9 types of medium pattern images G7 representing any of the numbers "1" to "9" as images to be stopped and displayed in the central area of the image display device 63 in the medium stop effect. The middle stop effect table storage area 93h stores nine kinds of middle stop effect tables for performing stop display of these nine kinds of middle symbol images G7. In the medium stop effect table, address information of display data for performing the stop display of the medium pattern image G7, setting destination information of the display data, and sound for outputting the above-described stop effect sound from the speaker 62 are stored. data and is set.

A first expected effect table storage area 93i is provided in the effect side ROM 93, and a first expected effect table for performing the first expected effect is stored in the first expected effect table storage area 93i. As already described with reference to FIGS. 40(a) to 40(e), the expected effect images displayed on the image display device 63 in the first expected effect include the bubble image G8, the water flow image G9, the swirl image G10, and the school of fish. There are five types of images G11 and giant character images G12, and five types of first expected effect tables for displaying the five types of expected effect images are stored in the first expected effect table storage area 93i. ing. A blank area in which performance data is not set is provided at the beginning of the first expected performance table, and performance execution in which performance data for performing the first expected performance is set after the blank area. area is provided. The blank area is provided over the range of the pointer information corresponding to the period from the occurrence of the fifth opportunity to the end of the middle stop effect. In the effect execution area, as effect data, address information of display data for displaying any expected effect image on the image display device 63, setting destination information of the display data, and the above-described first expected effect image are stored. Sound data for outputting sound effects from the speaker 62 is set. The sound data set in the first expected effect table are different data depending on the type of the expected effect image.

In a game in which the second expectation effect is not performed, the middle stop effect is started based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity, and the first expectation effect is started at the end timing of the middle stop effect. The first expected effect table is read based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity. When the first expected performance table is read out at the end of the intermediate stop performance and the first expected performance is executed immediately after reading, it becomes necessary to provide a configuration for grasping the end of the intermediate stop performance, This complicates the configuration for performing the first expected effect. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a blank area is provided at the beginning of the first expected effect table. This prevents the first expected performance from being performed during the execution of . As a result, it is possible to simplify the configuration for performing the first expected presentation by eliminating the configuration for grasping the end timing of the middle stop presentation.

A performance-side ROM 93 is provided with a bonus notification performance table storage area 93j, and a bonus notification performance table for performing a bonus notification performance after the first expected performance is stored in the bonus notification performance table storage area 93j. There is one type of bonus notification effect. A blank area in which data for performance is not set is provided at the beginning of the bonus notification effect table, and an effect execution area in which data for effect for performing the bonus notification effect is set is provided after the blank area. is provided. The blank area is provided over the range of the pointer information corresponding to the period from the occurrence of the fifth opportunity until the end of the first expected effect. In the effect execution area, as effect data, display data for displaying the bonus notification image G13 on the image display device 63, setting destination information for the display data, and for outputting the determination notification sound from the speaker 62. sound data, light emission data for causing the upper lamp 61 to emit light in a manner indicating that a bonus winning has occurred, and address information of a drive table for executing the performance of the action of the role product are set.

In the game targeted for executing the bonus notification effect, the middle stop effect is started based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity, and the first expectation effect is started at the end timing of the middle stop effect. After that, the bonus notification effect is executed at the end timing of the first expected effect. The bonus notification effect table is read based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity. When the bonus notification performance table is read out with the end of the first expected performance as a trigger and the bonus notification performance is executed immediately after reading, it becomes necessary to provide a configuration for grasping the end of the first expected performance, This complicates the configuration for performing the bonus notification effect. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a blank area is provided at the beginning of the bonus notification effect table. A bonus notification performance is prevented from being performed during execution of the 1-expectation performance. As a result, it is possible to simplify the configuration for performing the bonus notification effect by making the configuration for grasping the end timing of the first expected effect unnecessary.

A second expected performance table storage area 93k is provided in the performance side ROM 93, and a second expected performance table for performing the second expected performance is stored in the second expected performance table storage area 93k. As already described with reference to FIGS. 40(a) to 40(e), the expected effect images displayed on the image display device 63 in the second expected effect include the bubble image G8, the water flow image G9, the swirl image G10, and the school of fish. There are five types of images G11 and giant character images G12, and the effect-side ROM 93 stores five types of second expected effect tables for displaying these five types of expected effect images. The second expected effect table stores address information of display data for displaying one of the expected effect images on the image display device 63, setting destination information of the display data, and the aforementioned second expected effect sound. Sound data for output from the speaker 62 is set. The sound data set in the second expected effect table are different data depending on the type of expected effect image.

A re-variation performance table storage area 93m is provided in the performance-side ROM 93, and a re-variation performance table for performing a re-variation performance is stored in the re-variation performance table storage area 93m. As already explained, in the re-variation effect, after the middle symbols are changed again, nine types of medium symbol images G7 representing any number from "1" to "9" are stopped and displayed in the central region of the image display device 63. , and the effect-side ROM 93 stores 9 types of re-variation effect tables for performing stop display of these 9 types of middle pattern images G7 after re-variation. The re-fluctuation effect table contains address information of display data for re-varying the middle pattern that is stopped in the central area of the image display device 63, setting destination information of the display data, and left after re-fluctuation of the middle pattern. Address information of the display data for stopping and displaying the medium pattern image G7 showing the same number as the number shown by the pattern image G5 and the right pattern image G6, the setting destination information of the display data, and the effect during re-variation Sound data for outputting sound, light emission data for controlling the light emission of the upper lamp 61, and address information of the drive table for executing the performance of the character action are set.

As described above, in the normal game state ST1, a plurality of effects are executed based on the occurrence of the first to sixth opportunities. The number of combinations of the plurality of effects is enormous, and if the effect tables for all combinations are stored in advance in the effect side ROM 93, the storage capacity of the effect side ROM 93 for storing the effect tables is large. increase. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a plurality of individual effect tables for executing various effects are read, and one game effect is performed based on a combination of effect data set in the plurality of effect tables. be. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of executable combinations of effects while suppressing an increase in the storage capacity of the effect-side ROM 93 for storing the effect table.

Next, the configuration of the readout area 94a provided in the effect-side RAM 94 will be described with reference to FIG. 41(b). As already explained, the reading area 94a is an area from which data tables for executing various effects and various notifications are read. FIG. 41(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the effect-side RAM 94 for executing various effects.

As shown in FIG. 41(b), the effect-side RAM 94 is provided with a readout area 94a, and a data table for executing various effects and various notifications is read out from the readout area 94a. LY0 to 11th layer LY11 are provided. The 0th layer LY0 is a layer from which a normal base effect table is read in the normal game state ST1, and the 1st to 8th layers LY1 to LY8 are layers from which data tables for executing various effects are read out. The ninth to tenth layers LY9 to LY10 are layers from which notification tables for executing various notifications are read, and the eleventh layer LY11 is a layer from which a driving table for driving and controlling the accessory 75 is read. .

FIG. 42(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of each layer LYn (n is an integer from 0 to 11). As shown in FIG. 42( a ), each layer LYn includes an effect table, which is a data table for executing effects, a notification table, which is a data table for executing notifications, and drive control of the accessory 75 . A deployment area REn from which any one of the drive tables, which are data tables for execution, is read, and a pointer counter PCn that enables the effecting side MPU 92 to grasp the pointer information of the data table read to the deployment area REn. is provided. In this embodiment, one development area REn is provided in one layer LYn, and only one data table can be read out from the one development area REn at a time.

When it is time to read out the data table for executing various notifications and various effects, the effect-side MPU 92 reads out the data table to the development area REn of the corresponding layer LYn in the read-out area 94a. Then, light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62, display control of the image display device 63, and drive control of the accessory 75 are executed according to the data table read out to each layer LYn of the readout area 94a. do. As a result, various notifications and various effects are executed.

In each data table, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are arranged as serially numbered numerical information. Among the data tables, the effect table and the notification table contain light emission data for controlling the light emission of the upper lamp 61, sound data for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62, and data for controlling the display of the image display device 63. At least one of address information and setting destination information of the display data is set. Driving data for controlling the driving of the accessory 75 is set in the driving table of the data tables. Details of drive control of the accessory 75 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 41(b), the effect-side RAM 94 is set with light emission data set in the pointer information to be referenced in the data table read out to each layer LYn (n is an integer of 0 to 11). a setting area 111 for light emission to be displayed, a setting area 112 for sound output in which sound data set in the pointer information to be referenced is set, and a display specified by the address information set in the pointer information to be referenced A display setting area 113 in which data for display is set is provided. The effect-side MPU 92 performs light emission control of the upper lamp 61 in accordance with the light emission data set in the light emission setting area 111, performs sound output control of the speaker 62 in accordance with sound data set in the sound output setting area 112, The display control of the image display device 63 is performed according to the display data set in the display setting area 113 .

One light emission data is set in the light emission setting area 111 . The effect-side MPU 92 updates the reference target layer LYn in the order of the 0th layer LY0→the first layer LY1→ . The light emission data in the light emission setting area 111 is set. If the light emission data is already set in the light emission setting area 111, after clearing the light emission data, the light emission data set in the data table read out to the current layer LYn to be referenced is set. . Therefore, the light emission data set later remains preferentially in the light emission setting area 111 . After updating the layer LYn to be referred to up to the tenth layer LY10, the effect-side MPU 92 finally controls the light emission of the upper lamp 61 based on the light emission data remaining in the light emission setting area 111. FIG.

As already explained, the normal base effect table is read out to the 0th layer LY0, the data tables for executing various effects are read out to the 1st to 8th layers LY1 to LY8, and the 9th to 9th layers are read out. A data table for executing various notifications is read out from ten layers LY9 to LY10. Therefore, in the light emission setting area 111, light emission data are set in the order of light emission data for normal base effect→light emission data for various effects→light emission data for notification. As a result, the light emission data for various effects are preferentially set in the light emission setting area 111 over the light emission data for normal base effects, and the light emission data for various effects are notified. The light emission data for use is preferentially set in the light emission setting area 111 .

The pointer information to be referenced in the data table read out to the 0th to 10th layers LY0 to LY10 indicates whether or not the light emission control of the upper lamp 61 has been performed based on the light emission data set in the data table. Regardless, it is updated at the update timing. For example, even when the light emission data for notification is given priority over the light emission data for normal base effect and the light emission data for various effects, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is performed based on the light emission data for notification, The reference target pointer information in the normal base effect table and the effect tables for various effects is updated.

In the data table for executing effects in each game, the number ("n") of the layer LYn to be read increases as the timing of reading is later. Therefore, when a plurality of effect data tables are read and a plurality of light emission data exist, the light emission data set in the effect data table read later is the first. has priority over the light emission data set in the data table for effect read out. For example, the light emission data set in the medium stop effect table read out on the fifth layer LY5 has priority over the light emission data set in the normal base effect table read out on the 0th layer LY0. be done.

Next, sound output from the speaker 62 will be described. FIG. 42(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the sound output setting area 112. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 42(b), the sound output setting area 112 includes a bass area 112a in which sound data for normal bass effects are set, and an effect area 112a in which sound data for various effects are set. 112b and a notification area 112c in which sound data for various notifications is set. One sound data can be set in each of the base area 112a, the performance area 112b, and the notification area 112c.

The effect-side MPU 92 updates the reference target layer LYn in the order of the 0th layer LY0→the first layer LY1→ . The sound data stored in the audio output setting area 112 are set in the corresponding areas 112a to 112c.

Specifically, the effect-side MPU 92 sets the sound data in the bass area 112a when sound data is set in the normal bass effect table read out in the 0th layer LY0 of the readout area 94a. Then, when sound data is set in various effect tables read out on the first to eighth layers LY1 to LY8, the sound data is set in the effect area 112b, and the ninth to tenth layers LY9 to When sound data is set in various notification tables read out in LY10, the sound data is set in the notification area 112c.

If sound data is already set in the setting destination areas 112a to 112c, after clearing the sound data, the data table read to the current reference target layer LYn (n=0 to 10) The set sound data is set in the setting destination areas 112a to 112c. In the range of n=1 to 8 where the effect data table is read out, the sound data of the effect data table read out to the layer LYn is given priority as the number (“n”) of the layer LYn increases. It is set in the effect area 112b. In each game, the effect data table is read in such a manner that the later the read timing of the data table, the larger the number ("n") of the layer LYn. Therefore, the sound data set in the data table for effect read later is preferentially set in the effect area 112b. In the range of n=9 to 10 where the data table for notification is read out, the sound data in the data table for notification read out to the layer LYn is prioritized as the number (“n”) of the layer LYn increases. is set in the notification area 112c. The data table for notification is read in such a manner that the number ("n") of the layer LYn increases as the reading timing of the data table is delayed. Therefore, the sound data set in the data table for notification read later is preferentially set in the notification area 112c.

After updating the reference target layer LYn up to the tenth layer LY10, the production side MPU 92 finally controls the sound output of the speaker 62 based on the sound data remaining in the areas 112a to 112c of the sound output setting area 112. I do. Specifically, when sound data is set in the notification area 112c, the speaker 62 outputs sound based only on the sound data in the notification area 112c. The pointer information of the normal base effect table and various effect tables is updated even when the notification table is read in the 9th to 10th layers LY9 to LY10, but when sound output for notification is performed , sound output for normal bass effects and sound output for various effects are not performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from becoming difficult to hear due to the sound for the normal bass effect and the sound for various effects.

On the other hand, when sound data is not set in the notification area 112c, the speaker 62 outputs sound based on the sound data set in the base area 112a and the performance area 112b. When sound data is set in both the bass area 112a and the effect area 112b, the sound for normal bass effect and the sound for effect are output at the same time. When sound data is set only in the area 112a for bass, only sound for normal bass effect is output, and when sound data is set only in the effect area 112b, sound for effect is output. Only the sound of is output.

Next, display control in the image display device 63 will be described. The image display device 63 performs display control based on a plurality of display data set in the display setting area 113 . FIG. 42(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the display setting area 113. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 42(c), the display setting area 113 includes a background area 113a in which background display data is set, and a first effect area 113a in which display data for various effects are set. 113b to fifth effect area 113f, and first notification area 113g to second notification area 113h in which display data for notification are set are provided.

As already explained, there are eight display layers 101 to 108 (FIG. 38) as display layers for displaying a picture for one frame on the image display device 63, and pictures for one frame are displayed on these layers. It is displayed by synthesizing the images set in layers 101-108. Areas 113a to 113h in the display setting area 113 are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the display layers 101 to 108, respectively. The background area 113a is an area in which the display data of the image set in the background display layer 101 is set, and the first effect area 113b is the display data of the image set in the first effect display layer 102. is set, the second effect area 113c is an area in which display data for the image set in the second effect display layer 103 is set, and the third effect area 113d is for the third effect This is an area in which the display data of the image set in the display layer 104 is set, and the fourth effect area 113e is an area in which the display data of the image set in the fourth effect display layer 105 is set. , the fifth effect area 113f is an area in which the display data of the image set in the fifth effect display layer 106 is set, and the first notification area 113g is set in the first notification display layer 107. This is an area in which image display data is set, and the second notification area 113h is an area in which image display data set in the second notification display layer 108 is set.

In the normal game state ST1, display data for displaying the background image G4 is set in the background area 113a. In addition, the display data for displaying the image showing the variation of the left symbol and the left symbol image G5 are set in the first effect area 113b, and the image showing the variation of the right symbol and the right symbol image G6 are displayed. Display data for display is set in the second effect area 113c, and display data for displaying an image showing how the middle pattern changes, the middle pattern image G7, and an image showing how the middle pattern changes again. Data is set in the third effect area 113d. Also, the water flow image G9, swirl image G10, fish shoal image G11, and giant character image G12 in the first expected effect and the second expected effect already described with reference to FIGS. 40(a) to 40(e) are displayed. Display data for is set in the fourth effect area 113e. Furthermore, display data for displaying the bonus notification image G13 already described with reference to FIG. 39(g) is set in the fifth effect area 113f.

As already explained, the production side MPU 92 outputs to the VDP 95 a drawing list indicating the content of the image to be displayed on the image display device 63 . The VDP 95 follows the drawing list received from the MPU 92 on the production side, the image on the background display layer 101 → the image on the first production display layer 102 → the image on the second production display layer 103 → the image on the third production display layer 104 . These display layers 101 to 108 in the order of →image of the fourth effect display layer 105→image of the fifth effect display layer 106→image of the first notification display layer 107→image of the second notification display layer 108. Display data for one synthesized image generated in such a manner that the images are sequentially superimposed from the back side of the screen toward the front side of the screen is created in the frame area of the video RAM 96 . Then, the VDP 95 outputs an image signal for one frame corresponding to the display data generated in the frame area to the image display device 63, thereby causing the image display device 63 to display an image corresponding to the display data.

In the data table read out to the 0th to 10th layers LY0 to LY10, the pointer information in which the address information of the display data is set indicates that the display data is set to any one of the areas 113a to 113h of the display setting area 113. Setting destination information that specifies whether to read is set. When the address information and the setting destination information of the display data are set in the pointer information to be referenced, the effect-side MPU 92 specifies the display data based on the address information, and transfers the specified display data to the setting destination information. is set in one of the areas 113a to 113h of the display setting area 113 designated by .

When areas 113a to 113h in which display data have already been set in the display setting area 113 are specified as setting destinations, the effect-side MPU 92 clears the already set display data and restores the current reference target. The display data set in the pointer information is set in the areas 113a to 113h. Therefore, the display data whose setting trigger occurs later is preferentially set in each of the areas 113a to 113h than the display data whose setting trigger occurs first.

Specifically, when both the condition that the execution period of the first expected effect reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second) and the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs, the fourth effect After the display area 113e is cleared, display data for the second expected effect is set in the fourth effect area 113e. In this case, when the display data for the first expected effect is set in the fourth effect area 113e, the display data for the second expected effect is set instead of the display data. Become. As a result, it is possible to end the first expected effect and start the second expected effect. Further, when the execution period of the first expected effect (specifically, 1.5 seconds) has ended and the display data for the first expected effect has not been set in the fourth effect area 113e, , display data for the second expected effect is set and the second expected effect is started.

Thus, in the display setting area 113, the area in which the display data for the second expected effect is set is the same area as the area in which the display data for the first expected effect is set (for the fourth effect). By setting the area 113e), it is possible to start the second expected effect while making it unnecessary for the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp the progress of the first expected effect. Further, when the second expected performance is started in the middle of the first expected performance, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for aligning the end timing of the first expected performance with the start timing of the second expected performance. It has become. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent occurrence of overlapping periods between the execution period of the first expected performance performed earlier and the execution period of the second expected performance to be started later. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display contents of the image display device 63 from becoming too complicated.

Since the display data setting destination information is set in the effect table, the effect table is set in the display setting area 113 even when the layer LYn from which the effect table is read out in the readout area 94a changes. It is possible to prevent fluctuations in the areas 113a to 113h in which the displayed display data are set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting destination of the display data in the display setting area 113 from changing due to the change in the layer LYn from which the effect table is read, and also to prevent the image displayed on the image display device 63 from changing. It is possible to prevent the anteroposterior relationship from changing.

Next, the manner of reading the effect table in the normal game state ST1 will be described. First, the mode of reading the effect table when neither the bonus notification effect nor the re-variation effect is to be executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 43(a) to 43(d).

None of the bonus notification effect, the second expected effect, and the re-variation effect are executed, and the numbers of the left symbol image G5 and the numbers of the right symbol image G6 do not match in the right stop effect lottery, which will be described later. , no reach condition occurs. In this case, as shown in FIG. 43(a), one of the six normal base effect tables is read out to the 0th layer LY0 based on the occurrence of the first opportunity, and the symbol variation effect table is read to the 0th layer LY0. It is read out to one layer LY1. After that, the effective notification effect table is read to the second layer LY2 based on the occurrence of the second opportunity. After that, one of the nine types of left stop effect tables is read to the third layer LY3 based on the occurrence of the third opportunity, and one of the nine types of right stop effect tables is read to the third layer LY3 based on the occurrence of the fourth opportunity. It is read out to the 4th layer LY4, and based on the occurrence of the 5th opportunity, any one of the 9 kinds of middle stop effect tables is read out to the 5th layer LY5.

Pointer information to be referenced in each layer LYn (n is any integer from 0 to 11) is updated without being affected by other layers LYn. Therefore, each effect executed according to the effect table read out to each layer LYn is executed in parallel. Specifically, the normal base effect executed according to the normal base effect table read out on the 0th layer LY0 is the symbol executed according to the effect table read out on the first to fifth layers LY1 to LY5. To proceed in parallel with the progress of a variable performance, an effective notification performance, a left stop performance, a right stop performance, and a middle stop performance without being affected by the progress of these performances.

On the other hand, when the lottery results in which the number of the left symbol image G5 and the number of the right symbol image G6 match in the right stop effect lottery, which will be described later, a ready-to-win state occurs. In this case, if the lottery result is that the first expected effect is not performed in the first expected effect lottery at the time of failure, which will be described later, the read mode of the effect table based on the occurrence of the fourth and fifth opportunities is changed. This is different from the case of FIG. 43(a). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 43(b), based on the occurrence of the fourth opportunity, one of the nine types of right stop effect tables is read to the fourth layer LY4, and the ready-to-win notification effect table is read to the fourth layer LY4. 5 is read out to layer LY5. Then, based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity, one of the nine types of middle stop effect tables is read out to the sixth layer LY6. As already explained, sound data for outputting a stop effect sound is set in the right stop effect table, and sound data for outputting a reach notification sound is set in the reach notification effect table. Since the number ("5") of the fifth layer LY5 from which the reach notification effect table is read is greater than the number ("4") of the fourth layer LY4 from which the right stop effect table is read, the sound output setting area 112 Sound data for outputting a ready-to-win notification sound is preferentially set in the effect area 112b. Therefore, in this case, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed so that the ready-to-win notification sound is output in accordance with the right stop effect, and the stop effect sound is not output.

When one of the first expected effects is won in the first expected effect lottery at the time of loss, which will be described later, the reading mode of the effect table based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity is different from the case of FIG. 43(b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 43(c), based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity, one of the nine types of medium stop effect tables is read out to the sixth layer LY6, and five types of first expectation Any one of the effect tables is read to the seventh layer LY7.

If the second expectation effect execution target game is not the re-variation effect execution target game, the symbol change effect table, the effective notification effect table, the left stop effect table, the right stop effect table, the long press notification effect table, and the middle A first combined effect table including the contents of the stop effect table, the first expected effect table, and the second expected effect table is generated. In this case, as shown in FIG. 43(d), one of the six normal base effect tables is read out to the 0th layer LY0 based on the occurrence of the first opportunity, and the first synthesized effect table is It is read out to the first layer LY1. These effects are sequentially executed according to the first synthetic effect table. Note that the first synthetic effect table will be described later.

Next, the mode of reading the effect table in the case where the bonus notification effect or the re-variation effect is to be executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 44(a) and 44(b). If any bonus winning (either 1st to 4th BB winnings or 1st to 2nd RB winnings) occurs in the role lottery process (Fig. 14), the announcement lottery process (bonus announcement process (FIG. 50) step 2203) is performed. When winning the bonus notification effect in the notification lottery process, the reading mode of the effect table based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity is different from the case of FIG. 43(c). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44(a), one of the nine kinds of medium stop effect tables is read out to the sixth layer LY6 based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity, and five kinds of the first expected effect are displayed. One of the tables is read out on the seventh layer LY7, and the bonus notification effect table is read out on the eighth layer LY8.

On the other hand, in the notification lottery process (step S2311 of the effect content determination process (FIG. 51)) to be described later, the re-variation effect is won, and after that, 5 games are digested without the bonus winning being established, and the re-variation effect is executed. When it becomes a game, in addition to the first expected effect, the second expected effect and the re-variation effect are performed. In this case, a symbol variation effect table, an effective notification effect table, a left stop effect table, a right stop effect table, a long press notification effect table, a middle stop effect table, a first expected effect table, and a second A second composite effect table is generated that includes the contents of the 2-expected effect table and the re-fluctuation effect table. In this case, as shown in FIG. 44(b), based on the occurrence of the first trigger, one of the six normal base effect tables is read to the 0th layer LY0, and the second synthesized effect table is It is read out to the first layer LY1. These effects are sequentially executed according to the second synthetic effect table. Note that the second synthetic effect table will be described later.

As described above, when the first synthetic effect table and the second synthetic effect table are not generated, the various effect tables for executing various effects are individually placed on different layers LYn (n is 0 to 8) in the readout area 94a. One game progresses by executing various effects in parallel according to various effect tables. Further, when the first synthesized effect table or the second synthesized effect table is generated, the normal base effect executed according to the normal base effect table read out on the 0th layer LY0 and the normal base effect executed on the first layer LY1 Various effects executed according to the read first synthetic effect table or the second synthetic effect table are executed in parallel to progress the effects of one game.

When the first composite effect table is generated, the symbol change effect table, the effective notification effect table, the left stop effect table, the right stop effect table, the ready-to-win notification effect table, the intermediate stop effect table, and the second The contents of the first expected effect table and the second expected effect table are read out to one layer LYn (specifically, the first layer LY1), and when the second synthesized effect table is generated, the symbol variation effect is performed. A table, an effective notification effect table, a left stop effect table, a right stop effect table, a long press notification effect table, a middle stop effect table, a first expected effect table, a second expected effect table, and a re-fluctuation. The contents of the effect table are read out to one layer LYn (specifically, the first layer LY1). As a result, the maximum number of effect tables read out in one game in the readout area 94a is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of layers LYn in the readout area 94a.

As shown in FIG. 41(a), the effect-side ROM 93 is provided with a synthesis table storage area 93n. A table and a second synthesizing table for generating a second synthesizing effect table are stored. The first synthesis effect table is a symbol variation effect table, an effective notification effect table, a left stop effect table, a right stop effect table, a ready-to-win notification effect table, and a middle stop effect table, in addition to the first synthesis table. , and the data for effects set in the first expected effect table and the second expected effect table are generated. In addition, the second synthesizing effect table includes a symbol variation effect table, an effective notification effect table, a left stop effect table, a right stop effect table, a long press notification effect table, and a middle press effect table. It is generated by setting performance data set in a stop performance table, a first expected performance table, a second expected performance table, and a re-varying performance table.

Here, taking the second synthesized effect table as an example, the contents of the synthesized effect table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the second synthetic effect table. In addition, in the first synthetic effect table, the effect data of the ready-to-reach notification effect table is set instead of the effect data of the long-press notification effect table, and the effect data of the re-fluctuation effect table is not set. It is different from the second synthetic effect table.

In the second synthesizing table, the pointer information of "0" to "w" are set so as to be serial numbers. Update information is set for information. Specifically, the update information includes a jump condition for jumping the value of the pointer counter PCn (FIG. 42(a)) to the pointer information of the jump destination in one processing of the pointer update processing (FIG. 48), which will be described later. , a jump destination to be set in the pointer counter PCn when the jump condition is satisfied, and an update condition for updating the value of the pointer counter PCn by adding 1 to it.

When the second synthesis effect table (Fig. 45) is generated, the area of pointer information "0" to "p" in the second synthesis table contains address information and setting destination information of display data in the symbol variation effect table. is set, sound data in the effective notification effect table is set in the area of pointer information "p+1" to "q", and display data in the left stop effect table is set in the area of pointer information "q+1" to "r" Data address information, setting destination information, and sound data are set.

Address information and setting destination information of display data in the right stop effect table, and sound data in the long press notification effect table are set in the areas of "r+1" to "s" of the pointer information. Sound data in the right stop effect table is not set in the areas of "r+1" to "s" of the pointer information. Therefore, when the second synthesized effect table is generated, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed so that the long press notification sound is output in accordance with the right stop effect instead of the stop effect sound.

Address information, setting destination information, and sound data of display data in the middle stop effect table are set in the areas of "s+1" to "t" of the pointer information. Address information, setting destination information, and sound data of display data in the effect execution area of the first expected effect table are set in the areas of "t+1" to "u" of the pointer information. The blank area provided at the beginning of the first expected effect table is not set in the second synthesized effect table. Address information, setting destination information, and sound data of display data in the second expected effect table are set in the area of pointer information 'u+1' to 'v', and the area of pointer information 'v+1' to 'w' is set. Address information of display data, setting destination information, sound data, light emission data, and address information of the driving table in the re-fluctuation effect table are set in . Note that the first synthetic effect table does not have an area of pointer information "v+1" to "w".

There is one type of second synthetic effect table stored in the effect-side ROM 93, and the second synthetic effect table uses the one type of effect data set in each effect table to be executed in each game. It is created by setting it in the second synthesis table. Also, the first synthesis table stored in the effect-side ROM 93 is of one kind, and the first synthesis effect table stores effect data set in each effect table to be executed in each game. Created by setting in the first synthesis table of the type. Since the types of the first synthesis table and the second synthesis table, which are stored in advance in the effect side ROM 93 in order to generate the first synthesis effect table and the second synthesis effect table, are respectively one type, the synthesis table The storage capacity of the performance-side ROM 93 for storing is reduced.

The pointer information of the first synthetic effect table or the second synthetic effect table read out to the first layer LY1 is updated by pointer update processing (FIG. 48) described later. As shown in FIG. 45, in the second synthetic effect table, pointer information of "0" to "p" in which data for effect of symbol variation effect is set is displayed as a jump condition. A condition that it is one of "p" and a condition that the second trigger occurs are set, and "p+1" is set as jump destination pointer information. In addition, an update condition of "occurrence of the second trigger at p" is set for the area. In this case, until both the condition that the pointer information is one of "1" to "p" and the condition that the second trigger occurs are satisfied, the pointer information is updated by 1 at a cycle of 40 milliseconds. , and the pattern variation production progresses. When the symbol variation effect is started, the display data for performing the variable display of the left symbol is set in the first effect area 113b of the display setting area 113, and the display data for performing the variable display of the right symbol. is set in the second effect area 113c, and the display data for performing the variable display of the medium pattern is set in the third effect area 113d of the display setting area 113. FIG. In the image display device 63, the variable display of the left pattern, the right pattern and the middle pattern is performed according to these display data. In the image display device 63, the background image G4 is also displayed according to the display data set in the background area 113a of the display setting area 113. FIG. The display of the background image G4 is continuously performed regardless of the update mode of the pointer information to be referred to in the second synthetic effect table (FIG. 45).

If the pointer information of the reference target is updated to "p" without the occurrence of the second trigger, the pointer information remains "p" until the update condition that the second trigger occurs is met. Pointer information is no longer updated. In this case, in the image display device 63, the variable display of the left pattern, the right pattern and the middle pattern is continued according to the display data set in the first to third performance areas 113b to 113d of the display setting area 113. .

If both the condition that the pointer information is any one of "1" to "p" and the condition that the second trigger occurs, one process of the pointer update process (FIG. 48) described later is performed. In each round, the pointer information to be referenced is updated to the jump destination "p+1", and the effective notification effect is started. Specifically, when the second trigger occurs in a situation where the pointer information is any one of "1" to "p", or when the pointer information is any of "1" to "p" after the second trigger occurs. If so, the pointer information to be referenced is updated to the jump destination "p+1", and the effective notification effect is started.

In the area of the pointer information "p+1" to "q" in which the data for the effect of the effective notification effect is set, the condition that the pointer information is any one of "p+2" to "q" as the jump condition and the A condition that 3 triggers occur is set, and "q+1" is set as jump destination pointer information. In addition, an update condition of "occurrence of the third trigger at q" is set for the area. In this case, until both the condition that the pointer information is one of "p+2" to "q" and the condition that the third trigger occurs are satisfied, the pointer information is updated by 1 at a cycle of 40 milliseconds. , and the effective notification effect progresses. In the effective notification effect, the sound data of the effective notification sound set in the areas "p+1" to "q" is set in the effect area 112b of the sound output setting area 112, and the sound data is output from the speaker 62. be.

When the pointer information to be referenced is updated to "q" without the occurrence of the third trigger, the sound output of the valid notification sound is terminated, and the third trigger occurs with the pointer information being "q". The pointer information to be referenced is not updated until the update condition is satisfied. In this case, the image display device 63 continues to variably display the left, right and middle symbols in accordance with the display data set in the display setting area 113 .

If both the condition that the pointer information is any one of "p+2" to "q" and the condition that the third trigger occurs, one process of the pointer update process (FIG. 48) described later is performed. In the first round, the pointer information to be referenced is updated to the jump destination "q+1", and the left stop effect is started. Specifically, when the third trigger occurs in a situation where the pointer information is any of "p+2" to "q", or when the pointer information is any of "p+2" to "q" after the third trigger occurs. If so, the pointer information to be referenced is updated to the jump destination "q+1", and the left stop effect is started. When the third trigger occurs and the pointer information is updated to "q+1" in the situation where the effective notification effect is being executed (the situation where the pointer information is any of "p+2" to "q-1"), it is effective. The sound data for the notification effect is no longer set in the effect area 112b (FIG. 42(b)) of the sound output setting area 112, and the effective notification effect ends. When the left stop effect is started, the display data for performing the variable display of the left symbol is deleted, and the display data for performing the stop display of the left symbol image G5 is set to the first position in the display setting area 113. It is set in the effect area 113b.

In the area of the pointer information "q+1" to "r" in which the data for the effect of the left stop effect is set, the condition that the pointer information is any one of "q+2" to "r" as the jump condition and the 4 is set, and "r+1" is set as jump destination pointer information. In addition, an update condition of "occurrence of the fourth trigger at r" is set for the area. In this case, until both the condition that the pointer information is one of "q+2" to "r" and the condition that the fourth trigger occurs are satisfied, the pointer information is updated by 1 at a cycle of 40 milliseconds. , and the left stop effect progresses. In the left stop effect, the sound data of the stop sound effect set in the area of the pointer information "q+1" to "r" is set in the effect area 112b of the sound output setting area 112, and the sound data is output to the speaker 62. output from

If the pointer information to be referenced is updated to "r" without the fourth trigger occurring, the output of the stop sound effect ends, and the fourth trigger occurs with the pointer information "r". The pointer information to be referenced is not updated until the update condition is satisfied. In this case, the image display device 63 continues the stop display of the left symbol image G5 and the variable display of the right and middle symbols according to the display data set in the display setting area 113 .

If both the condition that the pointer information is any one of "q+2" to "r" and the condition that the fourth trigger occurs, one process of the pointer update process (FIG. 48) described later is performed. At the time, the pointer information to be referenced is updated to the jump destination "r+1", and the right stop effect and the long press notification effect are started. Specifically, when the fourth trigger occurs in a situation where the pointer information is any of "q+2" to "r", or when the pointer information is any of "q+2" to "r" after the fourth trigger occurs. If so, the pointer information to be referenced is updated to the jump destination "r+1", and the right stop effect and the long press notification effect are started. In the situation where the left stop effect is being executed (the situation where the pointer information is any of "q+2" to "r-1"), if the fourth trigger occurs and the pointer information is updated to "r+1", the left The stop effect sound data is no longer set in the effect area 112b (FIG. 42(b)) of the sound output setting area 112, and the left stop effect ends. When the right stop effect is started, the display data for performing the variable display of the right symbol is deleted, and the display data for performing the stop display of the right symbol image G6 is set to the second position in the display setting area 113. It is set in the effect area 113c.

Pointer information is provided as a jump condition in the area of pointer information "r+1" to "s" in which the address information and setting destination information of the display data for the right stop effect and the sound data for the long press notification effect are set. A condition that it is any one of "r+2" to "s" and a condition that the fifth trigger occurs are set, and "s+1" is set as jump destination pointer information. In addition, an update condition of "occurrence of the fifth trigger in s" is set for the area. In this case, until both the condition that the pointer information is one of "r+2" to "s" and the condition that the fifth trigger occurs, the pointer information is updated by 1 at a cycle of 40 milliseconds. Then, the right stop effect and the long press notification effect progress. In the long-press notification effect, the sound data of the long-press notification sound set in the area of the pointer information "r+1" to "s" is set in the effect area 112b of the sound output setting area 112, and the sound data is set in the effect area 112b. Output from the speaker 62 .

When the pointer information to be referenced is updated to "s" without the occurrence of the fifth trigger, the output of the long-press notification sound ends, and the fifth trigger occurs with the pointer information "s". The pointer information to be referenced is not updated until the update condition is satisfied. In this case, the image display device 63 continues the stop display of the left symbol image G5 and the right symbol image G6 and the variable display of the middle symbol according to the display data set in the display setting area 113 .

When both the condition that the pointer information is any one of "r+2" to "s" and the condition that the fifth trigger occurs, one process of the pointer update process (FIG. 48) described later is performed. In each round, the pointer information to be referenced is updated to the jump destination "s+1", and the middle stop effect is started. Specifically, when the fifth trigger occurs in a situation where the pointer information is any one of "r+2" to "s", or when the pointer information is any of "r+2" to "s" after the fifth trigger occurs. If so, the pointer information to be referenced is updated to the jump destination "s+1", and the middle stop effect is started. In the situation where the right stop effect and the long press notification effect are being executed (the situation where the pointer information is any of "r+2" to "s-1"), the fifth trigger occurs and the pointer information is updated to "s+1". In this case, the sound data for the long-press notification effect is no longer set in the effect area 112b (FIG. 42(b)) of the sound output setting area 112, and the long-press notification effect ends. When the medium stop effect is started, the display data for performing the variable display of the medium design is deleted, and the display data for performing the stop display of the medium design image G7 is set to the third position in the display setting area 113. It is set in the effect area 113d.

Jump conditions, jump destinations, and update conditions are not set in the areas of pointer information 's+1' to 't' in which effect data for middle stop effects are set. Therefore, in this area, regardless of whether or not the fifth trigger occurs, the pointer information to be referenced is updated by 1 every 40 milliseconds, and the medium stop effect progresses. In the middle stop production, the sound data of the stop sound effect set in the area of the pointer information "s+1" to "t" is set in the production area 112b of the sound output setting area 112, and the sound data is output to the speaker 62. output from Then, when the pointer information of the reference destination is updated to "t+1", the middle stop effect is terminated and the first expectation effect is started. Thus, the first expected effect is started at the end timing of the intermediate stop effect. Even when the sixth trigger occurs before the pointer information is updated to "t+1", the pointer information to be referenced does not jump. Therefore, even if the sixth opportunity occurs while the middle stop effect is being executed, the middle stop effect is executed to the end. Also in this case, the first expected effect is started at the end of the middle stop effect. Display data for displaying expected effect images (bubble image G8, water flow image G9, swirl image G10, fish school image G11, or giant character image G12) in the first expected effect when the first expected effect is started. is set in the fourth effect area 113e of the setting area 113 for display. The display data is deleted from the fourth effect area 113e when the execution period of the first expected effect (specifically, 1.5 seconds) has passed.

In the area of the pointer information 't+1' to 'u' in which the data for the effect of the first expected effect is set, a condition that the pointer information is any one of 't+26' to 'u' as a jump condition; A condition that the sixth trigger occurs is set, and "u+1" is set as jump destination pointer information. In addition, an update condition of "occurrence of the 6th trigger in u" is set for the area. In this case, until the pointer information to be referenced reaches "t+26", the pointer information is updated by 1 every 40 milliseconds even if the sixth trigger occurs, and the first expected effect proceeds. A period required from the start of the first expected effect until the pointer information to be referred to is updated to "t+26" is one second. After that, until both the condition that the pointer information is any one of "t+26" to "u" and the condition that the sixth trigger occurs, the pointer information is updated by 1 at a cycle of 40 milliseconds. , the continuation of the first expected performance proceeds. In the first expected effect, the sound data of the first expected sound effect set in the area of pointer information "t+1" to "u" is set in the effect area 112b of the sound output setting area 112, and the sound data is output from the speaker 62 .

If the pointer information to be referenced is updated to "u" without the occurrence of the sixth trigger, the output of the first expected sound effect ends, and the sixth trigger occurs while the pointer information is "u". The pointer information to be referenced is not updated until the update condition of doing is satisfied. When the pointer information to be referenced is updated to "u", that is, when the execution period of the first expected effect (specifically, 1.5 seconds) ends, the image display device 63 displays the expected effect image (bubble The display of the image G8, the water flow image G9, the swirl image G10, the fish school image G11, or the giant character image G12) ends. In the image display device 63, the left symbol image G5, the right symbol image G6 and the middle symbol image G7 are continuously displayed according to the display data set in the display setting area 113. FIG.

The second expected effect is started when the update condition that the sixth opportunity occurs in a state where the pointer information to be referenced is "u" is satisfied. Further, when both the condition that the pointer information is any one of "t+26" to "u" and the condition that the sixth trigger occurs, pointer update processing (FIG. 48) described later is executed. In one processing, the pointer information to be referenced is updated to the jump destination "u+1", and the second expectation effect is started. Specifically, when the sixth trigger occurs in a situation where the pointer information is any of "t+26" to "u", or when the pointer information is any of "t+26" to "u" after the sixth trigger occurs. If so, the pointer information to be referenced is updated to the jump destination "u+1", and the second expectation effect is started. When the display data for the first expected effect remains in the fourth effect area 113e of the display setting area 113 at the start of the second expected effect, the display data is deleted. Display data for displaying expected effect images (bubble image G8, water flow image G9, swirl image G10, fish school image G11, or giant character image G12) in the second expected effect is stored in the fourth effect area 113e. set.

In this way, the second expected effect satisfies both the condition that the execution period of the first expected effect reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second) and the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs. is started when As a result, the period from the ON operation to the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop is short, and the execution period of the first expected effect reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second). Even if the sixth opportunity occurs at the timing of , a predetermined period (specifically, one second) can be secured as the execution period of the first expected effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution period of the first expected effect from becoming so short that the content of the first expected effect cannot be understood. Also, the period from the ON operation to the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop is long, and the timing after the execution period of the first expected effect reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second). When the sixth opportunity occurs in , the second expected effect can be started without delay based on the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42-44. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate by associating the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop with the start of the second expected effect in a manner that is easy for the player to understand. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Jump conditions, jump destinations, and update conditions are not set in the areas "u+1" to "v" of the pointer information in which the effect data for the second expected effect is set. Therefore, in the area, the pointer information to be referenced is updated by 1 at a cycle of 40 milliseconds, and the second expected effect progresses. In the second expected effect, the sound data of the second expected sound effect set in the area of pointer information "u+1" to "v" is set in the effect area 112b of the sound output setting area 112, and the sound data is output from the speaker 62 . Then, when the pointer information of the reference destination is updated to "v+1", the second expected effect is terminated and the re-fluctuation effect is started. Thus, the re-fluctuation effect is started at the end timing of the second expected effect. When the re-variation effect is started, the display data for performing the stop display of the medium symbols is deleted, and the display data for performing the re-variation display of the medium symbols is displayed in the third effect of the display setting area 113. is set in the use area 113d.

Jump conditions, jump destinations, and update conditions are not set in the areas of pointer information 'v+1' to 'w' in which effect data for re-variation effects are set. Therefore, in the area, the pointer information to be referenced is updated by 1 at a cycle of 40 milliseconds, and the re-fluctuation effect progresses. In the re-fluctuation effect, the sound data set in the area of "v+1" to "w" of the pointer information is set in the effect area 112b of the sound output setting area 112, and the sound data is output from the speaker 62. . Further, the light emission data set in the area of pointer information "v+1" to "w" is set in the light emission setting area 111 (FIG. 41(b)), and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61 based on the light emission data is performed. done. Furthermore, the drive table of the accessory 75 specified by the address information of the drive table set in the area of pointer information "v+1" to "w" (specifically, the pointer information of "w") is read out. It is read out to the eleventh layer LY11 of the area 94a, and the performance of the role product action is executed according to the driving table. In addition, the details of the performance of the role product action will be described later.

In the re-variation effect execution target game, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop are turned OFF and the sixth opportunity is generated, the freeze counter in the main side RAM 74 is generated. Numerical information corresponding to the period from when the re-variation effect is completed is set. Numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically decremented by the timer subtraction process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). 13) waits in step S314. Therefore, during the execution period of the second expected effect in which the pointer information to be referred is "u+1" to "v" and the execution period of the re-variation effect in which the pointer information to be referred is "v+1" to "w" Even if the start lever 41 is operated to start the next game in , the game is not started based on the operation, and the re-variation effect can be executed to the end. A processing configuration that allows the main side MPU 72 to grasp the period from the occurrence of the sixth opportunity to the end of the re-variation effect will be described later.

In this embodiment, when the pointer information of the data table is updated up to the final pointer information and the repeat information is not set for the final pointer information, the layer LYn from which the data table is read is cleared. be. Specifically, the expansion area REn and the pointer counter PCn (FIG. 42(a)) of the layer LYn from which the data table is read are cleared.

As shown in FIG. 45, repeat information is not set to "w" which is the final pointer information of the second synthetic effect table. Therefore, when the pointer information to be referenced is updated to "w" and the re-fluctuation effect ends, the first layer LY1 from which the second synthetic effect table is read is cleared. On the other hand, the 0th layer LY0 from which the normal base effect table is read is not cleared, and the normal base effect based on the normal base effect table is continued.

As already explained, the normal base effect table for executing the normal base effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is the first layer LY1 from which the first synthesized effect table or the second synthesized effect table is read. are read out to a different 0th layer LY0. Even if the pointer information to be referenced in the first layer LY1 jumps, it does not affect the pointer information to be referenced in the 0th layer LY0. Therefore, while the background image G4 and the output of the normal bass music are continuously executed in the normal bass effect, it is possible to start these effects in correspondence with the occurrence of the 1st to 6th chances. It has become.

In the first effect area 113b of the display setting area 113, display data for starting the variable display of the left pattern at the timing when the second synthetic effect table is read out to the first layer LY1 is set and referred to. When the target pointer information is updated to "q+1", the display data is cleared and the display data for starting the stop display of the left pattern image G5 is set. As already explained, an image is set in the first effect display layer 102 based on the display data set in the first effect area 113b. Therefore, in the left area of the image display device 63, the variable display of the left symbol is started based on the occurrence of the first trigger, and the variable display of the left symbol is finished based on the occurrence of the third trigger, and the left symbol image G5 is displayed. stop display is started.

In the second effect area 113c in the display setting area 113, display data for starting the variable display of the right symbol at the timing when the second synthetic effect table is read out to the first layer LY1 is set and referred to. When the target pointer information is updated to "r+1", the display data is cleared and the display data for starting the stop display of the right symbol image G6 is set. As already explained, an image is set in the second effect display layer 103 based on the display data set in the second effect area 113c. Therefore, in the right area of the image display device 63, the variable display of the right symbol is started based on the occurrence of the first trigger, and the variable display of the right symbol is terminated based on the occurrence of the fourth trigger, and the right symbol image G6 is displayed. stop display is started.

In the third effect area 113d in the display setting area 113, display data for starting the variable display of medium symbols at the timing when the second synthetic effect table is read out to the first layer LY1 is set and referred to. When the target pointer information is updated to "s+1", the display data is cleared and the display data for starting the stop display of the middle pattern image G7 is set. After that, when the pointer information is updated to "v+1", the display data is cleared, and after the middle pattern is changed again, the middle pattern image G7 showing the same number as the left pattern image G5 and the right pattern image G6 is displayed. Display data for static display is set. Therefore, in the central region of the image display device 63, the variable display of the medium symbols is started based on the occurrence of the first opportunity, and the variable display of the medium symbols is finished based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity, and the medium symbol image G7 is displayed. stop display is started. After that, after the second expected effect performed based on the occurrence of the sixth opportunity, the re-variation display of the middle symbols is started. After that, a middle pattern image G7 showing the same number as the left pattern image G5 and the right pattern image G6 is started to be stopped.

In the fourth effect area 113e of the display setting area 113, display data for displaying the expected effect image of the first expected effect when the pointer information to be referenced is updated to "t+1" is set. . Thereafter, display data for displaying the expected effect image of the second expected effect when the pointer information to be referenced is updated to "u+1" is set. When the display data for the first expected effect remains in the fourth effect area 113e at the timing when the pointer information to be referenced is updated to "u+1", the display data is cleared and the second effect is displayed. Display data for the expected effect is set. Therefore, the sixth opportunity occurs at a timing after the execution period of the first expected effect reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second) and at a timing before the end of the first expected effect. In this case, the first expected effect ends halfway and the second expected effect starts. As a result, the execution period of the first expected performance is secured over a predetermined period (specifically, one second), and the second expected performance is started without delay when the sixth opportunity occurs. It is possible to

As already explained, the address information of the display data and the setting destination information of the display data are set in the data table such as the effect table. As a result, a synthetic effect table (first synthetic effect table or second synthetic effect table) is generated, and the synthetic effect table is read into one layer LYn (specifically, first layer LY1) in the readout area 94a. 113b to 113e in the display setting area 113, the respective display data set in the synthetic effect table are displayed in the display setting area 113 as in the case where the synthetic effect table is not generated. It is possible to set either This prevents the setting destination of the display data from changing depending on whether or not the synthetic effect table (first synthetic effect table or second synthetic effect table) is generated. This prevents the front-rear relationship of the images to be changed.

Next, how the second expected effect is started based on the second synthetic effect table will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 46(a) shows the execution period of the second expected effect, FIG. 46(b) shows the execution period of the re-fluctuation effect, FIG. 46(c) shows the execution period of the medium stop effect, and FIG. 46(d). ) indicates the execution period of the first expected effect, FIG. 46(e) shows the timing when the execution period of the first expected effect reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second), and FIG. The generation timing of the 5th opportunity is shown, and FIG. 46(g) shows the generation timing of the 6th opportunity.

First, the case where the sixth opportunity occurs after the execution period of the first expected effect reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second) will be described.

When the fifth opportunity occurs at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 46(f), the area (pointer The jump condition set in the information "r+1" to "s") is satisfied, and the pointer information to be referenced jumps to "s+1". As a result, the middle stop effect is started at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 46(c). As already explained, the fifth trigger is when the effect-side MPU 92 receives a stop instruction command in which information indicating that the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop have been turned ON has been performed. Occur. After that, the pointer information to be referenced is updated to "t+1" at the timing of t2. As a result, at the timing t2, the middle stop effect ends as shown in FIG. 46(c), and the first expected effect starts as shown in FIG. 46(d).

After that, at the timing of t3, the execution period of the first expected effect reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second) as shown in FIG. 46(e). At the timing of t3, the pointer information to be referenced is updated to "t+26". After that, after the execution period of the first expected effect has been performed for a predetermined period (specifically, one second), at the timing of t4 when the first expected effect is being executed, FIG. As shown in , the sixth opportunity occurs. In addition, as already explained, the sixth opportunity is generated when the effect-side MPU 92 receives the OFF operation command. Since the sixth trigger occurs at the timing of t4, both the condition that the pointer information to be referenced is any one of "t+26" to "u" and the condition that the sixth trigger occurs are satisfied. , the pointer information to be referenced jumps to "u+1", which is the jump destination. As a result, at the timing t4, the first expected effect ends as shown in FIG. 46(d), and the second expected effect starts as shown in FIG. 46(a). After that, the pointer information to be referenced is updated to "v+1" at the timing of t5. As a result, at the timing t5, the second expected effect ends as shown in FIG. 46(a), and the re-fluctuation effect starts as shown in FIG. 46(b).

In this way, when the sixth opportunity occurs after the execution period of the first expected effect reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second), the second expected effect occurs at the timing of occurrence of the sixth opportunity. be started. As described above, when the sixth opportunity occurs during the execution of the first expected effect in a situation where the execution period of the first expected effect has reached a predetermined period (specifically, one second), the Based on the occurrence of the 6 opportunity, the first expected performance is ended and the second expected performance is started. Further, as already explained, when the sixth opportunity occurs after the first expected effect ends, the second expected effect is started based on the occurrence of the sixth opportunity.

Therefore, when the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop is performed after the execution period of the first expected effect has reached a predetermined period (specifically, one second), the delay is eliminated. The second expectation effect can be started at the timing when the OFF operation is performed without causing the second expectation effect. As a result, the player can be made to feel that the second expected effect has started with the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop. In this case, the player long presses the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop, and then performs the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 while expecting the second expected effect to occur. Become. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Next, a case where the sixth opportunity occurs before the execution period of the first expected effect reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second) will be described.

At the timing of t6, the pointer information to be referred to in the second synthetic effect table (FIG. 45) is updated to "t+1". As a result, at the timing t6, the middle stop effect ends as shown in FIG. 46(c), and the first expected effect starts as shown in FIG. 46(d). After that, at timing t7 when the pointer information to be referenced is in the range from "t+1" to "t+25", the sixth trigger occurs as shown in FIG. 46(g). The timing of t7 is the timing when the execution period of the first expected effect has not reached a predetermined period (specifically, one second). Since the condition that the pointer information to be referenced is any one of "t+26" to "u" is not satisfied, even if the sixth trigger occurs, the jump condition is not satisfied and the pointer information to be referenced is jumped. do not do. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46(a), the second expected effect is not started at the timing of t7.

After that, at the timing t8, the pointer information to be referenced is updated to "t+26", and at the timing t8, as shown in FIG. seconds). As a result, both the condition that the pointer information to be referenced is any one of "t+26" to "u" and the condition that the sixth trigger occurs are satisfied, and the pointer information to be referenced is at the jump destination. Jump to some "u+1". As a result, at the timing t8, the first expected effect ends as shown in FIG. 46(d), and the second expected effect starts as shown in FIG. 46(a).

In this way, when the sixth opportunity occurs before the execution period of the first expected effect reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second), the execution period of the first expected effect is set to the predetermined period. (specifically, one second), the second expected effect is started. As a result, it is possible to secure the execution period of the first expected effect for at least a predetermined period (specifically, one second). As already explained, the fifth trigger is generated by turning ON the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop, and the sixth trigger is generated by turning OFF the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop. Occur. Also, the first expected effect is started at the timing when the middle stop effect started based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity ends. If the second expected effect is started only on the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs, there is a risk that the second expected effect will start before the first expected effect, and the execution period of the first expected effect will be extended. There is a risk that it will be too short to understand the contents of the production. In addition, in the configuration in which the degree of expectation for bonus winning is indicated in the first expectation performance and the degree of expectation for BB winning in the case where bonus winning occurs in the second expectation performance, the first expectation performance and the second expectation performance are provided. If the order of is reversed, the player may be confused. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, at least a predetermined period (specifically, one second) is secured as the execution period of the first expected effect. As a result, it is possible to execute the two expected effects in the order of the first expected effect → the second expected effect, and for a period (specifically, one second) that makes it possible to understand the content of the effect. It is possible to start the second expectation performance after executing the first expectation performance. By executing both the first expected performance and the second expected performance in such a manner that the content of the performance can be understood, the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the effect execution processing executed by the effect side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The effect execution process is a process for executing various effects and various notifications based on the data table read to each layer LYn (n is an integer from 0 to 11) of the readout area 94a. It is executed in the side MPU 92 as an interrupt process that is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds).

In the effect execution process, first, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the pointer information (step S1901). As already explained, the update timing of the pointer information occurs every 40 milliseconds. If it is time to update the pointer information (step S1901: YES), pointer update processing is executed to update the pointer information of the data table read to the read area 94a (step S1902). Details of the pointer update process will be described later.

Thereafter, the value of the target layer counter 114 (FIG. 41(b)) provided in the readout area 94a of the effect-side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1903). The target layer counter 114 is a counter that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp the current target layer to be set among the 0th to 11th layers LY0 to LY11 of the readout area 94a. By clearing the value of the target layer counter 114 to "0" in step S1903, the current target layer becomes the 0th layer LY0. After that, the light emission setting area 111 in the effect side RAM 94 and the base area 112a, effect area 112b and notification area 112c in the sound output setting area 112 are cleared (step S1904).

After that, the current target layer is grasped based on the value of the target layer counter 114, and it is determined whether or not the data table has been read to the grasped current target layer (step S1905). If the data table has been read to the target layer (step S1905: YES), data setting processing is executed (step S1906).

In the data setting process in step S1906, if light emission data is set for the current pointer information to be referenced, the light emission data is set for light emission after clearing the light emission setting area 111 (FIG. 41(b)). Set in area 111. As already explained, the light emission setting area 111 can set only one light emission data. The higher the number (“n”) of the layer LYn, and the later the layer LYn becomes the target layer, the more the light emission data of the data table read out for the layer LYn is finally set in the light emission setting area 111. It becomes easy to become light emission data. As already explained, the light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is performed based on the light emission data finally set in the light emission setting area 111 . The priority of the light emission data increases as the number (“n”) of the layer LYn increases. For this reason, the priority of light emission data for various effects is higher than the priority of light emission data for normal base effects, and the priority of light emission data for notification is higher than the priority of light emission data for various effects. has a higher priority.

In the data setting process in step S1906, if sound data is set for the current pointer information to be referenced, the sound output setting area 112 (FIG. 42(b)) corresponds to the value of the target layer counter 114. The sound data is set in areas 112a to 112c. Specifically, when the value of the target layer counter 114 is "0", the sound data is set in the base area 112a after clearing the base area 112a, and the value of the target layer counter 114 is set to "1". If the value of the target layer counter 114 is any of "9" to "10", the sound data is set in the effect area 112b after clearing the effect area 112b. In some cases, the sound data is set in the notification area 112c after clearing the notification area 112c. As already explained, since the eleventh layer LY11 is a layer from which the drive table of the accessory 75 is read, no sound data is set in the eleventh layer LY11.

As already explained, two sounds can be output from the speaker 62 at the same time. is output, and when sound data is set in the bass area 112a and the effect area 112b (FIG. 42(b)), the normal bass music sound and the effect sound are output at the same time. . On the other hand, when sound data is set in the notification area 112c (FIG. 42(b)), no sound is output based on the sound data set in the base area 112a and the effect area 112b. , only the notification sound set in the notification area 112c is output.

As already explained, only one sound data can be set in each of the areas 112a to 112c of the sound output setting area 112. FIG. In the range of n=1 to 8, the higher the number (“n”) of the layer LYn and the later the layer LYn becomes the target layer, the more the sound data of the effect table read out to the layer LYn is rendered. The sound data finally set in the use area 112 b is likely to be output, and the sound data is likely to be output from the speaker 62 . Further, in the range of n=9 to 10, the larger the number (“n”) of the layer LYn and the later the layer LYn becomes the target layer, the more the layer LYn is set in the notification table read out for the layer LYn. The sound data set in the notification area 112c is likely to be the sound data finally set in the notification area 112c, and the sound data is likely to be output from the speaker 62. FIG.

In the data setting process in step S1906, if the display data address information and setting destination information are set for the current pointer information to be referenced, the setting destination is set in the display setting area 113 (FIG. 42(c)). Areas 113a to 113h specified by the information are cleared. Then, the display data stored in the effect-side ROM 93 is specified based on the address information, and the specified display data is set in the areas 113a to 113h specified by the setting destination information. For this reason, in each area 113a to 113h, the display data set in the previously read effect table (the effect table read to the layer LYn with the smaller number ("n")) is displayed later than the display data. The display data set in the read effect table (the effect table read to the layer LYn with the larger number ("n")) is preferentially set. As already described, the display setting area 113 is provided with a background area 113a, first to fifth effect areas 113b to 113f, and first to second notification areas 113g to 113h. An image is set in the background display layer 101 based on the display data set in the background area 113a, and the first image is set based on the display data set in the first to fifth effect areas 113b to 113f. Images are set in the display layers 102 to 106 for the fifth effect, and based on the display data set in the first and second notification areas 113g to 113h, the first and second notification display layers 107 to 108 image is set to By stacking and synthesizing these display layers 101 to 108, display data for displaying a picture for one frame on the image display device 63 is created.

After the data setting process is performed in step S1906, the setting process for driving the character product (FIG. 76(a)) is performed (step S1907). In the role product drive setting process, when the address information of the drive table of the role product 75 is set for the pointer information to be referenced, the relevant Read drive table. Details of the character product driving setting process (FIG. 76(a)) will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S1905, or if the processing of step S1907 is performed, it is determined whether or not the value of the target layer counter 114 is "10" (step S1908). If the value of the target layer counter 114 is not "10" (step S1908: NO), the target layer is updated by adding 1 to the value of the target layer counter 114 (step S1909), and the process returns to step S1905. Then, the processing of steps S1905 to S1909 is repeated until an affirmative determination is made in step S1908. As a result, data setting processing ( Step S1906) and setting processing for accessory driving (step S1907) can be performed. As already explained, the 0th layer LY0 to the 10th layer LY10 store at least one of light emission data, sound data, display data address information and setting destination information, and address information of the drive table of the accessory 75. While the data table in which one is set is read out, only the driving table of the accessory 75 is read out in the eleventh layer LY11. Therefore, the processing of steps S1905 to S1909 is executed until the value of the target layer counter 114 becomes "10", and when the value of the target layer counter 114 becomes "10" (step S1908: YES), Proceed to step S1910. Note that the process for controlling the drive of the role product 75 based on the drive table read out to the eleventh layer LY11 (the role product drive control process) is performed in step S1915.

If a negative determination is made in step S1901, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1908, it is determined whether or not the calculation completion flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" ( step S1910). The calculation completion flag is used for various types of calculation processing (background calculation processing in step S2107, effect calculation processing in step S2110, and notification calculation processing in step S2113) for creating a drawing list in the display control processing (FIG. 49) described later. ) is executed once, respectively. If the calculation completion flag is set to "1" (step S1910: YES), the calculation completion flag is cleared to "0" (step S1911). On the other hand, if the calculation completion flag is not set to "1" (step S1910: NO), the delay flag provided in the effect-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1912). The in-delay flag is set by various arithmetic processing (background arithmetic processing in step S2107, effect arithmetic processing in step S2110, and notification arithmetic processing in step S2113) for creating a drawing list in the display control processing (FIG. 49) described later. ) is completed, the effect-side MPU 92 can grasp that the current interrupt process has occurred.

After performing the process of step S1911 or step S1912, light emission control process is performed (step S1913). In the light emission control process, light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed based on the light emission data set in the light emission setting area 111 . Light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed based on one light emission data set in the light emission setting area 111 .

After that, sound output control processing is executed (step S1914). In the sound output control process, it is determined whether sound data is set in the notification area 112c in the sound output setting area 112, and if sound data is set in the notification area 112c, the notification area is set. The sound output control of the speaker 62 is executed so that only the sound based on the sound data set in 112c is output from the speaker 62. FIG. On the other hand, when sound data is not set in the notification area 112c and sound data is set in both the base area 112a and the effect area 112b, sound based on the two sound data are output from the speaker 62 at the same time. Further, when sound data is not set in the notification area 112c, and sound data is set in only one of the base area 112a and the effect area 112b, the sound data is based on the sound data. Sound output control of the speaker 62 is executed so that only sound is output from the speaker 62. - 特許庁

After that, role product drive control processing (FIG. 76(b)), which will be described later, is executed (step S1915), and the present effect execution processing is terminated.

Next, the pointer update processing executed by the effect side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. Note that the pointer update process is executed in step S1902 of the effect execution process (FIG. 47) when it is determined that it is time to update the pointer information (step S1901: YES). As already explained, the update timing of the pointer information occurs every 40 milliseconds.

In the pointer update process, first, the value of the target layer counter 114 in the readout area 94a of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2001). As a result, the target layer is set to the 0th layer LY0. After that, if the data table has been read to the current target layer (step S2002: YES), it is determined whether or not the current pointer information to be referenced is the final pointer information (step S2003).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, it is determined whether or not repeat information is set for the final pointer information to instruct returning the pointer information to be referenced to predetermined numerical information ( step S2004). The repeat information includes numerical information indicating pointer information of the repeat start position. If repeat information is set for the last pointer information (step S2004: YES), repeat handling processing is executed (step S2005). In the repeat handling process, based on the repeat information, numerical information indicating the pointer information of the repeat start position is set in the pointer counter PCn (FIG. 42(a)) of the target layer. As a result, the pointer information to be referenced returns to the repeat start position.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2004 that the repeat information is not set, flag clear processing (FIG. 66(a)), which will be described later, is executed (step S2006), and the current target layer is cleared (step S2007). ). Specifically, in step S2007, the expansion area REn and pointer counter PCn (FIG. 42(a)) of the target layer are cleared.

If it is determined in step S2003 that the pointer information to be referenced has not been updated to the last pointer information, it is determined whether or not a jump condition is set for the pointer information to be referenced (step S2009). If a jump condition is set (step S2009: YES), it is determined whether or not the jump condition is satisfied (step S2010). Then, if the jump condition is satisfied (step S2010: YES), a pointer counter PCn setting process is executed (step S2011).

In the setting processing of the pointer counter PCn in step S2011, the pointer information of the jump destination set in the data table corresponding to the jump condition is set in the pointer counter PCn. As a result, the pointer information to be referenced in the data table jumps to the jump destination value in one processing of this pointer update processing (FIG. 48).

For example, in the second synthetic rendering table shown in FIG. 45, when the condition that the pointer information to be referenced is any one of "t+26" to "u" and the condition that the sixth trigger occurs, In the current processing of this pointer update processing (FIG. 48), the pointer information to be referenced jumps to "u+1", which is the jump destination. Thereby, when the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second), the second expected performance can be started based on the occurrence of the sixth opportunity.

If it is determined in step S2009 that the jump condition is not set for the pointer information to be referenced, or if it is determined in step S2010 that the jump condition is not satisfied, the pointer information to be referenced is updated. It is determined whether or not a condition is set (step S2012). If the update condition is set (step S2012: YES), it is determined whether the update condition is satisfied (step S2013).

If it is determined in step S2012 that the update condition is not set, or if it is determined in step S2013 that the update condition is satisfied, the value of the pointer counter PCn in the target layer is incremented by 1. The target pointer information is updated (step S2014). On the other hand, if an update condition is set for the pointer information to be referenced (step S2012: YES) and the update condition is not satisfied (step S2013: NO), the value of the pointer counter PCn is changed. The processing of step S2014 for adding 1 is not performed.

For example, in the second synthetic effect table shown in FIG. 45, in a situation where the pointer information to be referenced is "q", the third trigger does not occur and the update condition set in the pointer information is not satisfied. In this case, the pointer information to be referenced is not updated to "q+1" until the update condition is satisfied. This prevents the left stop effect from being started before the ON operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the first stop is performed.

When a negative determination is made in step S2002, when the process of step S2005 is performed, when the process of step S2008 is performed, when the process of step S2011 is performed, when a negative determination is performed in step S2013, or If the process of step S2014 has been performed, it is determined whether or not the value of the target layer counter 114 is "11" (step S2015). If the value of the target layer counter 114 is not "11" (step S2015: NO), the target layer is updated by adding 1 to the value of the target layer counter 114 (step S2016), and the process returns to step S2002. Then, the processing of steps S2002 to S2016 is repeatedly executed until an affirmative determination is made in step S2015. As a result, while updating the target layer in the reading area 94a in the order of the 0th layer LY0→the first layer LY1→ . It is possible to update the pointer information of the reference target of the data table. Further, when the pointer information to be referenced in the 0th to 11th layers LY0 to LY11 has been updated to the final pointer information, and repeat information is not set for the final pointer information, the data The layer LYn whose table is being read can be cleared.

On the other hand, if the value of the target layer counter 114 is "11" (step S2015: YES), it means that the processing for updating the pointer information for all layers LY0 to LY11 has ended. End the update process.

Next, the display control processing executed by the effect side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. Note that the display control process is executed at the end of the interrupt process that is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the effect-side MPU 92 .

In the display control process, first, it is determined whether or not the output standby flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2101). The output standby flag indicates that the creation of the drawing list is finished before the VDP 95 receives the image update completion signal indicating that the output of the image signal for one frame has been completed, and the output of the drawing list from the production side MPU 92 to the VDP 95 is stopped. This is a flag that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp that it is in a waiting state. When outputting an image signal for one frame to the image display device 63, the VDP 95 starts outputting the image signal from a dot in the upper left corner of the display surface of the image display device 63, and then outputs the image signal to a horizontal line including the dot at one end. Image signals are sequentially output to dots arranged on a line, and image signals are sequentially output to dots from left to right for each horizontal line. Finally, an image signal is output for the dot in the lower right corner of the display surface. In this case, the VDP 95 outputs an image update completion signal to the production side MPU 92 at the timing of outputting the image signal for the last dot, and makes the production side MPU 92 recognize that the update of the image of one frame is completed. .

If it is determined in step S2101 that the output standby flag is not set to "1", it is determined whether or not the delay flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2102). In the display control process, various arithmetic processes such as a background arithmetic process (step S2107), an effect arithmetic process (step S2110), and a notification arithmetic process (step S2113), which will be described later, are executed. In this case, the period required for executing various arithmetic processing varies depending on the number of individual images to be displayed on the image display device 63, the type of individual images, and the display mode of the individual images. The individual image is one still image defined by still image data such as background data, or one sprite defined by sprite data such as design sprite data. As a result of fluctuations in the period required for execution of various types of arithmetic processing, the timing for starting the next processing round of the interrupt processing may come before the execution of all arithmetic processing in the display control processing is completed. In the present slot machine 10, when the timing for starting the next processing round of the interrupt processing comes while the display control processing is being executed, the display control processing is not continued as it is, but the interrupt processing is newly executed. It is configured to start a new processing cycle. However, when starting a new processing cycle of the interrupt processing, the calculation result of the display control processing at that time is stored and held, and the calculation processing is started from the middle of the calculation in the display control processing in the interrupt processing of the new processing cycle. is restarted, the arithmetic processing for one update timing is not left unexecuted. When the delay flag is set to "1", the execution of various arithmetic processing (the processing of steps S2107, S2110 and S2113) in the display control processing is temporarily interrupted and delayed as described above. Situation means.

If the delay flag is not set to "1" (step S2102: NO), setting processing for starting control is executed (step S2103). In the control start setting process, first, based on the display data set in the display setting area 113 in the effect-side RAM 94, it is determined whether or not there is an individual image to be the control start target in the current process. judge. If it exists, the effect-side RAM 94 is searched for an empty buffer area for performing various calculations in controlling the individual image, and the individual image grasped as the control start target is searched for one-to-one. Allocate a free buffer area to support it. Further, initialization processing is executed for all the reserved empty buffer areas, and parameter information for starting control corresponding to the individual image is set for the initialized empty buffer areas.

In the following step S2104, update processing of the controlled object is executed. In the control target update process, an individual image for which the setting process for starting control in step S2103 has been completed and which is included in one frame of picture after the current process is grasped as a control target. Further, in the control target update process, based on the display data set in the display setting area 113, individual images to be deleted among the individual images recognized as control targets are excluded from the control targets. Then, initialization processing is performed on the buffer area reserved for the excluded individual image.

After that, in step S2105, new activation of interrupt processing is permitted, and in step S2106, immediately after, new activation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and then background arithmetic processing is executed (step S2107). In the background calculation process, parameter information necessary for setting information about the image of the background display layer 101 (FIG. 38) in the drawing list is calculated and derived. Specifically, based on the display data set in the background area 113a of the display setting area 113, the background still image and the background sprite that constitute the background image in each game state are displayed. Among them, the target of this control update is grasped. Further, for the grasped control update target, various parameter information necessary for creating a drawing list such as coordinates, rotation angle, scale, and transparency information on a virtual two-dimensional plane are calculated and derived. Then, the information for control is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in an area secured corresponding to each individual image in the effect-side RAM 94 .

After that, in step S2108, a new activation of the interrupt process is permitted, and in immediately following step S2109, after prohibiting the new activation of the interrupt process, the arithmetic processing for effect is executed (step S2110). In the effect calculation processing, parameter information necessary for setting information about the images of the first effect display layer 102 to the fifth effect display layer 106 (FIG. 38) in the drawing list is calculated and derived. Specifically, based on the display data set in the first effect area 113b to the fifth effect area 113f of the display setting area 113, the first effect display layer 102 to the fifth effect display layer Among the effect sprites constituting the 106 images, the current control update target is grasped, and the above various parameter information is derived for the control update target. Then, the information for control is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in an area secured corresponding to each individual image in the effect-side RAM 94 .

After that, in step S2111, a new activation of the interrupt process is permitted, and in immediately following step S2112, a new activation of the interrupt process is prohibited, and then the notification arithmetic processing is executed (step S2113). In the notification calculation processing, parameter information necessary for setting information about the images of the first notification display layer 107 to the second notification display layer 108 (FIG. 38) in the drawing list is calculated and derived. Specifically, based on the display data set in the first notification area 113g to the second notification area 113h of the display setting area 113, the first notification display layer 107 to the second notification display layer A notification sprite for displaying the notification image of 108 and various parameter information applied to the notification sprite are derived.

After that, "1" is set to the calculation completion flag in the production side RAM 94 (step S2114). As already explained, the calculation completion flag indicates that various types of calculation processing for creating a drawing list (background calculation processing in step S2107, effect calculation processing in step S2110, and notification calculation processing in step S2113) are performed once each. This is a flag for specifying that the performance side MPU 92 has executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, or if the process of step S2114 is performed, it is determined whether or not an image update completion signal has been received from the VDP 95 (step S2115). If the image update completion signal has been received (step S2115: YES), drawing list output processing is executed (step S2116). In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying one frame of pictures is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 95 . As already explained, in the VDP 95, according to this drawing list, the image of the background display layer 101→the image of the first effect display layer 102→the image of the second effect display layer 103→the image of the third effect display layer 104 These display layers 101 to 108 in the order of →image of the fourth effect display layer 105→image of the fifth effect display layer 106→image of the first notification display layer 107→image of the second notification display layer 108. display data for one synthesized image generated in such a manner that the images are successively superimposed from the back side of the screen toward the front side of the screen. The display data is created in the frame area of the video RAM 96 . As already explained, the video RAM 96 is provided with two frame areas, and the display data is alternately created in the two frame areas. The VDP 95 outputs an image signal for one frame corresponding to the display data created in the frame area to the image display device 63, thereby causing the image display device 63 to display an image corresponding to the display data. As a result, the image of the background display layer 101, the image of the first effect display layer 102, the image of the second effect display layer 103, the image of the third effect display layer 104, and the image of the fourth effect display layer 105 are displayed. , the image of the fifth effect display layer 106, the image of the first notification display layer 107, and the image of the second notification display layer 108 are generated in such a manner that they are sequentially superimposed from the back side of the screen toward the front side of the screen 1. One composite image is displayed on the image display device 63 as a picture for one frame.

After executing the drawing list output process in step S2116, the output standby flag in the effect-side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2117), and this display control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2115 that the image update completion signal has not been received, the output standby flag in the effect-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2118), and this display control process ends.

If it is determined in step S2102 that the delay flag in the effect-side RAM 94 is set to "1", after the delay flag is cleared to "0" (step S2119), the interrupt address of the effect-side RAM 94 By reading the address data from the area, a jump is made to the processing that was being executed immediately before a new processing cycle of the interrupt processing was started in the previous display control processing (step S2120). This makes it possible to restart the execution of the processing from the timing at which the previous display control processing was interrupted.

Next, the bonus notification process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the bonus notification process is executed in step S614 of the reel control process (FIG. 24).

In the bonus notification process, first, whether or not the game is a bonus winning game in which any bonus winning (either the 1st to 4th BB winnings or the 1st to 2nd RB winnings) has occurred in the winning lottery process (FIG. 14). (step S2201). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, it is determined in the winning determination process (step S613 of the reel control process (FIG. 24)) whether or not a bonus winning has been established (step S2202). If the affirmative determination is made in step S2202, this bonus notification without executing the processing for executing the bonus notification effect and the processing for executing the re-variation effect (processing of steps S2203 to S2206) end the processing. In this way, when the bonus winning corresponding to the bonus winning is established in the game in which the bonus winning has occurred, the bonus notification effect and the re-variation effect are not executed. In this case, as already explained, an affirmative determination is made in step S1501 of the bonus process (FIG. 34), and a bonus start command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 in step S1510.

Returning to the description of the bonus notification process (FIG. 50), if it is determined in step S2202 that the bonus winning has not been established, is the bonus notification win flag provided in the main side RAM 74 set to "1"? It is determined whether or not (step S2203). The bonus notification winning flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to grasp that the bonus notification effect has been won in the later-described notification lottery process (step S2311 of the effect content determination process (FIG. 51)). The bonus announcement winning flag is set to "1" at step S2313 of the effect content determination process (FIG. 51) described later.

When "1" is set to the bonus notification winning flag (step S2203: YES), freeze setting processing for notification effect is executed (step S2204). In the notification effect freeze setting process, numerical information corresponding to the total execution period (specifically, 5.5 seconds) of the first expected effect and the bonus notification effect is set in the freeze counter in the main RAM 74. . As already explained, the execution period of the first expected effect is 1.5 seconds. Also, the execution period of the bonus notification effect is 4 seconds. Numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically decremented in the timer subtraction process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). When a number is set in the freeze counter in the freeze setting process for notification effect (step S2204), the process waits in step S314 in the normal process (FIG. 13). As a result, the start of a new game is in a waiting state, so even if the start lever 41 is operated during execution of the first expectation performance and the bonus notification performance, the first expectation performance and the bonus notification performance are executed to the end. can do By preventing the bonus notification effect from being overlooked in this way, it is possible to reliably indicate to the player that the bonus winning has occurred. After that, the bonus notification winning flag is cleared to "0" (step S2205), and this bonus notification process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the bonus notification winning flag in the main RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S2203: NO), in the notification lottery process (step S2311 of the effect content determination process (FIG. 51)) described later, In order to signify that the re-variation effect has been won, numerical information of "6" corresponding to 6 games is set in the number of played games counter provided in the main side RAM 74 (step S2206), and this bonus notification effect is performed. exit. The number-of-games-completed counter is a counter that enables the main MPU 72 to grasp whether or not the game is a target game for execution of the re-variation effect. As already explained, if the bonus notification effect is not performed in a game in which a bonus win has occurred, and 5 games have been completed without the corresponding bonus winning being established after that, the game to be started next will be restarted. This is a game that is subject to execution of the variable effect. The value of the number-of-played-games counter is decremented by 1 in step S2303 of the effect content setting process (FIG. 51), which will be described later. When 5 games have been completed without any bonus winning, the value of the completed game number counter is decremented by 1 in step S2303 of the effect content setting process (FIG. 51) in the next game, and becomes "0". As a result, the game becomes a game to be executed for the re-variation effect. As already explained, when the bonus winning is established before the re-fluctuation effect is executed, the re-fluctuation effect is cancelled.

When a negative determination is made in step S2201, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the re-fluctuation effect flag provided in the main side RAM 74 (step S2207). The re-fluctuation effect flag is a flag that enables the main side MPU 72 to grasp that the game is an execution target game of the re-fluctuation effect. In the re-variation effect flag, when the bonus notification effect is not performed in the game in which the bonus winning occurs, and the corresponding bonus winning is not established after that, 5 games are digested and the game becomes the target game of the re-variation effect. , "1" is set in step S2305 of the effect content determination process (FIG. 51), which will be described later.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2207, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning corresponding to the carried-over bonus winning has been established in the winning determination processing (step S613 of the reel control processing (FIG. 24)). (Step S2208). If a negative determination is made in step S2208, this bonus notification process is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2208, that is, if a bonus prize is won in the game targeted for execution of the re-variation effect, the re-variation effect flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0", and the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2209), and the bonus notification process is terminated. As already explained, the main side effect timer counter enables the main side MPU 72 to grasp the remaining execution period of the intermediate stop effect and the first expected effect in the game targeted for execution of the second expected effect or re-variable effect. It is a timer counter. In step S2209, the re-fluctuation effect flag and the main-side effect timer counter are cleared to "0", so that the re-variation effect is not performed. In this way, in the game targeted for execution of the re-variation effect, when the bonus winning corresponding to the carried-over bonus win is established, the re-variation effect is cancelled.

Next, the effect content determination process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The effect content determination process is executed in step S415 of the winning lottery process (FIG. 14).

In the effect content determination process, if the internal bonus state is ST2 (step S2301: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter in the main RAM 74 is "1" or more (step S2302). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2302, the value of the number-of-games counter is decremented by 1 (step S2303), and it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-games counter after the subtraction of 1 has become "0". (step S2304). In the game in which the bonus notification effect is not performed in the game in which the bonus winning occurs, and the game is started after 5 games have been completed without the corresponding bonus winning being established (game subject to execution of the re-variation effect), step S2303. By subtracting 1 from the value of the number-of-games-completed counter at , the value of the number-of-games-completed counter becomes "0". When an affirmative determination is made in step S2304, "1" is set to the re-fluctuation effect flag provided in the main side RAM 74 (step S2305). As a result, the current game becomes the execution target game of the re-variation effect.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2301, it is determined whether or not it is the normal game state ST1 (step S2306), and if it is the normal game state ST1 (step S2306: YES), the role In the lottery process (FIG. 14), it is determined whether or not it is a game (bonus winning game) in which any bonus winning (any of the 1st to 4th BBs and 1st to 2nd RB winnings) occurs (step S2307) ). When a negative determination is made in step S2307, main side second expected effect lottery processing is executed (step S2308). In this way, the main-side second expected effect lottery process is executed in a game in which no bonus winning has occurred in the lottery process for a combination (FIG. 14). In the main side second expected effect lottery process in step S2308, the main side second expected effect lottery table is read from the main side ROM73. A lottery result that wins the second expected performance and a lottery result that does not win the second expected performance are set in the main side second expected performance lottery table, and the success or failure of these lottery results is determined. is set. In the main side second expected effect lottery table, the probability of winning the second expected effect in the main side second expected effect lottery is set to 1/20, and the second expected effect lottery in the main side second expected effect lottery is set. The probability of not winning is set to 19/20. After that, the main side MPU 72 reads the numerical value information of the random number counter which is periodically updated, and compares the read numerical value information with the read main side second expected effect lottery table. Then, a lottery result (either a lottery result that wins the second expected performance or a lottery result that does not win the second expected performance) in which the numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter is set is specified.

If the second expected effect is won in the main side second expected effect lottery process in step S2308 (step S2309: YES), the second expected effect flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" ( step S2310). The second expected effect flag is a flag that allows the main side MPU 72 to grasp that the second expected effect is to be executed. As already explained, if the bonus notification effect is not performed in the game in which the bonus is won, and 5 games are completed without the bonus winning being established, the game to be started next in this state will change again. This is a game for which the production is to be executed. In the execution target game of the re-variation effect, the re-variation effect is executed after the second expected effect ends. On the other hand, in the second expected effect execution target game executed by winning the second expected effect in the main side second expected effect lottery process in step S2308, while the second expected effect is executed, the re-variation effect is not executed.

On the other hand, if a bonus winning occurs in the role lottery process (FIG. 14) (step S2307: YES), notification lottery process is executed (step S2311). In the notice lottery process, the notice lottery table is read from the main ROM 73 . The notification lottery table contains lottery results for winning the bonus notification effect and lottery results for winning the re-variation effect, and numerical information for judging whether these lottery results are correct or not is set. there is In the announcement performance table, the probability of winning the bonus announcement performance and the probability of winning the re-variation performance in the announcement performance lottery are set to 1/2. After that, the main MPU 72 reads the numerical value information of the random number counter which is periodically updated, and compares the read numerical value information with the read notification lottery table. Then, it is determined that the effect (either the bonus notification effect or the re-variation effect) in which the numerical range including the numerical value information read from the random number counter is set is won.

When the bonus notification effect is won in the notification lottery process in step S2311 (step S2312: YES), the bonus notification winning flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2313). As a result, the main MPU 72 can grasp that the player has won the bonus notification effect.

If a negative determination is made in step S2302, if a negative determination is made in step S2304, if the processing of step S2305 is performed, if a negative determination is made in step S2306, a negative determination is made in step S2309. If the process of step S2310 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S2312, or if the process of step S2313 is executed, other processing is executed (step S2314), and the content of this effect End decision processing. In the other processing in step S2314, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current game state, the current game section, and the result of the lottery processing (FIG. 14) of the combination is used to determine the outline of the production by lottery. .

Next, the processing of steps S718 to S723 of the stop operation handling processing (FIG. 25) will be described. In the stop operation handling process, after transmitting the OFF operation command to the effect side MPU 92 in step S717, it is determined whether or not the second expected effect flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S718). ).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S718, it means that the game is a target game for execution of the second expected effect, so freeze setting processing for the second expected effect is executed (step S719). In the freeze setting process, the freeze counter in the main RAM 74 is set to numerical information corresponding to the period from the occurrence of the sixth opportunity to the end of the second expected effect. As already explained, the main side RAM 74 is provided with a main side effect timer counter that enables the main side MPU 72 to grasp the remaining execution period of the intermediate stop effect and the first expected effect. In step S709 of FIG. 25), the execution period of the middle stop effect (specifically 1 second) and the execution period of the first expected effect (specifically 1.5 seconds) are displayed in the timer counter for the main side effect. Numerical information corresponding to the total period (specifically, 2.5 seconds) is set. The value of the timer counter for main side effect is decremented by 1 every time the timer subtraction process (step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12)) is performed. It is possible to grasp the remaining execution period of the medium stop effect and the first expected effect based on the value of the timer counter for main side effect. In addition, when the intermediate stop effect and the first expected effect have ended, the execution period of the intermediate stop effect and the first expected effect is extended based on the fact that the value of the main side effect timer counter is "0". It is possible to grasp what is not left. In the freeze setting process for the second expected effect (step S719), the remaining execution period of the middle stop effect and the first expected effect is grasped based on the value of the main side effect timer counter. When the remaining execution period is 0.5 seconds or more, the second expected performance is started when the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second). means the remaining execution period minus 0.5 seconds and the execution period of the second expected effect (specifically 1.5 seconds) Numerical information corresponding to the total period of the freeze counter set to On the other hand, if the remaining execution period is less than 0.5 seconds, the execution period of the first expected effect has already reached the predetermined period (specifically, one second), and the second expected effect is immediately started. Numerical information corresponding only to the execution period (specifically, 1.5 seconds) of the second expected effect is set in the freeze counter because it means that the game has been started. In the freeze setting process for the second expected effect (step S719), after numerical information is set in the freeze counter, the value of the main side effect timer counter is cleared to "0".

The numerical information set in the freeze counter at step S719 is periodically decremented by the timer subtraction process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). When a value is set in the freeze counter in the freeze setting process for the second expected effect (step S719), the process waits in step S314 in the normal process (FIG. 13). As already explained, when the sixth opportunity occurs in a situation where the execution period of the first expected effect has reached a predetermined period (specifically, one second) (when the effect-side MPU 92 receives the OFF operation command). , the second expected effect is started at the timing when the sixth opportunity occurs, and the sixth expected effect is started at the timing before the execution period of the first expected effect reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second). When the opportunity occurs, the second expected effect is started at the timing when the execution period of the first expected effect reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second). In the freeze setting process for the second expected effect (step S719), by setting numerical information corresponding to the period from the occurrence of the sixth opportunity until the end of the second expected effect to the freeze counter, Even when the sixth opportunity occurs before the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period, the second expected performance can be executed to the end. Also, as already explained, in the normal effect (FIG. 13), when the second expected effect flag is set to "1", the process waits in step S312 until the second expected effect flag is cleared to "0". The second expected effect flag is cleared to "0" in step S720, which will be described later. Therefore, even if the start lever 41 is operated to start the next game before the freeze setting process for the second expected effect (step S719) is executed, the operation is performed. The game never starts. Specifically, even if the start lever 41 is operated while the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop are being pressed for a long time, the game will not start based on the operation. .

After that, the second expected effect flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S720), and the stop operation handling process is terminated. As described above, by clearing the second expected effect flag to "0", a negative determination is made in step S312 of the normal processing (FIG. 13), and the processing from step S313 onwards is executed. After a negative determination is made in step S312, normal processing is performed until the numerical information set in the freeze counter in the main side RAM 74 becomes "0" in the freeze setting process for the second expected effect (step S719). A negative determination is made in step S314 (FIG. 13). Therefore, even if the start lever 41 is operated before the end of the second expected effect, the game is not started based on the operation. This makes it possible to execute the second expected effect to the end.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S718, it is determined whether or not the re-fluctuation effect flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S721). If an affirmative determination is made in step S721, it means that the game is an execution target game for the re-variation effect, so freeze setting processing for the re-variation effect is executed (step S722). In the freeze setting process, the freeze counter in the main RAM 74 is set with numerical value information corresponding to the period from the occurrence of the sixth trigger to the end of the re-fluctuation effect. As already explained in the freeze setting process for the second expected effect (step S719), the main side RAM 74 stores the main side MPU 72 that allows the main side MPU 72 to grasp the remaining execution period of the middle stop effect and the first expected effect. A performance timer counter is provided, and when the middle stop performance or the first expected performance is being executed, the remaining execution period of the middle stop performance and the first expected performance is based on the value of the main side performance timer counter. It is possible to grasp the In addition, when the intermediate stop effect and the first expected effect have ended, the execution period of the intermediate stop effect and the first expected effect is extended based on the fact that the value of the main side effect timer counter is "0". It is possible to grasp what is not left. In the re-variation effect freeze setting process (step S722), the remaining execution period of the medium stop effect and the first expected effect is grasped based on the value of the main side effect timer counter. When the remaining execution period is 0.5 seconds or more, the second expected performance is started when the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second). Therefore, the period obtained by subtracting 0.5 seconds from the remaining execution period, the execution period of the second expected effect (specifically 1.5 seconds), and the execution period of the re-fluctuation effect (specifically 4 seconds) is set in the freeze counter. On the other hand, if the remaining execution period is less than 0.5 seconds, the execution period of the first expected effect has already reached a predetermined period (specifically, one second), and the second expected effect is immediately started. Since it means to start, the execution period of the second expected effect (specifically 1.5 seconds) and the execution period of the re-variation effect (specifically 4 seconds) Numerical value corresponding to the total period Set the information in the freeze counter. In the freeze setting process for re-fluctuation effect (step S722), after numerical information is set in the freeze counter, the value of the main side effect timer counter is cleared to "0".

Numerical information set in the freeze counter in the freeze setting process (step S722) for re-fluctuation effects is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). When a number is set in the freeze counter in the freeze setting process for re-fluctuation effect (step S722), the process waits in step S314 in the normal process (FIG. 13). As already explained, when the sixth opportunity occurs in a situation where the execution period of the first expected effect has reached a predetermined period (specifically, one second) (when the effect-side MPU 92 receives the OFF operation command). , the second expected effect is started at the timing when the sixth opportunity occurs, and the sixth expected effect is started at the timing before the execution period of the first expected effect reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second). When the opportunity occurs, the second expected effect is started at the timing when the execution period of the first expected effect reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second). In the freeze setting process for the re-fluctuation effect (step S722), by setting the numerical information corresponding to the period from the occurrence of the sixth opportunity to the end of the re-fluctuation effect to the freeze counter, the first Even when the sixth opportunity occurs before the execution period of the expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second), the re-variation performance can be executed to the end. Also, as already explained, in the normal effect (FIG. 13), when the re-fluctuation effect flag is set to "1", the structure waits in step S313 until the re-fluctuation effect flag is cleared to "0". , and the re-fluctuation effect flag is cleared to "0" in step S723, which will be described later. Therefore, even if the start lever 41 is operated to start the next game before the freeze setting process for the re-variation effect (step S722) is executed, the game is never started. Specifically, even if the start lever 41 is operated while the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop are being pressed for a long time, the game will not start based on the operation. .

After that, the re-fluctuation effect flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S723), and the stop operation handling process ends. As described above, when the re-fluctuation effect flag is cleared to "0", a negative determination is made in step S313 of the normal process (FIG. 13), and the processes after step S314 are executed. After a negative determination is made in step S313, normal processing ( A negative determination is made in step S314 of FIG. Therefore, even if the start lever 41 is operated at a timing before the end of the re-variation effect, the game is not started based on the operation. As a result, it is possible to execute the re-variation effect to the end.

Next, normal effect control processing executed by the effect side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, the production|presentation control processing for normal is performed by the interrupt processing repeatedly performed in the production|presentation side MPU92 with a comparatively short period (for example, 4 milliseconds).

In the normal effect control process, first, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the normal game state ST1 or the bonus internal state ST2 (step S2401). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, it is determined whether or not a bonus start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2402). executes the effect setting process at the start of the bonus described later (step S2403), and ends the normal effect control process.

If a negative determination is made in step S2402, it is determined whether or not a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2404). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2404, a prize-winning result handling process, which will be described later, is executed (step S2405), and the normal effect control process ends.

When a negative determination is made in step S2404, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in any of the type notification effect flags provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S2406). The type notification effect flag is a flag that enables the effect side MPU 92 to grasp that the type notification effect should be executed and the type of type notification effect to be executed. In this slot machine 10, after the bonus notification effect or re-variation effect is executed, until the bonus prize corresponding to the generated bonus win (either the 1st to 4th BB wins or the 1st to 2nd RB wins) is established. In the game executed in 1, a type notification effect corresponding to the type of bonus winning is executed. In the type notification effect, the image display device 63 displays a bonus type notification image showing a combination of symbols that establishes the bonus winning corresponding to the bonus winning that has occurred this time. For example, if the type of bonus winning that occurred this time is the 1st BB winning, the image display device 63 displays a bonus type notification image of "Red 7, Red 7, Red 7" corresponding to the combination of symbols that establishes the 1st BB winning. is displayed. By displaying the combination of symbols for establishing a bonus prize on the image display device 63, the player can operate the stop buttons 42 to 44 after understanding the combination of the symbols. A performance-side RAM 94 is provided with type notification performance flags in one-to-one correspondence with the types of bonus wins. The effect-side MPU 92 recognizes that the type notification effect is to be executed based on the fact that one of the type notification effect flags is set to "1", and the type for which "1" is set. The type of type notification effect to be executed is grasped based on the type of the notification effect flag. The type notification effect flag is set to "1" in step S2608 of the second effect information setting process (FIG. 54) to be described later.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2406, the type notification effect processing is executed (step S2407), and the normal effect control processing is terminated. In the type notification effect processing in step S2407, based on the reception of the game start command, a type notification effect table for executing the type notification effect corresponding to the type notification effect flag set to "1" is produced. The data is read out from the side ROM 93 to the readout area 94a. The type notification effect table is read to the 0th layer LY0. The performance-side MPU 92 controls execution of performance according to the read-out type notification performance table, thereby executing the type notification performance.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2406, it is determined whether or not a game start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2408). If the game start command has been received (step S2408: YES), that is, if the first opportunity has occurred, clear processing at the start of the game is executed (step S2409). In the clearing process at the start of the game, the 0th to 8th layers LY0 to LY8 in the reading area 94a are cleared. As a result, the data tables read out to the 0th to 8th layers LY0 to LY8 for executing the effect of the previous game are cleared. Also, in the clearing process at the start of the game in step S2409, the first synthesis flag and the second synthesis flag provided in the effect-side RAM 94 are cleared to "0". The first synthesis flag is a flag that enables the effect side MPU 92 to comprehend that the first synthesis effect table should be created, and the second synthesis flag is a flag that the effect side MPU 92 should generate the second synthesis effect table. This is a flag that can be grasped by the MPU 92 .

Thereafter, a first effect information setting process for setting information of various effects in the normal game state ST1 is executed (step S2410). FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the first effect information setting process.

In the first effect information setting process, the normal base effect type setting process is first executed (step S2501). In the normal-use base effect type setting processing, first, a normal-use base effect lottery is performed for determining the normal-use base effect table to be executed. In the normal base effect lottery, the normal base effect lottery table is read from the effect side ROM93. As already explained, in the normal base effect table storage area 93a (FIG. 41(a)) of the effect side ROM 93, six kinds of normal base effect tables are stored as effect tables for performing the normal base effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1. A base production table is stored. The type information of the six types of normal base effect tables (numerical information of any of 1 to 6) is set in the normal base effect lottery table, and the type information of each normal base effect table is determined. A numerical range is set for the determination. After that, the numerical information of the random number counter which is periodically updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information is checked against the read normal base performance lottery table. Then, the normal-use base effect table in which the numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter is set is specified as a read target. After that, the type information of the specified normal base effect table is set in the base effect information counter 115 (FIG. 41(b)) provided in the effect side RAM 94 . The base effect information counter 115 is a counter that enables the effect side MPU 92 to grasp the normal base effect table specified as a read target in the normal base effect lottery. In addition, as already explained, the symbol variation effect table stored in the symbol variation effect table storage area 93b of the effect side ROM 93 is one type, and is stored in the effective notification effect table storage area 93c of the effect side ROM 93. Since there is only one type of effective notification effect table, the processing for setting the type information of the symbol variation effect and the effective notification effect is not executed.

Thereafter, left stop effect type setting processing is executed (step S2502). In the left stop effect type setting process, first, a left stop effect lottery is performed for determining a left stop effect table to be executed. In the left stop effect lottery, the left stop effect lottery table is read from the effect side ROM93. As already explained, the left stop effect table storage area 93d (FIG. 41(a)) of the effect side ROM 93 stores nine types of left stop effect tables as effect tables for performing the left stop effect. In the left stop effect lottery table, type information (numerical information of one of 1 to 9) of the nine types of left stop effect tables is set, and the type information of each left stop effect table is determined to determine whether it is correct or not. is set. After that, the numerical information of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the effect side RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information is collated with the read left stop effect lottery table. Then, the left stop effect table in which the numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter is set is specified as a read target. After that, the type information of the specified left stop effect table is set in the left stop effect information counter 116 provided in the effect side RAM 94 (FIG. 41(b)). The left stop effect information counter 116 is a counter that enables the effect side MPU 92 to grasp the left stop effect table specified as a read target in the left stop effect lottery.

After that, it is determined whether or not any bonus combination (one of the 1st BB combination to the 4th BB combination and the 1st RB combination to the 2nd RB combination) has been won in the lottery process for the current combination (FIG. 14) (step S2503). ). If a negative determination is made in step S2503, based on the information set in the game start command received from the main MPU 72, it is determined whether or not the game is the execution target game of the second expected effect or re-variation effect. Determine (step S2504). In step S2504, if the main side second expected effect lottery process (step S2308 of the effect content determination process (FIG. 51)) wins the second expected effect (step S2309: YES), and in the game in which a bonus win occurs Affirmative determination is made when the re-variation performance is won and the game becomes a target game for execution of the re-variation performance after 5 games are completed without establishing a bonus winning. When a negative determination is made in step S2504, right stop effect type setting processing is executed (step S2505).

In the right stop effect type setting processing in step S2505, a right stop effect lottery is first performed to determine the right stop effect table to be executed. In the right stop effect lottery, the right stop effect lottery table is read from the effect side ROM93. As already explained, in the right stop effect table storage area 93e (FIG. 41(a)) of the effect side ROM 93, nine types of right stop effect tables are stored as effect tables for performing the right stop effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1. is stored. In the right stop effect lottery table, type information (numerical information of any one of 1 to 9) of the nine types of right stop effect tables is set, and the type information of each right stop effect table is used to determine whether it is correct or not. is set. After that, the numerical information of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the effect side RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information is collated with the read right stop effect lottery table. Then, the right stop effect table in which the numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter is set is specified as a read target. After that, the type information of the specified right stop effect table is set in the right stop effect information counter 117 (FIG. 41(b)) provided in the effect side RAM94. The right stop effect information counter 117 is a counter that enables the effect side MPU 92 to grasp the right stop effect table specified as an object to be executed. The effect side MPU 92 specifies the right stop effect table to be read based on the value of the right stop effect information counter 117 .

After that, a process for setting the type of medium stop effect is executed (step S2506). In the middle stop effect type setting processing, first, a middle stop effect lottery for determining the middle stop effect table to be executed is performed. In the middle stop effect lottery, the middle stop effect lottery table is read from the effect side ROM 93 . As already explained, the middle stop effect table storage area 93h (FIG. 41(a)) of the effect-side ROM 93 stores nine kinds of middle stop effect tables as effect tables for performing the middle stop effect. Type information (numerical information of any one of 1 to 9) of the 9 types of medium stop effect tables is set in the medium stop effect lottery table, and the type information of each medium stop effect table is determined to determine whether it is appropriate or not. is set. After that, the numerical information of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the effect side RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information is collated with the read middle stop effect lottery table. Then, a medium stop effect table in which a numerical range including numerical information read from the random number counter is set is specified as a read target. After that, the type information of the specified medium stop effect table is set in the medium stop effect information counter 118 (FIG. 41(b)) provided in the effect side RAM 94. FIG. The middle stop effect information counter 118 is a counter that enables the effect side MPU 92 to grasp the middle stop effect table specified as an object to be executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not a reach state occurs (step S2507). Specifically, the type information (numerical information of any one of 1 to 9) set in the left stop effect information counter 116 in step S2502, and the type information set in the right stop effect information counter 117 in step S2505. (numerical information of any one of 1 to 9) is the same value, it is determined that the reach state occurs. If it is determined in step S2507 that the ready-to-win state does not occur, the effect information setting process is terminated. As already explained, when the ready-to-win state does not occur, the effect of one game ends when the middle stop effect ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2507 that the ready-to-win state occurs, medium design adjustment processing is executed (step S2508). In the middle pattern adjustment process, the type information (numerical information of one of 1 to 9) set in the middle stop effect information counter 118 in step S2506 is the type information set in the left stop effect information counter 116 in step S2502. , and when the value is the same as the type information set in the right stop effect information counter 117 in step S2505, a process of shifting the numerical value information set in the middle stop effect information counter 118 is executed. Specifically, 1 is subtracted from the value of the middle stop effect information counter 118, and when the numerical information after the subtraction of 1 becomes "0", the value information of "9" is set in the middle stop effect information counter 118. . As a result, the numbers indicated by the left symbol image G5, the right symbol image G6, and the middle symbol image G7 on the image display device 63 are all the same even though the lottery process (FIG. 14) of the winning combination results in a loss. is prevented.

After that, the first expected effect lottery process at the time of loss is executed (step S2509). As already described, in the present embodiment, the first expected effect may be executed even when no bonus winning occurs in the winning lottery process (FIG. 14). In the first expected effect lottery process at step S2509, the first expected effect lottery table at the time of loss is first read from the effect side ROM93. As already explained, as the first expected effects, the effect of displaying the bubble image G8 on the image display device 63, the effect of displaying the water flow image G9, the effect of displaying the swirl image G10, and the effect of displaying the shoal of fish image G11. There are five types of effects that are displayed and effects that the giant character image G12 is displayed. A first expected effect table is stored. The type information of the five types of first expected effect tables (numerical information of any of 1 to 5) is set in the first expected effect lottery table at the time of failure, and the type information of each first expected effect table is set. has a numerical range for judging whether it is appropriate or not. In the first expectation effect lottery table at the time of failure, the probability of winning the bubble image G8 and the probability of winning the water flow image G9, which inform that the expectation of bonus winning is low, is set to 1/5, and the expectation of bonus winning is set. The winning probability of the swirl image G10 and the fish school image G11, which indicate that the prize is high, is set to 1/10. It is set to 1/20, and the probability of winning none of the first expected effects is set to 7/20. In this manner, the probability of winning in the first expected effect lottery at the time of loss is set to be lower for the expected effect image with a higher degree of expectation for bonus winning. After that, the numerical information of the random number counter which is periodically updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information is collated with the read out first expected performance lottery table at the time of failure. Thereby, the presence or absence of the first expected effect and the type of the first expected effect table when the first expected effect is executed are specified.

If any of the first expected effects is won in the first expected effect lottery process at the time of loss (step S2509) (step S2510: YES), the first expected effect specified in the first expected effect lottery process at the time of loss type information is set in the first expected effect information counter 119 (FIG. 41(b)) provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S2511). The first expected effect information counter 119 is a counter that enables the effect side MPU 92 to grasp the first expected effect table specified as an object to be executed.

After that, a notification effect lottery process is executed (step S2512). In the notification effect lottery process, first, the notification effect lottery table for determining the type of notification effect to be executed this time out of the reach notification effect and the long press notification effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 . In the notification effect lottery table, the probability of winning the ready-to-win notification effect lottery is set to 1/2, and the probability of winning the long press notification effect is set to 1/2. After that, the numerical information of the random number counter which is periodically updated in the effect side RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information is collated with the read notification effect lottery table. As a result, one of the ready-to-reach notification effect and the long-press notification effect is specified as the notification effect to be executed.

When winning the reach notification effect in the notification effect lottery process (step S2512) (step S2513: YES), the reach notification effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2514), This first effect information setting process is terminated. The ready-to-win notification effect flag is a flag that allows the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp that the ready-to-win notification effect should be executed. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2513, that is, if the long press notification effect is won in the notification effect lottery process (step S2512), the long press notification effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1 ' is set (step S2515), and the first effect information setting process is terminated. The long-press notification effect flag is a flag that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp that the long-press notification effect should be executed.

This is a game in which an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, that is, any bonus win (either 1st to 4th BB wins or 1st to 2nd RB wins) has occurred in the winning lottery process (FIG. 14). If so, the corresponding winning flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2516). In the production side RAM 94, a first BB winning flag that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the first BB winning has occurred, and a second BB winning flag that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the second BB winning has occurred. A third BB winning flag that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the third BB winning has occurred, a fourth BB winning flag that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the fourth BB winning has occurred, and a first RB. A first RB winning flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that a winning has occurred, and a second RB winning flag that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp that a second RB winning has occurred are provided. In step S2516, the winning flag corresponding to the bonus winning that occurred this time is set to "1".

After that, based on the information set in the game start command received from the main MPU 72, it is determined whether or not the bonus notification effect is won in the notification lottery process (step S2311 of the effect content determination process (FIG. 51)). (step S2517). If the bonus notification effect has not been won (step S2517: NO), the process proceeds to step S2505, and the processes of steps S2505 to S2515 already described are executed. In this way, in a game in which a bonus win has occurred, in the announcement lottery process (step S2311 of the effect content determination process (FIG. 51)), if the re-variation effect is won without winning the bonus announcement effect, the second expectation Production and re-variation production are not executed. In this case, as already explained, the game that is started after five games have been completed without any bonus prize being established is the game to be executed for the re-variation effect.

When the affirmative determination is made in step S2504, or when the affirmative determination is made in step S2517, the second effect information setting process is executed (step S2518), and the first effect information setting process ends. . FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing the second effect information setting process.

In the second effect information setting process, first, the right stop effect information counter 117 receives the same type information as the type information (numerical information of any one of 1 to 9) set in the left stop effect information counter 116 in the effect side RAM 94. Set (step S2601). As a result, the number indicated by the right symbol image G6 stopped in the right region of the image display device 63 in the right stop effect and the number indicated by the left symbol image G5 stopped in the left region of the image display device 63 in the left stop effect are the same. As a result, a reach state occurs.

After that, the type information corresponding to the type information (numerical information of any one of 1 to 9) set in the left stop effect information counter 116 is set in the middle stop effect information counter 118 in the effect side RAM 94 (step S2602). Specifically, the type information set in the left stop effect information counter 116 is read, and 1 is added to the read type information. Then, when the numerical information after the addition of 1 does not exceed the maximum value "9", the numerical information after the addition of 1 is set in the middle stop effect information counter 118, and the numerical information after the addition of 1 is set. exceeds the maximum value of "9", numerical information of "1" is set in the middle stop effect information counter 118. - 特許庁As a result, in the center area of the image display device 63, the middle pattern image G7 indicating the number immediately preceding the number indicated by the left pattern image G5 and the right pattern image G6 is stopped.

After that, the first expected effect lottery process at the time of winning is executed (step S2603). In the first expected effect lottery process at the time of winning, first, the first expected effect lottery table at the time of winning is read from the effect side ROM 93 . As already described with reference to FIGS. 40(a) to 40(e), as the first expectation effect, the effect of displaying the bubble image G8 on the image display device 63 and the effect of displaying the water flow image G9 are provided. , an effect in which a spiral image G10 is displayed, an effect in which a school of fish image G11 is displayed, and an effect in which a giant character image G12 is displayed. The area 93i (FIG. 41(a)) stores five types of first expected effect tables. In the first expected effect lottery table at the time of winning, type information (numerical information of any of 1 to 5) of the five types of first expected effect tables is set, and the type information of each first expected effect table is has a numerical range for judging whether it is appropriate or not. In the lottery table of the first expected effect at the time of winning, the winning probability of the bubble image G8 and the water flow image G9, which inform that the expectation of the bonus winning is low, is set to 1/10, and the expectation of the bonus winning is set. The probability of winning the swirl image G10 and the probability of winning the school of fish image G11 are set to 1/5. It is set to 2/5. In this way, it is set so that the probability of winning in the first expected effect lottery at the time of winning is higher for an expected effect image with a higher degree of expectation for winning a bonus. In the first expected performance lottery at the time of winning, one of the first expected performances is always won. After that, the numerical information of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information is collated with the read first expected performance lottery table at the time of winning. Thereby, the type of the first expected effect table to be read is specified.

After that, the type information of the first expected effect specified in the first expected effect lottery process (step S2603) at the time of winning (numerical information of one of "1" to "5") is stored as the first expected effect information in the effect side RAM 94. It is set in the counter 119 (FIG. 41(b)) (step S2604).

After that, based on the information set in the game start command received from the main MPU 72, it is determined whether or not the current game is the second expected effect or re-variable effect execution target game (step S2605). As already explained, the second expected effect is an effect executed in either the game targeted for execution of the second expected effect or the game targeted for execution of the re-variation effect. In the re-variable effect execution target game, the first expected effect and the second expected effect are executed, and the re-variable effect is executed after the second expected effect ends. Further, as already described, in the game in which the second expected effect is executed (the game targeted for execution of the second expected effect or the re-variation effect), the long press notification effect is executed based on the occurrence of the fourth opportunity, and the bonus In the target game for executing the notification effect, the ready-to-reach notification effect is executed based on the occurrence of the fourth opportunity. In step S2605, if the game is not a game in which a bonus win has occurred, it is a game targeted for execution of the second expected effect or re-variation effect, so an affirmative determination is made. Also, in step S2605, if the game is a game in which bonus winning has occurred and the bonus announcement effect is won in the notification lottery process (step S2311 of the effect content determination process (FIG. 51)), the second expected effect and re-variation Since the performance is not executed, a negative determination is made. If a negative determination is made in step S2605, it means that the game does not execute the second expected effect. The bonus notification effect flag 122 (FIG. 41(b)) provided in the side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2607). The bonus notification effect flag 122 is a flag that enables the effect side MPU 92 to grasp that the bonus notification effect should be executed.

After that, the type notification effect flag corresponding to the type of bonus winning this time is set to "1" (step S2608), and the second effect information setting process is terminated. As already explained, the effect-side RAM 94 is provided with type notification effect flags in one-to-one correspondence with the types of bonus wins. Also, as already explained, when a bonus win occurs, the win flag corresponding to the type of bonus win is set to "1" in step S2516 of the first effect information setting process (FIG. 53). In step S2608, the type of bonus winning generated is grasped based on the type of the winning flag set to "1", and "1" is set to the type notification effect flag corresponding to the type of bonus winning. . As a result, in the next and subsequent games, the type notification effect corresponding to the type of bonus win carried over will be executed.

On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S2605, the effect side second expected effect lottery process is executed (step S2609). In the effect side second expected effect lottery process, first, the second expected effect lottery table corresponding to the bonus winning occurrence situation is read from the effect side ROM 93 . Specifically, when the BB winning is occurring in the game targeted for executing the re-variation effect, the second expected effect lottery table at the time of BB winning is read from the effect side ROM 93, and the game targeted for executing the re-variation effect. And when RB winning has occurred, the second expected effect lottery table at the time of RB winning is read from the performance side ROM 93. - 特許庁Further, if the game is the target game for executing the second expected effect, the second expected effect lottery table at the time of loss is read from the effect-side ROM 93 . As already described with reference to FIGS. 40(a) to 40(e), as the second expected effect, the effect of displaying the bubble image G8 on the image display device 63 and the effect of displaying the water flow image G9 are provided. , an effect in which a spiral image G10 is displayed, an effect in which a school of fish image G11 is displayed, and an effect in which a giant character image G12 is displayed. The area 93k (FIG. 41(a)) stores five types of second expected effect tables. Type information (1 to 5 ) is set, and a numerical range for judging whether or not it is correct is set for each type of information of each second expected effect table.

In the performance-side second expected performance lottery process (step S2609), one of the second expected performances is always won. In the second expected effect lottery table at the time of BB winning, the winning probability of the bubble image G8 and swirl image G10, which informs that the expectation of BB winning is low when bonus winning occurs, is set to 1/10, The winning probability of the water flow image G9 and the fish school image G11, which indicate that the BB winning is highly expected when the bonus winning occurs, is set to 1/5, and the BB winning expectation when the bonus winning occurs. The winning probability of the gigantic character image G12 reporting that the number of winnings is very high is set to 2/5. As described above, in the second expected effect lottery table for BB winning, the probability of winning the bubble image G8 and swirl image G10, which have a low expectation of BB winning in the event of bonus winning, is set to be the lowest. The probability of winning is set to be the highest for the giant character image G12, which has the highest expectation of winning the BB when the winning occurs.

In the second expected effect lottery table at the time of RB winning, the winning probability of the bubble image G8 and swirl image G10, which informs that the expectation of BB winning is low when bonus winning occurs, is set to 3/8. The winning probability of the water flow image G9 and the winning probability of the fish school image G11, which indicate that the BB winning is highly expected when the bonus winning occurs, is set to 1/10, and the bonus winning has occurred. The winning probability of the gigantic character image G12, which informs that the expectation of winning the BB is very high in the case where the BB winning is very high, is set to 1/20. Thus, in the second expected effect lottery table for RB winning, the winning probability of the bubble image G8 and swirl image G10, which informs that the expectation of BB winning is low when bonus winning occurs, is set high. In addition, the winning probability of the water flow image G9 and the fish school image G11, which indicate that the BB winning is highly expected when the bonus winning has occurred, is set low. The lowest winning probability is set for the giant character image G12 that informs that the expectation of the BB winning is very high when the bonus winning occurs.

In the second expectation effect lottery table at the time of loss, the winning probability of the bubble image G8 and swirl image G10, which informs that the expectation of BB winning is low when bonus winning occurs, is set to 17/40. , the winning probability of the water flow image G9 and the winning probability of the fish school image G11, which indicate that the BB winning is highly expected when the bonus winning has occurred, are set to 1/20, and the bonus winning has occurred. The winning probability of the gigantic character image G12, which informs that the expectation of winning the BB is very high, is set to 1/20. In this way, in the second expected effect lottery table for the time of failure, the winning probability of the bubble image G8 and swirl image G10, which informs that the expectation of BB winning is low when bonus winning occurs, is set high. In addition, the winning probability of the water flow image G9 and the fish school image G11, which informs that the BB winning is highly expected when the bonus winning has occurred, is set to be low. Then, the winning probability of the giant character image G12, which informs that the expectation of the BB winning is very high when the bonus winning has occurred, is set to be the lowest.

The winning probability of each expected effect image in the second expected effect lottery table for BB winning, the second expected effect lottery table for RB winning, and the second expected effect lottery table for losing is set as described above. In the second expectation effect, either the bubble image G8 or the swirl image G10 is displayed to notify that the expectation of winning the BB is low when the bonus win occurs. By displaying one of the school of fish images G11, it is reported that the expectation of BB winning in the event of bonus winning is high, and by displaying a giant character image G12 in the second expectation effect, bonus winning occurs. It is notified that the expectation of winning the BB is very high in the event of the winning.

In the effect-side second expected effect lottery process in step S2609, after reading out the second expected effect lottery table corresponding to the bonus winning occurrence situation from the effect-side ROM 93, the value of the random number counter is periodically updated in the effect-side RAM 94. Information is read, and the read numerical information is collated with the read second expected effect lottery table. Thereby, the type of the second expected effect table is specified.

After that, the type information of the second expected effect specified in the effect-side second expected effect lottery process (step S2609) is set in the second expected effect information counter 121 (FIG. 41(b)) provided in the effect-side RAM 94. (Step S2610) The second expected effect information counter 121 is a counter that enables the effect side MPU 92 to grasp the second expected effect table specified as an object to be executed. Based on the information set in the command, it is determined whether or not the current game is the target game for executing the re-variation effect (step S2611).If a negative determination is made in step S2611, the effect side The second effect information setting process is terminated by setting "1" to the first synthesis flag provided in the RAM 94 (step S2612) As already explained, the first synthesis flag indicates that the first synthesis effect table is set. This is a flag that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp what should be created.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is a target game for executing the re-variation effect (step S2611: YES), a re-variation effect type setting process is executed (step S2613). In the re-variation performance type setting processing, the type information corresponding to the numerical information stored in the medium stop performance information counter 118 in the performance side RAM 94 is set in the re-variation performance information counter 123 provided in the performance side RAM 94. - 特許庁The re-variation effect information counter 123 is a counter that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp the re-variation effect table that is read. Specifically, the numerical information set in the middle stop effect information counter 118 is read, and 1 is subtracted from the numerical information. Then, if the numerical information after the subtraction of 1 is the minimum value "1" or more, the numerical information after the subtraction of 1 is set in the re-fluctuation effect information counter 123, and the numerical information after the subtraction of 1 is the minimum value. is less than "1", the numerical value information of "9", which is the maximum value, is set in the re-fluctuation effect information counter 123.

After that, "1" is set to the second synthesis flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S2614). As already explained, the second synthesis flag is a flag that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp that the second synthesis effect table should be generated. After that, the type notification effect flag corresponding to the type of bonus winning carried over is set to "1" (step S2615), and the second effect information setting process is terminated. As already explained, when bonus winning occurs, the winning flag corresponding to the type of bonus winning is set to "1" in step S2516 of the first effect information setting process (FIG. 53). In step S2615, as in step S2608 already described, the type of bonus winning carried over is grasped based on the type of winning flag set to "1", and the type notification corresponding to the type of bonus winning is made. "1" is set in the production flag. As a result, in the next and subsequent games, the type notification effect corresponding to the type of bonus win carried over will be executed.

Returning to the description of the normal effect control process (FIG. 52), after executing the first effect information setting process in step S2410, the read process of the normal base effect table is executed (step S2411). In the normal-use base effect table reading process, the normal-use base effect table corresponding to the type information set in the base effect information counter 115 in the effect-side RAM 94 is read from the normal-use base effect table storage area 93a of the effect-side ROM 93. The normal base effect table is read out to the 0th layer LY0 of the readout area 94a. After that, the base effect information counter 115 is cleared to "0".

After executing the reading process of the normal base effect table in step S2411, it is determined whether or not the first synthesis flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2412). When "1" is set to the first synthesis flag (step S2412: YES), the first synthesis table is read out from the synthesis table storage area 93n of the effect side ROM 93 (step S2413), and the first synthesis effect A first synthesizing process for generating a table is executed (step S2414).

In the first synthesizing process in step S2414, the symbol variation effect table is read from the symbol variation effect table storage area 93b of the effect side ROM 93, and the effect data set in the symbol variation effect table is read out in step S2413. It is set for the pointer information of "0" to "p" in the synthesis table. After that, the effective information effect table is read from the effective information effect table storage area 93c of the effect side ROM 93, and the effect data set in the effective information effect table is transferred to the pointers "p+1" to "q" of the first synthesis table. Set for information. After that, the left stop effect table corresponding to the type information set in the left stop effect information counter 116 in the effect side RAM 94 is read from the left stop effect table storage area 93d of the effect side ROM 93, and set in the left stop effect table. The present data for effect is set for the pointer information of "q+1" to "r" in the first synthesis table. After that, the right stop effect table corresponding to the type information set in the right stop effect information counter 117 in the effect side RAM 94 is read from the right stop effect table storage area 93e of the effect side ROM 93, and set in the right stop effect table. The address information and setting destination information of the display data among the present effect data are set with respect to the pointer information of "r+1" to "s" of the first synthesis table. In addition, the reach notification effect table is read from the reach notification effect table storage area 93f of the effect side ROM 93, and the sound data set in the reach notification effect table is used as the pointer information of "r+1" to "s" in the first synthesis table. set for As a result, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed so that the reach notification sound is output in accordance with the right stop effect. After that, the middle stop effect table corresponding to the type information set in the middle stop effect information counter 118 in the effect side RAM 94 is read out from the middle stop effect table storage area 93h of the effect side ROM 93, and set in the middle stop effect table. The effect data present is set for the pointer information of "s+1" to "t" in the first synthesis table. Thereafter, the first expected effect table corresponding to the type information set in the first expected effect information counter 119 in the effect side RAM 94 is read out from the first expected effect table storage area 93i of the effect side ROM 93, and the first expected effect table is read. is set to the pointer information of "t+1" to "u" of the first synthesizing table. Thereafter, the second expected effect table corresponding to the type information set in the second expected effect information counter 121 in the effect side RAM 94 is read from the second expected effect table storage area 93k of the effect side ROM 93, and the second expected effect table is read. is set to the pointer information of "u+1" to "v" in the first synthesis table. Thereby, the first synthetic effect table is generated. After that, the left stop effect information counter 116, the right stop effect information counter 117, the middle stop effect information counter 118, the first expected effect information counter 119, and the second expected effect information counter 121 in the effect side RAM 94 are cleared to "0".

After that, read processing of the first synthetic effect table is executed (step S2415), and the normal effect control processing is terminated. In the reading process of the first synthesized effect table in step S2415, the first synthesized effect table generated in step S2414 is read out to the first layer LY1 in the read area 94a.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2412 that the first synthesis flag is not set to "1", it is determined whether or not the second synthesis flag in the effect-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2416). When "1" is set to the second synthesis flag (step S2416: YES), the second synthesis table is read out from the synthesis table storage area 93n of the effect side ROM 93 (step S2417), and the second synthesis effect A second synthesizing process for generating a table is executed (step S2418).

In the second synthesizing process in step S2418, the symbol variation effect table is read from the symbol variation effect table storage area 93b of the effect side ROM 93, and the effect data set in the symbol variation effect table is read out in step S2417. It is set for the pointer information of "0" to "p" in the synthesis table. After that, the effective information effect table is read from the effective information effect table storage area 93c of the effect side ROM 93, and the effect data set in the effective information effect table is transferred to the pointers "p+1" to "q" of the second synthesis table. Set for information. After that, the left stop effect table corresponding to the type information set in the left stop effect information counter 116 in the effect side RAM 94 is read from the left stop effect table storage area 93d of the effect side ROM 93, and set in the left stop effect table. The effect data present is set for the pointer information of "q+1" to "r" in the second synthesis table. After that, the right stop effect table corresponding to the type information set in the right stop effect information counter 117 in the effect side RAM 94 is read from the right stop effect table storage area 93e of the effect side ROM 93, and set in the right stop effect table. The address information and setting destination information of the display data among the present effect data are set with respect to the pointer information of "r+1" to "s" of the second synthesis table. Also, the long-press notification effect table is read from the long-press notification effect table storage area 93g of the effect-side ROM 93, and the sound data set in the long-press effect table is stored as pointers "r+1" to "s" in the second synthesis table. Set for information. As a result, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed so that the long-press notification sound is output in accordance with the right stop effect. After that, the middle stop effect table corresponding to the type information set in the middle stop effect information counter 118 in the effect side RAM 94 is read out from the middle stop effect table storage area 93h of the effect side ROM 93, and set in the middle stop effect table. The effect data present is set for the pointer information of "s+1" to "t" in the second synthesis table. Thereafter, the first expected effect table corresponding to the type information set in the first expected effect information counter 119 in the effect side RAM 94 is read out from the first expected effect table storage area 93i of the effect side ROM 93, and the first expected effect table is read. is set to the pointer information of "t+1" to "u" of the second synthesizing table. Thereafter, the second expected effect table corresponding to the type information set in the second expected effect information counter 121 in the effect side RAM 94 is read out from the second expected effect table storage area 93k of the effect side ROM 93, and the second expected effect table is read. is set to the pointer information of "u+1" to "v" in the second synthesis table. Thereafter, the re-variation performance table corresponding to the type information set in the re-variation performance information counter 123 in the performance-side RAM 94 is read out from the re-variation performance table storage area 93m of the performance-side ROM 93, and the performance execution area of the re-variation performance table. is set to the pointer information of "v+1" to "w" in the second synthesis table. Thereby, a second synthetic effect table is generated. After that, the left stop effect information counter 116, the right stop effect information counter 117, the middle stop effect information counter 118, the first expected effect information counter 119, the second expected effect information counter 121, and the re-varying effect information counter 123 in the effect side RAM 94 to "0".

After that, read processing of the second synthetic effect table is executed (step S2419), and the normal effect control processing is terminated. In the process of reading out the second synthesized effect table in step S2419, the second synthesized effect table generated in step S2418 is read out to the first layer LY1 in the readout area 94a.

On the other hand, if "1" is not set to either the first synthesis flag or the second synthesis flag (step S2412: NO, step S2416: NO), the reading process of the symbol variation effect table is executed ( Step S2420), the production control process for normal use is terminated. In the reading process of the symbol variation effect table, the symbol variation effect table stored in the symbol variation effect table storage area 93b of the effect side ROM 93 is read to the first layer LY1 of the read area 94a.

If it is determined in step S2408 that the game start command has not been received, readout processing is executed (step S2421), and the normal effect control processing ends. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing read processing.

In the reading process, first, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to either the first synthesis flag or the second synthesis flag in the effect-side RAM 94 (step S2701). When "1" is set to either the first synthesis flag or the second synthesis flag (step S2701: YES), the first synthesis effect table or the second synthesis effect table is the first synthesis effect table in the readout area 94a. This means that the data is read out to layer LY1. In this case, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding effect table based on the occurrence of the second to fifth triggers, the process for reading is terminated without executing the processes after step S2702.

On the other hand, if neither the first synthesis flag nor the second synthesis flag is set to "1" (step S2701: NO), it is determined whether or not a constant speed rotation start command has been received from the main MPU 72. (step S2702). When the constant speed rotation start command is received (step S2702: YES), that is, when the second trigger occurs, read processing of the effective notification effect table is executed (step S2703), and this read processing ends. . In the effective information effect table reading process, the effective information effect table stored in the effective information effect table storage area 93c of the effect side ROM 93 is read to the second layer LY2 of the read area 94a.

If a negative determination is made in step S2702, is it received from the main MPU 72 a stop instruction command in which information indicating that the ON operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the first stop has been performed? It is determined whether or not (step S2704). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2704, that is, when the third trigger occurs, readout processing of the left stop effect table is executed (step S2705), and this readout processing ends. In the process of reading out the left stop effect table, the left stop effect information counter 116 of the effect side RAM 94 is set from nine types of left stop effect tables stored in the left stop effect table storage area 93 d of the effect side ROM 93 . A left stop effect table corresponding to the type information is specified. After that, the specified left stop effect table is read out to the third layer LY3 in the readout area 94a. Then, the left stop effect information counter 116 is cleared to "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S2704, is it received from the main MPU 72 a stop command command in which information indicating that the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the second stop have been turned on? It is determined whether or not (step S2706). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2706, that is, when the fourth opportunity occurs, a process of reading the right stop effect table is executed (step S2707). In the process of reading out the right stop effect table, the right stop effect information counter 117 of the effect side RAM 94 is set from among nine types of right stop effect tables stored in the right stop effect table storage area 93e of the effect side ROM 93. A right stop effect table corresponding to the type information is specified. After that, the specified right stop effect table is read to the fourth layer LY4 in the readout area 94a. Then, the right stop effect information counter 117 is cleared to "0".

After that, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the reach notification effect flag in the effect side RAM 94 (step S2708). When "1" is set to the ready-to-reach notification effect flag (step S2708: YES), readout processing of the ready-to-reach notification effect table is executed (step S2709), and this readout processing ends. In read processing of the reach notification effect table, the reach notification effect table stored in the reach notification effect table storage area 93f of the effect side ROM 93 is read to the fifth layer LY5 in the read area 94a. Then, the ready-to-reach notification effect flag is cleared to "0".

When a negative determination is made in step S2708, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the long press notification effect flag in the effect side RAM 94 (step S2710). When the long-press notification effect flag is set to "1" (step S2710: YES), read processing of the long-press notification effect table is executed (step S2711), and this read-out processing ends. In the long-press notification effect table reading process, the ready-to-win notification effect table stored in the long-press notification effect table storage area 93g of the effect-side ROM 93 is read to the fifth layer LY5 in the read area 94a. Then, the long press notification effect flag is cleared to "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S2706, is it received from the main MPU 72 a stop command command in which information indicating that the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop have been turned on? It is determined whether or not (step S2712). If a negative determination is made in step S2712, this readout process ends. On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S2712, that is, when the fifth opportunity occurs, a reading process of the middle stop effect table is executed (step S2713). In the process of reading out the middle stop effect table, the middle stop effect information counter 118 is set in the effect side RAM 94 from nine types of middle stop effect tables stored in the middle stop effect table storage area 93h of the effect side ROM 93. A mid-stop effect table corresponding to the type information is specified. After that, the specified middle stop effect table is read out to the readout area 94a. Specifically, when the data table (reach notification effect table) has already been read to the fifth layer LY5, the middle stop effect table is read to the sixth layer LY6, and the data table is read to the fifth layer LY5. If not, the middle stop effect table is read out on the fifth layer LY5. After that, the middle stop effect information counter 118 is cleared to "0".

After that, reading processing of the first expected effect table is executed (step S2714). In the reading process of the first expected effect table, when the value of the first expected effect information counter 119 in the effect side RAM 94 is equal to or greater than "1", 5 is stored in the first expected effect table storage area 93i of the effect side ROM 93. A first expected effect table corresponding to the value of the first expected effect information counter 119 is specified from among the first expected effect tables of the type. After that, the specified first expected effect table is read out to the seventh layer LY7 of the readout area 94a. Then, the value of the first expected effect information counter 119 is cleared to "0". On the other hand, when the value of the first expected effect information counter 119 is "0", the first expected effect table is not read.

After that, reading processing of the bonus notification effect table is executed (step S2715), and this reading processing ends. In the bonus notification effect table reading process, when the bonus notification effect flag 122 in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1", the bonus notification effect table stored in the bonus notification effect table storage area 93j of the effect side ROM 93 is read. It is read out to the eighth layer LY8 of the readout area 94a. Then, the value of the bonus notification effect flag 122 is cleared to "0". On the other hand, when the bonus notification effect flag 122 is not set to "1", the bonus notification effect table is not read.

Next, the winning result handling process executed by the effect-side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 56(a). Note that the winning result corresponding process is executed in step S2405 of the normal effect control process (FIG. 52).

In the winning result handling process, first, based on the winning result command received from the main MPU 72, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning corresponding to the bonus winning that has occurred has been established (step S2801). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the current game is a target game for execution of the bonus notification effect (step S2802). Specifically, when the bonus notification effect flag 122 (FIG. 41(b)) in the effect-side RAM 94 is set to "1", it is determined that the current game is the target game for executing the bonus notification effect. Then, if the game is a target game for execution of the bonus notification effect (step S2802: YES), processing for canceling the bonus notification effect is executed (step S2803). In the process of canceling the bonus notification effect, the eighth layer LY8 from which the bonus notification effect table is read out in the reading area 94a is cleared. As a result, the bonus notification effect is canceled. Also, in the bonus notification effect stop processing (step S2803), the bonus notification effect flag 122 is cleared to "0". As described above, in the game targeted for execution of the bonus notification effect, the bonus notification effect is canceled when the bonus winning corresponding to the bonus winning occurring this time is established.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2802, it is determined whether or not the current game is the execution target game of the re-variation effect (step S2804). Specifically, when the second synthesis flag in the effect-side RAM 94 is set to "1", it is determined that the game is a target game for execution of the re-variation effect. Then, if the game is a target game for execution of the re-variation effect (step S2804: YES), a process of canceling the re-variation effect is executed (step S2805). In the process of canceling the re-variation effect, the effect data set in the range of the pointer information of "v+1" to "w" in the second synthetic effect table read out to the first layer LY1 of the readout area 94a is delete. As already described with reference to FIG. 45, the range of pointer information from "v+1" to "w" in the second synthetic effect table includes address information and setting destination information of display data for executing the re-fluctuation effect. , sound data, light emission data, and address information of the drive table are set. By deleting these performance data, the re-variation performance is cancelled. In this way, in the game targeted for execution of the re-variation effect, the re-variation effect is canceled when the bonus winning corresponding to the carried-over bonus win is established.

As already explained, in the reel control process (FIG. 24), after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has stopped (step S611: YES), the winning result is sent from the main MPU 72 to the production MPU 92 in step S615. Command is sent. Then, in the normal effect control process (FIG. 52), when the effect side MPU 92 receives the winning result command (step S2404: YES), the winning result corresponding process (FIG. 56(a)) is executed in step S2405. be done. The time required from when the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop are turned ON until the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped and all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. is maximum when four-frame slippage occurs, and is 190 milliseconds at maximum. On the other hand, in the game subject to execution of the re-variation effect, when the ON operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop is performed, the intermediate stop effect is executed, and after the end of the intermediate stop effect, the first expected effect is executed. is executed. As already explained, the execution period of the middle stop effect is 1 second longer than 190 milliseconds. Also, as already explained, the condition is that the execution period of the first expected effect reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second), and that the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop is performed. The second expected performance is executed when both the conditions and the conditions are satisfied, and the re-variation performance is executed after the second expected performance is finished. The time required from the ON operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop to the execution of the re-fluctuation effect stop processing (step S2805) is the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop. Since it is shorter than the time required from the ON operation to the start of the re-variation effect, the re-variation effect stop processing (step S2805) is executed at the timing before the re-variation effect is started. It is possible to cancel the execution of the re-variation effect. This prevents the execution of the re-variation effect from being stopped during the execution of the re-variation effect.

When the process of step S2803 is performed, when a negative determination is made in step S2804, or when the process of step S2805 is performed, the role item setting process (FIG. 78) at the time of bonus winning, which will be described later, is executed. (Step S2806), the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated.

Next, the effect setting process at the start of the bonus, which is executed by the effect side MPU 92, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 56(b). Incidentally, the effect setting process at the start of the bonus is executed in step S2403 of the normal effect control process (FIG. 52) when the effect side MPU 92 receives a bonus start command from the main side MPU 72.

In the effect setting process at the start of the bonus, effect end processing is first executed (step S2901). In the effect ending process, the 0th layer LY0 from which the base effect table is read in the readout area 94a and the 1st to 8th layers LY1 to LY8 from which various effect tables are read are cleared. Also, the display data for the normal base effect set in the display setting area 113 and the display data for various effects are cleared. As a result, the normal base effect and various effects that have been executed in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 are finished.

After that, the type of bonus start effect corresponding to the bonus start command received from the main side MPU 72 is grasped (step S2902), and the bonus start effect table for executing the grasped bonus start effect is read out from the effect side ROM 93. 94a (step S2903). The bonus start effect table is read to the 0th layer LY0. The bonus start effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 by controlling the effect execution in the effect side MPU 92 according to the read bonus start effect table. After that, the type notification effect flag in the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2904), and the effect setting process at the start of this bonus ends. By clearing the type notification effect flag to "0" in step S2904, the type notification effect will not be executed in the next and subsequent games.

As described above, in the normal game state ST1, a plurality of effects are executed in parallel based on the occurrence of the first to sixth opportunities during one game. The number of combinations of the plurality of effects is enormous, and if the effect table corresponding to all the combinations of the plurality of effects is stored in advance in the effect side ROM 93, the effect for storing the effect table is provided. The storage capacity of the side ROM 93 will increase. On the other hand, when the first synthetic effect table and the second synthetic effect table are not generated, the various effect tables for executing various effects are individually stored in different layers LYn (n is any of 0 to 11) in the readout area 94a. (integer), and various effects are executed in parallel according to various effect tables. Further, when the first synthesized effect table or the second synthesized effect table is generated, the normal base effect executed according to the normal base effect table read to the 0th layer LY0 and the normal base effect read to the first layer LY1 Various effects executed according to the first synthesized effect table or the second synthesized effect table are executed in parallel. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of executable combinations of effects while suppressing an increase in the storage capacity of the effect-side ROM 93 for storing the effect table.

When the second composite effect table is generated, the symbol variation effect table, the effective notification effect table, the left stop effect table, the right stop effect table, the long press notification effect table, the intermediate stop effect table, the first expected effect table, the second The effect data of the expected effect table and the re-fluctuation effect table are read out to one layer LYn (specifically, the first layer LY1). As already explained, in the reading area 94a, there are a layer (0th layer LY0) from which the normal base effect table is read, a layer (1st to 8th layers LY1 to LY8) from which various effect tables are read, and various notifications. A layer (ninth to tenth layers LY9 to LY10) from which the table is read and a layer (eleventh layer LY11) from which the driving table of the accessory 75 is read are provided. If the normal base effect table and the nine types of effect tables are read out to different layers LYn in the game to be executed with the re-fluctuation effect, the layer to be provided in the readout area 94a to enable these effect tables to be read out. The number of LYn will increase. On the other hand, in the game targeted for execution of the re-variation effect, the second synthetic effect table is generated and read out to the first layer LY1. The maximum number of production tables that can be used has been reduced. This reduces the number of layers LYn in the readout area 94a.

There is one type of first synthetic effect table stored in the effect-side ROM 93, and the first synthetic effect table uses the one type of effect data set in each effect table to be executed in each game. It is created by setting it in the first synthesis table. There is one type of second synthesis table stored in the effect-side ROM 93, and the second synthesis effect table stores effect data set in each effect table to be executed in each game. It is created by setting the type in the second synthesis table. Since the types of the first synthesis table and the second synthesis table, which are stored in advance in the effect side ROM 93 in order to generate the first synthesis effect table and the second synthesis effect table, are respectively one type, the synthesis table It is possible to reduce the storage capacity in the performance-side ROM 93 for storing.

The normal base effect table for executing the normal base effect is read out to the 0th layer LY0 different from the first layer LY1 from which the first synthesized effect table or the second synthesized effect table is read. Therefore, even if the pointer information to be referenced in the first layer LY1 jumps, the pointer information to be referenced in the 0th layer LY0 is not affected. As a result, the display of the background image G4 and the output of the normal bass music in the normal base effect can be continuously executed, and various effects can be started in response to the occurrence of the first to sixth triggers. It's becoming

By combining five types of first expected effect tables and five types of second expected effect tables stored in the effect-side ROM 93 to generate a second synthetic effect table, all combinations (specifically 25 types), while suppressing an increase in the storage capacity of the performance side ROM 93 for storing the performance table, compared with the configuration in which the performance table corresponding to the first expected performance is stored in advance. and the variation of the combination of the second expected effect can be increased.

The second expected performance is started based on both the condition that the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second) and the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs. be done. If the second expected performance is started only on the condition of the occurrence of the sixth opportunity, the second expected performance starts before the first expected performance when the sixth opportunity occurs during execution of the middle stop performance. It will be done. The first expectation performance and the second expectation performance in a configuration in which the expectation level of bonus winning is reported in the first expectation performance and the expectation level of BB winning in the case where the bonus winning occurs in the second expectation performance is reported. If the order of is reversed, the player may be confused. On the other hand, based on both the condition that the execution period of the first expected effect reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second) and the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs, the second By adopting a configuration in which two expected effects are started, it is possible to execute the first expected effect and the second expected effect in the order of the first expected effect → the second expected effect. This prevents the order of the second expected performance from being reversed.

When the period from the ON operation to the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop is short, and the sixth opportunity occurs at the timing before the execution period of the first expected effect reaches the predetermined period. Even if there is, a predetermined period (specifically, one second) can be secured as the execution period of the first expected effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution period of the first expected effect from becoming so short that the content of the first expected effect cannot be understood.

The period from the ON operation to the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop is long, and at the timing after the execution period of the first expected effect reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second) When the 6 opportunity occurs, the second expectation effect can be started without delay based on the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42-44. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate by associating the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop with the start of the second expected effect in a manner that is easy for the player to understand. Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

While securing the execution period of the first expected performance over a predetermined period (specifically, one second), the second expected performance is started without delay when the sixth opportunity occurs. Thus, the player can be made to feel that the second expected effect has started with the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop. Therefore, after long pressing the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop, the player should turn off the stop buttons 42 to 44 while expecting the second expected effect to occur. Become. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In a game in which a second expected effect is performed, a first synthesized effect table or a second synthesized effect table including effect data for executing the first expected effect and effect data for executing the second expected effect. is generated, and the first synthetic effect table or the second synthetic effect table is read into one layer (specifically, the first layer LY1). If the first expected effect table and the second expected effect table are read in different layers LYn, when the second expected effect table is read based on the occurrence of the sixth opportunity, the execution period of the first expected effect is predetermined. period (specifically, one second) has been reached. On the other hand, a first synthesized effect table or a second synthesized effect table including effect data for executing the first expected effect and effect data for executing the second expected effect is placed on the first layer LY1. , the execution period of the first expected effect has reached a predetermined period (specifically, one second). To start a second expected performance when both the condition that the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second) and the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs are satisfied. can be done. As a result, it is possible to simplify the configuration for ensuring a predetermined period (specifically, one second) as the execution period of the first expected effect.

When both the condition that the execution period of the first expected effect reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second) and the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs, display for the second expected effect Data is set in the fourth effect area 113e of the display setting area 113. FIG. In this case, when the display data for the first expected effect remains in the fourth effect area 113e, the display data is deleted and the display data for the second expected effect is set. In the display setting area 113, as the area in which the display data for the second expected effect is set, the same area as the area in which the display data for the first expected effect is set (fourth effect area 113e) is provided. By being set, the second expected effect can be started while the effect-side MPU 92 does not need to grasp the progress of the first expected effect.

The layer LYn from which the medium stop effect table is read out in the readout area 94a varies depending on whether or not there is a ready-to-win notification effect. In addition, the effect table including the effect data of the symbol variation effect table, the effect table including the effect data of the left stop effect table, the effect table including the effect data of the right stop effect table, and the effect data of the reach notification effect table Layer LYn ( n is any integer from 0 to 11) varies depending on whether or not the first synthetic effect table and the second synthetic effect table are generated. Setting destination information of the display data is set in these effect tables in association with the address information of the display data. As a result, even if the reading destination of these effect tables changes, it is possible to prevent the setting destination of the display data in the display setting area 113 from changing, and the data is displayed on the image display device 63. It is possible to prevent the anteroposterior relationship of the images from changing.

A blank area in which performance data is not set is provided at the beginning of the first expected performance table, and performance execution in which performance data for performing the first expected performance is set after the blank area. area is provided. Thus, in a game in which the second expected effect is not executed, the first expected effect is executed while the intermediate stop effect is being executed while the intermediate stop effect table and the first expected effect table are read based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity. You can prevent it from being broken. In the game in which the second expected effect is executed, the effect execution area excluding the blank area of the first expected effect table is set in the first synthesized effect table or the second synthesized effect table. As a result, it is possible to start the first expected effect without causing a delay at the end timing of the intermediate stop effect.

<About the configuration for executing the effect in the ART state ST6>
Next, various effects executed in the ART state ST6 will be described. In the ART state ST6, when the effect side MPU 92 receives a game start command from the main side MPU 72, the ART base effect and the ART normal effect are started. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 in the ART base effect and the ART normal effect.

In the ART bass effect, a background image G16 is displayed on the image display device 63 and the ART bass music is output from the speaker 62 as shown in FIG. In the normal ART effect, as shown in FIG. 57, a moving image display is performed in which an ART character image G17 is displayed on the image display device 63, and an effect sound for effect is output from the speaker 62 in accordance with the progress of the moving image display. be done. The normal effect for ART is executed concurrently with the base effect for ART. The background image G16 is set in the background display layer 101 (Fig. 38), and the ART character image G17 is set in the first effect display layer 102 (Fig. 38). As already explained, in the display data created by the VDP 95 in the frame area of the video RAM 96 , the image of the first effect display layer 102 is set closer to the screen than the image of the background display layer 101 . Therefore, the ART character image G17 is displayed closer to the screen than the background image G16.

In the ART state ST6, the number of continued games is displayed. In the display of the number of continuous games, a continuous game number image G18 indicating the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. The number of games indicated by the number-of-continued-games image G18 is decremented by one each time one game is completed. The number-of-continued-games image G18 is set in the third effect display layer 104 (FIG. 38), and displayed closer to the screen than the background image G16 and the ART character image G17.

In the ART state ST6, based on the fact that the effect-side MPU 92 receives the add-on command during ART from the main-side MPU 72, the add-on main effect and the add-on sub effect are simultaneously started. The add-on main effect and the add-on sub effect are executed only when an add-on win occurs. As already explained, in the present embodiment, there are a first add-on win with an add-on game number of "50" and a second add-on win with an add-on game number of "100". The add-on main effect is an effect that suggests the number of add-on games for the add-on winning that occurred this time. FIGS. 58(a) to 58(c) and FIGS. 59(a) to 59(c) are explanations for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 in the added main effect and the added sub effect in the ART state ST6. It is a diagram.

In the additional main effect, as shown in FIG. 58(a), in the central display area 132, which is a central partial area of the image display device 63, the first additional character is displayed for a predetermined period (specifically, three seconds). A moving image display is performed in which the image G20 and the second superimposed character image G21 are displayed. The moving image has effects suggesting the number of added games, and the moving image ends with either the first added character image G20 or the second added character image G21 being displayed. When the moving image ends in a state where only the first addition character image G20 is displayed, it is suggested that the first addition winning with the number of addition games "50" has occurred, and the second addition character image G21. When the moving image ends in a state in which only is displayed, it is suggested that a second additional win with the number of additional games of "100" has occurred. The player can grasp the number of additional games by confirming the types of the additional character images G20 and G21 displayed at the end of the moving image. The superimposed character images G20 and G21 are set in the second effect display layer 103 (FIG. 38) and displayed closer to the screen than the background image G16 and the ART character image G17.

As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58(a), at the bottom of the image display device 63 is provided a sub-display area 131 for executing an additional sub-effect. Until then, the gauge frame image G19 is displayed in the sub-display area 131. FIG. The gauge frame image G19 is composed of a horizontally long rectangular gauge display portion G19a in which gauge display is performed, and an outer frame portion G19b displayed around the gauge display portion G19a. The gauge frame image G19 is set in the fourth effect display layer 105 (FIG. 38) and displayed closer to the screen than the background image G16 and the ART character image G17.

In the additional sub effect, as shown in FIG. 58(a), gauge blinking display is performed in which the unit gauge image G22 is blinked in the gauge display portion G19a, and as shown in FIGS. 58(b) and 58(c). As shown, after the flashing display of the gauge ends, the gauge increase display is performed in which the number and color of the unit gauge images G22 are updated step by step. The blinking display of the gauge is started simultaneously with the additional main effect, and is performed for a predetermined period (specifically, 3 seconds) during which the additional main effect is executed. The gauge increase display is performed in a manner of notifying the number of games for which additional wins have occurred this time. When the first add-on character image G20 is displayed last in the moving image of the added main effect, the gauge increase display is executed in a mode of notifying that the number of added games is "50", and the moving image of the added main effect is executed. In the case where the second added character image G21 is displayed last, the gauge increase display is executed in a mode informing that the added game number is "100".

The number of additional games in the additional sub effect is indicated by the number and color of the unit gauge images G22 displayed on the gauge display portion G19a. As shown in FIG. 58(b), the unit gauge image G22 is a vertically long rectangular image, and 30 unit gauge images G22 can be displayed side by side in the gauge display section G19a. The unit gauge image G22 is set in the fifth effect display layer 106 and displayed closer to the screen than the gauge display portion G19a.

The state in which "n" (n is an integer from 1 to 30) yellow unit gauge images G22 are arranged in the horizontal direction in the gauge display area G19a corresponds to the state in which the number of additional games is "n×10". , the state in which "n" (n is an integer from 1 to 30) red unit gauge images G22 are lined up in the horizontal direction corresponds to the state in which the number of additional games is "n×10+300", and the purple units The state in which "n" (n is an integer from 1 to 30) gauge images G22 are arranged in the horizontal direction corresponds to the state in which the number of additional games is "n×10+600". The state in which "n" pieces (n is an integer from 1 to 30) are lined up in the horizontal direction corresponds to the state in which the number of additional games is "n×10+900". The state in which n" (n is an integer from 1 to 30) are lined up corresponds to the state in which the number of additional games is "n×10+1200". The gauge display portion G19a is set to gray, so that the unit gauge images G22 of each color displayed on the front side of the gauge display portion G19a can be easily identified.

If the number of additional games is indicated only by the number of unit gauge images G22, the maximum number of unit gauge images G22 that can be displayed in the gauge display section G19a increases, so it is necessary to set the horizontal dimension of the unit gauge images G22 small. occur. With this configuration, when the number of additional games in the generated additional winning is small, the gauge increase display becomes difficult to see. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the number and color of the unit gauge images G22 are used to indicate the number of games to be added. can be made easy to see.

In the gauge flashing display when the effect side MPU 92 receives the add-on command during ART in a situation where the add-on sub effect is not being executed, as shown in FIG. A unit gauge image G22 is displayed, and blinking display of the unit gauge image G22 is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 58(b), in the gauge increase display that is performed after the gauge flashing display is completed, a unit gauge image of the number and color corresponding to the number of additional games (for example, "50") in the current additional winning is displayed. The number and color of the unit gauge images G22 displayed in the gauge display portion G19a are updated step by step until G22 is displayed in the gauge display portion G19a. Then, as shown in FIG. 58(c), a unit gauge image G22 of the number and color corresponding to the current number of additional games ("50" in FIG. 58(c)) is displayed in the gauge display section G19a. After that, the unit gauge image G22 is continuously displayed for one second. As a result, the player is shown that the number of additional games for the additional winning that occurred this time is "50".

After that, the unit gauge image G22 displayed in the gauge display portion G19a disappears, and the additional sub effect ends. Although not shown, when the additional sub-effect ends, the sub-display area 131 of the image display device 63 displays only the gauge frame image G19. Further, the number of additional games "50" is added to the number of continuous games "50" displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 63 at the end of the additional sub effect, and the number is updated to "100".

The gauge increase display includes a high-speed display in which the number and color of the unit gauge images G22 displayed in the gauge display portion G19a are updated at intervals of 200 milliseconds, and a unit gauge image G22 displayed in the gauge display portion G19a. There is a slow display where the numbers and colors are updated at 400 millisecond intervals. In high-speed display, a new yellow unit gauge image G22 is displayed on the right side of the currently displayed unit gauge image G22 at intervals of 200 milliseconds as shown in FIGS. 58(b) and 58(c). being added. In low-speed display, a new yellow unit gauge image is displayed on the right side of the currently displayed unit gauge image G22 at intervals of 400 milliseconds, as shown in FIGS. 58(b) and 58(c). G22 is added. In this manner, in the gauge increase display, the lateral dimension of the gauge as a whole is displayed to increase rightward from the left end of the gauge display portion G19a.

The execution period of the gauge increase display varies according to the number of additional games, and the greater the number of additional games, the longer the execution period of the gauge increase display. If the number of added games is "50", in the high-speed display, after 800 milliseconds from the start of the gauge increase display, a unit gauge image of the number and color corresponding to the number of added games this time or the total number of added games up to this time is displayed. G22 is displayed, and after this state continues for one second, the gauge increase display ends. On the other hand, in the low-speed display, the time required from the start of the gauge increase display until the unit gauge image G22 of the number and color corresponding to the current number of added games or the total number of added games up to this time is displayed. is 1.6 seconds. Further, when the number of added games is "100", in the high-speed display, the number and color corresponding to the current number of added games or the total number of added games up to this time is displayed 1.8 seconds after the gauge increase display is started. A state in which the unit gauge image G22 is displayed is reached, and after this state continues for one second, the gauge increase display ends. On the other hand, in the low-speed display, the time required from the start of the gauge increase display until the unit gauge image G22 of the number and color corresponding to the current number of added games or the total number of added games up to this time is displayed. is 1.6 seconds.

While the additional main effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 58(a), the image display device 63 blinks the gauge in the ART base effect, the ART normal effect, the additional main effect, and the additional sub effect. are being executed at the same time. After that, when the gauge increase display in the additional sub effect is started, as shown in FIG. It is in running state.

The value of the number of continuous games displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 63 is the value after the number of additional games in the additional winning that triggered the additional sub-effect is added at the end of the gauge increase display in the additional sub-effect. value. Until the gauge increase display ends, the number of games to be added this time is not known even by looking at the continuous game number image G18. there is

The main side MPU 72 does not set numerical information to the freeze counter in the main side RAM 74 at the start of the additional main effect and the additional sub effect. A player who is in a hurry in a situation such as the end of business hours is approaching can start the next game by operating the start lever 41 during the additional main performance and the additional sub performance. When the start lever 41 is operated to start the next game during the execution of the additional main effect, the effect side MPU 92 receives the game start command during the execution of the additional main effect. In this case, in the image display device 63, the additional main effect being executed in the central display area 132 (FIG. 58(a)) ends halfway, and a new base effect for ART and ART corresponding to the operation of the start lever 41 are executed. Normal production starts. In this case, since the types of the added character images G20 and G21 displayed last in the animation of the added main effect cannot be confirmed, the number of added games cannot be grasped based on the added main effect. On the other hand, the additional sub effect being executed in the sub display area 131 (FIG. 58(a)) is continuously executed. Even if the start lever 41 is operated and the additional main performance being executed ends, the additional sub performance is continuously displayed in parallel with the newly started ART base performance and ART normal performance. , not only the result of the additional winning, but also a part of the performance (specifically, the additional sub-performance) regarding the additional winning can be confirmed.

When the performance-side MPU 92 does not receive the game start command during execution of the additional main effect, the animation display of the additional main effect is performed to the end without ending in the middle. As already explained, when the moving picture display of the added main effect is performed to the end, the number of added games can be grasped based on the types of the added character images G20 and G21 displayed at the end of the moving picture. In this case, high-speed display is performed in which the number and color of the unit gauge images G22 are updated at intervals of 200 milliseconds. In this way, the gauge increase display that is performed after the additional game number is suggested is a high-speed display. As a result, the execution period of the gauge increase display is shortened.

On the other hand, when the effect-side MPU 92 receives the game start command during the execution of the additional main effect, the moving image display of the additional main effect ends in the middle without being performed to the end. When the animation display of the additional main effect ends in the middle, the gauge increase display is performed without suggesting the number of additional games. In this case, low-speed display is performed in which the number and color of the unit gauge images G22 are updated at intervals of 400 milliseconds. In this way, the gauge increase display performed in a state where the number of games to be added is not indicated is slow display. As a result, it is possible to extend the display period of the gauge increase display, which is expected to be seen with the expectation that the number of additional games will be large, and increase the degree of attention to the gauge increase display.

When the performance-side MPU 92 receives the add-on command during ART in a situation where the add-on sub effect is being executed, that is, when the add-on sub effect is continuously won twice or more in a state in which the add-on sub effect is not interrupted, it is executed. The added sub-effect is ended, and a new added main effect and added sub-effect corresponding to the added winning that occurred this time are started. In the gauge blinking display of the newly started additional sub-effect, the unit gauge image G22 of the color and number corresponding to the final state of the additional sub-effect that ended in the middle of execution is blinked. Specifically, in the blinking display of the gauge of the additional sub effect corresponding to the second consecutive additional winning, the unit gauge image G22 of the number and color corresponding to the number of additional games in the first additional winning is blinked, The blinking display of the gauge of the additional sub effect corresponding to the third consecutive additional winning corresponds to the total number of additional games, which is the sum of the number of additional games in the first additional winning and the number of additional games in the second additional winning. A number and color unit gauge image G22 is blinkingly displayed. As a result, it is possible to show the final display state of the unit gauge image G22 in the additional sub-effect to the player who is watching the additional sub-effect that has ended in the middle of the execution.

When the performance-side MPU 92 receives the add-on command during ART in a situation where the add-on sub-performance is being executed, the add-on main effect based on the reception of the add-on command during ART until the end of the add-on sub effect being executed; If the configuration is such that the start of the add-on sub effect is waited, a delay occurs from the reception of the add-on command during ART to the start of the add-on main effect and the add-on sub effect. With this configuration, when additional winnings occur consecutively and delays accumulate, a situation arises in which the additional main effect and the additional sub effect corresponding to the additional winnings cannot be started during the game in which the additional winnings have occurred. There is a risk. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the additional main effect and the additional sub effect are started without delay based on the reception of the additional command during ART. To eliminate the possibility that an additional main performance and an additional sub performance corresponding to the additional winning cannot be started during a game in which the additional winning occurs even when the additional winning occurs continuously. can be done.

If additional wins occur consecutively in a manner in which the add-on sub effect is not interrupted, the gauge increase display that is performed after the gauge flashing display ends will show the total of the add-on wins that occurred consecutively prior to the current add-on win. From the state where the unit gauge image G22 of the number and color corresponding to the number of additional games is displayed, the unit gauge of number and color corresponding to the total number of games for all the consecutive additional winnings including the current additional winning. The number and color of the unit gauge images G22 displayed in the gauge display portion G19a are updated step by step until the image G22 is displayed. Then, after the unit gauge image G22 of the number and color corresponding to the total number of additional games in all consecutively generated additional winnings including the current additional winning is displayed on the gauge display portion G19a, the relevant A unit gauge image G22 is continuously displayed for one second. As a result, the player is shown the total number of add-on games in which the add-on wins are continuously generated in a manner in which the add-on sub effects are not interrupted. The unit gauge image G22 continuously displayed for one second is no longer displayed after that. After the gauge increase display ends, the sub-display area 131 is in a state where only the gauge frame image G19 is displayed.

Specifically, the total number of add-on games in the add-on wins that occurred consecutively prior to the current add-on win is "250", and the total add-on game number in the add-on wins that occurred this time is "100". 59(a), 25 yellow unit gauge images G22 corresponding to the number of additional games of "250" are displayed in the gauge display section G19a, Blinking display of these 25 yellow unit gauge images G22 is performed for a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59(b), a predetermined time interval is reached until 30 yellow unit gauge images G22 corresponding to the number of additional games of "300" are displayed on the gauge display section G19a. Then, a new yellow unit gauge image G22 is added to the right side of the currently displayed unit gauge image G22. Then, at the next update timing when 30 yellow unit gauge images G22 are displayed in the gauge display section G19a, one red unit gauge image G22 corresponding to the number of additional games "310" is displayed. It will be in the state displayed at the left end of the gauge display part G19a. Thereafter, a new red unit gauge image G22 is added to the right side of the currently displayed unit gauge image G22. Then, as shown in FIG. 59(c), five red unit gauge images G22 corresponding to the number of additional games "350" are displayed in the gauge display area G19a. A unit gauge image G22 is continuously displayed for one second. As a result, the player is informed that the total number of games for which additional wins have been generated in succession in a manner in which the additional sub effects have not been interrupted has reached "350".

After that, the unit gauge image G22 displayed in the gauge display portion G19a disappears, and the additional sub effect ends. Although not shown, when the additional sub-effect ends, the sub-display area 131 of the image display device 63 displays only the gauge frame image G19. In addition, the total number of additional games in all the additional winnings that occurred consecutively with respect to the number of continuous games "50" displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 when the additional sub-effect was terminated is changed to "350". It is added and updated to "400".

In this way, when additional winnings are continuously generated in a manner in which the additional sub effects are not interrupted, the value of the number of continuous games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is the last additional winning that occurred in succession. It is updated collectively at the end of the additional sub effect in . The value of the number of continuous games displayed on the upper left part of the image display device 63 is not updated until the last added winning extra sub performance is completed, so that the additional main performance or the additional sub performance can be added. As a configuration in which the number of games can be grasped first, it is possible to increase attention to the additional main effect and the additional sub effect.

Even in a situation where additional wins are continuously occurring, the value of the number of continued games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is subtracted by 1 each time a game is started. The value of the number of continuous games to be displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 63 becomes a value of "0" or less until the total number of additional games in consecutively generated additional winnings is added together at the end. is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 63 instead of the value less than or equal to "0". Therefore, the ART state ST6 will not continue while the number of continued games is displayed at the upper left portion of the image display device 63 and is equal to or less than "0". After the value of the number of continuous games to be displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 63 becomes "0" or less in a situation where additional winnings are continuously occurring, the additional sub performance of the last occurring additional winning is terminated. In this case, the total number of additional winning games that occurred continuously is added to the value of "0" or less, and the value of the number of continued games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is the value after the addition. value.

Next, the configuration of the performance-side ROM 93 and the performance-side RAM 94 for executing various performances in the ART state ST6 will be described. FIG. 60(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the effect-side ROM 93, and FIG. 60(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the effect-side RAM 94. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), the effect-side ROM 93 contains an ART base effect table storage area 133a, an ART normal effect table storage area 133b, an additional main effect table storage area 133c, and a high-speed first add-on sub effect table storage area. An area 133d, a high speed second addition sub effect table storage area 133e, a low speed first addition sub effect table storage area 133f and a low speed second addition sub effect table storage area 133g are provided.

This slot machine 10 has 16 types of ART base effects executed in the ART state ST6, and the 16 types of ART base effects are executed in the ART base effect table storage area 133a of the effect side ROM 93. 16 types of base effect tables for ART are stored. In addition, there are 16 types of ART normal effects executed in the ART state ST6, and 16 types of ART normal effects for executing the 16 types of ART normal effects are stored in the ART normal effect table storage area 133b of the effect side ROM 93. Types of normal effect tables for ART are stored.

As already explained, there are "50" and "100" as the number of additional games in the additional winning that occurs in the ART state ST6. There are eight types of additional main effects to be executed in the ART state ST6, and the additional main effect table storage area 133c of the effect-side ROM 93 stores information for executing the additional main effects corresponding to the number of additional games "50". Four types of additional main effect tables and four types of additional main effect tables for executing the additional main effect corresponding to the number of additional games of "100" are stored.

As already explained, there are low-speed display and high-speed display as the gauge increase display in the additional sub effect. A high-speed first addition sub-effect table storage area 133d of the effect-side ROM 93 stores a high-speed first addition sub-effect table for executing a high-speed gauge increase display with the number of additional games being "50". A high-speed second addition sub-effect table storage area 133e of the effect-side ROM 93 stores a high-speed second addition sub-effect table for executing a high-speed gauge increase display with the number of added games being "100". . In addition, in the low speed first addition sub effect table storage area 133f of the effect side ROM 93, a low speed first addition sub effect table for executing the gauge increase display of the low speed display with the number of added games being "50" is stored. In addition, in the low speed second addition sub effect table storage area 133g of the effect side ROM 93, the number of addition games is "100" and the low speed second addition sub effect table for executing the gauge increase display of the low speed display is stored. ing.

The ART bass effect table contains address information and setting destination information for display data for displaying the background image G16 on the image display device 63, and the sound of the speaker 62 so that the above-described ART bass music is output. Sound data for performing output control are set. The ART base effect table is read out to the 0th layer LY0 in the readout area 94a.

Address information and setting destination information of display data for moving image display in which the ART character image G17 is displayed on the image display device 63, and the above-described effect sound for presentation are output to the normal ART presentation table. Sound data for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62 is set as follows. The ART normal effect table is read out to the first layer LY1 in the readout area 94a.

The add-on main effect table contains address information and setting destination information of display data for displaying moving images in which the add-on character images G20 and G21 are displayed in the central display area 132 of the image display device 63, and information corresponding to the moving image display. Sound data for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62 so as to output a sound that is played, and light emission data for controlling the light emission of the upper lamp 61 so that the upper lamp 61 emits light in a manner corresponding to the moving image display. , and address information of a drive table for executing a role product motion presentation in which the spherical effect portion 77b of the role product 75 moves up and down is set. The address information of the driving table is set for the pointer information of the final stage in the additional main performance table, and the performance of the accessory action is started when the remaining execution period of the additional main performance becomes 1 second. The add-on main effect table is read out on the second layer LY2 in the readout area 94a. In addition, the details of the performance of the role product action will be described later.

In the sub-display area 131 of the image display device 63, the additional sub-effect tables (first high-speed add-on sub effect table, second high-speed add-on sub effect table, first low-speed add-on sub effect table, and second low-speed add-on sub effect table) Address information and setting destination information of display data for executing gauge flashing display in which one yellow unit gauge image G22 is displayed blinking, and address information and setting of display data for executing gauge increase display. destination information is set. The add-on sub effect table is read out to the third layer LY3.

An add-on main effect is executed according to the add-on main effect table read on the second layer LY2, and the add-on sub effect table (first high-speed add-on sub effect table, second high-speed add-on sub effect table, read on the third layer LY3) is executed. The addition sub-effect is executed according to the effect table, the first low speed addition sub-effect table, or the second low speed addition sub-effect table). Thus, according to the additional main effect table and the additional sub effect table read out to different layers LYn of the readout area 94a, the additional main effect and the additional sub effect progress in parallel.

The data structure of the add-on sub-effect table will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 61, taking the high-speed first add-on sub effect table as an example. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high speed first addition sub effect table.

In the range of pointer information "0" to "74" in the high-speed first addition sub-effect table, effect data for flashing the gauge is set. Specifically, the pointer information of "0", "25", and "50" in the high-speed first addition sub effect table is used to display one yellow unit gauge image G22 on the gauge display portion G19a. Address information (AD10(1)) of the display data and setting destination information specifying the fifth effect area 113f (FIG. 42(c)) of the display setting area 113 as the setting destination of the display data are set. It is In addition, the pointer information of "15", "40", and "65" in the additional sub effect table includes erasing data for clearing the fifth effect area 113f of the display setting area 113 and erasing data. Setting destination information indicating the fifth effect area 113f is set as data setting destination information. When erasing data is set for the pointer information to be referenced, the fifth effect area 113f is cleared and the unit gauge image G22 is no longer displayed. By alternately repeating the setting of the display data for displaying the unit gauge image G22 and the deletion of the display data, the blinking display of the gauge is performed.

When the pointer information to be referenced is "0", display data is set in the fifth effect area 113f of the display setting area 113. FIG. As a result, one yellow unit gauge image G22 is displayed on the gauge display portion G19a. In the yellow unit gauge image G22, the pointer information to be referenced changes from "25" to "40" for 0.6 seconds until the pointer information to be referenced is updated from "0" to "15". It is displayed for 0.6 seconds until it is updated and for 0.6 seconds until the pointer information to be referenced is updated from "50" to "65", while the pointer information to be referenced is displayed for "15". ” to “25”, 0.4 seconds until the reference target pointer information is updated from “40” to “50”, and the reference target pointer information is updated from “65” to “50”. It is not displayed for 0.4 seconds before being updated to "75". Therefore, in the gauge flashing display, one yellow unit gauge image G22 is flashingly displayed.

In the range of pointer information "75" to "120" in the high-speed first addition sub effect table (Fig. 61), the number and color of unit gauge images G22 displayed in the gauge display section G19a correspond to the number of added games. Address information and setting destination information of display data are set for performing gauge increase display which is updated step by step to the number and color to be used. Specifically, the address information (AD10(1)) of the display data for displaying one yellow unit gauge image G22 is set for the pointer information of "75" in the high-speed first addition sub effect table. , address information (AD10(2)) of display data for displaying two yellow unit gauge images G22 is set for the pointer information of "80", and the pointer of "85" is set. Address information (AD10(3)) of display data for displaying three yellow unit gauge images G22 is set for the information, and four yellow unit gauge images G22 are set for the pointer information "90". Address information (AD10(4)) of display data for displaying the unit gauge image G22 is set, and five yellow unit gauge images G22 are displayed for pointer information of "95". Address information (AD10(5)) of display data is set. Setting destination information indicating the fifth effect area 113f of the display setting area 113 is set for the address information of these display data. Display data for displaying the unit gauge image G22 is set in the fifth effect area 113f, and the unit gauge image G22 is set in the fifth effect display layer . As shown in FIG. 61, erasing data for clearing the fifth effect area 113f is set in the pointer information of "120" in the first additional sub effect table.

When the high-speed first addition sub effect table is read, in the gauge increase display, one yellow color is displayed for 0.2 seconds until the pointer information to be referenced is updated from "75" to "80". A unit gauge image G22 is displayed, and two yellow unit gauge images G22 are displayed for 0.2 seconds until the pointer information of the reference target is updated from "80" to "85". Three yellow unit gauge images G22 are displayed for 0.2 seconds until the pointer information is updated from "85" to "90", and the pointer information to be referenced is changed from "90" to "95". Four yellow unit gauge images G22 are displayed for 0.2 seconds until they are updated, and 5 are displayed for one second until the pointer information to be referenced is updated from "95" to "120". yellow unit gauge images G22 are displayed.

When additional winnings occur consecutively, it is set in the additional sub effect table (high speed first additional sub effect table, high speed second additional sub effect table, low speed first additional sub effect table and low speed second additional sub effect table). The address information of the display data is for displaying the gauge flashing display and the gauge increase display in a manner corresponding to the total number of additional games in the additional winning that occurred consecutively before this additional winning. It is rewritten with the address information of the data. In the present embodiment, the case where the additional winnings occur continuously means that the performance-side MPU 92 receives a new ART-in-addition command while the additional sub-effect is being executed, and multiple additional winnings are won in a manner in which the additional sub-effect is not interrupted. occurs.

Specifically, in a situation where the total number of games to be added in the consecutively occurring bonus winnings is "n" (where n is an integer equal to or greater than "50"), the number of games to be added is increased in a manner in which the additional sub effects are not interrupted. When an additional win of "50" occurs, the address information (AD10 (1 )) is rewritten to the address information of the display data for displaying the unit gauge image G22 of the number and color corresponding to the number of added games of "n". Also, the address information of the display data set in the pointer information of "75", "80", "85", "90" and "95" in the high-speed first addition sub effect table (Fig. 61) is It is rewritten to address information of display data for displaying unit gauge images G22 of numbers and colors corresponding to the number of additional games of "n+10", "n+20", "n+30", "n+40", and "n+50". For example, when "n" is "200", the state in which 20 yellow unit gauge images G22 are lined up changes to the state in which 25 yellow unit gauge images G22 are lined up in the gauge display area G19a. Until then, the gauge increase display is updated in such a manner that a new yellow unit gauge image G22 is added to the right side of the rightmost unit gauge image G22 at intervals of 200 milliseconds.

In this way, when additional winnings occur continuously in a manner in which the additional sub effects are not interrupted, the additional sub effects table (high speed first additional sub effect table, high speed second additional sub effect table, low speed first additional sub effect table, The address information of the display data set in the effect table and the low speed second additional sub effect table) is rewritten. As a result, a unit gauge image G22 of numbers and colors corresponding to the total number of additional games in the additional winnings that occurred consecutively prior to the occurrence of the additional winning that triggered the reading of the additional sub effect table is displayed. From this state to the state where the unit gauge image G22 of the number and color corresponding to the total number of additional games added to the number of additional games for the current additional winning is displayed, the unit gauge image G22 is displayed. A gauge increase display is performed in which the number and color of the unit gauge images G22 are updated at time intervals (specifically, at intervals of 200 milliseconds).

If the start lever 41 is operated before the top-up main effect ends and the top-up main effect ends in the middle, the top-up sub effect table for high-speed display read out on the third layer LY3 (high-speed 1 additional sub-effect table or high speed second additional sub-effect table) for low speed display (low speed first additional sub-effect table or low speed second additional sub-effect table) is read out. Specifically, when the high-speed first addition sub-effect table is read to the third layer LY3, the low-speed first addition sub-effect table is read to the third layer LY3, and the high-speed to the third layer LY3. When the second add-on sub effect table has been read, the low speed second add-on sub effect table is read on the third layer LY3.

When the add-on sub-effect table for low-speed display is read instead of the add-on sub-effect table for high-speed display, the value of the pointer counter PC3 in the third layer LY3 is inherited without being cleared. In this case, the display data for the additional sub-effect set in the fifth effect area 113f (FIG. 42(f)) of the display setting area 113 is not cleared. Therefore, the gauge flashing display is executed from the continuation of the gauge flashing display that has been executed halfway. Further, when the data of the high-speed display add-on sub-effect table read out to the third layer LY3 has been rewritten, each pointer information of the high-speed display add-on sub-effect table is set. The data after rewriting is set to the corresponding pointer information in the add-on sub effect table for low-speed display read out to the third layer LY3. As a result, in a situation where additional winnings are continuously occurring, the gauge in the additional sub-effect is adjusted in a manner corresponding to the total additional winning game that occurred consecutively before the current additional winning occurred. Flashing indications and increasing gauge indications can be implemented.

As shown in FIG. 60(b), the effect-side RAM 94 is provided with a display counter 134, an additional game number counter 135, and a flashing display counter 136. As shown in FIG. The display counter 134 is a counter that is decremented by one by the effect-side MPU 92 each time one game is executed in the ART state ST6. In the ART state ST6, the value set in the display counter 134 is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 63 as the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST6.

The number-of-additional-games counter 135 is a counter that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp the number of additional games generated by the additional winnings. The flashing display counter 136 is a counter that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp the total number of games of the additional wins that occurred consecutively before the current add-on win when the add-on wins occurred consecutively. be. As already explained, in the present embodiment, the case where the additional winning occurs continuously means that the effect side MPU 92 receives a new ART-in-art add-on command while the additional sub-effect is being executed, and the additional sub-effect is not interrupted. This is a case where multiple additional wins occur.

Next, a processing configuration in the effect side MPU 92 for enabling execution of various effects in the ART state ST6 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing an extraordinary effect control process executed by the effect side MPU 92. As shown in FIG. In addition, when the game state is the bonus internal state ST2, the BB state ST3, the RB state ST4, the preparation state ST5, and the ART state ST6, the non-normal effect control processing is executed in the effect side MPU 92 in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds). ) is executed in an interrupt process that is repeatedly executed.

In the non-normal effect control process, when the ending end command is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S3001: YES), the effect side ending effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3002 ). The effect-side ending effect flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify that the execution period of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 has arrived. After that, ending ending processing is executed (step S3003). In the ending ending process, a process for executing an ending effect is performed as a effect corresponding to the end of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2. The ending effect is performed by the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. FIG. In addition, in the ending end processing (step S3003), numerical information is set to the effect side effect timer counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 so that the effect side MPU 92 can grasp the end timing of the ending end effect. The value of the effect-side effect timer counter is updated in step S5705 of the history image management process (FIG. 95), which will be described later.

After that, the ART in-progress flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3004). The ART-in-progress flag indicates that the game state is any of ART state ST6, bonus internal state ST2 shifted from ART state ST6, bonus state shifted from ART state ST6, and ready state ST5 shifted after the bonus state ends. can be grasped by the effect side MPU 92. The ART in progress flag is set to “1” when the effect side MPU 92 receives an ART start command from the main side MPU 72 . In addition, the ART in-progress flag is cleared to "0" when the effect-side MPU 92 receives an ART end command or an ending end command from the main-side MPU 72 .

If a negative determination is made in step S3001, it is determined whether or not an ending effect command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3005). sets "1" to the effect side ending effect flag in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3006).

When a negative determination is made in step S3005, or when the processing of step S3006 is performed, it is determined whether or not the effect side ending effect flag is set to "1" (step S3007), and the effect side ending If the effect flag is set to "1" (step S3007: YES), an ending effect process is executed (step S3008). In the ending effect processing, processing for executing the ending effect is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3007, it is determined whether or not an ART start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3009). The ART start command is sent from the master side MPU 72 when the ART state ST6 is started as already explained. If the ART start command has been received (step S3009: YES), effect setting processing at the time of ART start is executed (step S3010). FIG. 63(a) is a flow chart showing the effect setting process at the start of ART.

In the effect setting process at the time of ART start, based on the information set in the ART start command received from the main MPU 72, it is determined whether or not the current transition to ART state ST6 corresponds to return to ART state ST6. (step S3101). If it does not correspond to the return to the ART state ST6 (step S3101: NO), the start game number (specifically 50 games) corresponding to the new start of the ART state ST6 set in the ART start command is stored in the effect side RAM 94. is added to the display counter 134 (step S3102). In this case, in the bonus state and the preparation state ST5 before the start of the ART state ST6, if the number of continued games of the ART state ST6 is not added, the value of the display counter 134 corresponds to the number of starting games. 50”. On the other hand, in the bonus state and the preparation state ST5 before the start of the ART state ST6, if the number of remaining games to be continued in the ART state ST6 is added, the number of games generated by the addition and the start game The total value of the number (“50”) is set in the display counter 134 .

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3101, or when the process of step S3102 is performed, a process for starting the display of the number of continued games is executed (step S3103). In the process for starting the number-of-continued-games display, the display data for displaying the number-of-continued-games image G18 corresponding to the current value of the display counter 134 is read from the effect-side ROM 93, and the read display data is used for display. It is set in the third effect area 113d of the setting area 113 (FIG. 42(c)). By controlling the display of the image display device 63 based on the display data, a continuous game number image G18 (FIG. 57) corresponding to the value of the display counter 134 is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 63. . In this manner, the number-of-continued-games image G18 indicating the value of the display counter 134 is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 63 as the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST6. When the previous display data is set in the third effect area 113d of the display setting area 113, the current display data is set after the third effect area 113d is cleared. As a result, the number-of-continued-games image G18 displayed on the image display device 63 is updated to a value corresponding to the value of the display counter 134 after updating.

Thereafter, a gauge frame display start process is executed (step S3104). In the process for starting the gauge frame display, the display data for displaying the gauge frame image G19 (FIG. 57) in the sub-display area 131 (FIG. 57) of the image display device 63 is read from the effect-side ROM 93, and the read display is performed. data is set in the fourth effect area 113e of the display setting area 113 (FIG. 42(b)). By controlling the display of the image display device 63 based on the display data, the display of the gauge frame image G19 in the sub-display area 131 of the image display device 63 is started.

After that, ART start effect lottery processing is executed (step S3105). In the ART start effect lottery process, first, the ART start effect lottery table is read from the effect side ROM 93 . This slot machine 10 has 16 types of ART start effects, and the effect side ROM 93 stores 16 types of ART start effect tables for executing the 16 types of ART start effects. Information of the 16 kinds of ART start effect tables is set in the ART start effect lottery table, and a numerical range for judging right or wrong is set in the information of each ART start effect table. After that, the numerical information of the random number counter which is periodically updated in the effect side RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information is collated with the read ART start effect lottery table. As a result, the ART start effect table to be read this time is specified. Specifically, the ART start rendering table in which the numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter is set is specified as the read target.

After that, type information setting processing of ART start effect is executed (step S3106). In the ART start effect type information setting process, in the case of the history storage mode, which will be described later, the ART start effect type information (any of 1 to 16) corresponding to the ART start effect table specified in the ART start effect lottery process (step S3105) numerical information) is set in the eighth history storage area RA8 in the history storage area 94b (step S3106). The history storage mode and the eighth history storage area RA8 will be described later.

Thereafter, the ART start effect table specified in the ART start effect lottery process in step S3105 is read out to the reading area 94a (step S3107), and the effect setting process at the time of this ART start ends. The ART start rendering table is read to the 0th layer LY0. ART start effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the effect in the effect side MPU 92 according to the ART start effect table read in step S3107.

Returning to the description of the non-normal effect control processing (FIG. 62), after making a negative determination in step S3009, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the ART state ST6 (step S3012). If the current game state is not the ART state ST6 (step S3012: NO), other processing for effect is executed (step S3013), and the non-normal effect control processing is terminated. In the other effect processing (step S3013), a process for controlling the execution of the effect when the game state is the bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4 or preparation state ST5 is executed. In addition, in the other effect processing (step S3013), when the effect-side MPU 92 receives a winning result command in which information indicating that the bonus prize has been established in the bonus internal state ST2 or the preparation state ST5 is set, a bonus (to be described later) is received. Executes the role item setting process (FIG. 78) at the time of winning.

If the current game state is the ART state ST6 (step S3012: YES), it is determined whether or not a game start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3014). If the game start command has been received (step S3014: YES), the game start process in ART is executed (step S3015), and the non-normal effect control process ends. FIG. 63(b) is a flow chart showing the game start processing during ART.

In the game start processing during ART, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the main effect in-progress flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3201). The main effect in-progress flag is a flag that allows the effect side MPU 92 to grasp that the additional main effect is being executed. The flag during the main effect is set to "1" at step S3404 of the process for additional effect (FIG. 65), which will be described later. Further, the flag during the main effect is cleared to "0" in step S3503 of the additional main effect ending process (step S3202) and the flag clearing process (FIG. 66(a)) described later.

If it is determined in step S3201 that the flag during the main effect is set to "1", it means that the game start command has been received while the additional main effect is being executed, so the end processing of the additional main effect is executed. Execute (step S3202). In the end processing of the additional main effect, the second layer LY2 in the readout area 94a is cleared. As already explained, the second layer LY2 is a layer from which the additional main effect table is read. By clearing the second layer LY2 from which the add-on main effect table has been read, the sound output control based on the sound data set in the add-on main effect table and the light emission data set in the add-on main effect table are performed. The light emission control of the upper lamp 61 based on this is no longer performed. As already explained, the address information of the drive table of the accessory 75 is set in the pointer information at the end of the add-on main effect table (the pointer information indicating that the execution period of the add-on main effect is one second remaining). By clearing the second layer LY2 from which the additional main effect table has been read, the drive table is no longer read, and the accessory action effect based on the drive table is cancelled. In addition, the details of the performance of the role product action will be described later. Also, in the end processing of the additional main effect (step S3202), the second effect area 113c (FIG. 42(c)) of the display setting area 113 is cleared. As already explained, the second effect area 113c is an area in which display data for executing the additional main effect is set. When the additional main effect is being executed, the display data for executing the additional main effect is cleared. As a result, the display of the additional main effect performed on the image display device 63 ends. In the reading area 94a, the layer LYn from which the additional main effect table and the additional sub effect table are read out is different, and the display data for executing the additional main effect and the display data for executing the additional sub effect are displayed. The settings are also different. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for ending the add-on main effect while continuing the add-on sub effect. Furthermore, in the end processing of the additional main effect (step S3202), the flag during the main effect is cleared to "0". As a result, the MPU 92 on the production side can grasp that the additional main production has ended.

After that, update processing of the addition sub effect table is executed (step S3203). In the updating process, instead of the high-speed display add-on sub effect table read out to the third layer LY3 of the readout area 94a, the corresponding low-speed display add-on sub effect table is read out to the third layer LY3. . Specifically, when the high-speed first addition sub-effect table is read on the third layer LY3, the low-speed first addition sub-effect table is read, and the high-speed second addition sub-effect table is read on the third layer LY3. If read, the low speed second addition sub effect table is read. As already explained, the value of the pointer counter PC3 in the third layer LY3 is inherited without being cleared. In addition, in the process of updating the additional sub-effect table (step S3203), the fifth effect area 113f of the display setting area 113 in which the display data for the additional sub-effect is set is not cleared. Therefore, the continuation of the blinking gauge display is displayed in the gauge display section G19a.

In the update process of the add-on sub-effect table in step S3203, if the data of the add-on sub-effect table for high-speed display read out to the third layer LY3 has been rewritten, the add-on sub-effect table for high-speed display has been rewritten. The data after rewriting set for each piece of pointer information is set to the corresponding pointer information in the add-on sub effect table for low-speed display read out to the third layer LY3. As a result, in a situation in which additional winnings are continuously occurring, the additional sub performance is performed in a mode corresponding to the total number of additional games of the additional winnings that occurred consecutively before the occurrence of this additional winning. Gauge blinking indications and gauge increasing indications can be implemented.

After that, base effect lottery processing for ART is executed (step S3204). In the ART base effect lottery process, first, the ART base effect lottery table for selecting the ART base effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 . As already explained, 16 types of ART base effect tables are stored in the ART base effect table storage area 133a of the effect side ROM 93 . In the ART base effect lottery table, the 16 types of ART base effect table type information (numerical information from 1 to 16) are set, and the numerical range for judging success is set for each type of information. It is After that, the numerical information of the random number counter which is periodically updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information is collated with the read base rendering lottery table for ART. As a result, the ART base effect table to be read this time is specified. Specifically, the ART base effect table in which the numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter is set is specified as the object to be read.

After that, reading processing of the ART base effect table is executed (step S3205). In the reading process, the 0th layer LY0 in the reading area 94a is cleared, and the ART base effect table specified in step S3204 is stored in the ART base effect table storage area 133a of the effect-side ROM 93 and stored in the 0th layer LY0 of the reading area 94a. Read to layer LY0. ART base effects are executed in the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the effects in accordance with the ART base effect table. Specifically, address information and setting destination information of display data for executing the ART base effect on the image display device 63 are set in the pointer information of "0" in the ART base effect table. . The display data is set in the background area 113a of the display setting area 113 (FIG. 42(c)). When the previous display data is set in the background area 113a, the current display data is set after the background area 113a is cleared. As a result, the previous base effect for ART ends and the current base effect for ART is started.

Thereafter, a normal effect lottery process for ART is executed (step S3206). In the ART normal effect lottery process, first, the ART normal effect lottery table for selecting the ART normal effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 . As already explained, the ART normal effect table storage area 133b of the effect side ROM 93 stores 16 types of ART normal effect tables. Type information (numerical information of 1 to 16) of the 16 types of normal effect table for ART is set in the normal effect lottery table for ART, and a numerical range for judging success or failure is set in each type information. ing. After that, the numerical information of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information is collated with the read normal performance lottery table for ART. As a result, the ART normal effect table to be read this time is specified. Specifically, the ART normal effect table in which the numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter is set is specified as the read target.

After that, the first layer LY1 in the reading area 94a is cleared, and the ART normal effect table specified as a read target in the ART normal effect lottery process in step S3206 is stored in the ART normal effect table storage area 133b of the effect side ROM 93. (step S3207). As described above, the ART normal effect table is read to the first layer LY1 in the read area 94a. The normal ART effect is executed by the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the effect according to the normal ART effect table. The base ART effect and the normal ART effect are executed in parallel based on the ART base effect table and the ART normal effect table read out to different layers LYn of the readout area 94a.

After that, the value of the display counter 134 of the effect-side RAM 94 is decremented by 1 (step S3208), the display of the number of continued games is updated (step S3209), and the game start processing in this ART ends. In the process of updating the display of the number of continued games in step S3209, if the value of the display counter 134 after subtracting 1 in step S3208 is a value of "1" or more, the continued game corresponding to the value of the display counter 134 is displayed. The display data for displaying the number image G18 is read from the effect-side ROM 93, and the read display data is set in the third effect area 113d of the display setting area 113. FIG. As already explained, when the display data is already set in the third effect area 113d, the current display data is set after the third effect area 113d is cleared to "0". By performing display control of the image display device 63 based on the display data, the value of the number of continuous games displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after subtracting one. In addition, in the process of updating the display of the number of continued games in step S3209, if the value of the display counter 134 after subtracting 1 in step S3208 is a value of "0" or less, the value of "0" or less is replaced with , to display "?" As already explained, even in a situation where additional wins occur continuously, the value of the number of continued games displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 63 is subtracted by 1 each time a game is started. The value of the number of continuous games to be displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 63 becomes "0" or less until the total number of additional games in the consecutively generated additional winnings is finally added together. There is In this case, instead of the value of "0" or less, "?" is displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63. The ART state ST6 never continues while a value is being displayed.

Returning to the description of the non-normal effect control processing (FIG. 62), if a negative determination is made in step S3014, it is determined whether or not the command to add during ART is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S3016) . When the addition command is received during ART (step S3016: YES), effect adjustment processing is executed (step S3017). FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing effect adjustment processing.

In the effect adjustment process, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the sub-effect in-progress flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3301). The flag during sub-effect is a flag that allows the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp that the additional sub-effect is being executed. "1" is set to the sub-effect in-progress flag at step S3411 of the additional effect processing (FIG. 65), which will be described later. Also, the flag during sub-effect is cleared to "0" in step S3506 of the flag clearing process (FIG. 66(a)) to be described later.

If it is determined in step S3301 that the sub-effect in-progress flag is set to "1", it means that the add-on command during ART is received during the execution of the add-on sub-effect, so the end processing of the add-on sub effect is performed. is executed (step S3302). In the end processing of the additional sub effect, the third layer LY3 in the readout area 94a is cleared, and the fifth effect area 113f (FIG. 42(c)) in the display setting area 113 is cleared. As already explained, in the third layer LY3, the additional sub effect table (high speed first additional sub effect table, high speed second additional sub effect table, low speed first additional sub effect table, or low speed second additional sub effect table) is read. The fifth effect area 113f is an area in which display data for an additional sub-effect is set. By clearing the fifth effect area 113f, the additional sub-effect performed on the image display device 63 ends. Further, by clearing the third layer LY3, it is possible to prevent the display data for the additional sub-effect from being newly set in the fifth effect area 113f, thereby ending the additional sub-effect.

After that, "1" is set to the continuous addition flag in the production side RAM 94 (step S3303). The continuous top-up flag is a flag that enables the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the top-up winning is continuously occurring two or more times in a mode in which the top-up sub performance is not interrupted.

After that, addition processing of the blinking display counter 136 is executed (step S3304). In addition processing of the flashing display counter 136, the number of added games in the added sub-effect that ended in step S3302 is grasped by referring to the added game number counter 135 in the effect side RAM 94, and the grasped number of added games is displayed on the effect side. The value of the flashing display counter 136 in the RAM 94 is added. As a result, the flashing display counter 136 is set to the total number of games for which the additional wins occurred successively prior to the current additional win.

When the blinking display counter 136 is added at step S3304, the value of the added game number counter 135 is cleared to "0" (step S3305), and the effect adjustment process ends. In step S3401 of the add-on effect processing (FIG. 65) described later, the add-on game number for the current add-on win is set in the add-on game number counter 135. FIG.

Returning to the description of the non-normal production control process (FIG. 62), after the production adjustment process (FIG. 64) is executed in step S3017, the additional production process is executed (step S3018). FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing processing for adding effect.

In the add-on effect processing, the number of add-on games is grasped based on the information set in the add-on command during the ART received this time, and the grasped number of add-on games is set in the add-on game number counter 135 in the effect-side RAM 94 (step S3401). As a result, when additional winnings are continuously generated in a state in which the additional sub-effect is not interrupted, the number of additional games for the current additional winning is set in the additional game number counter 135, and the current additional winning is set. The total number of add-on games in the add-on wins that occurred consecutively before is set in the flashing display counter 136 . Further, when the additional wins have not occurred consecutively, the number of add-on games for the current add-on win is set in the add-on game number counter 135, and the value of the flashing display counter 136 is "0". state.

After that, the addition main effect lottery process is executed (step S3402). In the add-on main effect lottery process, first, the add-on main effect lottery table for selecting the add-on main effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 . As already explained, in the additional main effect table storage area 133c (FIG. 60(a)) of the effect-side ROM 93, there are four types of additional main effect tables for executing the additional main effect corresponding to the number of additional games of "50". and four types of additional main effect tables for executing the additional main effect corresponding to the number of additional games of "100". In the first addition main effect lottery table, type information of four types of addition main effect table is set, and a numerical range for judging whether each type of information is correct or not is set. Further, in the second addition main effect lottery table, type information of four types of addition main effect table is set, and a numerical range for judging whether each type of information is correct or not is set. After that, the numerical information of the random number counter which is periodically updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information is collated with the read addition main performance lottery table. As a result, the additional main effect table to be read this time is specified. Specifically, the add-on main effect table in which the numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter is set is specified as the object to be read.

After that, the second layer LY2 of the reading area 94a is cleared, and the addition main effect table specified in the addition main effect lottery process in step S3402 is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the reading area 94a (step S3403). As already explained, the add-on main effect table is read to the second layer LY2. The addition main effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the effect according to the additional main effect table. Further, by reading out the driving table of the accessory 75 set with respect to the pointer information at the end of the add-on main effect table (the pointer information indicating that the execution period of the add-on main effect is one second remaining), A character action effect is executed in which the spherical effect portion 77b moves up and down. In addition, the details of the performance of the role product action will be described later. After that, "1" is set to the main effect in progress flag in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3404). As a result, the effect side MPU 92 can grasp that the additional main effect is being executed.

After that, the add-on sub effect table corresponding to the number of add-on games this time is specified (step S3405). Specifically, when the number of add-on games set in the add-on game number counter 135 in step S3401 is "50", the high-speed first game stored in the high-speed first add-on sub-effect table storage area 133d of the effect-side ROM 93 is executed. When the number of add-on games set in the add-on game number counter 135 in step S3401 is "100" while specifying the 1 add-on sub effect table, it is stored in the high-speed second add-on sub effect table storage area 133e of the effect-side ROM 93. A high-speed second addition sub effect table that is set is specified.

After that, it is determined whether or not the continuous addition flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3406). As already explained, the continuous addition flag is a flag that enables the performance-side MPU 92 to grasp the situation in which the addition sub-performance is continuously occurring twice or more in a state in which the addition sub-performance is not interrupted. When the continuous addition flag is not set to "1" (step S3406: NO), the addition sub effect table specified in step S3405 is read out to the readout area 94a (step S3407). As already explained, the add-on sub effect table is read to the third layer LY3. By controlling the execution of the effects according to the additional sub-effect table, the image display device 63 executes the additional sub-effect including the gauge increase display of high-speed display.

On the other hand, if the continuous addition flag is set to "1" (step S3406: YES), table rewrite processing is executed (step S3408). In the table rewriting process, first, the value of the flashing display counter 136 in the effect side RAM 94 is grasped. If the current additional winning is the second consecutive additional winning, the blinking display counter 136 is set with the number of additional games in the previously generated additional winning. In addition, when additional wins occur consecutively two or more times in a row, if this additional win occurs in succession, that is, if this add-on win is three or more consecutive wins, a blinking counter will be displayed. In 136 is set the total number of games for which additional wins occurred consecutively prior to the current add-on win. After that, the address information of the display data for blinking the unit gauge image G22 of the number and color corresponding to the comprehended total number of added games is specified. Then, the pointer information of "0", "25", and "50" of the additional sub-effect table specified in step S3405 (the first high-speed additional sub-effect table or the second high-speed additional sub-effect table) is set. The address information of the specified display data is set instead of the address information of the specified display data. Also, if the table identified in step S3405 is the high-speed first addition sub effect table (FIG. 61), it is set to "75", "80", "85", "90" and "95". Instead of the address information of the display data for performing the gauge increase display, the gauge increase display is performed in a manner corresponding to the total number of additional games in the additional win that occurred consecutively before the current add-on win. Set the display data address information for On the other hand, if the table specified in step S3405 is the high speed second addition sub effect table, "75", "80", "85", "90", "95", "100", "105". , "110", "115" and "120" instead of the address information of the display data for increasing the gauge display, which has been continuously generated before the current addition win. Address information of display data for increasing the gauge display in a mode corresponding to the total number of additional games in winning is set.

After that, the third layer LY3 of the reading area 94a is cleared, and the additional sub-effect table (high-speed first additional sub-effect table or high-speed second additional sub-effect table) after table rewrite processing is executed in step S3408 is read. read out to the use area 94a (step S3409). The rewritten add-on sub effect table is read out to the third layer LY3 in the same manner as when no rewriting is performed. The image display device 63 executes the additional sub-effect by controlling the execution of the effect according to the rewritten additional sub-effect table. After that, the continuous addition flag in the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3410).

When the process of step S3407 is performed, or when the process of step S3410 is performed, "1" is set to the sub-rendering flag in the performance-side RAM 94 (step S3411). As a result, the performance side MPU 92 can grasp that the additional sub performance is being executed. After that, the addition display waiting flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3412), and the process for the addition effect is terminated. The addition display standby flag allows the production side RAM 94 to grasp that the process of adding the number of addition games in the current addition winning to the display counter 134 is in a standby state until the execution period of the addition sub production ends. is a flag to

Returning to the description of the non-normal effect control processing (FIG. 62), if a negative determination is made in step S3016, it is determined whether or not an ART end command has been received from the main side MPU 72 (step S3019). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3019, ART end processing is executed (step S3020). In the ART ending process, a process for executing an ART ending effect is performed as an effect corresponding to the end of the ART state ST6. The ART ending effect is executed in the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. FIG. Also, in the ART end processing (step S3020), numerical information is set to the effect side effect timer counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 so that the effect side MPU 92 can grasp the end timing of the ART end effect. The value of the effect-side effect timer counter is updated in step S5705 of the history image management process (FIG. 95), which will be described later. After that, the during-ART flag in the effect-side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3021), and the non-normal effect control process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S3019, the number of games update process is executed (step S3022), and the non-normal effect control process ends. In the number-of-games update process (step S3022), a process for updating the number-of-continued-games image G18 displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is executed on condition that the additional sub-effect has ended.

Here, before explaining the game count update process (FIG. 66(b)), the flag clearing process executed by the effect side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 66(a). Note that the flag clear processing is executed in step S2006 of the pointer update processing (FIG. 48) when the pointer information to be referenced is updated to the final pointer information and repeat information is not set in the final pointer information. be done.

In the flag clearing process, when the value of the target layer counter 114 in the readout area 94a is "2" (step S3501: YES), and "1" is set in the main effect flag in the effect-side RAM 94 (step S3502). : YES), clear the flag during main effect to "0" (step S3503). As a result, the MPU 92 on the production side can grasp that the additional main production has ended.

In the flag clearing process, if the value of the target layer counter 114 in the readout area 94a is "3" (step S3504: YES), and if the sub-rendering flag in the rendering-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3505). : YES), clear the flag during sub-effect to "0" (step S3506). As a result, the performance-side MPU 92 can grasp that the additional sub-performance has ended.

In the flag clearing process, if the value of the target layer counter 114 is "11" (step S3507: YES), a role product flag setting process (to be described later) is executed (step S3508), and the flag clearing process ends.

Next, the processing for updating the number of games executed by the effect side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 66(b). The number-of-games update process is executed in step S3022 of the non-normal effect control process (FIG. 62).

In the game number update processing, first, it is determined whether or not the addition display standby flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3601). When "1" is set to the standby flag for additional display (step S3601: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the flag during sub-effect in the effect-side RAM 94 (step S3602). .

If a negative determination is made in step S3602, it means that the additional sub effect being executed has ended. In this case, addition processing of the display counter 134 is executed (step S3603). In addition processing of the display counter 134 , the value of the additional game number counter 135 and the value of the flashing display counter 136 in the effect side RAM 94 are added to the value of the display counter 134 . When the additional effect is not generated continuously, the number of additional games in the added sub-effect that ended this time is set in the additional game number counter 135, and the value of the flashing display counter 136 becomes "0". there is In the addition processing of the display counter 134 performed in this case (step S3603), the number of additional games in the additional sub effect that has ended this time is added to the value of the display counter . Further, when the additional sub-effect is continuously generated in a state in which the additional sub-effect is not interrupted, the number of additional games in the added sub-effect that has ended this time is set in the additional game number counter 135, and the flashing display counter is set. In 136 is set the total number of games for which additional wins occurred consecutively prior to the last generated add-on win. In the addition processing of the display counter 134 performed in this case (step S3603), the total number of additional games in all the consecutively generated additional winnings is added to the value of the display counter 134. FIG.

After that, update processing for the display of the number of continued games is executed (step S3604). In the processing for updating the display of the number of continuous games, the display data for displaying the number of continuous games image G18 corresponding to the value of the display counter 134 after the addition processing is performed in step S3603 is read from the production-side ROM 93. The read display data is set in the third effect area 113d of the display setting area 113 (FIG. 42(c)). By performing display control of the image display device 63 based on the display data, the value of the number of continuous games displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 63 is added to the display counter 134 in step S3603. It will be updated to the value after it is done. Specifically, when the additional effect has not occurred continuously, the value is updated to the value after the number of additional games in the additional sub effect ended this time is added. In addition, when the additional performance is continuously generated in a state in which the additional sub performance is not interrupted, the value is updated to the value after adding the total number of additional games in the continuous additional winning.

Thereafter, the value of the add-on game number counter 135 and the value of the flashing display counter 136 in the effect-side RAM 94 are cleared to "0" (step S3605), and the add-on display standby flag in the effect-side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3606). ), the process for updating the number of games ends.

Next, how the additional main effect and the additional sub effect are executed in the ART state ST6 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 67(a) shows the execution period of the additional main effect, FIG. 67(b) shows the execution period of the gauge flashing display in the additional sub effect, and FIG. 67(c) shows the execution period of the increased gauge display in the additional sub effect. 67(d) shows the start timing of the ART base effect and the ART normal effect, FIG. 67(e) shows the update timing of the continuous game number display, and FIG. FIG. 67(g) shows the timing at which the production side MPU 92 receives the game start command.

First, the case where the effect side MPU 92 receives the game start command after the additional main effect and the additional sub effect are completed will be described.

At the timing of t1, which is the ART state ST6, as shown in FIG. 67(f), when the production side MPU 92 receives the add-on command during ART, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. Along with the start of the production, as shown in FIG. 67(b), flashing gauge display in the additional sub-production is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(a), when the additional main effect ends at the timing t2, at the timing t2, as shown in FIG. 67(b), as shown in FIG. As shown in c), gauge increase display is started in the additional sub effect. Since the animation display of the additional main effect was executed to the end without ending in the middle, the gauge increase display is a high-speed display in which the number and color of the unit gauge images G22 in the gauge display section G19a are updated at intervals of 200 milliseconds. Become.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(c), when the gauge increase display in the additional sub-effect ends at the timing of t3, the value of the display counter 134 is changed to the additional winning that triggered the finished additional sub-effect. The number of additional games in is added. Then, as shown in FIG. 67(e), at the timing t3, the value of the number of continuous games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after adding the number of additional games.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67(g), when the effect side MPU 92 receives the game start command at the timing t4, as shown in FIG. At the same time as the normal effect is started, a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the display counter 134 is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 67(e), at the timing t4, the value of the number of continuous games displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after subtracting 1.

As already explained, when the animation display of the additional main effect is executed to the end without ending in the middle, the number of additional games is suggested at the end of the animation display. In this case, the player sees the gauge increase display while grasping the number of additional games. Since the gauge increase display is a high-speed display, the period in which the ART base effect and the ART normal effect started based on the reception of the game start command and the gauge increase display are executed in parallel is shortened. , the player's interest can be quickly returned to the normal effect for ART.

Next, a case will be described where the effect-side MPU 92 receives the game start command during execution of the additional main effect, and the effect-side MPU 92 receives the add-on command during ART during execution of subsequent gauge increase display.

At the timing of t5, which is the ART state ST6, as shown in FIG. 67(f), when the effect-side MPU 92 receives the add-on command during ART, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. Along with the start of the effect, as shown in FIG. 67(b), flashing gauge display in the additional sub effect is started.

After that, at the timing t6, which is the timing before the end of the execution period (specifically, 3 seconds) of the additional main effect, the effect-side MPU 92 receives the game start command as shown in FIG. , As shown in FIG. 67(a), at the timing of t6, the additional main effect that has been executed until the middle ends. At the timing of t6, instead of the high-speed first addition sub-effect table read to the third layer LY3, the low-speed first addition effect table is read to the third layer LY3. As already explained, the value of the pointer counter PC3 in the third layer LY3 is inherited without being cleared. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 67(b), the blinking display of the gauge in the additional sub effect is continued. Further, as shown in FIG. 67(d), at the timing t6, the ART base effect and the ART normal effect are started, and the value of the display counter 134 is decremented by one. Then, as shown in FIG. 67(e), at the timing t6, the value of the number of continuous games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after subtracting 1.

In this way, when the effect-side MPU 92 receives the game start command during the execution of the additional main effect and the additional sub effect, the additional main effect being executed is terminated, and at the same time, the game start command is received. The base effect for ART and the normal effect for ART are started. Further, by reading out the low speed first addition sub effect table instead of the high speed first addition sub effect table, the gauge increase display in the addition sub effect is switched from high speed display to low speed display. As a result, not only the result of the additional winning, but also the additional sub-performance corresponding to the additional winning can be confirmed, and based on the reception of the game start command, the base performance for ART and the normal performance for ART are generated without delay. can be started. Since the moving image display of the additional main effect is not executed to the end and ended in the middle, the gauge increase display is started without suggesting the number of additional games. In this case, the player watches the gauge increase display expecting that the number and color of the unit gauge images G22 displayed in the gauge display section G19a will be updated in a manner corresponding to the number of games added to "100". It will happen. By switching the gauge increase display from the high-speed display to the low-speed display, the display period of the gauge increase display, which is of high interest, can be extended, and the interest in the game can be improved.

After that, at the timing t7, as shown in FIG. 67(b), the gauge flashing display in the additional sub effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 67(c), the gauge increasing display in the additional sub effect starts. . As a result, the image display device 63 is in a state in which the ART base effect, the ART normal effect, and the gauge increase display in the additional sub effect are being executed at the same time. As already explained, if the moving image display of the additional main effect ends without being executed to the end, the gauge increase display in the additional sub effect will change the number and color of the unit gauge image G22 displayed in the gauge display portion G19a. is a slow display that is updated every 400 milliseconds.

After that, at timing t8, which is the timing before the end of the execution period of the gauge increase display, as shown in FIG. Thus, the gauge increase display that has been performed halfway ends at the timing t8. Further, as shown in FIGS. 67(a) and 67(b), at the timing of t8, the addition main effect corresponding to the ART middle addition command received this time and the flashing gauge display in the addition sub effect are started. . As a result, the image display device 63 simultaneously executes the ART base effect, the ART normal effect, the additional main effect, and the flashing gauge display in the additional sub effect. In the flashing display of the gauge, the flashing display of the gauge is performed in a mode corresponding to the total number of additional games in the successive additional winnings before the occurrence of the current additional winning. For this reason, based on the number and color of the blinking unit gauge images G22, it is possible to grasp the total number of additional games in the additional winning that occurred consecutively before the occurrence of the current additional winning. An additional main performance and an additional sub performance based on the received ART intermediate addition command can be started without delay after receiving the intermediate addition command.

Thereafter, at timing t9, the additional main effect ends as shown in FIG. 67(a), and the flashing gauge display in the additional sub effect ends as shown in FIG. 67(b). Then, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 67(c), gauge increase display in the additional sub effect is started. Since the animation display of the additional main effect was executed to the end without ending in the middle, the gauge increase display is a high-speed display in which the number and color of the unit gauge images G22 in the gauge display section G19a are updated at intervals of 200 milliseconds. Become.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(c), at the timing of t10, the gauge increase display in the add-on sub effect ends, and the total number of add-on games in two consecutive wins on the display counter 134. is added. Then, as shown in FIG. 67(e), at the timing t10, the value of the number of continuous games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after adding the total number of additional games.

As described above, the main MPU 72 does not set numerical information to the freeze counter in the main RAM 74 at the start of the additional main effect and the additional sub effect. A player who is in a hurry in a situation such as the end of business hours is approaching can start the next game by operating the start lever 41 during the additional main performance and the additional sub performance. When the performance-side MPU 92 receives the game start command during the execution of the additional main performance and the additional sub performance, the additional main performance being executed is terminated, and the base performance for ART is based on the reception of the game start command. And the normal effect for ART is started. Further, the gauge increasing display in the additional sub effect is switched from the high speed display to the low speed display, and the display of the additional sub effect is continued. As a result, not only the result of the additional winning, but also the additional sub-performance corresponding to the additional winning can be confirmed, and based on the reception of the game start command, the base performance for ART and the normal performance for ART are generated without delay. can be started. After the base performance for ART and the normal performance for ART are started based on the operation of the start lever 41, the additional sub performance is continuously executed in parallel with these performances, thereby omitting the additional main performance. The entire additional sub performance can be displayed even for a player who hastened ahead. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The number of additional games is suggested by the fact that the animation display of the additional main effect is executed to the end without ending in the middle. When the gauge increase display is performed in a state in which the additional main effect is executed to the end and the additional game number is suggested, the gauge increase display is high speed display. As a result, it is possible to shorten the execution period of the gauge increase display that is performed after the number of games to be added is suggested, so that the player's interest can be quickly shifted to the next game. On the other hand, when the moving image display of the additional main effect ends without being executed to the end, the gauge increase display performed is slow display. When the gauge increase display is started without suggesting the number of games to be added, the player will notice that the number and color of the unit gauge images G22 displayed in the gauge display section G19a are updated to the number of games to be added, which is "100". You will see the increasing gauge display in anticipation of the corresponding aspect. By switching the gauge increase display from the high-speed display to the low-speed display, the display period of the gauge increase display, which is of high interest, can be extended, and the interest in the game can be improved.

When the performance-side MPU 92 receives the add-on command during ART in a situation where the add-on sub-performance is being executed, the executed add-on sub-performance is terminated and a new add-on main effect is performed based on the reception of the add-on command during ART. And the additional sub production is started. If the configuration is such that the start of the add-on main effect and the add-on sub effect based on the reception of the add-on command during ART is waited until the add-on sub effect being executed is completed, then the add-on main effect is received after receiving the add-on command during ART. And, a delay occurs before the additional sub performance is started. With this configuration, when additional winnings occur consecutively and delays accumulate, a situation arises in which the additional main effect and the additional sub effect corresponding to the additional winnings cannot be started during the game in which the additional winnings occur. There is a risk. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the additional main effect and the additional sub effect are started without delay based on the reception of the additional command during ART. To eliminate the possibility that an additional main performance and an additional sub performance corresponding to the additional winning cannot be started during a game in which the additional winning occurs even when the additional winning occurs continuously. can be done.

In the situation where the additional sub-effect is being executed, the additional sub-effect in the case where the effect-side MPU 92 receives the add-on command during ART is the total of the additional winnings that have occurred consecutively before the occurrence of the current additional winning. It is carried out in a mode corresponding to the number of additional games. Therefore, when the add-on command during ART is received, the gauge display section G19a blinks the unit gauge image G22 of the final number and color in the add-on sub effect being executed. As a result, it is possible to give continuity to the add-on sub performance, and to give a special feeling that the add-on wins are continuously occurring. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the final state of the additional sub-effect can be displayed to the player who was watching the additional sub-effect that was being executed. In this way, based on the fact that the add-on command during ART is received, the add-on sub effect being executed is ended without delay, and the add-on main effect and the add-on sub effect are started. The final state of the additional sub performance can be displayed to the player watching the additional sub performance.

When additional winnings occur continuously in a manner in which the additional sub effects are not interrupted, address information of the display data set in the additional sub effects table is replaced with address information before the occurrence of the current additional winnings. The address information of the display data is set for performing the gauge flashing display and the gauge increasing display in a manner corresponding to the total number of games for which the additional winning has occurred. Thus, it is possible to reduce the number of additional sub-performance tables stored in advance in the performance side ROM 93, and reduce the storage capacity of the performance side ROM 93 for storing the additional sub-performance tables.

When the additional wins do not occur consecutively, the continuous game number image G18 displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is updated at the end of the additional sub effect. By setting the state in which the number of additional games cannot be grasped based on the number-of-continued-games image G18 until the additional sub-effect is completed, the additional main effect indicating the number of additional games and the additional sub-effect indicating the number of additional games are realized. can raise interest.

When the additional winning is continuously generated in a state in which the additional sub performance is not interrupted, the display of the number of continuous games is updated at the end of the last additional winning in the continuously generated additional winning. By not updating the number-of-continued-games image G18 until the last winning addition sub-performance is completed, interest in the addition main performance suggesting the number of addition games and the addition sub-performance showing the number of addition games can be increased. In addition, by setting the number of additional games to be added to the display counter 134 in the effect-side RAM 94 at once to a large value, the impression that the number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 has greatly increased due to the additional winnings that have occurred consecutively. can give

In the ART state ST6, the ART base effect, the ART normal effect, the added main effect and the added sub effect are executed. There are a plurality of types of these effects, and the number of combinations of these effects is enormous. These effects are read out on different layers LYn (0th layer LY0 to 3rd layer LY3) in the readout area 94a, including the ART base effect table, the ART normal effect table, the additional main effect table, and the additional sub effect table. , the effect execution control is executed by the effect side MPU 92 according to these effect tables. As a result, as compared with the configuration in which the performance tables for all combinations of these performances are stored in advance in the performance side ROM 93, while suppressing the increase in the data capacity of the performance tables stored in advance in the performance side ROM 93, It is possible to increase the variations of combinations of these effects. Also, in a situation where the ART base effect and the ART normal effect are being executed, based on the fact that the effect side MPU 92 receives the ART add-on command, the ART base effect and the ART normal effect which are being executed are continued. However, the processing for starting the additional main effect and the additional sub effect is simplified.

There are four types of add-on main effect tables that are read out when an add-on win with the number of add-on games of "50" occurs, and there are two types of add-on sub-effect tables (a high-speed first add-on sub-effect table and a low-speed first add-on sub effect table). There are two types of tables, namely, an additional sub-effect table. In addition, there are four types of add-on main effect tables that are read when an add-on win with the number of add-on games of "100" occurs, and there are two types of add-on sub effect tables (a high-speed second add-on sub effect table and a low-speed second add-on effect table). There are two types of tables, namely, the second additional sub-effect table. An add-on main effect table and an add-on sub effect table are stored in the effect-side ROM 93, and the add-on main effect and the add-on sub effect table are read in different layers LYn (n=2, 3) of the readout area 94a according to these effect tables. One effect table containing effect data for executing the additional main effect and effect data for executing the additional sub effect is stored in the effect side ROM 93 by the configuration in which the effect is executed. Compared with the configuration, the storage capacity of the production side ROM 93 for storing the production table for executing the additional main production and the additional sub production is reduced.

<Structure for executing character action effect>
Next, the configuration for executing the performance of the character action will be described. In the present slot machine 10, it is determined whether or not the spherical effect part 77b (FIG. 1) of the character 75 is staying at the origin on the condition that the effect side MPU 92 receives the game start command from the main side MPU 72. Origin detection is performed. When it is determined in the origin detection that the spherical effect portion 77b is not staying at the origin, a correction operation is performed to return the spherical effect portion 77b to the origin. The origin of the spherical effect portion 77b in the normal game state ST1, the bonus internal state ST2, the bonus state shifted from the normal game state ST1, and the preparation state ST5 is the initial position detected by the initial position sensor 75a (FIG. 1). On the other hand, the origin of the spherical effect portion 77b in the ART state ST6 and the bonus state shifted from the ART state ST6 is the displacement position detected by the displacement position sensor 75b (FIG. 1).

As described above, the bonus notification effect, the re-variation effect, and the additional main effect are performed as the accessory action effect. Also in each game in the BB state ST3 and the RB state ST4, the performance of the action of the character is performed. In these performances of the action of the role product, the spherical effect part 77b (FIG. 1) of the role product 75 moves up and down.

In the bonus notification effect, the character action effect is started with the image display device 63 displaying the bonus notification image G13 (FIG. 39(g)). In addition, in the re-variation production, after the image display device 63 starts the re-variation of the middle pattern, the role product action production is started. In the bonus notification effect and the re-variation effect, the spherical effect portion 77b of the accessory 75 staying at the initial position moves downward for 1 second, and moves to a midway position near the displacement position for 1 second. stop across. After that, the spherical effect portion 77b moves upward for one second and returns to the initial position. The role object action performance in the bonus notification performance ends at the timing when the execution period of the bonus announcement performance ends, and the role object motion performance in the re-variation performance ends at the timing when the execution period of the re-variation performance ends.

In the additional main effect, the accessory action effect is started at the timing when the execution period of the additional main effect remains one second. In addition, in the bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4), the performance of the character action is started based on the fact that the effect side MPU 92 receives the game start command from the main side MPU 72 . In the additional main effect and the performance of the role object action in the bonus state shifted from the ART state ST6, the spherical effect part 77b of the role object 75 staying at the displaced position moves upward for 0.5 seconds and is moved upward from the initial position. also stops for 0.5 seconds at an intermediate position below. After that, the spherical effect portion 77b moves downward for 0.5 seconds and returns to the displaced position. In addition, in the performance of the role object action in the bonus state shifted from the normal game state ST1, the spherical performance portion 77b of the role object 75 staying at the initial position moves downward for 0.5 seconds, and is moved downward from the displacement position. It stops for 0.5 seconds at the upper halfway position. After that, the spherical effect portion 77b moves upward for 0.5 seconds and returns to the initial position.

In the bonus notification effect and the re-variation effect, the freeze counter is set in the main side RAM 74, and the effect side MPU 92 does not receive the game start command until the value of the freeze counter becomes "0". Therefore, when the role product action effect is executed in the bonus notification effect and the re-variation effect, the effect side MPU 92 does not receive the game start command during execution of the role product action effect. Also, in the bonus state, the performance of the role action is started at the start timing of the game. The execution period of the role action effect in the bonus state is the period from when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating in the previous game to when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can start rotating next time. This is 1.5 seconds shorter than the wait time (specifically 4.1 seconds) during which the rotation of 32M and 32R is waited. Therefore, even when the role product action effect is executed in the bonus state, the effect side MPU 92 does not receive the game start command during execution of the role product action effect.

On the other hand, in the additional main effect and the additional sub effect in the ART state ST6, the setting of the freeze counter in the main side RAM74 is not performed. Therefore, it is possible that the effect-side MPU 92 receives the game start command during execution of the character action effect that is started at the end of the additional main effect (at the timing when the execution period of the additional main effect is one second remaining). . In this case, based on the fact that the effect-side MPU 92 has received the game start command, the character object action effect being executed is terminated in the middle. Then, the spherical effect portion 77b of the accessory 75 returns to the origin (specifically, the displacement position). As already explained, when the effect-side MPU 92 receives the game start command before the accessory action effect is started in the additional main effect, the additional main effect ends. In this case, the performance of the role product action is canceled.

As shown in FIG. 41(b), the effect-side RAM 94 is provided with a role product management area 94d in which management information of the role product 75 is set. The role product management area 94d is provided with a correction execution counter 141 that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of executions of the correction operation. Each time it is determined that the spherical effect portion 77b of the role object 75 is not staying at the origin in origin detection, the correction operation of the role object 75 is executed, and the value of the correction execution counter 141 is incremented by "1". . However, even if it is determined that the spherical effect part 77b is not staying at the origin in the origin detection performed by the effect-side MPU 92 upon receiving the game start command during the performance of the accessory action effect, the value of the correction execution counter 141 "1" is not added to When it is determined that the spherical effect part 77b of the accessory 75 is not staying at the origin in the origin detection performed in a situation where the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "3", the origin detection and correction operation are not executed. The correction operation standby state is set. In the correcting action waiting state, when a predetermined period (specifically, five minutes) has passed since the correcting action waiting state was started, the number of games played after the correcting action waiting state was started reaches a predetermined number. Information indicating that the number of times (specifically, 30 times) has been reached, or that the effect-side MPU 92 has received a character product initialization command from the main-side MPU 72, or that the effect-side MPU 92 has won a bonus award from the main-side MPU 72. is canceled when a winning result command in which is set is received. As already explained, the role item initialization command is transmitted in step S102 of the main process (FIG. 11) when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is started. When the correction action waiting state is canceled, the correction action of returning the accessory 75 to the origin is executed. The correction operation executed when the correction operation standby state is canceled is not counted by the correction execution counter 141 .

As shown in FIG. 41(b), in the role product management area 94d, there is a standby execution counter 142 that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of times the correction operation standby state has been set, and a counter for starting the correction operation standby state. A waiting time counting counter 143 that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the elapsed time later, and a waiting game number counter 144 that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of games executed after the start of the correction operation standby state are provided. It is The value of the standby execution counter 142 is incremented by 1 each time the correction operation standby state is set.

When it is determined that the spherical effect part 77b of the accessory 75 is not staying at the origin in the origin detection performed in a situation where the values of the standby execution counter 142 and the correction execution counter 141 are "3", the origin On the condition that the detection is not performed during performance of the role product action, it is set to the role product error state. Similarly to the correction operation standby state, origin detection and correction operation are not executed in the accessory error state. The character product error state is when the production side MPU 92 receives a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus prize has been established is set from the main side MPU 72, or when the production side MPU 92 receives a character product initialization command from the main side MPU 72. Canceled when received. When the accessory error state is canceled, a correcting action is performed to return the spherical effect portion 77b to the origin. The correction operation executed when the accessory error state is canceled is not counted in the correction execution counter 141 .

Next, the role product management process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the character product management process is executed in an interrupt process that is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the production side MPU 92 .

In the role product management process, first, the role product initialization process is executed (step S3701). FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing character product initialization processing.

In the role product initialization process, it is first determined whether or not a role product initialization command has been received from the main side MPU 72 (step S3801). As already explained, the accessory initialization command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 in step S102 of the main process (FIG. 11) when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is started.

When the role product initialization command is received (step S3801: YES), the initial setting process for the role product is executed (step S3802). In the role product initial setting process, various counters 141 to 144 and various flags (a role product initialization flag described later, initialization End flag, accessory error flag, error cancellation flag, correction operation standby flag, standby cancellation flag, correction operation flag, correction operation completion flag, accessory operation flag, origin displacement flag, first origin standby flag, second Origin standby flag and return operation flag) are cleared to "0". As a result, if the role product error state exists before the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is cut off, the error state of the role product is canceled and the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is cut off. If the correction operation standby state exists before the correction operation is performed, the correction operation standby state is canceled. In addition, in the role item initial setting process (step S3802), the eleventh layer LY11 in the reading area 94a is cleared. As a result, the drive table for executing the drive control of the accessory 75 is not read out to the readout area 94a.

After that, it is determined whether or not the initial position sensor 75a is ON (step S3803). If the initial position sensor 75a is ON (step S3803: YES), the spherical effect part 77b is already staying at the initial position. The process of steps S3804 and S3805) is not performed, and the main character product initialization process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the initial position sensor 75a is not ON (step S3803: NO), processing for starting initial position return for returning the spherical effect portion 77b of the accessory 75 to the initial position (steps S3804 to S3805 process). Specifically, the character product initialization table is read out from the production-side ROM 93 to the eleventh layer LY11 in the readout area 94a (step S3804). Numerical information from "0" to "60" are arranged in serial numbers as pointer information in the character initialization table. The first drive data is set for moving (upward). The pointer information of the character object initialization table read to the eleventh layer LY11 is updated in step S2014 of the pointer update process (FIG. 48). As already explained, the pointer information update cycle is 40 milliseconds. Every time the pointer information of the character product initialization table is updated, the first drive data is output to the character product drive unit 78 (FIG. 1), and the spherical effect unit 77b moves toward the initial position. The number of outputs of the first drive data required to move the spherical effect portion 77b staying at the displacement position farthest from the initial position to the initial position is 30 times. On the other hand, in the accessory initialization table, the first drive data for 60 times, which exceeds the number of times of output necessary for returning the spherical effect portion 77b staying at the displacement position to the initial position, is set. . Therefore, even if the movement of the spherical effect portion 77b is temporarily obstructed while the spherical effect portion 77b is returning to the initial position, the spherical effect portion 77b cannot return to the initial position, and the accessory error state occurs. is less likely to become The maximum time required for returning to the initial position is 2.4 seconds. As already described, when the spherical effect portion 77b stays at the initial position, the subsequent output of the first drive data is cancelled.

After reading the character product initialization table in step S3804, the character product initialization flag provided in the character product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3805), and the main character product initialization process is executed. finish. The character object initialization flag is a flag that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the character object 75 is being initialized.

If it is determined in step S3801 that the character product initialization command has not been received, it is determined whether or not the character product initialization flag in the character product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3801). S3806). When "1" is set in the character product initialization flag (step S3806: YES), it is determined whether or not the initial position sensor 75a is ON (step S3807). If the initial position sensor 75a is ON (step S3807: YES), the initial position return of the role product 75 is completed. Clear the layer LY11 (step S3808). As a result, the first drive data set in the accessory initialization table is no longer output. Thereafter, the character product initialization flag is cleared to "0" (step S3809), and the main character product initialization process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3807 that the initial position sensor 75a is not ON, it is determined whether or not the initialization end flag provided in the role product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3810). ). The initialization end flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the pointer information of the character product initialization table read out to the eleventh layer LY11 has been updated to the final pointer information. The initialization end flag is set to "1" in step S4602 of the accessory flag setting process (FIG. 77), which will be described later.

When the initialization end flag is set to "1" (step S3810: YES), the spherical effect portion 77b of the accessory 75 is in the initial position even though the first drive data has been output 60 times. , the processing for setting the accessory error state (processing of steps S3811 to S3814) is executed. Specifically, the character product initialization flag in the character product management area 94d is cleared to "0" (step S3811), and the initialization end flag in the character product management area 94d is cleared to "0" (step S3812). ).

Thereafter, the role product error flag provided in the role product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3813). The role product error flag is a flag that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the role product error state. By setting "1" to the role product error flag, the process of newly reading the drive table of the role product 75 to the read area 94a is prohibited.

After that, the notification setting process of the role product error state is executed (step S3814), and the main role product initialization process ends. In the notification setting process, the character product error notification table for executing the character product error notification is read from the effect-side ROM 93 to the readout area 94a. The accessory error notification table is read out to the ninth layer LY9 of the readout area 94a. The role product error notification table contains address information and setting destination information of display data for executing a role product error display indicating a role product error state on the image display device 63, and the role product error state. Sound data for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62 so as to output a role product error notification sound that informs that the Light emission data is set. The setting destination information of the display data for executing the role product error display is information specifying the first notification area 113g of the display setting area 113. FIG. Performance-side MPU 92 performs notification execution control in accordance with the character product error notification table read out on the ninth layer LY9, thereby executing character product error notification by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62 and image display device 63. .

As described above, when the spherical effect unit 77b does not return to the initial position even though the first drive data has been output to the role product driving unit 78 60 times according to the role product initialization table, the correction operation is performed. It is set to the accessory error state without going through the standby state. As a result, when the spherical effect portion 77b does not return to the initial position even though the supply of the operating power to the main side MPU 72 is started, the fact that the spherical effect portion 77b does not return to the initial position is confirmed. is less likely to be overlooked by administrators.

Returning to the description of the role product management process (FIG. 68), after executing the role product initialization process in step S3701, it is determined whether or not a game start command has been received from the main side MPU 72 (step S3702), and the game starts. If a command has been received (step S3702: YES), it is determined whether or not the correction operation completion flag provided in the role product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3703). The correction operation completion flag is a flag that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the correction operation of the accessory 75 has been completed. The correction operation completion flag is set to "1" when the correction operation of the accessory 75 is completed.

If the correction operation completion flag is set to "1" (step S3703: YES), the correction operation completion flag is cleared to "0" (step S3704). Thus, the correction operation completion flag is cleared to "0" when the game start command is received. The effect-side MPU 92 does not execute the accessory action effect in which the spherical effect section 77b operates in a situation where the correction action completion flag is set to "1". Therefore, when the correction operation of the accessory 75 is completed during the game and the correction operation completion flag is set to "1", the correction operation completion flag is cleared to "0" at the start of the next game. The role object motion presentation is not executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S3703, or when the process of step S3704 is performed, it is determined whether or not the role product error flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3705). If the role product error flag is set to "1" (step S3705: YES), it is not time to execute the correction action of the role product 75 and the performance of the role product action effect, so the processing of steps S3706 to S3714 is executed. Without doing so, the process proceeds to step S3715.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3705 that the role product error flag is not set to "1", it is determined whether "1" is set to the return operation flag provided in the role product management area 94d. (step S3706). The return operation flag indicates that the return operation of the accessory 75 is being performed to move the spherical effect portion 77b to the changed origin based on the fact that the origin of the spherical effect portion 77b of the accessory 75 has been changed. It is a flag that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp the state. When the return operation flag is set to "1" (step S3706: YES), the spherical effect portion 77b can be returned to the changed origin without performing the correction operation of the accessory 75. , the process proceeds to step S3715 without performing the correction operation.

If a negative determination is made in step S3706, it is determined whether or not the correction action standby flag provided in the role product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3707). The correction action standby flag is a flag that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the correction action standby state is in effect. If the correction action standby flag is set to "1" (step S3707: YES), the value of the standby game number counter 144 provided in the character product management area 94d is subtracted by 1 (step S3708). It is determined whether or not the value of the waiting game number counter 144 after the subtraction has become "0" (step S3709). As already explained, the standby game number counter 144 is a counter that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp the number of games that have been executed after the start of the correction action standby state.

When the value of the standby game number counter 144 becomes "0" (step S3709: YES), the processing for canceling the correction operation standby state (processing of steps S3710 to S3712) is executed. Specifically, the correction operation standby flag and the standby timer counter 143 are cleared to "0" (step S3710), and the notification canceling process of the correction operation standby state is executed (step S3711). In the notification canceling process, a process for canceling the notification of the correction operation standby state is executed. Notification of the correction operation standby state is started by reading the notification table for the correction operation standby state to the ninth layer LY9 of the readout area 94a. The notification table is read by executing the correction operation standby state notification setting process in step S4207 of the standby setting process (FIG. 73(a)) described later. In the notification table for the correction operation standby state, address information and setting destination information of display data for displaying the correction operation standby display indicating the correction operation standby state on the image display device 63, and correction operation standby state information. and sound data for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62 so as to output the standby state notification sound for notifying that the state is set. The setting destination information of the display data for performing the correction operation standby display is information specifying the first notification area 113g (FIG. 42(c)) of the display setting area 113. FIG. The output of the standby state notification sound is terminated after being executed for a predetermined period of time (specifically, one second). At the timing when the output of the standby state notification sound ends, the pointer information to be referenced in the notification table for the correction operation standby state is updated to the final pointer, and the ninth layer LY9 is cleared. Therefore, at the timing when the correction operation standby state notification cancellation processing is executed in step S3711, the notification table for the correction operation standby state does not remain in the ninth layer LY9. In the notification cancellation processing of the correction operation standby state in step S3711, the first notification area 113g in which the display data for performing the correction operation standby display is set in the display setting area 113 is cleared. Thus, the correction operation standby display that has been executed on the image display device 63 ends.

After that, "1" is set to the standby release flag provided in the role product management area 94d of the production side RAM 94 (step S3712). The standby cancellation flag is a flag that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to recognize that a timing for canceling the correction operation standby state has occurred. By setting the standby cancellation flag to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S4102 of the correction operation start setting processing (FIG. 72), which will be described later, and processing for ending the correction operation standby state (step S4104) is performed. to step S4108) are executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3707, origin detection is performed to determine whether or not the spherical effect portion 77b is staying at the origin (step S3713). The character product management area 94d is provided with an origin displacement flag that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the origin is set to the displacement position. When the value of the origin displacement flag is "0", it means that the origin is set at the initial position, and when the value of the origin displacement flag is "1", the origin is set at the displacement position. means that In step S3713, when the value of the origin displacement flag is "0", it is determined that the spherical effect portion 77b is staying at the origin when the initial position sensor 75a is ON, and the initial position sensor 75a is OFF. If so, it is determined that the spherical effect portion 77b is not staying at the origin. Further, in step S3713, when the value of the origin displacement flag is "1", it is determined that the spherical effect portion 77b is staying at the origin when the displacement position sensor 75b is ON, and the displacement position sensor 75b is OFF. , it is determined that the spherical effect portion 77b is not staying at the origin.

When the process of step S3712 is executed, or when it is determined in step S3713 that the spherical effect section 77b is not staying at the origin, a correction operation start setting process is executed (step S3714). In the correction action start setting process, a process is performed to execute a correction action for returning the spherical effect portion 77b to the origin. Details of the correction operation start setting process (step S3714) will be described later.

If the determination is negative in step S3702, if the determination is affirmative in step S3705, if the determination is affirmative in step S3706, if the determination is negative in step S3709, the determination is affirmative in step S3713. or when the process of step S3714 is executed, the origin setting process for changing the origin of the accessory 75 is executed based on the command received from the main side MPU 72 (step S3715). After that, standby management processing for managing the correction operation standby state is executed (step S3716), and the main role product management processing ends. Details of the origin setting process (FIG. 70) in step S3715 and the standby management process (FIG. 73B) in step S3716 will be described later.

As described above, when the effect-side MPU 92 receives the game start command from the main-side MPU 72, the character object error state, the correction operation standby state, and the origin return due to the change in the origin of the spherical effect portion 77b are being executed. Under the condition that neither state exists, the origin detection is executed to determine whether or not the spherical effect portion 77b is staying at the origin, and if the spherical effect portion 77b is not staying at the origin, the spherical effect portion 77b to return to the origin. In the configuration in which the spherical effect portion 77b can be moved by touching the spherical effect portion 77b, the position of the spherical effect portion 77b is changed by the configuration in which the correction action execution opportunity is generated each time the game start command is received. It is possible to quickly return the spherical effect portion 77b to the origin when a deviation occurs. As described above, the correction operation is also executed when it is determined that the origin is detected during execution of the performance of the accessory action and the spherical effect portion 77b is not staying at the origin. It is not counted in the correction execution counter 141 .

Next, the origin setting process executed by the effect side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. The origin setting process is executed in step S3715 of the accessory management process (FIG. 68).

In the origin setting process, when an ART start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3901: YES), the origin displacement flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3902). As a result, when the game state shifts to the ART state ST6, the origin of the accessory 75 is set to the displacement position.

Thereafter, when neither the role product error flag nor the correction operation standby flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3903: NO), the correction operation is being performed in the role product management area 94d. It is determined whether or not the flag is set to "1" (step S3904). The correcting action flag is a flag that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the accessory 75 is being corrected. The correction operation in progress flag is set to "1" in step S4105 of the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72), which will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S3904, the displacement position drive table is read out from the effect-side ROM 93 to the readout area 94a (step S3905). The displacement position drive table is read to the eleventh layer LY11. In the displacement position drive table, numerical information from "0" to "35" are arranged in serial numbers as pointer information. The second drive data is set to move downwards. The number of outputs of the second drive data required to move the spherical effect portion 77b staying at the initial position farthest from the displacement position to the displacement position is "30", and the displacement position drive table contains the number of outputs of "30". , 35 second drive data are set. Therefore, by executing the drive control of the accessory 75 according to the displacement position drive table read out in the readout area 94a, even if the spherical effect part 77b stays at the initial position farthest from the origin, It is possible to move the spherical effect portion 77b to the displacement position. As already explained, the second drive data is output under the condition that the displacement position sensor 75b is in the OFF state. Therefore, when drive control of the accessory 75 is performed according to the displacement position drive table, the spherical effect portion 77b moves to the displacement position and stops. When the second drive data is set for the remaining pointer information in the displacement position drive table, the output of the second drive data is canceled based on the ON state of the displacement position sensor 75b. In this case, the pointer information to be referenced is updated in a cycle of 40 milliseconds without outputting the second drive data. Then, the eleventh layer LY11 from which the displacement position drive table has been read after the pointer information to be referenced is updated up to the final pointer is cleared.

After the displacement position drive table is read out in step S3905, the return operation flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3906), and the origin setting process ends. As a result, the effect-side MPU 92 can grasp that the return operation of the accessory 75 based on the change of the origin is being executed.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3904, that is, if it is determined that the correction operation of the role product 75 is being executed, the second origin point provided in the role product management area 94d of the production side RAM 94 The standby flag is set to "1" (step S3907), and the origin setting process ends. The waiting flag for the second origin enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp that the origin has been changed to the displacement position and the movement of the spherical effect portion 77b to the changed origin (displacement position) is suspended. is a flag. When the return to the origin of the spherical effect part 77b is suspended due to the fact that the corrective action of the accessory 75 is being executed, it means that the standby flag for the second origin is set to "1". Based on this, the movement of the spherical effect portion 77b to the origin is started after the correction operation is completed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3901, it is determined whether or not an ART end command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3908). If the ART end command has been received (step S3908: YES), the origin displacement flag in the role product management area 94d is cleared to "0" (step S3909). As a result, when the ART state ST6 ends, the origin of the accessory 75 is set to the initial position.

After that, it is determined whether or not the role product error flag or the correction operation standby flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3910). If a negative determination is made in step S3910, it means that neither the role product error state nor the correction operation standby state is established, so the correcting operation in-progress flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1". (step S3911).

If a negative determination is made in step S3911, the initial position drive table is read out from the effect-side ROM 93 to the readout area 94a (step S3912). The initial position drive table is read to the eleventh layer LY11. In the initial position drive table, numerical information from "0" to "35" are arranged in serial numbers as pointer information. The first drive data is set to move upwards. As already explained, the number of outputs of the first drive data required to move the spherical effect portion 77b staying at the displacement position farthest from the initial position to the initial position is "30", and the initial position drive table is set with 35 pieces of first drive data, which is larger than the "30". Therefore, even if the spherical effect portion 77b stays at the displacement position that is the farthest from the origin, by executing the drive control of the accessory 75 according to the initial position drive table read out in the readout area 94a, It is possible to move the spherical effect portion 77b to the initial position. As already explained, the first drive data is output under the condition that the initial position sensor 75a is in the OFF state. Therefore, when drive control of the accessory 75 is performed according to the initial position drive table, the spherical effect portion 77b moves to the initial position and stops. When the first drive data is set for the remaining pointer information in the initial position drive table, the output of the first drive data is canceled based on the ON state of the initial position sensor 75a. In this case, the pointer information to be referenced is updated at intervals of 40 milliseconds without outputting the first drive data. Then, the eleventh layer LY11 from which the initial position drive table has been read after the pointer information to be referenced is updated to the final pointer is cleared.

After reading the initial position drive table in step S3912, the return operation flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3913), and the origin setting process ends. As a result, the effect-side MPU 92 can grasp that the return operation of the accessory 75 based on the change of the origin is being executed.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3911, that is, if it is determined that the correction operation of the role product 75 is being executed, the first origin standby flag provided in the role product management area 94d is set to " 1" is set (step S3914), and the origin setting process ends. The waiting flag for the first origin enables the effect side MPU 92 to grasp that the origin has been changed to the initial position and the movement of the spherical effect portion 77b to the changed origin (initial position) is suspended. is a flag. When the return to the origin of the spherical effect part 77b is suspended due to the fact that the corrective action of the accessory 75 is being executed, it means that the standby flag for the first origin is set to "1". Based on this, the movement of the spherical effect portion 77b to the origin is started after the correction operation is completed.

As described above, the origin of the accessory 75 is set to the displacement position when the ART state ST6 starts, and set to the initial position when the ART state ST6 ends. If the origin of the role object 75 is changed in a state other than the role object error state, the correction operation standby state, or the state in which the correction operation of the role object 75 is being executed, the spherical effect part 77b is moved to the origin after the change. Moving. As a result, the spherical effect portion 77b can be moved to the changed origin at an early timing before the effect-side MPU 92 receives the game start command. On the other hand, when the origin of the role product 75 is changed in the state of the role product error state or the correction operation standby state, the movement of the spherical effect part 77b to the origin after the change is performed in the role product error state or the correction operation standby state. Executed when released. Further, when the origin of the character object 75 is changed while the correction operation of the character object 75 is being executed, the movement of the spherical effect unit 77b to the origin after the change is suspended, and the spherical effect unit 77b When the correction operation of the accessory 75 being executed is completed, it moves to the origin after the change.

Next, the accessory origin return processing executed by the effect-side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the accessory origin return processing is executed in step S2008 of the pointer update processing (FIG. 48) when the pointer information to be referenced in the target layer is updated to the final pointer and the target layer is cleared. . As already described, in the pointer update process (FIG. 48), the character object origin return process (step S2008) is performed so that the reference pointer information of the data table read to the target layer is the final pointer information (step S2003 : YES), and repeat information is not set for the final pointer information (step S2004: NO), that is, the situation is such that the pointer information to be referenced is updated to the final pointer information and the data table is cleared. will be executed if

In the accessory origin return process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the target layer counter 114 in the readout area 94a is "11" (step S4001). This is the timing when an affirmative determination is made in step S4001, that is, when the pointer information to be referenced in the drive table read out to the eleventh layer LY11 is updated to the final pointer information and the eleventh layer LY11 is cleared. In this case, it is determined whether or not the standby flag for the first origin in the role product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4002). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4002, it is determined whether or not it is in a readable state (step S4003). In step S4003, the character product error flag, the correction operation standby flag, the character product initialization flag, the correction operation flag, the correction operation completion flag, the return operation flag, and the character product operation flag in the character product management area 94d. If "1" is not set to any of them, it is determined that the drive table can be read to the eleventh layer LY11. The flag during operation of the role product is a flag for making it possible for the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the production of the role product action is being executed. The role product operating flag is set to "1" in step S4405 of the setting process for driving the role product (FIG. 76(a)), which will be described later.

If it is determined in step S4003 that the reading is possible, the first origin standby flag is cleared to "0" (step S4004), and it is determined whether or not the spherical effect portion 77b is staying at the origin (step S4004). step S4005). As already explained, the first origin waiting flag indicates that the origin has been changed to the initial position, and the movement of the spherical effect portion 77b to the changed origin (initial position) is being suspended by the effect side MPU 92. It is a flag that makes it possible to grasp. In step S4005, when the initial position sensor 75a is ON, it is determined that the spherical effect portion 77b stays at the origin, and when the initial position sensor 75a is OFF, the spherical effect portion 77b stays at the origin. judge not.

If the spherical effect section 77b does not stay at the origin (step S4005: NO), the already described initial position drive table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the readout area 94a (step S4006). The initial position drive table is read to the eleventh layer LY11. The performance-side MPU 92 drives and controls the accessory 75 according to the initial position drive table read out to the readout area 94a, so that the spherical performance portion 77b moves to the initial position, which is the post-change origin.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4002, it is determined whether or not the standby flag for the second origin in the role product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4007). If the standby flag for the second origin is set to "1" (step S4007: YES), it is determined whether or not the reading is possible (step S4008). In step S4008, similarly to the case of step S4003, the character product error flag, the correction operation standby flag, the character product initialization flag, the correction operation flag, the correction operation completion flag, and the recovery operation flag in the character product management area 94d In the case where "1" is not set in neither of nor the accessory in operation flag, it is determined that the driving table is in a readable state.

If it is determined in step S4008 that the reading is possible, the second origin standby flag is cleared to "0" (step S4009), and it is determined whether or not the spherical effect portion 77b is staying at the origin (step S4009). step S4010). As already explained, the waiting flag for the second origin indicates that the origin has been changed to the displacement position and that the movement of the spherical effect portion 77b to the changed origin (displacement position) is suspended. It is a flag that makes it possible to grasp. In step S4010, it is determined that the spherical effect portion 77b is staying at the origin when the displacement position sensor 75b is ON, and the spherical effect portion 77b is staying at the origin when the displacement position sensor 75b is OFF. judge not. If the spherical effect portion 77b does not stay at the origin (step S4010: NO), the displacement position driving table described above is read from the effect-side ROM 93 to the readout area 94a (step S4011). The displacement position drive table is read to the eleventh layer LY11. The performance-side MPU 92 drives and controls the accessory 75 in accordance with the read displacement position drive table, thereby moving the spherical performance portion 77b to the displacement position that is the post-change origin.

When the process of step S4006 is executed or when the process of step S4011 is executed, "1" is set in the return operation flag in the character product management area 94d (step S4012), and the original character product is returned. End the process.

As described above, the origin of the character object 75 is changed in the state where the character object 75 is being initialized, the correction operation is being performed, or the character object action effect is being executed, and the spherical effect part 77b is changed. When the movement to the origin after the change of is in a suspended state, the origin after the change of the spherical effect part 77b at the timing when the initialization of the character product 75, the correction operation, or the effect of the character product operation that was being executed is completed. movement to is started. As a result, without waiting for the effect-side MPU 92 to receive the game start command, the movement of the spherical effect part 77b to the changed origin can be started early.

Next, the correction operation start setting process executed by the effect-side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The correction operation start setting process is executed in step S3714 of the role product management process (FIG. 68) and step S4706 of the bonus prize setting process (FIG. 78) described later.

In the correction operation start setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the correction execution counter 141 in the role product management area 94d is "3" (step S4101). When the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "3" (step S4101: YES), whether or not "1" is set to the error cancellation flag or the standby cancellation flag provided in the role product management area 94d is determined (step S4102). The error release flag is a flag that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to recognize that a trigger for releasing the accessory error state has occurred. Further, as already explained, the standby release flag is a flag that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp that the timing for releasing the correction operation standby state has occurred. If a negative determination is made in step S4102, it is determined whether or not the role product in-operation flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4103).

If a negative determination is made in step S4101, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4102, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S4103, reading processing for correction operation is executed (step S4104). In the read processing, after clearing the eleventh layer LY11 in the read area 94a, the drive table corresponding to the current origin is read out from the effect-side ROM 93 among the already explained initial position drive table and displacement position drive table. Read to area 94a. Specifically, when the origin displacement flag in the accessory management area 94d is not set to "1" and the current origin is the initial position, the initial position driving table is read to the eleventh layer LY11, When the origin displacement flag is set to "1" and the current origin is the displacement position, the displacement position drive table is read to the eleventh layer LY11. The performance-side MPU 92 drives and controls the accessory 75 according to the initial position drive table or the displacement position drive table read out to the eleventh layer LY11, so that the spherical performance portion 77b moves to the origin (initial position or displacement position). ). This configuration clears the eleventh layer LY11 before reading the initial position drive table or the displacement position drive table. Therefore, when it is determined that the spherical effect part 77b is not staying at the origin in the origin detection performed during the performance of the role product motion effect, the role product motion effect being executed ends in the middle. Then, the correction operation of the accessory 75 is started.

Thereafter, "1" is set to the correction operation flag in the role product management area 94d (step S4105). As a result, the effect-side MPU 92 can grasp that the correction operation of the accessory 75 is being performed. After that, if the standby release flag is set to "1" (step S4106: YES), that is, if the correction action of the accessory 75 is started based on the occurrence of the release trigger of the correction action standby state , the first clearing process of the role product management information is executed (step S4107). In the first clearing process of the role product management information, the standby release flag, the correction operation standby flag and the value of the correction execution counter 141 in the role product management area 94d are cleared to "0". The correction operation standby state is released by clearing the correction operation standby flag to "0". Further, by clearing the value of the correction execution counter 141 to "0", the number of executions of the correction operation of the accessory 75 counted by the production side MPU 92 is reset. On the other hand, in the first clearing process of the role product management information (step S4107), the value of the standby execution counter 142 in the role product management area 94d is not cleared to "0".

Thereafter, processing for canceling notification of the correction operation standby state is executed (step S4108), and the processing for setting the start of this correction operation ends. In step S4108, the same process as the notification canceling process of the correction operation standby state in step S3711 of the role product management process (FIG. 68) already described is executed. Specifically, in the correction operation standby state notification cancellation processing in step S4108, the first notification area 113g in which the display data for performing the correction operation standby display is set in the display setting area 113 is cleared. Thus, the correction operation standby display that has been executed on the image display device 63 ends.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step S4106, it is determined whether or not the error cancellation flag is set to "1" (step S4109). If the error cancellation flag is set to "1" (step S4109: YES), the second clearing process of the role product management information is executed (step S4110). In the second clearing process of the role product management information, various counters 141 to 144 and various flags (specifically, a role product initialization flag, initial conversion end flag, accessory error flag, error cancellation flag, correction operation standby flag, standby cancellation flag, correction operation completion flag, accessory operation flag, first origin standby flag, second origin standby flag, and during return operation flag) is cleared to "0". As a result, the management information of the accessory 75 excluding the information of the correction operation flag and the origin displacement flag is cleared. By executing the second clearing process (step S4110) of the role product management information, the value of the role product error flag is cleared to "0" and the role product error state is released. In addition, the number of times set in the correction operation standby state counted by the standby execution counter 142 is cleared to "0", and the correction operation of the accessory 75 counted by the correction execution counter 141 is executed. The count is cleared to "0".

After that, the notification release processing of the role product error state is executed (step S4111), and the start setting processing of this correction operation ends. In the process of canceling notification of the error state of the role product, the ninth layer LY9 from which the notification table for the error state of the role product is read out in the reading area 94a is cleared, and the error of the role product is displayed in the display setting area 113. Clear the first notification area 113g in which the display data for is set. By clearing the ninth layer LY9, the accessory error notification performed by the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62 ends. In addition, by clearing the first notification area 113g, the character object error display performed on the image display device 63 ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S4109, it is determined whether or not the role product operating flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4112). When an affirmative determination is made in step S4112, the role product operating flag in the role product management area 94d is cleared to "0" (step S4113). A case where an affirmative determination is made in step S4112 means that the effect-side MPU 92 receives the game start command during execution of the performance of the performance of the performance, and the origin is detected, and the spherical performance portion 77b of the performance 75 stays at the origin. This is the case when it is determined that the As already explained, in the additional main effect and the additional sub effect in the ART state ST6, the setting of the freeze counter in the main side RAM 74 is not performed. Therefore, the MPU 92 on the performance side may receive the game start command during the execution of the performance of the accessory action started at the final stage of the additional main performance (the timing when the execution period of the additional main performance is one second remaining). Further, as already described, in the role product management process (FIG. 68), when the production side MPU 92 receives the game start command during execution of the role product action production (step S3702: YES), step S3705, step S3706 and step A negative determination is made in S3707, and origin detection (determination processing in step S3713) is performed. Then, if it is determined that the vehicle is not staying at the origin (step S3713: NO), a correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72) is executed in step S3714.

Returning to the description of the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72), when the role product operation flag is cleared to "0" in step S4113, the process of adding 1 to the value of the correction execution counter 141 (step S4114) is performed. The process for setting the start of the correcting operation is terminated without execution. In this way, when it is determined that the spherical effect part 77b is not staying at the origin in the origin detection performed during the performance of the role product motion effect, the role product motion effect being executed ends in the middle. At the same time, the correction operation of the accessory 75 is started. The correction operation is not counted by the correction execution counter 141 .

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S4112, 1 is added to the value of the correction execution counter 141 in the role product management area 94d (step S4114), and the start setting process of this correction operation is completed.

If negative determinations are made in steps S4102 and S4103, standby setting processing (FIG. 73A) is executed (step S4115), and the correction operation start setting processing ends. The details of the standby setting process (FIG. 73(a)) will be described later.

As described above, when the accessory error state and the correction operation standby state are canceled, the correction operation of returning the spherical effect portion 77b to the origin is performed. This reduces the possibility of determining that the spherical effect portion 77b is not staying at the origin in the origin detection of the role product 75 that is performed first after the role product error state or the correction operation standby state is released. . Further, the correction execution counter 141 does not count the correction action performed when the correction action standby state and the accessory error state are canceled. This reduces the frequency of occurrence of the correction operation standby state.

As already explained, "35" pieces of first drive data are set in the initial position drive table, and "35" pieces of second drive data are set in the displacement position drive table. Pointer information to be referenced in these driving tables is updated at a cycle of 40 milliseconds. The maximum time required for the correction action of the accessory 75 is 1.4 seconds, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate from the time the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R started to rotate in the previous game. It is shorter than the wait time (specifically, 4.1 seconds) during which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until the start of rotation becomes possible. Therefore, when it is determined that the spherical effect portion 77b is not staying at the origin in the origin detection performed based on the effect-side MPU 92 receiving the game start command, and the correction operation of the accessory 75 is started, The correction operation ends at a timing before the effect-side MPU 92 receives the next game start command. This eliminates the possibility that the next origin detection will be performed during the execution of the correction operation of the accessory 75 in this case.

Next, the standby setting process executed by the effect-side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 73(a). Note that the standby setting process is executed in step S4115 of the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72).

In the standby setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the standby execution counter 142 in the role product management area 94d is "3" (step S4201). As already explained, the standby execution counter 142 is a counter that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of times the correction operation standby state has been set. If the value of the standby execution counter 142 is not "3" (step S4201: NO), the processing for setting the correction operation standby state (processing of steps S4202 to S4207) is executed. Specifically, the value of the standby execution counter 142 is incremented by 1 (step S4202), and the value of the correction execution counter 141 in the role product management area 94d is cleared to "0" (step S4203). As a result, the number of executions of the correction operation of the accessory 75 counted by the effect-side MPU 92 is reset.

Thereafter, the correction operation standby flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4204). As already explained, the correction action standby flag is a flag that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the correction action standby state is in effect. By setting the correction operation standby flag to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S3707 of the role product management process (FIG. 68), and the origin of the role product 75 is detected at the start of the game (the role product management process (Determination processing in step S3713 in FIG. 68) is not performed. Therefore, in the correction action waiting state, the correction action of the accessory 75 is not executed even if the spherical effect part 77b is not staying at the origin at the start of the game.

After that, "30" is set in the waiting game number counter 144 in the character product management area 94d (step S4205), and numerical information corresponding to "5 minutes" is set in the standby time counter 143 in the character product management area 94d. (Step S4206). The value of the standby game number counter 144 is decremented by 1 each time a game start command is received from the main MPU 72 . In addition, the value of the standby timer counter 143 is updated each time an interrupt process is executed in a cycle of 4 milliseconds. As already explained, in the correction operation standby state, when the value of the standby timing counter 143 becomes "0" and when the value of the standby game number counter 144 becomes "0", the effect side MPU 92 is released from the main side MPU 72. It is canceled when a character product initialization command is received, or when the effect-side MPU 92 receives a prize-winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus prize has been established is set from the main-side MPU 72 .

Thereafter, notification setting processing for the correction operation standby state is executed (step S4207), and this standby setting processing ends. In the notification setting process for the correction operation standby state, the notification table for the correction operation standby state is read from the effect-side ROM 93 to the readout area 94a. The notification table for the correction operation standby state is read to the ninth layer LY9. As already explained, the notification table for the correction operation standby state contains the address information and setting destination information of the display data for displaying the correction operation standby display indicating the correction operation standby state on the image display device 63. , and sound data for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62 so as to output a standby state notification sound for notifying that the device is in the correction operation standby state. The display data setting information for performing the correction operation standby display is information specifying the first notification area 113 g of the display setting area 113 . In accordance with the notification table for the correction operation standby state read out to the ninth layer LY9, the performance side MPU 92 performs notification execution control, so that a predetermined time (specifically, one second) from the speaker 62 A standby state notification sound is output, and a correction operation standby display is performed on the image display device 63 . In the correction operation standby display, a correction operation standby image called “correction operation standby state” is displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 63 . The correction operation standby image is set in the first notification display layer 107 and displayed on the front side of the screen from the background image and various effect images. The correction action standby display is continued until the correction action standby state notification cancellation process (step S3711 of the role product management process (FIG. 68)) is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4201 that the value of the standby execution counter 142 is "3", the role product error flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4208). An error state notification setting process is executed (step S4209), and this standby setting process ends. In the notification setting process for the role product error state, the notification table for the role product error state is read from the effect-side ROM 93 to the readout area 94a. The notification table for the role product error state is read to the ninth layer LY9. As already described, the role product error notification table contains address information and setting destination information of display data for executing the role product error display indicating that the role product error state is on the image display device 63, and role product error notification table. Sound data for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62 so as to output a role product error notification sound for notifying that the product error state is output, and the upper lamp 61 is turned on in a manner to notify that the product error state Light emission data for light emission control are set. The setting destination information of the display data for executing the role product error display is information specifying the first notification area 113g of the display setting area 113. FIG. Performance-side MPU 92 performs notification execution control in accordance with the character product error notification table read out on the ninth layer LY9, thereby executing character product error notification by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62 and image display device 63. .

As described above, the situation where the value of the standby execution counter 142 is "2" or less (step S4201: NO) and the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "3" (the step of the correction operation start setting process (Fig. 72) S4101: YES), it is determined that the spherical effect portion 77b is not staying at the origin in the origin detection performed in S4101: YES), and "1" is set to both the error cancellation flag and the standby cancellation flag in the character product management area 94d. If not (step S4102: NO) and the role product operating flag in the role product management area 94d is not set to "1" (step S4103: NO), the correction operation standby state is entered. In addition, the situation where the value of the standby execution counter 142 is "3" (step S4201: YES) and the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "3" (step S4101 of the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72): YES) ), it is determined that the spherical effect part 77b is not staying at the origin, and both the error cancellation flag and the standby cancellation flag in the character product management area 94d are set to "1". First (step S4102: NO), and if "1" is not set to the role product in-operation flag in the role product management area 94d (step S4103: NO), a role product error state occurs. As already described, in the role product management process (FIG. 68), when the return operation flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3706: YES), the origin is detected (determination in step S3713). processing) is not performed. Therefore, the correction operation standby state and the accessory error state are set in a situation in which none of the drive tables are read to the eleventh layer LY11 and the accessory 75 is not controlled to be driven.

Next, the standby management process executed by the effect side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 73(b). The standby management process is executed in step S3716 of the accessory management process (FIG. 68).

In the standby management process, first, it is determined whether or not the correction operation standby flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4301). As already described, the correction operation standby flag is set to "1" in step S4204 of the standby setting process (FIG. 73(a)). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4301, the standby timer counter 143 in the role product management area 94d is updated (step S4302). Specifically, the value of the standby timer counter 143 is decremented by one. Then, if the value of the standby time counter 143 after the update is not "0" (step S4303: NO), the main character product management process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the standby timer counter 143 after updating in step S4302 becomes "0" (step S4303: YES), it means that five minutes have passed since the correction operation standby state was set. Therefore, processing for canceling the correction operation standby state (processing of steps S4304 and S4305) is executed. Specifically, the standby game number counter 144 in the character product management area 94d is cleared to "0" (step S4304), and the standby release flag in the character product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4305). , terminates this accessory management process. By setting the standby cancellation flag to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S4102 of the correction operation start setting processing (FIG. 72), and the processing for ending the correction operation standby state (steps S4104 to step S4102). processing of S4108) is executed.

Next, how the correction operation standby state and the accessory error state are set will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 74(a) shows the status of the role product error flag in the role product management area 94d, FIG. 74(b) shows the state of the correction operation standby flag in the role product management area 94d, and FIG. FIG. 74(d) shows the timing when "1" is added to the correction execution counter 141 in the role product management area 94d, and FIG. 74(e) shows role product management. FIG. 74(f) shows the timing at which "1" is added to the standby execution counter 142 in the area 94d for use, and FIG. indicates when the

First, how the correction operation standby state is set will be described.

At the timings of t1, t3, t5 and t7, the effect side MPU 92 receives the game start command from the main side MPU 72, and the origin of the accessory 75 is detected as shown in FIG. 74(f). As already described, in the role product management process (FIG. 68), the detection of the origin of the role product 75 (the determination process in step S3713) is performed by checking the role product error flag, the correction operation standby flag, and the returning operation flag in the role product management area 94d. is not set to "1" (step S3705: NO, step S3706: NO, step S3707: NO). When it is determined that the spherical effect part 77b of the role object 75 is not staying at the origin in the origin detection of the role object 75 performed at the timing t1 when the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "0", the correction operation is performed. In the start setting process (FIG. 72), none of the error release flag, standby release flag, and role product operating flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4106: NO, step S4109: NO, step S4112: NO), "1" is added to the value of the correction execution counter 141 as shown in FIG. 74(d). As a result, the value of the correction execution counter 141 becomes "1". Then, as shown in FIG. 74(c), the correcting action of the role object 75 is performed from timing t1 to timing t2. As already explained, the maximum time required for the correction action of the accessory 75 is 1.4 seconds. This is shorter than the wait time (specifically, 4.1 seconds) during which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait for the rotation of the reel 32R to start.

When it is determined that the accessory 75 is not staying at the origin in the origin detection of the accessory 75 performed at the timing t3 when the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "1", an error occurs in the accessory management area 94d. On the condition that none of the release flag, standby release flag, and accessory action flag is set to "1", the value of the correction execution counter 141 is changed at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 74(d). A process of adding 1 is performed, and the value of the correction execution counter 141 becomes "2". Then, as shown in FIG. 74(c), the correcting action of the role object 75 is performed from timing t3 to timing t4. Further, when it is determined that the accessory 75 is not staying at the origin in the origin detection of the accessory 75 performed at the timing t5 when the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "2", the accessory management area 94d is displayed. 74(d), the correction execution counter 141 is turned on at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. Processing for adding 1 to the value is performed, and the value of the correction execution counter 141 becomes "3". Then, as shown in FIG. 74(c), the correcting action of the role object 75 is performed from timing t5 to timing t6.

After that, at timing t7 when the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "3", the origin of the accessory 75 is detected as shown in FIG. 74(f), and it is determined that the accessory 75 is not staying at the origin. 74(e), under the condition that none of the error release flag, standby release flag, and role product in-operation flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1". At the timing t7, the value of the standby execution counter 142 is incremented by 1, and the value of the standby execution counter 142 becomes "1". Then, as shown in FIG. 74(b), the correction action waiting flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1", and the correction action waiting state is set from timing t7 to timing t8. As already explained, the correction operation standby state is performed after the correction operation standby state is started when a predetermined period (specifically, 5 minutes) has passed since the correction operation standby state was started. When the number of games reaches a predetermined number (specifically, 30 times), when the production side MPU 92 receives a character product initialization command from the main side MPU 72, or when the production side MPU 92 receives a bonus award from the main side MPU 72 It is canceled when a winning result command in which information indicating that it has been set is received.

As described above, when the origin detection of the accessory 75 is performed while the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "3", and it is determined in the origin detection that the accessory 75 is not staying at the origin, Under the condition that none of the error release flag, the standby release flag, and the role product operating flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1", the correction operation standby state is entered. Without counting the number of times it is determined that the spherical effect part 77b of the role object 75 does not stay at the origin when it is determined that the spherical effect part 77b of the role object 75 does not stay at the origin in the origin detection of the role object 75. Compared to a configuration in which the correction operation standby state is immediately set, the frequency of setting the correction operation standby state can be reduced.

Next, how the role product error state is set will be described.

At the timing t9 when the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "3" and the value of the standby execution counter 142 is "1", the origin of the accessory 75 is detected as shown in FIG. If it is determined that the object 75 is not staying at the origin, the condition is that none of the error release flag, the standby release flag, and the accessory operating flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1". 74(e), the value of the standby execution counter 142 is increased by "1", and the value of the standby execution counter 142 becomes "2". Then, as shown in FIG. 74(b), the correction operation standby flag is set to "1" at the timing t9, and the correction operation standby state is set from the timing t9 to the timing t10. The condition for canceling the correction action waiting state is as already explained. For example, when the number of games executed in the correction action waiting state becomes "30", the correction action waiting state is canceled at the timing of t10. .

After that, at timing t11 when the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "3" and the value of the standby execution counter 142 is "2", the origin of the accessory 75 is detected as shown in FIG. 74(f). If it is determined that the accessory 75 is not staying at the origin, none of the error cancellation flag, the standby cancellation flag, and the accessory operating flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1". , the value of the standby execution counter 142 is increased by "1" as shown in FIG. 74(e), and the value of the standby execution counter 142 becomes "3". Then, as shown in FIG. 74(b), the correction operation standby flag is set to "1" at the timing t11, and the correction operation standby state is set from the timing t11 to the timing t12. The condition for canceling the correction action waiting state is as already explained. For example, when the number of games executed in the correction action waiting state becomes "30", the correction action waiting state is canceled at the timing of t12. .

After that, at the timing of t13 when the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "3" and the value of the standby execution counter 142 is "3", the origin of the accessory 75 is detected as shown in FIG. 74(f). If it is determined that the accessory 75 is not staying at the origin, none of the standby cancellation flag, the error cancellation flag, and the accessory operating flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1". Under this condition, the role product error flag is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 74(a) to enter the role error state.

As described above, the origin detection of the accessory 75 is performed in a state where the values of the correction execution counter 141 and the standby execution counter 142 are "3", and it is determined that the accessory 75 is not staying at the origin in the origin detection. In this case, a role product error state occurs on the condition that none of the standby cancellation flag, error cancellation flag, and role product in-operation flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1". When it is determined that the spherical effect part 77b of the role object 75 is not staying at the origin in detecting the origin of the role object 75, the role object error state is immediately set without counting the number of times set in the correction operation standby state. Compared to the configuration, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the accessory error state is set.

Next, prior to the description of the accessory drive setting process (FIG. 76(a)) executed by the effect-side MPU 92, the accessory action effect in the bonus notification effect is executed for the data structure of the drive table of the accessory 75. An example of the bonus notification drive table TB for the purpose of this will be described. FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the bonus notification drive table TB.

As shown in FIG. 75, in the bonus notification driving table TB, the pointer information of "0" to "79" are set to be serial numbers. Second drive data for moving the spherical effect portion 77b downward toward the displacement position is set for the pointer information of "0" to "24", and the pointer information of "50" to "79" is set. First drive data for moving the spherical effect portion 77b upward toward the initial position is set with respect to the pointer information. None of the drive data is set in the pointer information of "25" to "49".

The bonus notification drive table TB is read to the eleventh layer LY11 in the read area 94a. As already explained, the pointer information to be referenced in the data table read out to the read area 94a is updated at a cycle of 40 milliseconds. By outputting the second driving data set to the pointer information of "0" to "24" in the bonus notification driving table TB to the character object driving section 78, the spherical effect section 77b is moved to the initial position. , and moves downward over a period of 1 second to an intermediate position above the displacement position. After that, until the pointer information to be referred to in the bonus notification drive table TB is updated to "50", the spherical effect section 77b is stopped at the intermediate position. After that, the first drive data set for the pointer information of "50" to "79" in the bonus notification drive table TB is output to the accessory drive unit 78, whereby the spherical effect unit 77b It moves upward for 1 second from the halfway position where it was stopped, and returns to the initial position.

On the bonus notification drive table TB, the spherical effect part 77b is moved upward more than the number of second drive data (specifically, 25) for moving the spherical effect part 77b downward and is returned to the initial position. The number of the first drive data (specifically, 30) for the purpose is larger. As a result, even if an external force is applied to the spherical effect portion 77b, the possibility of the spherical effect portion 77b returning to the initial position is increased, and the spherical effect portion 77b is positioned at the origin when the accessory 75 is detected as the origin. The possibility of being judged as not staying is reduced. As already explained, the first driving data is output to the accessory driving section 78 on condition that the initial position sensor 75a is in the OFF state. Therefore, when the spherical effect section 77b returns to the initial position, the output of the first drive data set for the subsequent pointer information to the accessory drive section 78 is cancelled.

Next, the character product driving setting process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 76(a). Note that the character product driving setting process is executed when it is determined that the data table has been read to the current target layer in the readout area 94a (step S1905: YES). It is executed in S1907.

In the character object driving setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the address information of the driving table of the character object 75 is set for the pointer information of the reference target in the data table currently read into the target layer ( step S4401). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4401, it is determined whether or not it is in a readable state (step S4402). In step S4402, as in step S4003 of the already-described role product origin return processing (FIG. 71), the role product error flag, correction operation standby flag, and role product initialization flag in the role product management area 94d When "1" is not set in any of the correcting action flag, the correcting action completion flag, the return action flag, and the accessory action flag, the driving table can be read to the eleventh layer LY11. It is judged to be in a readable state.

If it is determined in step S4402 that the reading is possible, it is determined whether or not the spherical effect portion 77b stays at the origin (step S4403). Specifically, when the origin displacement flag in the accessory management area 94d is not set to "1", that is, when the origin is at the initial position and when the initial position sensor 75a is in the ON state, the spherical effect unit 77b is determined to stay at the origin. Further, when the origin displacement flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1", that is, when the origin is the displacement position, when the displacement position sensor 75b is in the ON state, the spherical effect part 77b moves to the origin. determined to be staying in

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4403, read processing of the driving table is executed (step S4404). In this reading process, the driving table of the accessory 75 corresponding to the address information set for the pointer information to be referenced is read from the effect-side ROM 93 to the eleventh layer LY11 of the read area 94a. After that, "1" is set in the role product in-operation flag in the role product management area 94d (step S4405), and the setting process for driving the role product is terminated. The performance-side MPU 92 controls the driving of the role product 75 in accordance with the drive table read out to the eleventh layer LY11, thereby executing the performance of the role product action in which the spherical production unit 77b moves up and down.

As described above, the driving table of the accessory 75 is read to the eleventh layer LY11 on the condition that the spherical effect portion 77b stays at the origin in the readable state. If it is not in a readable state and if the spherical effect section 77b is not staying at the origin, reading of the drive table is cancelled. Due to the configuration in which the reading of the driving table is canceled when it is not in a readable state, the character object error state, the correction action standby state, the state in which the correction action is being executed, and the game in which the correction action is executed are not finished. The driving table of the role product 75 is read out to the eleventh layer LY11 and the role product motion presentation is performed in the state where the role product 75 is not present, the state in which the return motion of the role product 75 is being executed, and the state in which the role product motion presentation is being performed. is prevented from being started.

If the spherical effect portion 77b does not stay at the origin, the reading of the drive table is cancelled. For example, the origin when shifting from the normal game state ST1 to the bonus state is the initial position where the spherical effect portion 77b is detected by the initial position sensor 75a. In this case, if the character action effect is executed while the spherical effect portion 77b is staying at the displacement position detected by the displacement position sensor 75b, the downward movement of the spherical effect portion 77b is canceled. put away. On the other hand, since the reading of the drive table is canceled when the spherical effect portion 77b does not stay at the origin, the spherical effect portion 77b performs a movement different from the movement assumed at the design stage. are prevented from doing so.

Next, the character product driving control process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 76(b). Incidentally, the role product drive control process is executed in step S1915 of the effect execution process (FIG. 47).

In the character product driving control process, if any driving table is read out to the eleventh layer LY11 in the reading area 94a (step S4501: YES), the first It is determined whether or not drive data is set (step S4502). If the first drive data is set (step S4502: YES), it is determined whether the initial position sensor 75a is OFF (step S4503), and if the initial position sensor 75a is OFF ( In step S4503: YES), the first drive data is output to the role product driving unit 78 (step S4504), and the main role product driving process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the initial position sensor 75a is in the ON state (step S4503: NO), the main character product drive control process is terminated as it is without outputting the first drive data. In this way, when the spherical effect section 77b has already stayed at the initial position, the output of the first drive data is cancelled.

If a negative determination is made in step S4502, it is determined whether or not the second drive data is set for the pointer information to be referenced in the drive table read out to the eleventh layer LY11 (step S4502). S4505). If the second drive data is set (step S4505: YES), it is determined whether or not the displacement position sensor 75b is in the OFF state (step S4506), and if the displacement position sensor 75b is in the OFF state ( In step S4506: YES), the second driving data is output to the character product driving unit 78 (step S4507), and the main character product driving process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the displacement position sensor 75b is in the ON state (step S4506: NO), the main character product drive control process is terminated as it is without outputting the second drive data. In this way, when the spherical effect portion 77b has already stayed at the displaced position, the output of the second drive data is cancelled.

Next, the character product flag setting process executed by the effect-side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that in the accessory flag setting process, the pointer information to be referenced in the drive table read out on the eleventh layer LY11 is updated until it becomes the final pointer information, and the repeat information is updated with respect to the final pointer information. If not set, it is executed in step S3508 of the flag clearing process (FIG. 66(a)).

In the accessory flag setting process, if the accessory initializing flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4601: YES), the accessory 75 is initialized based on the accessory initialization table. Since this means that the initialization operation has ended, the initialization end flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4602).

If a negative determination is made in step S4601, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the correction operation flag in the role product management area 94d (step S4603). If the correcting action in progress flag is set to "1" (step S4603: YES), it means that the correcting action of the accessory 75 based on the correcting action driving table has ended, so the correcting action in progress flag is set. is cleared to "0" (step S4604), and the correction operation completion flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4605).

If a negative determination is made in step S4603, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the returning flag in the role product management area 94d (step S4606). If the return operation flag is set to "1" (step S4606: YES), it means that the return operation of the accessory 75 that moves the spherical effect portion 77b to the changed origin has been completed. The returning operation flag is cleared to "0" (step S4607), and the flag clearing process for this role product ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S4606, it means that the pointer information to be referred to in the performance drive table has been updated to the final pointer information, and the performance of the performance of the performance has ended. , the flag during operation of the role product is cleared to "0" (step S4608), and the flag setting process for this role product is terminated.

Next, the character item setting process at the time of bonus winning, which is executed by the effect side MPU 92, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, in the normal game state ST1 or in the bonus internal state ST2 shifted from the normal game state ST1, the effect-side MPU 92 receives the winning result command, and the winning result handling process (FIG. 56(a)) is executed. . The bonus prize setting process (FIG. 78) is performed when it is determined in the prize result response process that the bonus prize has been established based on the prize result command received from the main MPU 72 (step S2801: YES). Executed in step S2806. In addition, in the accessory setting process (FIG. 78) at the time of bonus winning, information indicating that the bonus winning has been established is set in the other effect processing (step S3013 of the non-normal effect control process (FIG. 62)). It is also executed when the effect-side MPU 92 receives the awarded winning result command. Therefore, the accessory setting process (FIG. 78) at the time of bonus winning is also executed in the preparation state ST5, the ART state ST6, the bonus internal state ST2 shifted from the preparation state ST5, and the bonus internal state ST2 shifted from the ART state ST6. be.

In the bonus prize setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the role error flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4701). If the role product error flag is set to "1" (step S4701: YES), the error clearing flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4702). As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S4102 of the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72), and the process (steps S4104 to S4106 and steps S4109 to S4111) for canceling the accessory error state is performed. will be executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S4701, it is determined whether or not the correction operation standby flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4703). When the correction action standby flag is set to "1" (step S4703: YES), the standby release flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4704). As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S4102 of the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72), and the process (steps S4104 to S4108) for canceling the correction operation waiting state is executed. . Thereafter, the value of the standby execution counter 142 in the role product management area 94d is cleared to "0" (step S4705). As a result, the number of times set in the correction operation standby state counted by the standby execution counter 142 is cleared.

When the process of step S4702 is performed or when the process of step S4705 is performed, the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72) is executed (step S4706), and the role setting process at the time of winning the bonus is executed. finish. The contents of the correction operation start setting process have already been described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S4703, the eleventh layer LY11 in the reading area 94a is cleared (step S4707). As already explained, the eleventh layer LY11 is a layer from which the driving table of the accessory 75 is read. By clearing the 11th layer LY11 in step S4707, even if the driving table is read in the 11th layer LY11, driving data is not output to the accessory driving unit 78. Specifically, when the correcting operation is being executed, the correcting operation ends in the middle.

After that, the third clearing process of the role product management information is executed (step S4708). In the third clearing process of the role product management information (step S4708), various counters 141 to 144 and various flags (specifically, the role product initialization flag, initialization End flag, accessory error flag, error cancellation flag, correction operation standby flag, standby cancellation flag, correction operation flag, correction operation completion flag, accessory operation flag, first origin standby flag, second origin standby flag and return operation flag) are cleared to "0". As a result, the management information of the accessory 75 except for the origin displacement flag information is cleared. By executing the third clearing process (step S4708) of the role product management information, the number of times set in the correction operation standby state counted by the standby execution counter 142 is cleared to "0", and the correction is executed. The number of times the corrective action of the accessory 75 that has been counted by the counter 141 is executed is cleared to "0".

After that, it is determined whether or not the spherical effect portion 77b of the accessory 75 is staying at the origin (step S4709). In step S4709, if the origin displacement flag in the role product management area 94d is not set to "1" and the current origin is the initial position, if the initial position sensor 75a is ON, the spherical effect section 77b is turned on. When it is determined that the user is staying at the origin, and when the origin displacement flag is set to "1" and the current origin is at the displacement position, and the displacement position sensor 75b is ON, the spherical effect portion 77b moves to the origin. determined to be staying in As already explained, when the current bonus winning opportunity occurs in the normal game state ST1 or the preparation state ST5, the origin of the accessory 75 is set to the initial position. On the other hand, in the ART state ST6, when the opportunity for the bonus winning this time occurs, the origin of the accessory 75 is set to the displacement position.

If the spherical effect portion 77b stays at the origin (step S4709: YES), the processing for executing the correction operation of the role object 75 (the processing of steps S4710 to S4711) is not executed, and the present The accessory setting process at the time of winning a bonus is ended. On the other hand, when the spherical effect portion 77b is not staying at the origin (step S4709: NO), the processing for executing the correction operation of the role object 75 (processing of steps S4710 to S4711) is executed. Specifically, read processing for correction operation is executed first (step S4710). In step S4710, as in step S4104 of the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72), the drive table corresponding to the current origin is selected from the effect-side ROM 93, out of the already-described initial position drive table and displacement position drive table. It is read out to the readout area 94a. Specifically, when the origin displacement flag in the accessory management area 94d is not set to "1" and the current origin is the initial position, the initial position driving table is read to the eleventh layer LY11, When the origin displacement flag is set to "1" and the current origin is the displacement position, the displacement position drive table is read to the eleventh layer LY11. The performance-side MPU 92 drives and controls the accessory 75 according to the initial position drive table or the displacement position drive table read out to the eleventh layer LY11, so that the spherical performance portion 77b moves to the origin (initial position or displacement position). ).

After that, "1" is set to the correcting action flag in the character product management area 94d (step S4711), and the character product setting process at the time of winning the bonus is completed. The correction operation of the accessory 75, which is started by reading the initial position drive table or the displacement position drive table to the eleventh layer LY11 in step S4710, is counted by the correction execution counter 141 in the accessory management area 94d. not. In this way, the correction execution counter 141 does not count the correction operation of the accessory 75 that is executed when the production side MPU 92 receives the winning result command in which the information indicating that the bonus prize has been established is set. .

As described above, in the case of the accessory error state or the correction operation standby state, the accessory error state or the correction operation standby state is activated based on the receipt of the winning result command in which the information indicating that the bonus prize has occurred is set. It is canceled and the correction operation of the accessory 75 is performed. The time required for the correction action of the accessory 75 is 1.4 seconds at maximum, which is shorter than the execution period (specifically, 5 seconds) of the bonus start effect. Further, the correcting action of the accessory 75 is started prior to the bonus start effect. Therefore, the correcting action of the accessory 75 can be finished before the bonus start presentation is finished, and the accessory action presentation can be executed in the first game in the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4.

When the production-side MPU 92 receives a prize winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus prize has occurred is set in neither the error state nor the correction operation waiting state, the eleventh layer LY11 is cleared. At the same time, the third clearing process of the role product management information is executed. By clearing the eleventh layer LY11, when the correction operation of the role product 75 is being executed, the driving data is not output to the role product driving unit 78, and the correction operation is completed. Also, by executing the third clearing process of the role product management information, the values of various counters 141 to 144 and various flags except the origin displacement flag in the role product management area 94d are cleared to "0". As a result, the number of times the correction action standby state has been set in the standby state counted by the standby execution counter 142 is cleared to "0", and the correction action of the accessory 75 counted by the correction execution counter 141 is executed. The count is cleared to "0". Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of being set to the correction action waiting state or the role product error state during the bonus state, and increase the chances of executing the role product action presentation.

As already explained, in the normal game state ST1 or in the bonus internal state ST2 shifted from the normal game state ST1, bonus winning (either the 1st to 4th BB or the 1st to 2nd RB winning or) is generated, notification lottery processing (step S2311 of effect content determination processing (FIG. 51)) is performed. When the bonus notification effect is won in the notification lottery process, the bonus notification effect is executed in the game in which the bonus winning occurs. Then, when it is neither the role product error state nor the correction operation standby state, the role product action effect is executed in the bonus notification effect. However, as already explained, if a bonus prize is won in a game in which a bonus prize is won, the bonus notification effect is cancelled. Also, in the case of winning the re-variation effect in the notification lottery process, if 5 games are completed without the corresponding bonus winning being established after the game in which the bonus winning occurred, the re-variation effect is subject to execution. A game is played. Then, when it is neither the role product error state nor the correction operation standby state, the role product action effect is executed in the re-variation effect. However, as already explained, if the corresponding bonus prize is established before the 5 games are completed, or if the bonus prize is established in the game targeted for execution of the re-variation production, the re-variation production is canceled. .

If the role product error state or the correction operation standby state is canceled when the start trigger of the accessory operation effect occurs in the bonus notification effect, when the bonus notification effect is canceled, the accessory error state or the correction operation standby state is set. The bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) is started without canceling. In this case, it becomes impossible to execute the performance of the character action in the first game in the bonus state. In addition, if the structure is such that the role product error state or the correction operation standby state is canceled when the start trigger of the role product operation effect occurs in the re-variation production, the role product error state or the correction operation is canceled when the re-variation production is canceled. The bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) is started without canceling the standby state. Also in this case, it becomes impossible to execute the performance of the character action in the first game in the bonus state. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the performance side MPU 92 receives a winning result command in which information indicating the occurrence of a bonus winning is set as a trigger to release the accessory error state or the correction operation waiting state. The event that the effect-side MPU 92 receives the winning result command in which the information indicating that the bonus winning has occurred is an event that always occurs before the start of the bonus state. As a result, regardless of the presence or absence of the bonus notification effect and the presence or absence of the re-variation effect, it is possible to execute the accessory action effect from the first game in the bonus state.

Next, the manner in which the role product error state is released and the role product action presentation is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 79(a) shows the execution period of the performance of the role product action effect, FIG. 79(b) shows the execution period of the correction action of the role product 75, and FIG. 79(c) shows the role product error in the role product management area 94d. 79(d) shows the execution period of the middle stop effect, FIG. 79(e) shows the execution period of the first expected effect, and FIG. 79(f) shows the execution period of the bonus start effect. 79(g) shows the timing at which the production side MPU 92 receives the winning result command, FIG. 79(h) shows the timing at which the production side MPU 92 receives the game start command, and FIG. 79(i) shows the fifth Indicates the timing of occurrence of the opportunity.

As already explained, in the normal game state ST1, when the fifth opportunity occurs, that is, when the ON operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop is performed, the intermediate stop effect is started. Also, as already explained, bonus winning (either 1st to 4th BB winning or 1st to 2nd RB winning) occurs in the role lottery process (Fig. 14), and notification lottery process (effect content determination process ( When the bonus notification effect is won in step S2311) of FIG. 51), the first expectation effect is executed after the end of the middle stop effect. When the fifth opportunity occurs at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 79(i), the middle stop effect is started as shown in FIG. 79(d). As already explained, the middle stop effect is executed for one second. As shown in FIG. 79(c), the role product error flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1" at the timing t1.

After that, at the timing of t2 during execution of the middle stop effect, as shown in FIG. 79(g), the effect side MPU 92 receives the winning result command. The time required from the occurrence of the fifth opportunity until all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped is 190 milliseconds at maximum, and the time required from the occurrence of the fifth opportunity to the end of the medium stop effect. (Specifically, one second). The main side MPU 72 transmits a winning result command when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. When information indicating that a bonus prize corresponding to the bonus prize generated this time has been established is set in the prize result command, the bonus notification performance is canceled upon receipt of the prize result command. At the timing of t2, the role product error flag in the role product management area 94d is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 79(c). As a result, the role product error state is released. Also, at the timing of t2, the correction operation of the character object 75 is started as shown in FIG. 79(b). As already explained, the correcting action of the accessory 75 is executed for 1.4 seconds at maximum.

After that, at the timing of t3, the middle stop effect ends as shown in FIG. 79(d), and the first expected effect starts as shown in FIG. 79(e). The first expected effect is executed for 1.5 seconds. After that, at timing t4 during execution of the first expected effect, the correcting operation of the accessory 75 ends as shown in FIG. 79(b). The execution period of the correction action of the role object 75 is 1.4 seconds at maximum, which is shorter than the execution period of the first expected effect (specifically, 1.5 seconds). Further, the correction operation of the role object 75 is started at a timing (specifically, t2) before the timing (specifically, t3) at which the first expected effect is started. Therefore, the timing t4 when the correcting action of the accessory 75 ends is earlier than the timing t5 when the first expected effect ends.

After that, at timing t5, which is after timing t4, the first expected effect ends as shown in FIG. 79(e). As already explained, since the bonus winning has been established in the game which has been the target game for the execution of the bonus notification effect due to the bonus winning, the bonus notification effect has been cancelled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 79(f), the bonus start effect is started at the timing of t5. The bonus start effect is executed for 5 seconds until timing t6.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79(h), the effect side MPU 92 receives the first game start command from the main side MPU 72 after the bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) is started at the timing of t7. At the timing t7, the role product error state is released as shown in FIG. 79(c), and the correction operation of the role product 75 is completed as shown in FIG. 79(b). Therefore, at the timing of t7, the performance of the character action is started as shown in FIG. 79(a). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79(a), the performance of the character action is completed at the timing t8 which is 1.5 seconds after the timing t7.

As described above, when the performance side MPU 92 receives the winning result command in which the information indicating that the bonus prize has been established is set, the role product error state is canceled and the correction operation of the role product 75 is started. be. The execution period of the correction action of the role object 75 is 1.4 seconds at maximum, which is shorter than the execution period (specifically 1.5 seconds) of the first expected effect. Further, the correcting action of the role object 75 is started at a timing before the timing at which the first expected effect is started. Therefore, the correcting action of the accessory 75 ends before the end of the first expected effect. As a result, the spherical performance part 77b can be kept at the origin at the end of the bonus start performance, and the accessory action performance can be executed in the first game after the bonus state is started.

Triggered by the fact that the production side MPU 92 receives a prize winning result command indicating that the bonus prize has been established, the role product error state is canceled and the correction operation of the role product 75 is executed. Therefore, even if the bonus is won and the bonus notification effect is canceled in the game in which the bonus is won, the accessory error state is returned at the timing before the timing when the first game in the bonus state is started. It can be in a state where it is released and the spherical effect portion 77b stays at the origin. As a result, it is possible to execute the performance of the character action in the game that is executed first after the bonus state is started. In this way, by reducing the frequency of cancellation of the accessory action effect in the bonus state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A structure in which the performance-side MPU 92 receives a game start command in which information indicating the occurrence of a bonus winning is set, cancels the role product error state or the correction operation standby state, and executes the operation performance of the role product 75. Then, although it is possible to end the correction action before moving to the bonus state, even if the bonus notification effect is not won in the game in which the bonus is won, the accessory error state or the correction action standby state is canceled. Since the correcting action of the accessory 75 is performed at the same time, the player will be aware of the occurrence of the bonus winning based on the correcting action being performed. On the other hand, when the performance-side MPU 92 receives a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus prize has been established is set, the role product error state or the correction operation standby state is canceled and the role product 75 is corrected. With the configuration for executing the action, the player can prevent the player from grasping the occurrence of the bonus winning based on the correction action of the role object 75, and the role can be played from the first game in the bonus state. Object action production can be started.

<Configuration for executing history image display>
Next, a configuration for executing history image display on the image display device 63 will be described. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the history image display is performed so that the game history can be checked. FIG. 80(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the history image G23 displayed on the image display device 63, and FIG. 80(b) shows the generation trigger of the history configuration data and the images included in the history image G23. is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship with the types of . As described above, the history configuration data is data that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp the types of the plurality of images that make up the history image G23, and the history configuration data designates the plurality of images that make up the history image G23. Contains multiple specified data. The effect-side MPU 92 generates display data for displaying the history image G23 on the image display device 63 based on the history configuration data.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), the history image G23 is composed of a plurality of images. As shown in FIG. 80(b), as images constituting the history image G23, a background plate image G24, a first wording image G25, a second wording image G26, a third wording image G27, a character image G28, an ending image G29, There are a history point image G30, a rank image G31, a base plate image and a common background plate image.

The history configuration data indicates that when the ART state ST6 ends, when the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 ends, and when the number of game media provided after the transition to the ART state ST6 is a predetermined number of divisions (specifically, "1000"). , “2000”, or “3000”), and when the player selects intermediate generation of the history image G23. The number of game media given after the transition to the ART state ST6 is the period from when the ART in-progress flag in the effect-side RAM 94 is set to "1" until the value of the ART in-progress flag is cleared to "0". It is the number of given game media. As already explained, the ART-in-progress flag indicates which of the game state is the ART state ST6, the bonus internal state ST2 that has shifted from the ART state ST6, the bonus state that has shifted from the ART state ST6, and the preparation state ST5 that has shifted after the bonus state ends. It is a flag that enables the effecting side MPU 92 to grasp that it is. The ART in progress flag is set to “1” when the effect side MPU 92 receives an ART start command from the main side MPU 72 . In addition, the ART in-progress flag is cleared to "0" when the effect-side MPU 92 receives an ART end command or an ending end command from the main-side MPU 72 . The types of images included in the history image G23 differ according to the types of triggers for generating the history configuration data for displaying the history image G23.

As shown in FIG. 80(b), the first to third word images G25 to G27, the character image G28, the history point image G30, and the rank image G31 are always history images, regardless of the type of history configuration data generation trigger. It is a basic image included in G23. A background plate image G24 and these basic images are included in the history image G23 of the first pattern for which history configuration data is generated upon termination of the ART state ST6. A background plate image G24, an ending image G29, and these basic images are included in the history image G23 of the second pattern for which history configuration data is generated upon completion of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2. A third pattern in which the history configuration data is generated when the number of game media provided after the transition to the ART state ST6 reaches a predetermined number of divisions, or when intermediate generation is selected by the player's operation. The history image G23 includes a base plate image, a common background plate image, and these basic images.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), when the history image G23 of the second pattern is displayed on the image display device 63, the background plate image G24 is arranged on the backmost side, and the first background plate image G24 is placed in front of the background plate image G24. ˜third word images G25 to G27, a character image G28, an ending image G29, a history point image G30, and a rank image G31 are arranged. Also, although not shown, when the history image G23 of the first pattern is displayed on the image display device 63, the background plate image G24 is arranged on the backmost side, and the text image is placed in front of the background plate image G24. G25 to G27, character image G28, history point image G30, and rank image G31 are arranged. Also, although illustration is omitted, when the history image G23 of the third pattern is displayed on the image display device 63, the base plate image is arranged on the backmost side, and the common background plate image is placed in front of the base plate image. are arranged, and word images G25 to G27, character image G28, history point image G30, and rank image G31 are arranged in front of these base plate images and common background plate images.

The first to third wording images G25 to G27 are images displaying words corresponding to the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b. The content changes according to the content of the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b.

In the history image display, the background plate image G24 (FIG. 80(a)) or the common background plate image is displayed on the entire surface of the image display device 63. FIG. There are a plurality of types of background plate images G24, and the type of background plate image G24 to be displayed is specified in the later-described plate lottery process (step S5505 of plate setting process (FIG. 92)). The type of background plate image G24 that is likely to be displayed in the plate lottery process differs depending on the current set value. Therefore, based on the type of the background plate image G24 displayed on the image display device 63, the player can predict the current set value. On the other hand, there is one type of common background plate image, and regardless of the current set value, it is commonly displayed when the background plate image G24 is not displayed. When the common background plate image is displayed, the base plate image is displayed on the far side of the screen from the common background plate image. There are a plurality of types of colors for the base plate image, and the color of the base plate image changes according to the net increase in the number of game media after the transition to the ART state ST6. The common background plate image includes a translucent area, and the base plate image arranged on the backmost side is visible through the translucent area.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), a first headline range 151 in which a first word image G25 having the highest priority is arranged is set in the upper left part of the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. In addition, a second headline range 152 in which a second word image G26 having the second highest priority is arranged is set in the right part of the image display device 63, and a top priority A third headline range 153 is set in which a third word image G27 with a low degree is arranged.

The first heading range 151 is set larger than the second heading range 152 and the third heading range 153, and the first wording image G25 displayed in the first heading range 151 is the second heading range 152 and the third heading range. 153 is more likely to attract attention than the second wording image G26 and the third wording image G27 displayed in 153 . In the image display device 63, the second heading range 152 is set larger than the third heading range 153, and the second word image G26 displayed in the second heading range 152 is displayed in the third heading range 153. It is easier to attract attention than the third wording image G27.

The effect-side ROM 93 stores a selection condition table for selecting the text images G25 to G27 to be displayed. In the selection condition table, a plurality of wording designation data for designating wording images G25 to G27 are set, and display priority data and selection conditions are set for each wording designation data. Wording designation data becomes a candidate for display when the set selection condition is satisfied. Whether or not the selection condition is satisfied is determined based on the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b. The display priority data is data indicating the display priority of the wording designation data, and the higher the display priority of the wording designation data, the more difficult it is to satisfy the selection condition. For example, the display priority (specifically, "5") of wording data for which the selection condition "the number of game media provided after transition to ART state ST6 is 400 or more" is set to "to ART state ST6 is set higher than the display priority (specifically, "1") for which the selection condition "200 or more game media are provided after the transition to . As a result, it is possible to confirm later based on the history image G23 that a selection condition that is difficult to achieve has been achieved. Details of the selection condition table will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), a character image range 154 is set in the center of the image display device 63 in which the character image G28 is displayed. A plurality of character images G28 corresponding to wording data are stored in the effect-side ROM 93, and among the plurality of character images G28, the character image G28 corresponding to the first wording image G25 displayed in the first headline range 151 is selected. It is selected as the character image G28 displayed in the character image range 154. FIG.

An ending image range 155 is set in the upper right portion of the image display device 63 in which an ending image G29 indicating that the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 is executed is displayed. As already described, the ending image G29 is displayed only in the history image G23 of the second pattern in which the history configuration data is generated when the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 ends. When the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 is performed, the ending image G29 is always set in the history configuration data.

Specifically, when "1" is set in the fifteenth history storage area RA15 of the history storage area 94b at the generation timing of the history configuration data, that is, execution data for the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 is set. If so, the ending image data for displaying the ending image G29 is reliably set in the history configuration data. Details of the fifteenth history storage area RA15 will be described later.

If the execution history of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 cannot be confirmed, the player who wants to keep a record of the execution of the ending effect must leave the execution history of the ending effect by himself/herself with a camera or the like. I can't enjoy it slowly. In addition, even if the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 is executed, the ending image G29 may not be displayed depending on the result of the lottery or other game history. In case the ending image G29 is not displayed, the user has to leave the execution history of the ending effect by using a camera or the like, and cannot fully enjoy the ending effect.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when execution data for the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 is set in the history storage area 94b at the timing of generating the history composition data, the ending image data is surely included in the history composition data. Configuration to be set. Therefore, the player can check the record of the ending effect by displaying the history image later without leaving the record of the effect with a camera or the like during execution of the ending effect. As a result, it is possible to carefully show the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 to the player.

A rank display range 156 in which the rank image G31 is displayed is set in the upper center of the image display device 63 . A history point display range 157 in which a history point image G30 is displayed is set below the rank display range 156 and above the character image range 154 . When the history configuration data is generated, the history is generated based on the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b and the display priority data of the first to third word images G25 to G27 selected as display targets. Points are calculated, and a history point image G30 showing the calculated history points is displayed in the history point display range 157. FIG. Also, the history image G23 is ranked based on the history points, and the rank image G31 corresponding to the history image G23 is displayed in the rank display range 156. FIG.

FIG. 81(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the effect-side RAM 94 for displaying history images. As already described, the effect-side RAM 94 is provided with a history storage area 94b in which game history data is stored, and an image reproduction storage area 94c in which history configuration data is stored.

The slot machine 10 has a history storage mode in which game history data for displaying history images is stored. The game history data is stored in the history storage area 94b under the condition that the mode is the history storage mode. When the setting of the history storage mode is canceled, the game history data is not stored in the history storage area 94b.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), the effect side RAM 94 is provided with a history storage flag 158 that enables the effect side MPU 92 to grasp that the mode is the history storage mode. The history storage flag 158 is set to "1" when the game player operates the effect operating device 64 (FIG. 1) to select the setting of the game history mode. The history storage flag 158 is set when the game player operates the effect operation device 64 and selects cancellation of the game history mode, and when the effect side MPU 92 finally receives the game start command from the main side MPU 72 in the normal game state ST1. is cleared to "0" when the game start command is not received for a predetermined period (specifically, 10 minutes). When the history storage flag 158 is cleared to "0" and the game history mode ends, the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b except for the game history data indicating the number of occurrences of ART wins are changed to "0". 0” is cleared.

With the configuration in which the game history mode can be set and the game history mode can be canceled based on the operation of the effect operation device 64, the history can be checked when the player wishes to check the game history later. It is possible to perform image display.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), the history storage area 94b is provided with a 0th history storage area RA0 to a 15th history storage area RA15. The 0th history storage area RA0 is a counter that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp the number of games before the transition to the ART state ST6. The 0th history storage area RA0 consists of 2 bytes and can measure the number of games with an upper limit of "65535". The value of the 0th history storage area RA0 is incremented by 1 on the condition that the game is in the game history mode when the game is played in a state where the value of the ART in-progress flag in the effect side RAM 94 is "0". . As already explained, the ART-in-progress flag indicates which of the game state is the ART state ST6, the bonus internal state ST2 that has shifted from the ART state ST6, the bonus state that has shifted from the ART state ST6, and the preparation state ST5 that has shifted after the bonus state ends. It is a flag that enables the effecting side MPU 92 to grasp that it is. The ART in progress flag is set to “1” when the effect side MPU 92 receives an ART start command from the main side MPU 72 . In addition, the ART in-progress flag is cleared to "0" when the effect-side MPU 92 receives an ART end command or an ending end command from the main-side MPU 72 . The value of the 0th history storage area RA0 is set when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2, and when the game Cleared to "0" when the history mode setting is cancelled.

The first history storage area RA1 is a counter that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp the number of games until either the bonus state or the ART state ST6 is started. The first history storage area RA1 consists of 2 bytes, and can measure the number of games with an upper limit of "65535". The value of the first history storage area RA1 is incremented by 1 under the condition that the game is in the game history mode when the game is played in a state where the value of the ART in-progress flag in the effect side RAM 94 is "0". . Also, the value of the first history storage area RA1 is set to the end of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 when the effect-side MPU 92 receives the bonus end command, or when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ART state ST6 as a trigger. is cleared to "0" when the history configuration data is generated with this as a trigger and when the setting of the game history mode is canceled. As already explained, the bonus end command is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 when the bonus state end condition is satisfied in the bonus state processing (step S1514 of the bonus processing (FIG. 34)). be.

The second history storage area RA2 is a counter that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp the number of game media that has decreased before the transition to the ART state ST6. The second history storage area RA2 consists of 2 bytes and can measure the number of game media from "-32767" to "32767". In the game history mode, the value of the second history storage area RA2 is a game started with automatic betting after a replay win occurs in a state where the value of the ART in-progress flag in the effect side RAM 94 is "0". Except for certain cases, the number of game media bet (specifically, "3") is subtracted, and the number of game media provided when a minor winning combination is won is added. The value of the second history storage area RA2 is set when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2, and when the game Cleared to "0" when the history mode setting is cancelled.

The third history storage area RA3 is a counter that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp the maximum number of game media decreased during the period until the transition to the ART state ST6. The third history storage area RA3 consists of 2 bytes and can measure the number of game media from "-32767" to "0". In the game history mode, when the value of the second history storage area RA2 becomes smaller than the value of the third history storage area RA3, the value of the second history storage area RA3 is stored. The value of RA2 is set. The value of the third history storage area RA3 is set when the history data is generated with the end of the ART state ST6, when the history data is generated with the end of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2, and when the game history data is generated. Cleared to "0" when the history mode setting is canceled.

The fourth history storage area RA4 is a counter that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of occurrences of the BB state ST3. The fourth history storage area RA4 consists of 1 byte and can measure the number of occurrences of the BB state ST3 with an upper limit of "255". In the game history mode, 1 is added to the value of the fourth history storage area RA4 when the BB state ST3 occurs. Further, the value of the fourth history storage area RA4 is set when the history composition data is generated with the end of the ART state ST6 as a trigger, when the history composition data is generated with the end of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 as a trigger, And it is cleared to "0" when the setting of the game history mode is cancelled.

The fifth history storage area RA5 is a counter that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of occurrences of the RB state ST4. The fifth history storage area RA5 consists of 1 byte and can measure the number of occurrences of the RB state ST4 with an upper limit of "255". In the game history mode, 1 is added to the value of the fifth history storage area RA5 when the RB state ST4 occurs. Further, the value of the fifth history storage area RA5 is set when the history data is generated with the end of the ART state ST6, when the history data is generated with the end of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2, And it is cleared to "0" when the setting of the game history mode is cancelled.

The sixth history storage area RA6 is a counter that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp the number of occurrences of ART winning. The sixth history storage area RA6 consists of 3 bytes, and it is possible to measure the number of occurrences of ART wins with an upper limit of a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the cube of "256". In the game history mode, the value of the sixth history storage area RA6 is incremented by 1 each time an ART win occurs, and is cleared to "0" when the value after the 1 addition exceeds the upper limit. The value of the sixth history storage area RA6 is set when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2, and when the game It is not cleared to "0" even when the history mode setting is canceled. The number of occurrences of ART wins counted in the sixth history storage area RA6 includes the number of times a bonus win occurred in ART state ST6 and then returned to ART state ST6 via the bonus state and preparation state ST5. can't

The seventh history storage area RA7 is a counter that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp the type information of the triggering combination for winning ART. The seventh history storage area RA7 consists of 4 bits and is capable of storing the type information of the ART winning opportunity with the upper limit of "15". In the game history mode, the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 14) for the combination in the game in which the ART winning occurred is set in the seventh history storage area RA7. In the seventh history storage area RA7, specifically, numerical information of any one of "4", "6", "8" and "15" is set. The value of the seventh history storage area RA7 is set when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2, and when the game Cleared to "0" when the history mode setting is canceled.

The eighth history storage area RA8 is a counter that enables the effect side MPU 92 to grasp the type information of the ART start effect. The eighth history storage area RA8 consists of 5 bits and can store the type information of the ART start effect with an upper limit of "31". As already explained, the slot machine 10 has 16 types of ART start effects. The winning number (“1” to “16”) in the ART start effect lottery table specified in S3105) is set in the eighth history storage area RA8 as type information. The eighth history storage area RA8 is stored in the game history mode when the history configuration data is generated when the ART state ST6 ends, when the history configuration data is generated when the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 ends, and in the game history mode. is cleared to "0".

The ninth history storage area RA9 is a counter that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp the number of games that have been executed after the transition to the ART state ST6. The ninth history storage area RA9 consists of 2 bytes and can measure the number of games with an upper limit of "65535". In the game history mode, the value of the ninth history storage area RA9 is incremented by 1 when the game is played while the ART in-progress flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1". Further, the value of the ninth history storage area RA9 is set when the history composition data is generated with the end of the ART state ST6 as a trigger, when the history composition data is generated with the end of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 as a trigger, And it is cleared to "0" when the setting of the game history mode is canceled.

The tenth history storage area RA10 is a counter that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp the number of game media provided after the transition to the ART state ST6. The tenth history storage area RA10 consists of 16 bits and can measure the number of game media from "0" to "65535". In the game history mode, the value of the tenth history storage area RA10 is added with the number of game media provided when a small win is won while the ART in-progress flag is set to "1". The value of the tenth history storage area RA10 is set when the history data is generated with the end of the ART state ST6, when the history data is generated with the end of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2, and when the game data is generated. Cleared to "0" when the history mode setting is cancelled.

The eleventh history storage area RA11 is a counter that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp the net increase in the number of game media after the transition to the ART state ST6. The eleventh history storage area RA11 consists of 18 bits and can measure the number of game media from "-131072" to "131072". In the game history mode, the value of the eleventh history storage area RA11 indicates that the game is started with automatic betting after a replay win occurs in a state where the ART in-progress flag is set to "1". The number of game media bet (specifically, "3") is subtracted, and the number of game media given when a minor winning combination is won is added. The value of the eleventh history storage area RA11 is set when the history data is generated with the end of the ART state ST6, when the history data is generated with the end of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2, and when the game history data is generated. Cleared to "0" when the history mode setting is cancelled.

The twelfth history storage area RA12 is a counter that enables the directing MPU 92 to grasp the total number of additional games in the ART state ST6. The twelfth history storage area RA12 consists of 2 bytes, and can measure the number of additional games with an upper limit of "65535". In the game history mode, the value of the twelfth history storage area RA12 is added with the number of additional games set in the ART additional command when the production side MPU 92 receives the ART additional command. The value of the twelfth history storage area RA12 is set when the history data is generated with the end of the ART state ST6, when the history data is generated with the end of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2, and when the game data is generated. Cleared to "0" when the history mode setting is canceled.

The thirteenth history storage area RA13 is a counter that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp the total number of additional games in the preparation state ST5. The thirteenth history storage area RA13 consists of 2 bytes and is capable of counting the number of additional games with an upper limit of "65535". In the game history mode, the value of the 13th history storage area RA13 is added with the number of additional games set in the additional preparation during preparation command when the production side MPU 92 receives the additional preparation during preparation command. The value of the thirteenth history storage area RA13 is set when the history data is generated with the end of the ART state ST6, when the history data is generated with the end of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2, and when the game data is generated. Cleared to "0" when the history mode setting is cancelled.

The fourteenth history storage area RA14 is a counter that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp the total number of additional games in the bonus state. The 14th history storage area RA14 consists of 2 bytes and is capable of counting the number of additional games with an upper limit of "65535". In the game history mode, the value of the 14th history storage area RA14 is added with the number of add-on games set in the add-on bonus command when the effect-side MPU 92 receives the add-on bonus command. The value of the fourteenth history storage area RA14 is set when the history configuration data is generated when the ART state ST6 ends, when the history configuration data is generated when the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 ends, and when the history configuration data is generated when the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 ends. Cleared to "0" when the history mode setting is canceled.

The fifteenth history storage area RA15 is a flag that enables the effect side MPU 92 to grasp whether or not the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 has been executed. The fifteenth history storage area RA15 consists of one bit. In the game history mode, "1" is set in the fifteenth history storage area RA15 when the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 is executed. The value of the fifteenth history storage area RA15 is set when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2, and when the history data is generated with the end of the advantageous section SC2. Cleared to "0" when the history mode setting is canceled.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), the history storage area 94b is provided with a configuration data storage area 161 in which history configuration data being generated is set. FIG. 81(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the configuration data storage area 161. As shown in FIG. The configuration data storage area 161 stores background plate image designation data designating the background plate image G24 or the common background plate image, base plate image designation data designating the base plate image, and first text image G25 designating the first text image G25. Wording designation data, second wording designation data designating the second wording image G26, third wording designation data designating the third wording image G27, and rank image designating data designating the rank image G31 are stored. . As already explained, the type of the character image G28 displayed in the history image G23 corresponds to the type of the first wording image G25. Therefore, the effect-side MPU 92 grasps the types of the first wording image G25 and the character image G28 to be displayed based on the first wording designation data. In addition to the various designation data described above, the configuration data storage area 161 also stores data indicating whether or not there is an ending image G29, data indicating history points, date and time data indicating the date and time when history configuration data was generated, Generation trigger data indicating the type of generation trigger of the history configuration data is stored.

As shown in FIG. 81(b), the configuration data storage area 161 contains a first wording counter 161a, a second wording counter 161b, a third wording counter 161c, an ending image flag 161d, a history point counter 161e, a rank counter 161f, A background plate counter 161g, a base plate counter 161h, a date/time data counter 161j, and a generation trigger counter 161k are provided.

The first wording counter 161a is a counter in which first wording designation data designating the first wording image G25 and display priority data corresponding to the first wording designation data are stored. A counter storing second wording designation data designating the two-wording image G26 and display priority data corresponding to the second wording designation data, and the third wording counter 161c designates the third wording image G27. A counter in which third wording designation data and display priority data corresponding to the third wording designation data are stored. The first to third wording designation data are numerical information that can specify the wording images G25 to G27, and are not address data of the wording images G25 to G27 in the character ROM. As already explained, the display priority data is data indicating the display priority of wording designation data.

There are 324 types of wordings displayed in the history image G23, and the character ROM stores 324 types of wording image data for displaying the 324 types of wordings in vertical writing, and 324 types of wording image data. 324 kinds of wording image data for displaying "." in horizontal writing are stored. The wording designation data is 9-bit numerical information indicating any one of "1" to "324", and the wording designation data and the wording image data are in one-to-one correspondence. The data amount of the first to third wording designation data is smaller than the data amount of the address data of the wording image data. The rendering-side ROM 93 stores a wording correspondence table in which correspondence between wording designation data and address data of wording image data in the character ROM is set. Due to the configuration for storing the wording designation data, compared to the configuration for storing the address data of the wording image data, the effect side RAM 94 for making it possible to grasp the types of the wording images G25 to 27 included in the history image G23. storage capacity is reduced.

The first to third word counters 161a to 161c have a storage capacity of 13 bits, word designation data is stored in the upper 7 bits, and display priority data ("0" to "8" are stored in the next 4 bits). , 4-bit numerical information) is stored.

A text image for horizontal writing is set in the first heading range 151 at an enlargement rate of 100%, a text image for vertical writing is set in the second heading range 152 at an enlargement rate of 100%, and a text image for vertical writing is set in the third heading range 153 at an enlargement rate of 100%. A text image for horizontal writing is set at an enlargement rate of 50%. The word images for horizontal writing set in the first headline range 151 and the third headline range 153 are common, and have different enlargement ratios.

As already explained, the effect-side MPU 92 generates display data for displaying the history image G23 on the image display device 63 based on the history configuration data. When generating the display data, the effect-side MPU 92 checks the first wording designation data against the wording correspondence table to grasp the address data of the wording image for horizontal writing corresponding to the first wording designation data, and displays the address data of the wording image for horizontal writing corresponding to the first wording designation data. The grasped address data is set as display data, and the second wording designation data is collated with the wording correspondence table to grasp the address data of the wording image for vertical writing corresponding to the second wording designation data. The grasped address data is set as display data, and the third wording designation data is collated with the wording correspondence table to grasp the address data of the wording image for horizontal writing corresponding to the third wording designation data, and grasp the address data. Set the displayed address data as display data.

The effect-side ROM 93 stores a history image generation table in which parameters of various images included in the history image G23 are set. The effect-side MPU 92 sets the parameters (position coordinate information, enlargement ratio, transparency information, color information) of the first to third word images G25 to G27 in the display data of the history image G23 based on the history image generation table. do. The positional coordinate information is information for specifying the coordinates on the image display device 63 where the image should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio for a standard display size preset for the image. When the magnification is greater than 100%, the image is enlarged and displayed, and when the magnification is less than 100%, the image is displayed in reduced size. The transparency information is for specifying the transparency of the entire image. Color information is information for designating the color tone of an image to be displayed. As already explained, the enlargement rate of the first wording image G25 and the second wording image G26 is set to 100%, and the enlargement rate of the third wording image G27 is set to 50%.

As already explained, the type of the character image G28 included in the history image G23 is grasped based on the first wording designation data. 324 types of character image data are stored in the character ROM, and the character image data corresponds to the text designation data on a one-to-one basis. The effect-side ROM 93 stores a character image correspondence table in which the correspondence between wording designation data and address data of character image data in the character ROM is set. Compared to the configuration in which data for ascertaining the type of the character image G28 is stored separately from the first wording designation data, the configuration for ascertaining the type of the character image G28 based on the first wording designation data The storage capacity of the effect-side RAM 94 for making it possible to grasp the type of the character image G28 included in the history image G23 is reduced.

When the display data for the history image G23 is generated based on the history configuration data, the effect-side MPU 92 compares the first wording designation data against the character image correspondence table to generate a character image corresponding to the first wording designation data. The address data of the data is grasped, and the grasped address data is set as the display data. Also, the effect-side MPU 92 sets the parameters (positional coordinate information, enlargement ratio, transparency information, color information) of the character image G28 in the display data of the history image G23 based on the history image generation table.

The ending image flag 161d is a flag that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp whether or not the ending image G29 is displayed in the history image G23. The state in which the ending image flag 161d is set to "1" corresponds to the state in which the ending image G29 is to be displayed, and the state in which the ending image flag 161d is not set to "1" corresponds to the state in which the ending image G29 is displayed. Corresponds to the non-display target state.

When the display data for the history image G23 is generated based on the history configuration data, the effect-side MPU 92 generates the address data of the ending image data in the character ROM based on the fact that the ending image flag 161d is set to "1". is set as display data. Also, the effect-side MPU 92 sets the parameters (position coordinate information, enlargement ratio, transparency information, color information) of the ending image G29 in the display data of the history image G23 based on the history image generation table.

The history point counter 161e is a counter that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp the history points of the history image G23. A history point is 16-bit numerical information corresponding to any one of "0" to "65535".

The character ROM stores numeric image data and alphabet image data for displaying each numeric image of the history point image G30 and the alphabet image of "P". The performance-side ROM 93 stores a history point correspondence table in which the correspondence between each digit of the history points and each number image in the character ROM is set. The history point correspondence table also stores the address data of the alphabet image data for displaying the alphabet image of "P".

When generating the data for display of the history image G23 based on the history configuration data, the effect-side MPU 92 compares the number of each digit of the history point data with the history point correspondence table to include the data in the history point image G30. The address data of each numeric image is grasped, and the address data of the alphabetic image data of "P" stored in the history correspondence table is grasped. Then, these address data that have been grasped are set as display data. Also, the effect-side MPU 92 sets the parameters (positional coordinate information, enlargement ratio, transparency information, color information) of these numeric images and alphabet images in the display data of the history image G23 based on the history image generation table. .

The rank counter 161f is a counter in which rank image designation data designating the rank image G31 is stored. The rank image specifying data is numerical information that enables the rank image G31 to be specified, and is not the address data of the rank image data in the character ROM. The character ROM stores five types of rank image data corresponding to "C rank", "B rank", "A rank", "S rank" and "SS rank". The rank image designation data is 3-bit numerical information indicating any one of "0" to "6". The state in which the value of the rank image designation data is "1" corresponds to the state in which the rank image data of "C rank" is to be displayed, and the state in which the value of the rank image designation data is "2" corresponds to "B Rank" corresponds to the state in which the rank image data is to be displayed, and the state in which the value of the rank image designation data is "3" corresponds to the state in which the rank image data of "A rank" is to be displayed. The state in which the value of the rank image designation data is "4" corresponds to the state in which the rank image data of "S rank" is to be displayed, and the state in which the value of the rank image designation data is "5" corresponds to This corresponds to a state in which the rank image data of "SS rank" is to be displayed. The data amount of the rank image designation data is smaller than the data amount of the address data of the rank image G31.

The character ROM stores a plurality (specifically, six types) of rank image data for the history image G23. The effect-side ROM 93 stores a rank correspondence table in which the correspondence between rank image designation data and address data of the rank image data in the character ROM is set.

When the display data for the history image G23 is generated based on the history configuration data, the effect-side MPU 92 obtains the address of the rank image data corresponding to the rank image designation data by collating the rank image designation data against the rank correspondence table. Data is grasped, and the grasped address data is set as display data. Also, the effect-side MPU 92 sets the parameters (position coordinate information, enlargement ratio, transparency information, color information) of the rank image G31 to the display data of the history image G23 based on the history image generation table.

The background plate counter 161g is a counter in which background plate image designation data designating the background plate image G24 or the common background plate image is stored. The background plate image designation data is numerical information that enables specification of the background plate image G24 or the common background plate image, and is not address data of the background plate image data or the common background plate image data in the character ROM. The character ROM stores five types of background plate images G24: a white plate image, a copper plate image, a silver plate image, a gold plate image, and a rainbow plate image, and one type of common background plate image. The state in which the background plate image designation data is "1" corresponds to the state in which the white plate image is to be displayed, and the state in which the background plate image designation data is "2" corresponds to the state in which the copper plate image is to be displayed. The state where the background plate image designation data is "3" corresponds to the state where the silver plate image is to be displayed, and the state where the background plate image designation data is "4" corresponds to the gold plate image. is to be displayed, and the state in which the background plate image designation data is "5" corresponds to the state in which the rainbow plate image is to be displayed. A state in which the background plate image designation data is "0" corresponds to a state in which the common background plate image is to be displayed. The data amount of the background plate image designation data is smaller than the data amount of the background plate image data or the common background plate image data.

The character ROM stores a plurality of types of background plate image data and one type of common background plate image data. The effect-side ROM 93 stores a background plate correspondence table in which the correspondence between background plate image designation data and address data of background plate image data and common background plate image data in the character ROM is set.

When the display data for the history image G23 is generated based on the history configuration data, the effect-side MPU 92 compares the background plate image designation data against the background plate correspondence table to generate the background plate corresponding to the background plate image designation data. The address data of the image data or the common background plate image data is grasped, and the grasped address data is set as the display data. Specifically, when the value of the background plate image designation data is "0", the address data of the common background plate image data is set as display data, and the value of the background plate image designation data is "1" or more. , the address data of the background plate image data corresponding to the value is set as the display data. Also, the effect-side MPU 92 adds the parameters (positional coordinate information, enlargement ratio, transparency information, color information) of the background plate image G24 or the common background plate image to the display data of the history image G23 based on the history image generation table. set.

A base plate counter 161h is a counter in which base plate image designation data for designating a base plate image is stored. The base plate image designation data is numerical information that enables the base plate image to be specified, and is not address data of the base plate image data in the character ROM. The character ROM stores seven types of baseplate images, usually in color, black, blue, green, red, silver and gold. The base plate image designation data is 3-bit numerical information corresponding to any one of "0" to "7". A state in which the base plate image designation data is "1" corresponds to a state in which a normal color base plate image is to be displayed, and a state in which the base plate image designation data is "2" corresponds to a state in which a black base plate image is displayed. The state in which the base plate image designation data is "3" corresponds to the state in which the blue base plate image is to be displayed, and the state in which the base plate image designation data is "4". corresponds to the state in which the green base plate image is to be displayed, and the state in which the base plate image designation data is "5" corresponds to the state in which the red base plate image is to be displayed. , the state where the base plate image designation data is "6" corresponds to the state where the silver base plate image is to be displayed, and the state where the base plate image designation data is "7" corresponds to the state where the gold base plate image is displayed. Corresponds to the state to be displayed. The data amount of the base plate image designation data is smaller than the data amount of the base plate image data.

The character ROM stores a plurality of types (specifically, seven types) of base plate image data. The effect-side ROM 93 stores a base plate correspondence table in which a correspondence relationship between base plate image designation data and address data of the base plate image data in the character ROM is set.

When the display data for the history image G23 is generated based on the history configuration data, the effect-side MPU 92 compares the base plate image designation data against the base plate correspondence table to determine the base plate corresponding to the base plate image designation data. Address data of image data is grasped, and the grasped address data is set as display data. Also, the effect-side MPU 92 sets the parameters (position coordinate information, enlargement ratio, transparency information, color information) of the base plate image in the display data of the history image G23 based on the history image generation table.

The date-and-time data counter 161j is a counter that stores date-and-time data that makes it possible to grasp the date and time when the history configuration data was generated. The performance control board 91 is provided with an RTC for updating date and time data. The RTC is a real-time clock that constantly measures date information and time information, and outputs the measured date information and time information (hereinafter also referred to as date information) in accordance with instructions from the production side MPU 92. It is a configuration that allows The production side MPU 92 acquires date and time data from the RTC in the production control board 91 when generating the history configuration data. Note that the RTC is provided with a backup power supply, so that it is possible to measure date information and time information even while the slot machine 10 is powered off.

The generation trigger counter 161k is a counter in which generation trigger data indicating the type of the generation trigger of history configuration data is stored. Numerical information of one of "1" to "6" corresponding to the type of generation trigger of the history configuration data is set in the generation trigger counter 161k. The generation trigger counter 161k is set to "1" when the history configuration data is generated when the number of game media provided after the transition to the ART state ST6 reaches 1000, and the game media are provided. "2" is set when the history configuration data is generated when the number reaches 2000, and when the history configuration data is generated when the number of provided game media reaches 3000 is set to "3", and "4" is set when the history composition data is generated when the ART state ST6 ends, and the history composition data is set when the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 ends. is generated, "5" is set, and "6" is set when history configuration data is generated triggered by an intermediate generation operation.

As already described with reference to FIG. 80(b), the history image G23 of the first pattern for which history configuration data is generated upon completion of the ART state ST6 includes an ending image G29, a base plate image and a common background plate. Images are not included. In this case, the values of the ending image flag 161d, the background plate counter 161g, and the base plate counter 161h are "0". As already described, the base plate image and the common background plate image are not included in the history image G23 of the second pattern for which the history configuration data is generated when the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 ends. In this case, the values of the background plate counter 161g and base plate counter 161h are "0". As already described, the history image G23 of the third pattern in which the history configuration data is generated when the number of game media provided in the ART state ST6 reaches the predetermined number of divisions or when midway generation is selected is displayed. does not include the background plate image G24 and the ending image G29. In this case, the values of the ending image flag 161d and the background plate counter 161g are "0".

While the display data of the history image G23 is set in the display setting area 113 of the effect-side RAM 94, the effect-side MPU 92 creates a drawing list for one frame based on the display data, and saves the drawing list. Output to VDP95. According to the drawing list, the VDP 95 extracts various image data (background plate image data, first to third word image data, character image data, ending image data, history point image data, rank image data, base plate image data and Common background plate image data) is read, and display data is created in either one of the two frame areas in the video RAM 96 using the read various image data. Then, the VDP 95 outputs an image signal corresponding to the created display data to the image display device 63, thereby causing the image display device 63 to display the history image G23 corresponding to the display data.

Next, the image reproduction storage area 94c will be described. The image reproduction storage area 94c is a storage area to which backup power is supplied after the slot machine 10 is powered off. Even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the effect side MPU 92 is stopped because the power supply of the slot machine 10 is in an OFF state, the image of the effect side RAM 94 is transmitted from the power supply part during power interruption provided in the power supply device 54.例文帳に追加Backup power is supplied to the reproduction storage area 94c as power for memory retention. As a result, information is stored and held in the image reproduction storage area 94c even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the effect side MPU 92 is stopped because the power supply of the slot machine 10 is in an OFF state. Therefore, the image reproduction storage area 94c also stores the history configuration data generated before the previous day.

As described above, the image reproduction storage area 94c can store history configuration data corresponding to a maximum of 32 history images G23. As shown in FIG. 81(a), the image reproduction storage area 94c includes a 0th reproduction storage area RD0 to a 31st reproduction storage area RD31 as storage areas for storing history configuration data corresponding to the history image G23. is provided. In each reproduction storage area RDn (n is any integer from 0 to 31), a first word counter, a second word counter, A third word counter, an ending image flag, a history point counter, a rank counter, a background plate counter, a base plate counter, a date and time data counter, and a generation trigger counter are provided. Each reproduction storage area RDn stores history configuration data corresponding to one history image G23. Further, in each reproduction storage area RDn, the production side MPU 92 determines whether or not the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data stored in the reproduction storage area RDn can be displayed on the image display device 63. A displayable flag is provided to enable grasping. Details of the displayable flag will be described later.

When the generation of history configuration data is completed, the history configuration data set in the configuration data storage area 161 is moved to the image reproduction storage area 94c. As shown in FIG. 81( a ), the effect side RAM 94 is provided with a write pointer 162 . The write pointer 162 is a pointer counter that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp the reproduction storage area RDn in which the history configuration data is written in the image reproduction storage area 94c. The write pointer 162 is set with numerical value information from "0" to "30". When the newly generated history configuration data is stored in the image reproduction storage area 94c, the reproduction storage area RDn corresponding to the value of the write pointer 162 is cleared, and the cleared reproduction storage area RDn is , the newly generated historical configuration data is stored. Then the value of the write pointer 162 is updated. The 31st reproduction storage area RD31 is a storage area for storing history configuration data generated when the player selects midway generation. Therefore, the maximum value of the write pointer 162 is "30". Details of the 31st reproduction storage area RD31 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), the effect-side RAM 94 is provided with a first protection target counter 163 and a second protection target counter 164 that make it possible to grasp the reproduction storage area RDn that is excluded from being erased. there is The first protection target counter 163 can grasp the reproduction storage area RDn in which the history configuration data with the highest history point is stored in the image reproduction storage area 94c, and the history point data included in the history configuration data. is a counter for In addition, the second protection target counter 164 stores a reproduction storage area RDn in which the history configuration data with the second highest history point is stored in the image reproduction storage area 94c, and the history points included in the history configuration data. It is a counter that makes it possible to grasp the data.

The first protection target counter 163 and the second protection target counter 164 have a storage capacity of 13 bits. Area data indicating the storage area for reproduction RDn is stored in the upper 5 bits, and a history point is stored in the lower 8 bits. data is stored. The area data is numerical value information "0" to "30" corresponding to the 0th to 30th reproduction storage areas RD0 to RD30.

If the history point in the history configuration data newly stored in the image reproduction storage area 94c is greater than or equal to the history point in the first protection target counter 163, the data in the first protection target counter 163 overwrites the second protection target counter 164. be done. Then, the area data corresponding to the reproduction storage area RDn in which the new history configuration data is stored is stored in the high-order 5 bits of the first protection target counter 163, and the low-order 8 bits of the first protection target counter 163 History point data of the new history configuration data is stored.

As a result, the reproduction storage area RDn in which the history composition data having the second highest history point is stored is removed from the protection object, and the reproduction storage area RDn in which the history composition data is newly stored becomes the protection object. is set to If the history point in the first protected counter 163 and the history point in the newly stored history configuration data are the same value, the newer history configuration data is preferentially protected.

Further, when the history point in the history configuration data newly stored in the image reproduction storage area 94c is equal to or greater than the history point in the second protection target counter 164 and is less than the history point in the first protection target counter 163, 2 protection target counter 164 is cleared to "0". Then, the area data corresponding to the reproduction storage area RDn in which the new history configuration data is stored is stored in the upper 5 bits of the second protected counter 164, and the lower 8 bits of the second protected counter 164 History point data of the new history configuration data is stored.

As a result, the reproduction storage area RDn in which the history composition data having the second highest history point is stored is removed from the protection object, and the reproduction storage area RDn in which the history composition data is newly stored becomes the protection object. is set to If the history point in the second protected counter 164 and the history point in the newly stored history configuration data are the same value, the newer history configuration data is preferentially protected.

When the newly generated history configuration data is stored in the image reproduction storage area 94c, 1 is added to the value of the write pointer 162 and the reproduction storage area RDn to be written is updated. In this case, if the reproduction storage area RDn corresponding to the value of the write pointer 162 after the addition of 1 is set as a protection target, the value of the write pointer 162 is further incremented by 1 to obtain the reproduction storage area to be written. Area RDn is updated. When the value of the write pointer 162 after adding 1 exceeds "30" which is the maximum value of the write pointer 162, the value of the write pointer 162 is cleared to "0". In this way, the reproduction storage area RDn set as a protection target is excluded from the write target. As a result, the history configuration data having a history point value higher than or equal to a predetermined rank (specifically, second or higher) is protected without being erased.

If history configuration data is unconditionally deleted in order from the oldest, valuable history configuration data with high history points cannot be left. In addition, if the history points are erased in ascending order, there is a possibility that the history configuration data generated on the current day will be overwritten by the history configuration data generated next and become unconfirmable. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, on condition that the history points are not in the history configuration data of a predetermined rank (specifically, the top two ranks) or higher, the configuration is such that the oldest history configuration data is deleted in order. . As a result, it is possible to prevent history configuration data with high history points and value from being deleted, and to reduce the possibility that history configuration data generated on the day will be deleted on the same day. can be done.

The 31st reproduction storage area RD31 is a storage area for storing history configuration data generated when the player selects midway generation. Intermediate generation can be selected at any timing. For this reason, a storage area for storing history configuration data generated when intermediate generation is selected, and a storage area for storing normal history configuration data generated by events other than the selection of intermediate generation. If the storage area is shared, most of the normal history configuration data may be rewritten when intermediate generation is repeatedly selected in a short period of time. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a reproduction storage area RD31 for storing history configuration data generated with the selection of intermediate generation as a trigger, and reproduction storage areas RD0 to RD30 for storing normal history configuration data are stored. is separated, it is possible to prevent normal history configuration data from being overwritten by history configuration data generated in the wake of intermediate generation. As a result, it is possible to appropriately leave normal history configuration data.

Next, a processing configuration for displaying history images will be described. First, the history image processing executed by the effect-side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. Incidentally, the history image processing is executed in the effect-side MPU 92 by interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds).

In the history image processing, first, it is determined whether or not the history storage flag 158 in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S4801). If the history storage flag 158 is set to "1" (step S4801: YES), it means that the history storage mode is set, so the history information storage process is executed (step S4802). FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing history information storage processing.

In the history information storage process, when a game start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S4901: YES), the number of games information is updated (step S4902), and this history information storage process ends. In the update process of the number-of-games information, 1 is added to the value of the 0th history storage area RA0 when the ART in-progress flag in the effect-side RAM 94 is not set to "1". In addition, in the game number information updating process (step S4902), the value of the first history storage area RA1 is incremented by 1 if the ART in-progress flag is not set to "1" and the game is not in the bonus state. Furthermore, in the game number information updating process (step S4902), 1 is added to the value of the ninth history storage area RA9 when the ART flag is set to "1".

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4901, it is determined whether or not an ART winning command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S4903). If the ART winning command has been received (step S4903: YES), update processing of the ART winning frequency information is executed (step S4904). In the process of updating the ART winning count information, 1 is added to the value of the sixth history storage area RA6 in the history storage area 94b.

After that, the memory processing of the trigger role information is executed (step S4905). In the memory processing of the triggering combination information, the information of the combination won in the lottery process (FIG. 14) of the combination in the current game in which the ART winning occurred is stored as the triggering combination information of the ART winning in the seventh history storage area RA7.

If a negative determination is made in step S4903, it is determined whether or not a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S4906). If the winning result command has been received (step S4906: YES), the number information is stored (step S4907). FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing update processing of number information.

In the process of updating the number information, first, it is determined whether or not the replay flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5001). The replay flag is a flag that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to recognize that a replay win has occurred in the previous game. The replay flag is set to "1" in step S5015, which will be described later. If the replay flag is set to "1" (step S5001: YES), the replay flag is cleared to "0" (step S5002).

On the other hand, when "1" is not set in the replay flag (step S5001: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the ART in-progress flag in the effect side RAM 94 (step S5003). If the middle flag is set to "1" (step S5003: YES), the number of bets "3" is subtracted from the value in the eleventh history storage area RA11 (step S5004). As already explained, the eleventh history storage area RA11 is a counter that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp the net increase in the number of game media after the transition to the ART state ST6.

On the other hand, if the ART flag is not set to "1" (step S5003: NO), the number of bets "3" is subtracted from the value in the second history storage area RA2 (step S5005). As already explained, the second history storage area RA2 is a counter that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp the number of game media that has decreased before the transition to the ART state ST6. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value in the second history storage area RA2 is smaller than the value in the third history storage area RA3 (step S5006). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5006, it means that the maximum decrease number of game media in the period until the transition to ART state ST6 has been updated. 3 is set in the history storage area RA3 (step S5007). As already explained, the third history storage area RA3 is a counter that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp the maximum number of game media decreased during the period until the transition to the ART state ST6.

When the process of step S5002 is executed, when the process of step S5004 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S5006, or when the process of step S5007 is executed, based on the winning result command received this time It is determined whether or not a minor win has occurred (step S5008). If a minor win has occurred (step S5008: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the ART in-progress flag in the effect-side RAM 94 (step S5009). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5009, the number of given game media set for the minor win is added to the tenth history storage area RA10 and the eleventh history storage area RA11 ( step S5010). As already explained, the tenth history storage area RA10 is a counter that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp the number of game media provided after the transition to the ART state ST6, and the eleventh history storage area RA11 , a counter that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp the net increase in the number of game media after the transition to the ART state ST6.

After that, in step S5010, the value of the tenth history storage area RA10 to which the number of game media to be given has been added is a predetermined division number (specifically, "1000", "2000", or "3000"). It is determined whether or not it has reached (step S5011). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5011, it means that the number of game media provided after the transition to the ART state ST6 has reached the predetermined number of divisions. 176a to 176c corresponding to the current number of divisions (specifically, "1000", "2000" or "3000") is set to "1" (step S5012), Terminates the number of sheets information update process. The effect-side RAM 94 is provided with a first break generation flag 176a, a second break generation flag 176b, and a third break generation flag 176c. The first break generation flag 176a indicates the number of game media given after the transition to the ART state ST6 (the number of games played during the period from when the ART flag is set to "1" until the ART flag is cleared to "0") It is a flag that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the number of game media provided) has reached 1000, and the second partition generation flag 176b indicates that the number of provided game media after the transition to the ART state ST6 has reached 2000. The third break generation flag 176c indicates that the number of game media provided after the transition to the ART state ST6 has reached 3,000. It is a flag that can be grasped by In step S5012, when the number of given game media after the transition to the ART state ST6 reaches 1000, the first division generation flag 176a is set to "1", and the number of game media after the transition to the ART state ST6 is set. When the given number reaches 2000, the second division generation flag 176b is set to "1". 176c is set to "1". By setting "1" to any one of the first to third delimiter generation flags 176a to 176c, an affirmative determination is made in step S5101 of the history configuration data generation processing (FIG. 85), which will be described later. Configuration data will be generated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5009, the number of given game media set for the minor win won this time is added to the value in the second history storage area RA2 (step S5009). S5013), the process of updating the number information is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S5008, based on the winning result command received this time, it is determined whether or not replay winning has occurred (step S5014). If a replay win has occurred (step S5014: YES), the replay flag in the effect-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5015), and the process of updating the number information is terminated.

Returning to the description of the history information storage process (FIG. 83), after executing the number information update process in step S4907, it is determined whether or not any BB win has occurred based on the winning result command received this time. (Step S4908) If any BB winning has occurred (step S4908: YES), update processing of BB winning information is executed (step S4909). In the process of updating the BB winning information, 1 is added to the value of the fourth history storage area RA4.

If a negative determination is made in step S4908, it is determined whether or not any RB win has occurred based on the winning result command received this time (step S4910), and if any RB win has occurred. If there is (step S4910: YES), update processing of RB winning information is executed (step S4911). In the process of updating the RB winning information, 1 is added to the value of the fifth history storage area RA5.

If a negative determination is made in step S4906, it is determined whether or not any of the add-on command during bonus, the add-on command during preparation, and the add-on command during ART has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S4912). If the command has been received (step S4912: YES), update processing for the number-of-additional-games information is executed (step S4913). In the process of updating the number-of-bonus-additional-games information, when an additional-in-bonus command is received, the number of additional-games set in the additional-in-bonus command is added to the fourteenth history storage area RA14. Further, when an add-on command during preparation is received, the number of add-on games set in the add-on command during preparation is added to the thirteenth history storage area RA13, and when an add-on command during ART is received, The number of add-on games set in the add-on command during ART is added to the twelfth history storage area RA12.

After making a negative determination in step S4912, when the ending end command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S4914: YES), execution information of the ending effect is stored (step S4915). Specifically, "1" is set in the fifteenth history storage area RA15.

After making a negative determination in step S4914, if the bonus end command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S4916: YES), the first history storage area RA1 is cleared to "0" (step S4917), This history information storage process ends.

Returning to the description of the history image processing (FIG. 82), when a negative determination is made in step S4801, or when history information storage processing is executed in step S4802, a game start command has been received from the main MPU 72. (step S4803), and if a game start command is received (step S4803: YES), a game start handling process, which will be described later, is executed (step S4804).

If a negative determination is made in step S4803, or if the processing of step S4804 is performed, history image management processing (described later) is executed (step S4805), and display operation handling processing (described later) is executed (step S4806). ). After that, the process of generating history configuration data is executed (step S4807). The processing of steps S4808 to S4813 will be described later. FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing the history configuration data generation process in step S4807.

In the history configuration data generation process, first, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to any one of a plurality of generation flags provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S5101). In the effect-side RAM 94, as generation flags that enable grasping of the occurrence of the history configuration data generation trigger, an ART end generation flag 174, an ending end generation flag 175, an intermediate generation flag 177, and the above-described third First to third segment generation flags 176a to 176c are provided. The generation flag 174 at the end of ART is a flag that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the ART state ST6 has ended and that the history configuration data for displaying the history image G23 of the first pattern should be generated. . The ending generation flag 175 enables the effect side MPU 92 to grasp that the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 has ended and that the history configuration data for displaying the history image G23 of the second pattern should be generated. is a flag. The midway generation flag 177 indicates to the production side MPU 92 that the midway generation of the history image G23 has been selected by the player's operation and that the history configuration data for displaying the history image G23 of the third pattern should be generated. It is a flag that makes it possible to grasp. As already explained, the first break generation flag 176a is set to the number of game media to be given after the transition to the ART state ST6 (after the ART in progress flag is set to "1", the ART in progress flag is cleared to "0"). The number of game media provided during the period until 1000 has reached 1000. It is a flag that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp that the number of given game media has reached 2000, and the third division generation flag 176c indicates that the number of given game media has reached 3000 after the transition to the ART state ST6. This is a flag that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp that. In step S5101, an affirmative determination is made when "1" is set to any one of these six generation flags. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, wording selection processing for selecting wording data to be set in the first to third headline ranges 151 to 153 is executed (step S5102). The wording selection process is executed using the first to third selection condition tables stored in the main ROM 73 .

Here, prior to the description of the wording selection process (FIG. 88) executed by the effect side MPU 92, wording images G25 to G27 displayed in the headline ranges 151 to 153 in the first to third selection condition tables and the effect side RAM 94 are described. A configuration for determining is described.

As already explained, the first to third word images G25 to G27 are set in the history image G23 (FIG. 80(a)). The effect-side ROM 93 stores a selection condition table for selecting wording designation data designating the wording images G25 to G27 set in the history image G23. FIG. 86(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the types of the selection condition table and wording specification data set in the selection condition table.

As shown in FIG. 86(a), in the effect-side ROM 93, an opportunity to generate history configuration data is generated in the game state (the state in which the ART in-progress flag is not set to "1") before shifting to the ART state ST6. The first to third selection condition tables before ART are stored as the selection condition tables read out when the ART is performed. The first to third pre-ART selection condition tables are read when a history configuration data generation trigger occurs during the period from the end of ART state ST6 to the start of the next ART state ST6. In the effect-side ROM 93, a selection condition table that is read when a history configuration data generation trigger occurs in a state where the number of game media to be awarded after the transition to the ART state ST6 is 0 to 999. ~ A third selection condition table is stored, and as a selection condition table that is read when an opportunity to generate history configuration data occurs in a state where the number of given game media is 1000 to 1999 after the transition to ART state ST6 When the first to third selection condition tables for the second period are stored and the number of game media provided after the transition to the ART state ST6 is 2000 to 2999, and the history configuration data generation opportunity occurs The first to third selection condition tables for the third period are stored as the selection condition tables to be read, and the generation trigger of the history configuration data in a state where the number of game media provided after the transition to the ART state ST6 is 3000 or more. 1st to 3rd selection condition tables for the fourth period are stored as selection condition tables to be read out when a is generated. In addition, the effect-side RAM 94 stores the first to third selection condition tables at the end of ART as the selection condition tables read out at the end of the ART state ST6. As the condition table, the first to third selection condition tables at the end of the ending are stored.

18 wording designation data are set in each selection condition table, and display priority data and selection conditions are set corresponding to each wording designation data. As shown in FIG. 86(a), word designation data of "1" to "18", "19 to 36" and "37 to 54" are set in the first to third selection condition tables before ART. In these wording designation data, wording images indicating the number of occurrences of bonus winnings (1st to 4th BB winnings and 1st to 2nd RB winnings) (for example, wording images "BB winning 2 times") are designated. Contains specified data. Wording designation data of "55" to "72", "73 to 90" and "91 to 108" are set in the first to third selection condition tables of the first period, and these wording designation data include It contains wording designation data designating a wording image corresponding to the number of game media to be awarded in the ART state ST6 being "0" to "999" (for example, a wording image "500 won"). Wording designation data of "109" to "126", "127 to 144" and "145 to 162" are set in the first to third selection condition tables of the second period. Wording designation data for designating a wording image corresponding to the number of game media provided in the ART state ST6 being “1000” to “1999” (for example, a wording image saying “More than 1000 won!”) is included. there is Wording designation data of "163" to "180", "181 to 198" and "199 to 216" are set in the first to third selection condition tables of the third period. Wording designation data for designating a wording image corresponding to the fact that the number of given game media in the ART state ST6 is "2000" to "2999" (for example, a wording image "Over 2000 won!") is included. there is Wording designation data of "217" to "234", "235 to 252" and "253 to 270" are set in the first to third selection condition tables of the fourth period, and these wording designation data include It contains wording designation data designating a wording image corresponding to the fact that the number of given game media in the ART state ST6 is "3000" or more (for example, a wording image "over 3000 won!"). Wording designation data of "271" to "288", "289 to 306" and "307 to 324" are set in the first to third selection condition tables at the end of ART, and these wording designation data Various ranges of the number of given game media in ART state ST6 (range of “0” to “999”, range of “1000” to “1999”, range of “2000” to “2999” and range of “3000” or more) contains wording designation data that designates a wording image corresponding to the . Wording designation data of "325" to "342", "343 to 360" and "361 to 378" are set in the first to third selection condition tables at the end of the ending. Various ranges of the number of given game media in ART state ST6 (range of “0” to “999”, range of “1000” to “1999”, range of “2000” to “2999” and range of “3000” or more) contains wording designation data that designates a wording image corresponding to the .

The first to third selection condition tables corresponding to the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b are read out, and each selection condition table contains the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b. contains wording designation data that designates a wording image containing a number corresponding to . As a result, it is possible to display a text image including numbers corresponding to the game history.

When a history configuration data generation trigger occurs, the corresponding three selection condition tables (first selection condition table, second selection condition table, and third selection condition table) are read, and from the three selection condition tables, A total of three wording designation data are selected one by one. Then, out of the three selected wording designation data, the first wording designation data corresponding to the first wording image G25 set in the first headline range 151 and the second wording set in the second headline range 152 are selected. Second wording designation data corresponding to image G26 and third wording designation data corresponding to third wording image G27 set in third headline range 153 are determined.

FIG. 86(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the history storage area RAn set as a reference destination in each selection condition table. As shown in FIG. 86(b), the first pre-ART read out when the generation opportunity occurs in the game state (state in which "1" is not set to the ART in-progress flag) before shifting to the ART state ST6. In the selection condition table, the 0th history storage area RA0 and the first history storage area RA1 are set as reference destinations. As already explained, the 0th history storage area RA0 is a counter that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of games played before the transition to the ART state ST6, and the first history storage area RA1 stores the bonus state and the number of games played. This is a counter that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of games until one of the ART states ST6 is started. In the first selection condition table before ART, wording designation data for designating a wording image related to the number of games is set.

In the second selection condition table before ART, which is read when the creation opportunity occurs in the game state before shifting to ART state ST6, the second history storage area RA2 and the third history storage area RA3 are referenced. is set. As already explained, the second history storage area RA2 is a counter that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of game media that has decreased before the transition to the ART state ST6, and the third history storage area RA3 , a counter that allows the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp the maximum number of game media that have decreased during the period until the transition to the ART state ST6. In the second selection condition table before ART, wording designation data for designating a wording image regarding the number of game media is set.

In the third selection condition table before ART, which is read when the creation opportunity occurs in the game state before shifting to ART state ST6, the fourth history storage area RA4 and the fifth history storage area RA5 are referenced. is set. As already explained, the fourth history storage area RA4 is a counter that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of occurrences of the BB state ST3, and the fifth history storage area RA5 indicates the number of occurrences of the RB state ST4. This is a counter that can be grasped by the production side MPU 92 . In the third selection condition table before ART, wording designation data for designating wording images relating to the number of occurrences of bonus states (BB state ST3 and RB state ST4) is set.

The first selection condition table (specifically, the first selection condition table for the first period to the fourth period, the first selection condition table at the end of ART and the first selection condition table at the end of the ending), the 0th history storage area RA0, the 2nd history storage area RA2, the 3rd history storage area RA3, and the 6th history storage area RA6 to An eighth history storage area RA8 is set. As already explained, the sixth history storage area RA6 is a counter that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of occurrences of ART winning, and the seventh history storage area RA7 stores the type information of the ART winning opportunity. , and the eighth history storage area RA8 is a counter that enables the effect MPU 92 to grasp the type information of the ART start effect. Word designation data for designating word images corresponding to the game history data before the transition to the ART state ST6 and at the time of the transition to the ART state ST6 are set in the first selection condition table.

The second selection condition table (specifically, the second selection condition table of the first period to the fourth period, the second selection condition table at the end of ART and the second selection condition table at the end of the ending), the fourth history storage area RA4, the fifth history storage area RA5, and the ninth history storage area RA9 to 11th history storage area RA11 are set as reference destinations. It is As already explained, the fourth history storage area RA4 is a counter that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of occurrences of the BB state ST3, and the fifth history storage area RA5 indicates the number of occurrences of the RB state ST4. The ninth history storage area RA9 is a counter that enables the effect side MPU 92 to grasp the number of games that have been executed after the transition to the ART state ST6. The 10th history storage area RA10 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of game media given after the transition to the ART state ST6, and the 11th history storage area RA11 is the transition to the ART state ST6. This is a counter that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp the net increase in the number of game media later. The second selection condition table contains wording designation data for designating wording images relating to the number of occurrences of bonus states (BB state ST3 and RB state ST4) and the number of games and the number of game media after transition to ART state ST6. is set.

The third selection condition table (specifically, the third selection condition table for the first period to the fourth period, the third selection condition table at the end of ART and the third selection condition table at the end of the ending), the 12th history storage area RA12 to the 14th history storage area RA14 are set as reference destinations. As already explained, the twelfth history storage area RA12 is a counter that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp the total number of games added in the ART state ST6, and the thirteenth history storage area RA13 stores the total number in the preparation state ST5. This is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of additional games, and the fourteenth history storage area RA14 is a counter that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp the total number of additional games in the bonus state. In the third selection condition table, wording designation data for designating a wording image related to the number of additional games is set.

54 wording designation data are set in one selection condition table, and three wording designation data with high display priority are selected from the wording designation data satisfying the selection conditions in the selection condition table. Then, the types of wordings to be displayed tend to overlap. For example, when the number of net additions in ART state ST6 is 1500 or more, the phrase "Over 1200 net additions!" There is a risk that the wording "over 1500 net additions!!", which is selected under the condition that the number of net additions in the ART state ST6 is 1500 or more, is selected at the same time. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, three selection condition tables in which 18 wording designation data are set are read, and one wording designation data is selected from one selection condition table, thereby obtaining a total of three wording designation data. It is a configuration that selects As a result, duplication of the contents of the words set in the history image G23 and discomfort are prevented.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, one wording designation data is selected from one selection condition table as the wording designation data to be displayed. The selection of wording designation data is performed based on the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b at the time when the history configuration data generation opportunity occurs.

When one wording-specified data to be displayed is selected from each selection condition table, the wording-specified data with the highest display priority among the wording-specified data that satisfies the selection condition in the target selection condition table is first displayed. Selected as a candidate of interest. Each selection condition table stores up to three wording designation data having the same display priority. When there is one wording designation data with the highest display priority among the wording designation data satisfying the selection condition in the selection condition table, the one wording designation data is selected as a candidate to be displayed. Then, the wording designation data is selected as the wording designation data to be displayed. On the other hand, if there are a plurality (specifically, two or three) of the wording designation data with the highest display priority among the wording designation data that satisfy the selection condition in the selection condition table, the plurality of wording designation data The designated data is selected as a candidate to be displayed. Then, a lottery is performed to select one wording designation data to be displayed from among the plurality (specifically, two or three) of wording designation data selected as candidates for display.

As shown in FIG. 81( a ), the effect side RAM 94 is provided with a first candidate area 171 , a second candidate area 172 and a third candidate area 173 . As described above, up to three wording designation data are selected as candidates for display from one selection condition table. The first to third candidate areas 171 to 173 contain wording designation data (7-bit numerical information of 1 to 96) selected as candidates to be displayed, and display priority data (0 to 8) of the wording designation data. 3-bit numerical information) is stored. Each candidate area 171 to 173 has a storage capacity of 10 bits, wording designation data is stored in the upper 7 bits, and display priority data corresponding to the wording designation data is stored in the lower 3 bits. .

As described above, in each selection condition table, the same display priority data is set for up to three wording designation data. Candidate areas 171 to 173 display the wording designation data with the highest display priority data among the wording designation data satisfying the selection conditions in the target selection condition table, and the wording designation data corresponding to the wording designation data. degree data is set. If there are a plurality of wording designation data that satisfy the selection conditions and have the same display priority data set, a maximum of three combinations of wording designation data and display priority data are selected from the first to the first. They are set in the third candidate areas 171-173.

When two or more wording designation data are set in the first to third candidate areas 171 to 173, one wording designation data to be actually displayed from among the wording designation data as candidates for the display object. A lottery will be held to determine the In this way, there may be a plurality of wording designation data that are candidates for display based on the game history data set in the history storage area 94b. The content of the history image G23 may differ. By increasing the variations of the history images G23, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the same history image G23 will be generated and improve the interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), the effect side RAM 94 is provided with a first selection area 165, a second selection area 166 and a third selection area 167. As shown in FIG. The first selection area 165 contains one wording designation data (7-bit numerical information from 1 to 96) selected as a display object from the first selection condition table, and display priority data (0 to 8 3-bit numerical information) is stored. The second selection area 166 contains one wording designation data (7-bit numerical information from 1 to 96) selected as a display target from the second selection condition table, and display priority data (0 to 8 3-bit numerical information) is stored. The third selection area 167 contains one wording designation data (7-bit numerical information from 1 to 96) selected as a display object from the third selection condition table, and display priority data (0 to 8 3-bit numerical information) is stored. Each of the selection areas 165 to 167 has a storage capacity of 10 bits, wording designation data is stored in the upper 7 bits, and display priority data corresponding to the wording designation data is stored in the lower 3 bits. .

Here, the selection condition table will be described by taking as an example the second selection condition table at the end of ART, which is read out at the end of the ART state ST6. FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second selection condition table at the end of ART.

As shown in FIG. 87, in the second selection condition table at the end of ART, a plurality of (specifically, 18) wording designation data "289" to "306" are set, and these wording designation data Nine levels of display priority data and selection conditions are set in one-to-one correspondence with each of the above. Specifically, display priority data of any one of "0" to "8" is set for each word designation data, and the display priority is higher as the value of the display priority data is larger.

In the second selection condition table at the end of ART, three pieces of text designation data with display priority data of "8", "7" and "6" are set, and the display priority data is "5". , "4" and "3" are set, and the display priority data are "2", "1" and "0", respectively. there is In this way, by setting a large number of wording designation data having a large display priority data value, there are many kinds of wordings displayed in the history image G23 when a selection condition that is difficult to achieve is satisfied. It's becoming This increases the possibility that text that the player has never seen before will be displayed when a difficult selection condition is met.

In each selection condition table, wording designation data is set in descending order of the display priority data value. Then, the wording-designating data are set to the wording-designating data to be determined in descending order of display priority data value, and it is determined whether or not the selection condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the selection condition is not satisfied, the determination target is updated to the next wording designation data. On the other hand, when it is determined that the selection condition is satisfied, the current wording designation data to be determined becomes a candidate for display. If there is other wording designation data set with the same display priority data as the wording designation data, the wording designation data with the same display priority data set is set as the determination target. and a determination is made as to whether or not the selection conditions are satisfied. Then, when it is determined that the selection condition is satisfied, the wording designation data for which the same display priority data is set also becomes a candidate for display. In this way, a plurality of wording designation data may be candidates for display.

As shown in FIG. 87, specifically regarding the second selection condition table at the end of ART, when the value of the tenth history storage area RA10 is "3000" or more, that is, the game after transition to the ART state ST6 When the number of media provided is 3000 or more, the word designation data of "289" whose display priority data is "8" becomes a candidate for display. In this case, word designation data of “289” and display priority data of “8” are set in the first candidate area 171 .

In the second selection condition table (FIG. 87) at the end of ART, the wording designation data of "290" also exists as the wording designation data with the display priority data of "8". Therefore, when the selection condition is satisfied, the word designation data of "290" whose priority data is "8" is also a candidate for display. Specifically, when the value of the eleventh history storage area RA11 is "1500" or more, that is, when the net increase in the number of sheets after the transition to the ART state ST6 is 1500 or more, the word "290" is displayed. Specified data is also a candidate for display. In this case, word designation data of “290” and display priority data of “8” are set in the second candidate area 172 .

In the second selection condition table (FIG. 87) at the end of ART, the wording designation data "291" also exists as the wording designation data with the display priority data "8". Therefore, when the selection condition is satisfied, the word designation data of "291" whose priority data is "8" also becomes a candidate for display. Specifically, when the value of the fourth history storage area RA4 is "5" or more, that is, when the number of occurrences of BB winning is 5 times or more, the wording designation data of "291" is also displayed. be a candidate for In this case, word designation data of “291” and display priority data of “8” are set in the third candidate area 173 . Then, a lottery is conducted to select one wording designation data to be displayed from among these three wording designation data (wording designation data of "289" to "291"), and a winner is selected in the lottery. The wording designation data thus obtained becomes the wording designation data selected from the second selection condition table at the end of ART. Then, the selected wording designation data and the display priority data of "8" corresponding to the wording designation data are set in the second selection area 166 corresponding to the second selection condition table.

The selection condition table contains wording specification data in which a plurality of selection conditions are set. In other words, there is wording designation data that becomes a display candidate when a plurality of selection conditions are satisfied. For example, as shown in FIG. 87, the word designation data of "299" in the second selection condition table at the end of ART indicates that the number of game media provided after transition to ART state ST6 is "1000" or more. A selection condition and a selection condition that the number of occurrences of BB winning in the ART state ST6 is "2" or more are set. As a result, the total number of wording images G25 to G27 that can be displayed in the history image G23 is limited, and only one wording designation data is selected as a display object out of the wording designation data set in one selection condition table. , it is possible to display wording images G25 to G27 reflecting the contents of a plurality of game history data. By making it possible to display the history image G23 in which the contents of the game history data are reflected in detail, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the history image G23 and improve the interest in the game.

Even if the same result is obtained for one parameter, the content of the wording that is a display candidate can be changed by different results for other parameters. For example, as shown in FIG. 87, in the second selection condition table at the end of ART, the number of occurrences of the parameter "BB win occurrence count" (value of fourth history storage area RA4) is "2" or more. In some cases, the parameter (value of the tenth history storage area RA10) of "the number of game media given after transition to the ART state ST6" is "299" if the number of the given game media is "1000" or more. The designated data becomes a candidate for display, and when the number of additions is less than "1000", the word designation data of "300" becomes a candidate for display. In this way, by setting selection conditions for combinations of a plurality of parameters, it is possible to reflect the details of the game history on the history image G23.

A plurality of thresholds are provided for one parameter, and the content of the wording that is a display candidate changes depending on whether each threshold is exceeded. The content of the image G23 can be detailed. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the history image G23.

Next, the wording selection processing executed by the effect side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. Note that wording selection processing is executed in step S5102 of the history configuration data generation processing (FIG. 85).

In the wording selection process, the current game state is grasped (step S5201), and the first selection condition table corresponding to the grasped game state is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S5202). Specifically, the first selection condition table before ART is read when the ART in-progress flag in the effect-side RAM 94 is not set to "1". Further, when the number of given game media after the transition to the ART state ST6 is 0 to 999, the first selection condition table for the first period is read, and the number of given game media after the transition to the ART state ST6 is 1000. 1999, the first selection condition table for the second period is read, and the first selection condition table for the third period is read when the number of given game media after the transition to the ART state ST6 is 2000 to 2999. , the first selection condition table for the fourth period is read when the number of given game media is 3000 or more after the transition to the ART state ST6. Furthermore, when the ART state ST6 is ended, the first selection condition table at the end of ART is read, and when the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2 is ended, the first selection condition table at the end of the ending is read.

After that, the first to third candidate areas 171 to 173 in the effect side RAM 94 are cleared (step S5203), and one word is selected from the word designation data set in the selection condition table read out to the effect side RAM 94. Designated data is set as a determination target (step S5204). In step S5204, the wording designation data with the highest display priority in the selection condition table are set as determination targets in order. Thereafter, wording determination processing is executed for the wording designation data set as the determination target in step S5204 (step S5205). In the wording determination process, the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b of the effect-side RAM 94 is collated against the selection condition table read out to the effect-side RAM 94, thereby determining the wording data to be determined. Determines whether or not the set selection conditions are satisfied.

If the selection condition set in the wording data to be determined is not satisfied (step S5206: NO), it is determined whether wording designation data is set in the first candidate area 171 in the effect-side RAM 94. (Step S5207) If the wording designation data is not set (Step S5207: NO), the process returns to Step S5204. Then, the wording designation data to be judged is updated in the selection condition table read out to the effect-side RAM 94 . Then, the processes of steps S5204 to S5207 are repeatedly executed until an affirmative determination is made in step S5206. In each selection condition table, wording designation data with the lowest display priority data of "0" and no selection condition is set. For example, as shown in FIG. 87, in the second selection condition table at the end of ART, the display priority data is set to "0" and wording designation data of "306" in which no selection condition is set is set. there is Therefore, if none of the selection conditions set in the selection condition table are satisfied, the processing of steps S5204 to S5207 is repeatedly executed, and finally wording data for which no selection condition is set is subject to determination. , and an affirmative determination is made in step S5206.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5206 that the selection condition set in the wording designation data to be judged is satisfied, the wording designation data to be judged and the display priority data corresponding to the wording designation data are set as candidate areas 171 to 173 (step S5208). In step S 5208 , when the wording designation data is already set in the first candidate area 171 , the wording designation data to be judged and the display priority data corresponding to the wording designation data are set in the second candidate area 172 . In addition, when the wording designation data is already set in the first candidate area 171 and the second candidate area 172, the wording designation data to be judged and the display priority data corresponding to the wording designation data are set in the third candidate area 173. set. As described above, each selection condition table contains wording data for which no selection condition is set, and if none of the selection conditions set in the selection condition table are satisfied, the selection condition is set. Wording designation data that does not exist is selected as a candidate to be displayed. Therefore, one of the wording designation data and the display priority data is set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 .

If it is determined in step S5207 that the wording designation data is set in the first candidate area 171, or if the wording designation data and the display priority data are set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 in step S5208, the It is determined whether or not there is other wording designation data that has the same display priority data as the wording designation data that has been set and that has not yet been determined exists in the selection condition table (step S5209). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5209, the process returns to step S5204, and the other wording designation data having the same display priority as the wording data set in the first candidate area 171 is set as a determination target. (Step S5204), wording determination processing is executed for the other wording designation data (step S5205).

If a negative determination is made in step S5209, it is determined whether or not a plurality of wording designation data are set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 (step S5210). If a plurality of wording designation data are set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 (step S5210: YES), one wording to be set in the selection areas 165 to 167 of the production side RAM 94 from among the plurality of wording designation data. Lottery processing of wording designation data for selecting designation data is executed (step S5211).

In the wording designation data lottery process (step S5211), the wording designation lottery table corresponding to the number of wording designation data set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 is read from the production side ROM93. In the effect-side ROM 93, a lottery table for first word designation read out when the number of word designation data set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 is "2", and set in the candidate areas 171 to 173. A lottery table for second wording designation read out when the number of wording designation data is "3" is stored. In these wording designation lottery tables, winning probabilities are set such that the winning probabilities of each wording designation data are the same or substantially the same. After that, the random number updated in the production side RAM 94 is acquired. Then, by collating the obtained random number against the wording lottery table, one wording designation data to be selected as a display target from the current selection condition table is specified.

After that, by referring to the image reproduction storage area 94c, the wording designation data selected in the wording designation data lottery process (step S5211) is included in the history configuration data generated and stored in the past. It is determined whether or not it is the same as the data (step S5212). In step S5212, the wording designation data specified in the wording designation data lottery process (step S5211) (numerical information of any one of "1" to "378") is stored in the 0th to 31st positions in the image reproduction storage area 94c. It is determined whether or not it is included in the history configuration data stored in the reproduction storage areas RD0 to RD31. If it is included, make an affirmative decision. Since the wording designation data has a serial number from "1" to "378", the history configuration data in which the wording designation data specified in the wording designation data lottery process (step S5211) was generated and stored in the past. The processing for grasping whether or not it is included in is facilitated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5212, a process of changing wording designation data is executed (step S5213). In the wording designation data change process, the wording designation that is won in the wording designation lottery table (first wording designation lottery table or second wording designation lottery table) used in the wording designation data lottery process (step S5211). The wording designation data different from the data is reselected as the wording designation data to be displayed. Specifically, when the first wording designation lottery table is read out in the wording designation data lottery process (step S5211), the wording designation data set in the first candidate area 171 is the wording designation data that has been won. If it is data, the wording designation data set in the second candidate area 172 is reselected as the wording designation data to be displayed, and the winning wording designation data is the wording set in the second candidate area 172. If it is designated data, the wording designation data set in the first candidate area 171 is reselected as the wording designation data to be displayed. In addition, when the second wording designation lottery table is read in the wording designation data lottery process (step S5211), the wording designation data that has been won may be the wording designation data set in the first candidate area 171. For example, the wording designation data set in the second candidate area 172 is reselected as the wording designation data to be displayed, and the wording designation data that has been selected is the wording designation data set in the second candidate area 172. For example, the wording designation data set in the third candidate area 173 is reselected as the wording designation data to be displayed, and the wording designation data that has been selected is the wording designation data set in the third candidate area 173. For example, the wording designation data set in the first candidate area 171 is reselected as the wording designation data to be displayed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the wording designation data selected in step S5213 is the same as the wording designation data included in the history configuration data generated and stored in the past (step S5214). In step S5214, the wording designation data selected in the wording designation data change processing (step S5213) (numerical information of any one of "1" to "378") is stored in the 0th to 31st positions in the image reproduction storage area 94c. It is determined whether or not it is included in the history configuration data stored in the reproduction storage areas RD0 to RD31. If it is included, make an affirmative decision. If a negative determination is made in step S5214, the process proceeds to step S5217. In this case, the wording designation data selected in the wording designation data change process (step S5213) becomes the wording designation data to be displayed.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5214, the wording included in the history configuration data generated and stored in the past in the wording designation lottery table used in the wording designation data lottery process (step S5211) It is determined whether or not there is other wording designation data for which it has not been determined whether or not it is the same as the designated data (step S5215). If the number of wording designation data selected as candidates for display from the selection condition table is two, a negative determination is made in step S5215, and the number of wording designation data selected as candidates for display is determined. is three, an affirmative determination is made in step S5215.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5215, the process returns to step S5213 to repeat the processes of steps S5213 to S5215. In this case, in the wording designation data change process (step S5213), if the wording designation data set in the first candidate area 171 is selected as the display target, it is set in the second candidate area 172 as the display target. If the wording designation data set in the second candidate area 172 is selected as the object to be displayed, the wording designation data set in the third candidate area 173 is selected as the object to be displayed. is selected again, and when the wording designation data set in the third candidate area 173 is selected as the display object, the wording designation data set in the first candidate area 171 is selected again as the display object. After that, it is determined whether or not the wording designation data selected in step S5213 is the same as the wording designation data included in the history configuration data generated and stored in the past (step S5214). If a negative determination is made in step S5214, the process proceeds to step S5217. In this case, the third wording designation data selected in the wording designation data change process (step S5213) becomes the wording designation data to be displayed. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5214, the process proceeds to step S5215.

If a negative determination is made in step S5215, the wording designation data first selected in wording designation data lottery processing (step S5211) is reselected as the wording designation data to be displayed (step S5216), and step S5217. proceed to

When a negative determination is made in step S5210, when a negative determination is made in step S5212, when a negative determination is made in step S5214, or when the process of step S5216 is performed, the history configuration data is set. The wording designation data selected as the wording designation data to be displayed and the display priority data of the wording designation data are stored in the selection areas 165 to 167 corresponding to the current selection condition table (step S5217). Specifically, the wording designation data and the display priority data are stored in the first selection area 165 when the current selection condition table is the first selection condition table, and are stored in the first selection area 165 when the current selection condition table is the second selection condition table. It is stored in the second selection area 166, and is stored in the third selection area 167 if it is the third selection condition table.

After that, if the current selection condition table is not the third selection condition table (step S5218: NO), the selection condition table is updated (step S5219), and the process returns to step S5203. In step S5219, the selection condition table read out to the effect side RAM 94 is cleared in order of the first selection condition table→second selection condition table→third selection condition table, and the next selection condition table is read.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5218 that the current selection condition table is any third selection condition table, this means that the selection of the three wording specification data set in the history configuration data has ended. Therefore, the first to third candidate areas 171 to 173 are cleared (step S5220), and the text word selection process ends.

Returning to the description of the history configuration data generation process (FIG. 85), after the wording selection process is performed in step S5102, the three wording designation data selected in the wording selection process are assigned to the first to third data of the history image G23. A headline setting process to be arranged in the headline range 151 to 153 (FIG. 80(a)) is executed (step S5103). FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing the heading setting process.

In the headline setting process, first, the maximum display priority data among the three display priority data set in the first to third selection areas 165 to 167 is specified (step S5301), and the specified maximum display priority data is selected. A combination of wording designation data and display priority data included is set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 in the effect side RAM 94 (step S5302). In step S5302, if there is one combination of wording data and display priority data including the maximum display priority data, the combination is set in the first candidate area 171, and the maximum display priority data is set. If there are two combinations of wording data and display priority data containing And when there are three combinations of display priority data, the three combinations are set in the first candidate area 171 , the second candidate area 172 and the third candidate area 173 .

After that, priority adjustment processing is executed (step S5303). In the priority adjustment process, when a plurality of word designation data are set in the candidate areas 171 to 173, by referring to the 0th to 31st reproduction storage areas RD0 to RD31 of the image reproduction storage area 94c, the relevant To grasp the same wording designation data as the wording designation data included in history configuration data generated and stored in the past among a plurality of wording designation data. When part of the wording designation data set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 is the same as the wording designation data included in the history configuration data generated and stored in the past, the same wording designation data The combination of the wording designation data including the wording designation data and the display priority data is deleted from the candidate areas 171-173. As a result, when a plurality of wording designation data having the same display priority exists in the candidate areas 171 to 173, the wording designation data not included in the history configuration data generated and stored in the past is displayed. It is possible to preferentially set the headline range 151 to 153 of the higher order. On the other hand, in the priority adjustment process (step S5303), if all of the plurality of wording designation data set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 are not included in the history configuration data generated and stored in the past, and If all of the plurality of wording designation data are included in the history configuration data generated and stored in the past, the combination of the wording designation data and the display priority data is not deleted. Therefore, all combinations of the wording designation data and the display priority data set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 are not deleted.

Thereafter, when a plurality of wording designation data exist in candidate areas 171 to 173 (step S5304: YES), lottery processing for wording designation data is executed (step S5305). In step S5305, the same process as the wording designation data lottery process in step S5211 of the already described wording selection process (FIG. 88) is performed. Specifically, the lottery table for wording designation corresponding to the number of wording designation data set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 is read from the effect-side ROM 93 . Specifically, when the number of wording designation data set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 is "2", the first wording designation lottery table is read, and the number of wording designation data is set in the candidate areas 171 to 173. When the number of wording designation data is "3", the second wording designation lottery table is read. As already explained, in these wording designation lottery tables, the winning probabilities are set so that the winning probabilities of the respective wording designation data are the same or substantially the same. After that, the random number updated in the production side RAM 94 is acquired. Then, by collating the acquired random number against the wording designation lottery table, one wording designation data is specified from a plurality of wording designation data set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 . After that, in candidate areas 171 to 173, combinations of wording designation data and display priority data other than the combination of wording designation data and display priority data containing the specified wording designation data are deleted. As a result, the candidate areas 171 to 173 are in a state in which only one combination of word designation data and display priority data is set.

When a negative determination is made in step S5304, or when the process of step S5305 is executed, a set of word designation data and display priority data set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 are stored as configuration data. The highest available counter among the first to third word counters 161a to 161c in the area 161 is set (step S5306). Specifically, when data is not set in any of the first to third wording counters 161a to 161c, the combination of the wording designation data and the display priority data is set to the first wording counter 161a. When data is set only in the first wording counter 161a, it is set in the second wording counter 161b, and when data is set in the first wording counter 161a and the second wording counter 161b, the third wording counter 161c is set. is set to

After that, the selection areas 165 to 167 in which the combination of the wording designation data and the display priority data set in the configuration data storage area 161 in step S5306 are cleared (step S5307), and the candidate areas 171 to 173 are cleared. (Step S5308).

After that, it is determined whether or not the wording designation data and the display priority data are set in the third wording counter 161c in the configuration data storage area 161 (step S5309). If a negative determination is made in step S5309, the process returns to step S5301, and the processes of steps S5301 to S5308 are repeated until an affirmative determination is made in step S5309. As a result, the three word designation data and the display priority data set in the first to third selection areas 165 to 167 are stored in the first to third word counters 161a to 161c of the configuration data storage area 161. state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5309, this headline setting process ends.

As already explained, the type of the character image G28 displayed in the history image G23 corresponds to the type of the first wording image G25. The types of the word image G25 and the character image G28 are grasped. Therefore, the type of the first word image G25 included in the history image G23 is determined by storing the word designation data in the first word counter 161a of the configuration data storage area 161 in the headline setting process (FIG. 89). At the same time, the type of character image G28 included in the history image G23 is determined. Compared to the configuration in which the data for ascertaining the type of the character image G28 is stored separately from the first wording designation data, the configuration for ascertaining the type of the character image G28 based on the first wording designation data, The storage capacity of the effect-side RAM 94 for making it possible to grasp the type of the character image G28 included in the history image G23 is reduced.

Returning to the description of the history configuration data generation process (FIG. 85), after performing the headline setting process in step S5103, it is determined whether or not the value of the fifteenth history storage area RA15 is "1" (step S5104). If the value of the fifteenth history storage area RA15 is "1" (step S5104: YES), it means that the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 has been executed, so the ending image setting process is executed (step S5105). In the ending image setting process, the ending image flag 161d in the configuration data storage area 161 is set to "1". As a result, the ending image G29 is included in the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data.

In this way, when the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 is executed, the ending image flag 161d is set to "1" without performing a lottery or the like. Therefore, even if the player does not personally record the ending effect with a camera or the like during the execution of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2, the player can recognize that the ending effect has been performed at an arbitrary timing by displaying the history image. You can check with

When a negative determination is made in step S5104, or when the process of step S5105 is performed, the wording designation data set in the first to third wording counters 161a to 161c in the configuration data storage area 161 and the effect Point calculation processing for calculating the sum of history points corresponding to the game history data set in the history storage area 94b of the side RAM 94 is executed (step S5106). FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing point calculation processing.

In the point calculation process, first, the headline point table is read from the effect-side ROM 93 (step S5401). FIG. 91(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a heading point table. As shown in FIG. 91(a), in the headline point table, history points are set in one-to-one correspondence with the display priority data of "0" to "8".

Returning to the description of the point calculation process (FIG. 90), after reading the headline point table in step S5401, the history point setting process is executed (step S5402). In the history point setting process, the display priority data set in the first wording counter 161a of the configuration data storage area 161 is collated with the headline point table read out in step S5401 to obtain the first wording designation data. A corresponding history point is specified, and the specified history point is set in the history point counter 161 e in the configuration data storage area 161 . As already explained, the history point counter 161e is a counter that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp the history points of the history image G23. In the history point setting process (step S5402), the display priority data set in the second wording counter 161b is collated with the headline point table to specify the history points corresponding to the second wording designation data. At the same time, by collating the display priority data set in the third wording counter 161c against the headline point table, the history point corresponding to the third wording designation data is specified. Then, the specified two history points are added to the value of the history point counter 161e. As a result, the total value of the history points corresponding to the first wording designation data, the second wording designation data, and the third wording designation data is set in the history point counter 161e.

After that, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the flag during ART in the effect side RAM 94 (step S5403). If the ART in progress flag is set to "1" (step S5403: YES), it means that the trigger for generating the current history configuration data occurred after the transition to the ART state ST6. It is read from the production side ROM 93 (step S5404). FIG. 91(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the additional point table. As shown in FIG. 91(b), in the additional point table, as additional points, "the number of games played in the ART state ST6 x 1", "the number of occurrences of bonus winning x 500", and "total in the ART state ST6 The number of additional games x 10" is set.

Returning to the description of the point calculation process (FIG. 90), after reading the additional point table in step S5404, the additional point addition process is executed (step S5405), and the point calculation process ends. In the process of adding the additional points, the number of games executed in the ART state ST6 is grasped by referring to the ninth history storage area RA9 of the history storage area 94b, and "the number of games executed in the ART state ST6×1 ” is added to the history point counter 161 e in the configuration data storage area 161 . Also, after calculating the sum of the value of the fourth history storage area RA4 (the number of occurrences of BB winning) and the value of the fifth history storage area RA5 (the number of occurrences of RB winning) of the history storage area 94b. , and "the number of occurrences of bonus wins.times.500" are calculated as additional points, and the additional points are added to the history point counter 161e. Furthermore, by referring to the twelfth history storage area RA12 of the history storage area 94b, the total number of additional games in the ART state ST6 is grasped, and the additional points of "total number of additional games in the ART state ST6 x 10" are calculated. Then, the additional points are added to the history point counter 161e. As a result, the history points of the history image G23 are set in the history point counter 161e.

Returning to the description of the history configuration data generation process (FIG. 85), after executing the point calculation process in step S5106, the process for ranking the history image G23 (steps S5107 to S5108) is performed. Specifically, the rank correspondence table is read from the production side ROM 93 (step S5107). In the rank correspondence table, a plurality of ranks set for the history image G23 are set, and a range of history points corresponding to each rank is set.

After that, rank setting processing is executed (step S5108). In the rank setting process, the rank corresponding to the current history image G23 is specified by collating the history points calculated in the point calculation process in step S5106 against the rank correspondence table read out in step S5107. Then, the rank image specifying data corresponding to the characteristic rank is set in the rank counter 161f in the configuration data storage area 161. FIG.

Specifically, in the rank setting process in step S5108, when any one of "0" to "2499" is set in the history point counter 161e of the configuration data storage area 161, the rank counter 161f is set to " If the rank image designation data corresponding to "C rank" is set, and any history point of "2500" to "5999" is set in the history point counter 161e, the rank counter 161f corresponds to "B rank". If any of the history points "6000" to "9999" is set in the history point counter 161e, the rank image designation data corresponding to "A rank" is set in the rank counter 161f. is set, and if any one of "10000" to "14999" is set in the history point counter 161e, rank image designation data corresponding to "S rank" is set in the rank counter 161f, and the history When the point counter 161e is set with a history point of "15000" or more, the rank counter 161f is set with rank image designation data corresponding to "SS rank".

After that, plate setting processing for setting the background plate image G24, base plate image, and common background plate image is executed (step S5109). FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing plate setting processing.

In the plate setting process, first, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the ART end generation flag 174 or the ending end generation flag 175 in the effect side RAM 94 (step S5501). When an affirmative determination is made in step S5501, the total number of games played from the end of the previous ART state ST6 to the end of the current ART state ST6 is calculated (step S5502). Specifically, the value of the 0th history storage area RA0 (the number of games until the ART state ST6 is started) and the value of the 9th history storage area RA9 (the number of games executed in the ART state ST6) The total number of games is calculated by calculating the total value of

After that, the current set value of the slot machine 10 is specified (step S5503), and a plate lottery table corresponding to the combination of the total number of games calculated in step S5502 and the set value specified in step S5503 is generated from the production-side ROM 93. Read out (step S5504). As already explained, the effect-side MPU 92 grasps the current setting value based on the numerical information set in the setting end command received from the main-side MPU 72 . The setting end command is transmitted in the winning probability setting process (step S106 of the main process (FIG. 11)).

FIG. 93(a) shows a plate lottery table PA1 that is read when the total number of games executed from the end of the previous ART state ST6 to the end of the current ART state ST6 is "0" to "1000". 93(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of plate lottery tables PB1 to PB6 read when the total number of games is "1001" to "2000". FIG. 93(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the plate lottery tables PD1 to PD6 read out when the total number of games is "2001" or more.

18 combinations of the total number of games (0 to 1000 games, 1001 to 2000 games, and 2001 or more games) and setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) are stored in the effect ROM 93. 18 plate lottery tables PA1-PA6, PB1-PB6, PD1-PD6 are stored in one-to-one correspondence.

When the total number of games is "0" to "1000", the plate lottery tables PA1 to PA6 corresponding to "setting 1" to "setting 6" are read, and the total number of games is "1001" to "2000". ”, the plate lottery tables PB1 to PB6 corresponding to “setting 1” to “setting 6” are read, and when the total number of games is “2001” or more, “setting 1” to “ The plate lottery tables PD1 to PD6 corresponding to "setting 6" are read.

In this slot machine 10, a white plate image that can be displayed in the cases of "setting 1", "setting 3" and "setting 5" and "setting 2”, “setting 4” and “setting 6”, a silver plate image that can be displayed in the case of “setting 4” to “setting 6”, and “setting 5” and “setting There is a gold plate image that can be displayed for "setting 6" and a rainbow plate image that can be displayed for "setting 6". When the white plate image is displayed, it becomes possible to grasp that the set value is an odd number, and when the copper plate image is displayed, it becomes possible to grasp that the set value is an even number, and the silver plate image is displayed. When the gold plate image is displayed, it is possible to grasp that the set value is "4" or more, and when the gold plate image is displayed, it is possible to grasp that the set value is "5" or more, and the rainbow plate image is displayed. In this case, it can be grasped that the set value is "6".

The greater the total number of games in the section, the lower the probability of winning one of the background plate images G24 when the set value is low, and the more the set value is high, the more the background plate image G24 is set. The probability of winning is set high. Specifically, the probability of winning one of the background plate images G24 in “Setting 1” and “Setting 2” is set to be the highest in the first section, and is set to the second highest in the second section. , and is set to be the lowest in the third section. The probability of winning one of the background plate images G24 in "Setting 3" and "Setting 4" is set to be common in the first to third sections. The probability of winning one of the background plate images G24 in "Setting 5" and "Setting 6" is set to be the lowest in the first section, the second highest in the second section, and set to the highest.

When the white plate image is displayed in the first section, there is a probability of about 36% that it is “setting 1”, a probability of about 36% is that it is “setting 3”, and a probability of about 27% is that it is “setting 5”. ”. When the white plate image is displayed in the second section, there is a probability of about 9% that it is “setting 1”, a probability of about 36% is that it is “setting 3”, and a probability of about 55% is that it is “setting 5”. ”. When the white plate image is displayed in the third section, the probability of "setting 1" is about 2%, the probability of "setting 3" is about 30%, and the probability of "setting 5" is about 68%. ”. Also, when the copper plate image is displayed in the first section, there is a 40% probability that the setting is "setting 2", a 30% probability that it is "setting 4", and a 30% probability that it is "setting 6". is. When the copper plate image is displayed in the second section, there is a probability of about 8% that it is “setting 2”, a probability of about 23% is “setting 4”, and a probability of about 69% is “setting 6”. ”. When the copper plate image is displayed in the third section, there is a probability of about 1% that it is “setting 2”, a probability of about 16% is “setting 4”, and a probability of about 82% is “setting 6”. ”. Further, when the silver plate image is displayed in the first section, there is a probability of about 33% that the setting is "4", a probability of about 33% that it is "setting 5", and a probability of about 33% that it is " Setting 6”. When the silver plate image is displayed in the second section, there is a probability of about 16% that it is “setting 4”, a probability of about 33% that it is “setting 5”, and a probability of about 50% that it is “setting 6”. ”. When the silver plate image is displayed in the third section, there is a probability of about 11% that it is “setting 4”, a probability of about 33% that it is “setting 5”, and a probability of about 56% that it is “setting 6”. ”. In addition, when the gold plate image is displayed in the first section, there is a 50% probability that the setting is "setting 5", and a 50% probability that the setting is "setting 6". When the gold plate image is displayed in the second section, there is a 40% probability of "setting 5", and a 60% probability of "setting 6". When the gold plate image is displayed in the third interval, the probability of "setting 5" is approximately 38%, and the probability of "setting 6" is approximately 63%.

In the white plate image, the copper plate image, the silver plate image, and the gold plate image, the probability that the set value on the lower side of the set values corresponding to the background plate image G24 is set is high in the section with a small total number of games. , and the probability that the setting value set to the background plate image G24 is on the high side is high in the interval in which the total number of games is large. Therefore, when these background plate images G24 are displayed in the history image G23, the player can predict the set value of the slot machine 10 from the combination of the displayed background plate images G24 and the total number of games. It becomes possible. By presenting the information suggesting the setting value, the player can guess the setting value, and the interest in the game can be improved. Also, when the rainbow plate image is displayed, the player can be sure that the set value of the slot machine 10 is "6". In this case, the player can play the game while being sure that the set value is advantageous to the player.

Returning to the description of the plate setting process (FIG. 92), after reading one of the plate lottery tables PA1-PA6, PB1-PB6, and PD1-PD6 in step S5504, the plate lottery process is executed (step S5505). In the plate lottery process, a random number updated in the effect-side RAM 94 is acquired, and the random number is compared with the plate lottery table read out in step S5504 to determine whether or not the background plate image G24 has been won and the background plate image that has been won. Identify the type of G24. If one of the background plate images G24 is won in the plate lottery process (step S5506: YES), the background plate image designation data corresponding to the winning background plate image G24 is stored in the background plate counter 161g in the configuration data storage area 161. set (step S5507), and this plate setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the current history configuration data generation opportunity is not generated at the end of the ART state ST6 or at the end of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 (step S5501: NO), no plate lottery is performed. When a negative determination is made in step S5501, a net increase number grasping process for grasping the net increase number of game media after shifting to the ART state ST6 is executed (step S5508). In the net increase number grasping process, the net increase number of game media after the transition to the ART state ST6 is grasped by referring to the eleventh history storage area RA11. If it is before the transition to the ART state ST6 (if the ART in-progress flag in the effect-side RAM 94 is not set to "1"), the net increase number of game media is set to "0" in the net increase number grasping process (step S5508). ”.

After that, the base data table in which the base plate image designation data is set corresponding to the range of the net increase number is read out from the production side ROM 93 (step S5509). Then, the base plate image designation data is identified by collating the net increase number of game media ascertained in step S5508 against the base data table (step S5510), and the identified base plate image designation data is constructed. It is set in the base plate counter 161h in the data storage area 161 (step S5511), and this plate setting process is terminated. In the background data table, the number of net additions is "range of 0 to 499 sheets", "range of 500 to 1000 sheets", "range of 1001 to 1499 sheets", "range of 1500 to 1999 sheets", "range of 2000 to 2499 sheets". range”, “range of 2500 to 2999 sheets”, and “range of 3000 sheets or more”. , and the base plate image designation data is set so as to change in the order of gold.

If a negative determination is made in step S5501 or a negative determination is made in step S5506, the value of the background plate counter 161g in the configuration data storage area 161 becomes "0". As already explained, when the value of the background plate counter 161g is "0", the common background plate image is included in the history image G23.

Returning to the description of the history configuration data generation process (FIG. 85), after the plate setting process is performed in step S5109, the current date and time data (specifically, year and month date information and time information), and sets the relevant date and time data in the date and time data counter 161j in the configuration data storage area 161 (step S5110). As a result, the effect-side MPU 92 can grasp the date and time when the history image G23 was generated.

Thereafter, generation trigger data setting processing is executed (step S5111). In the generation trigger data setting process, the generation trigger data corresponding to the type of history configuration data generation trigger is stored in the generation trigger counter 161k of the configuration data storage area 161 (FIG. 81(b)). Specifically, when "1" is set in the first break generation flag 176a in the effect-side RAM 94, "1" is stored in the generation trigger counter 161k, and "1" is set in the second break generation flag 176b. If so, "2" is stored in the generation trigger counter 161k; When "1" is set in the flag 174, "4" is stored in the creation trigger counter 161k, and when "1" is set in the ending generation flag 175, "5" is stored in the creation trigger counter 161k. is stored, and when the midway generation flag 177 is set to "1", "6" is stored in the generation trigger counter 161k.

After that, history configuration data setting processing is performed (step S5112). In the history configuration data setting process, the history configuration data generated this time is stored in the image reproduction storage area 94c. In step S5112, if any of the ART end generation flag 174, the ending end generation flag 175, and the first to third delimiter generation flags 176a to 176c in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1", image reproduction is performed. In the storage area 94c for reproduction, the storage area for reproduction RDn (n is any integer from 0 to 30) corresponding to the value of the write pointer 162 in the effect side RAM 94 is cleared, and set in the configuration data storage area 161. The history configuration data is set in the reproduction storage area RDn. As already explained, in each reproduction storage area RDn, the rendering side indicates whether or not the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data stored in the reproduction storage area RDn can be displayed on the image display device 63. A displayable flag that can be grasped by the MPU 92 is provided. When the history configuration data is stored in the reproduction storage area RDn, the display enable flag of the reproduction storage area RDn is set to "1". As a result, the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data stored in the reproduction storage area RDn can be displayed on the image display device 63. FIG.

As already described with reference to FIG. 81(a), the effect-side RAM 94 has a first protection target counter 163 and a second protection target counter 164 that enable grasping of the reproduction storage area RDn that is excluded from being erased. is provided. If the history point of the history configuration data stored in the reproduction storage area RDn in step S5112 is equal to or greater than the history point in the second protection target counter 164, the history configuration with the second highest history point is determined. The reproduction storage area RDn in which the data is stored is removed from the protection target, and the reproduction storage area RDn in which the current history configuration data is stored is set as the protection target.

In the history configuration data setting process (step S5112), thereafter, the value of the write pointer 162 is updated by adding 1 to it. If the value of the write pointer 162 after the addition of 1 is a value corresponding to the protected reproduction storage area RDn, the value of the write pointer 162 is further updated. Further, when the value of the write pointer 162 after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the write pointer 162, which is "30", the value of the write pointer 162 is cleared to "0". In the history configuration data setting process (step S5112), after updating the value of the write pointer 162, the configuration data storage area 161 is cleared.

In the history configuration data setting process (step S5112), if the intermediate generation flag 177 in the effect-side RAM 94 is set to "1", the 31st reproduction storage area RD31 in the image reproduction storage area 94c is cleared, The history configuration data set in the configuration data storage area 161 is set in the 31st reproduction storage area RD31. After that, the configuration data storage area 161 is cleared.

In the history configuration data generation process (FIG. 85), after the history configuration data setting process (step S5112) is executed, the ART end generation flag 174 or the ending end generation flag 175 in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1". It is determined whether or not it is set (step S5113). When an affirmative determination is made in step S5113, game history data clearing processing is executed (step S5114). In the game history data clearing process (step S5114), the 0th to 5th history storage areas RA0 to RA5 and the 7th to 15th history storage areas RA7 to RA15 in the history storage area 94b are cleared. As a result, the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b are cleared to "0" except for the game history data indicating the number of occurrences of ART wins.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5113, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the in-progress generation flag in the effect-side RAM 94 (step S5115). When an affirmative determination is made in step S5115, "1" is set to the midway generation end flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S5116). The midway generation end flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the generation of the history configuration data started when the operation for midway generation of the history image G23 was performed has been performed.

When the process of step S5114 is performed, when a negative determination is made in step S5115, or when the process of step S5116 is performed, the corresponding generation flag is cleared to "0" (step S5117), and this history Terminate the configuration data generation process. In step S5117, if the ART end generation flag 174 is set to "1", the ART end generation flag 174 is cleared to "0", and the ending end generation flag 175 is set to "1". If there is, the generation flag 175 at the end of the ending is cleared to "0", and if the midway generation flag 177 is set to "1", the midway generation flag 177 is cleared to "0". When "1" is set to any one of the three division generation flags 176a to 176c, the division generation flags 176a to 176c set to "1" are cleared to "0".

Next, the game start handling process executed by the effect side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The game start support process is executed in step S4804 of the history image process (FIG. 82) when the effect side MPU 92 receives a game start command from the main side MPU 72. FIG.

In the game start handling process, first, it is determined whether or not history display is being executed (step S5601). In step S5601, an affirmative determination is made when the history image G23, a history menu screen, a mode selection screen, a headline list, or a ranking screen, which will be described later, is being displayed on the image display device 63. FIG. The effect-side RAM 94 is provided with a history image display flag, a mode selection flag, a headline list display flag, and a ranking display flag. The history image displaying flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the history image G23 is being displayed on the image display device 63, and the mode selection flag indicates that the image display device 63 is in the mode. It is a flag that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the selection screen is being displayed, and the headline list display flag is a flag that indicates that the headline list is being displayed on the image display device 63. It is a flag that can be grasped by the production side MPU 92 , and the ranking display flag is a flag that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the ranking screen is being displayed on the image display device 63 . In step S5601, an affirmative determination is made if any of these flags is set to "1".

When an affirmative determination is made in step S5601, end processing of history display is executed (step S5602). In the history display termination process, the display data for displaying any of the history image G23 set in the display setting area 113, the history menu screen, the mode selection screen, the headline list, and the ranking screen, which will be described later, is cleared. do. As a result, the display of any one of the history image G23, the history menu screen, the mode selection screen, the headline list, and the ranking screen, which has been performed on the image display device 63, ends.

Thereafter, a history display flag clearing process is executed (step S5603). In the history display flag clearing process, among the history image display flag, mode selection flag, headline list display flag, and ranking display flag in the effect-side RAM 94, the flags set to "1" are cleared to "0". do. After that, the history operation valid flag provided in the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S5604). The history operation valid flag is a flag that allows the effect side MPU 92 to grasp that various selections for displaying history images can be made based on the operation of the effect operation device 64 . The state in which the history operation enable flag is set to “1” corresponds to a state in which various selections for displaying the history image can be made based on the operation of the operating device 64 for presentation. By clearing the history operation valid flag to "0" based on the reception of the game start command by the performance side MPU 92, various selections for displaying the history image can be disabled during the performance of the game.

When a negative determination is made in step S5601, or when the processing of step S5604 is performed, it is determined whether or not the value of the pop display counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 is "1" or more (step S5605). In the present slot machine 10, when the history composition data is generated with the end of the ART state ST6 as a trigger, when the history composition data is generated with the end of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 as a trigger, and when the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs. When the history configuration data is generated when the number of game media provided later reaches a predetermined delimiter number (specifically, "1000", "2000", or "3000"), new A pop image is displayed on the image display device 63 to indicate that the history image G23 can be displayed. Specifically, a pop-up image including the characters “History image can now be displayed” is displayed in the lower right portion of the image display device 63 . This allows the player to recognize that the new history image G23 can be displayed. The pop display ends when the corresponding history image display is performed. Also, the pop display ends when three games are played without displaying the corresponding history image. The pop display counter is a counter that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp whether or not three games have been played since the start of the pop display. The pop display counter is set to "3" at the timing when the pop display is started.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5605, the value of the pop display counter is decremented by 1 (step S5606). If the value of the pop display counter after the subtraction of 1 becomes "0" (step S5607: YES), pop display end processing is executed (step S5608). In the termination process, the display data for popup display set in the display setting area 113 is cleared. As a result, the pop-up display performed by the image display device 63 ends.

When the negative determination is made in step S5605, when the negative determination is made in step S5607, or when the processing of step S5608 is performed, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the normal game state ST1. (step S5609). If the affirmative determination is made in step S5609, date and time data (specifically, date and time information and time information) is acquired from the RTC in the effect control board 91 (step S5610), and the acquired date and time data is A reference time counter provided in the effect-side RAM 94 is set (step S5611), and the game start corresponding processing is terminated. In this slot machine 10, it is predicted that the player will leave the seat after 10 minutes have passed without the production side MPU 92 receiving the game start command since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal game state ST1. When the state is reached, the setting of the history storage mode is canceled. The effect-side MPU 92 uses the date and time data set in the reference time counter in step S5611 to determine whether 10 minutes have passed since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal game state ST1. do.

Next, the history image management process executed by the effect-side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the history image management process is executed in step S4805 of the history image process (FIG. 82).

In the history image management process, first, it is determined whether or not an OFF operation command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S5701). As already explained, the OFF operation command is transmitted when the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop is performed. When an affirmative determination is made in step S5701, "1" is set to the history operation valid flag in the effect side RAM 94 (step S5702). As a result, various selections for displaying history images can be made based on the operation of the operation device 64 for effect.

When a negative determination is made in step S5701, or when the processing of step S5702 is performed, end effect handling processing is executed (step S5703). FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing end effect handling processing.

In the end effect handling process, first, it is determined whether or not an ART end command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S5801). When an affirmative determination is made in step S5801, "1" is set to the generation flag 174 at the end of ART provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S5802). As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S5101 of the history configuration data generation processing (FIG. 85) already described, and history configuration data is generated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5801, it is determined whether or not an ending end command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S5803). When an affirmative determination is made in step S5803, "1" is set to the ending end generation flag 175 provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S5804). As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S5101 of the history configuration data generation processing (FIG. 85) already described, and history configuration data is generated.

When the process of step S5802 is performed, or when the process of step S5804 is performed, the notice pop display start process is executed (step S5805). In the slot machine 10, while the end effect or the ending effect of the ART state ST6 is being executed, an advance notice pop-up image is displayed to foretell that a new history image G23 can be displayed after the end effect is finished. It takes place in device 63 . In the notice pop-up display, a notice pop-up image including characters “preparing history image” is displayed in the lower right portion of the image display device 63 . In the advance notice pop display start process (step S5805), display data for displaying the advance notice pop image on image display device 63 is set in display setting area 113. FIG. As a result, the preview pop image is displayed in the lower right portion of the image display device 63 . By performing the notice pop-up display, the player is made to recognize that the history image G23 can be displayed after the ending effect or the ending effect of the ART state ST6 is completed, so as to correspond to the newly generated history constituting data. It is possible to increase the possibility that an operation for displaying the history image G23 will be performed.

After that, "1" is set to the advance notice display flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 (step S5806). The notice display in-progress flag is a flag that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp that the notice pop-up display is being executed. Thereafter, the history operation valid flag in the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S5807), and the end effect handling process is terminated. By clearing the history operation enable flag to "0", various selections for displaying the history image based on the operation of the operation device 64 for presentation cannot be performed.

Returning to the description of the history image management process (FIG. 95), after the end effect handling process is executed in step S5703, it is determined whether or not the notice display flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" ( step S5704). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5704, it means that the image display device 63 is in a state in which the end effect of the ART state ST6 or the end effect of the ending and the notice pop display are being performed. The value of the timer counter for the effect side effect in the RAM 94 is updated by subtracting 1 (step S5705).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter for effect side effect after being updated in step S5705 has become "0" (step S5706), and the value of the timer counter for effect side effect has become "0". If so (step S5706: YES), end processing of the notice pop display is executed (step S5707). In the termination process, the display data for the preview popup display set in the display setting area 113 is deleted. As a result, the preview pop image is no longer displayed on the image display device 63, and the preview pop display ends. After that, the advance notice display flag in the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S5708), and the history operation valid flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5709). As a result, various selections for displaying history images can be made based on the operation of the operation device 64 for effect.

After that, pop display start processing is executed (step S5710). In the start process, display data for displaying a pop image on the image display device 63 is set in the display setting area 113 . As a result, a pop-up image including the characters "The history image can be displayed" is displayed in the lower right portion of the image display device 63, and the pop-up display is started. After that, "3" is set to the pop display counter in the production side RAM 94 (step S5711).

When the negative determination is made in step S5704, when the negative determination is made in step S5706, or when the process of step S5711 is performed, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the normal game state ST1. (step S5712). If the affirmative determination is made in step S5712, the current date and time data (specifically, date information and time information) is obtained from the RTC (not shown) in the effect control board 91 (step S5713), Based on the acquired date and time data and the date and time data set in the reference time counter in the production side RAM 94, it is determined whether 10 minutes have passed since the start lever 41 was last operated ( step S5714).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5714, processing for clearing the displayable flag is executed (step S5715). In the clearing process, all the displayable flags set to "1" among the displayable flags provided in the respective reproduction storage areas RD0 to RD31 of the image reproduction storage area 94c are cleared to "0". As a result, the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data that has been generated and stored in the 0th to 31st reproduction storage areas RD0 to RD31 cannot be selected and displayed on the image display device 63. In the normal game state ST1, when 10 minutes have passed since the last operation of the start lever 41 without receiving the game start command by the effect side MPU 92 and the player is expected to leave the seat. selects the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data generated before the occurrence of the state and stored in the 0th to 31st reproduction storage areas RD0 to RD31 and causes the image display device 63 to display the history image G23. become unable. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from estimating the set value by referring to the past history image G23 of the player other than the player himself/herself.

When the player is expected to leave the seat, the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data stored up to that point cannot be displayed, but is stored in the 0th to 31st reproduction storage areas RD0 to RD31. The stored historical configuration data remains without being deleted. As already explained, the image reproduction storage area 94c is a storage area to which backup power is supplied after the slot machine 10 is powered off. Information is stored and held in the image reproduction storage area 94c even when the supply of operating power to the image reproduction storage area 94c is stopped. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the same wording designation data as the wording designation data included in the history composition data is selected when new history composition data is generated. This makes it possible to increase the possibility that the history image G23 including the never-before-seen word images G25 to G27 will be displayed.

Thereafter, game history data clear processing is executed (step S5716). In the game history data clearing process, similar to the game history data clearing process in step S5114 of the history configuration data generation process (FIG. 85), the 0th to 5th history storage areas RA0 to RA5 in the history storage area 94b are cleared. And the seventh to fifteenth history storage areas RA7 to RA15 are cleared. In this way, it is predicted that the player will leave the seat after 10 minutes have passed without the effect-side MPU 92 receiving the game start command since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal game state ST1. If so, the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b is cleared to "0" except for the game history data indicating the number of occurrences of ART wins. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game history data of the next player to be seated from being mixed with the game history data of the player who was seated before the player. After that, the history storage flag 158 in the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S5117). This cancels the game history mode.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the pop display counter in the effect-side RAM 94 is "1" or more (step S5118). If the value of the pop display counter is "1" or more (step S5118: YES) , pop display end processing is executed (step S5119). In the termination process, the display data for pop display set in the display setting area 113 is cleared in the same manner as in step S5608 of the game start process (FIG. 94). As a result, the pop-up display performed by the image display device 63 ends. After that, the pop display counter in the effect-side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S5720), and this history image management process ends.

Next, the history menu screen displayed on the image display device 63 will be described prior to the description of the display operation corresponding process (FIG. 98) executed by the effect-side MPU 92. FIG. The history menu screen is displayed on the image display device 63 when the center button 64a of the operation device 64 for effect is operated in a situation where the effect operation valid flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1".

FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the history menu screen displayed on the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 97, the history menu screen displays six item images G32 to G37 and a cursor image G38 that allows selection of the item images G32 to G37. The effect-side RAM 94 is provided with a cursor position counter that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp the item selected by the cursor on the image display device 63 . The value of the cursor position counter corresponds one-to-one with the items displayed on the image display device 63, and is updated based on the operation of the upper button 64b or the lower button 64c of the operating device 64 for presentation. The player changes the item selected by the cursor image G38 on the image display device 63 by operating the upper button 64b or the lower button 64c of the operation device 64 for presentation, and operates the center button 64a to change the item selected by the cursor image G38. You can confirm the selection of the item. When the screen displayed on the image display device 63 is switched, the maximum value of the cursor position counter is changed according to the number of items displayed on the image display device 63 .

When the history menu screen is displayed on the image display device 63, the state where the value of the cursor position counter is "0" corresponds to the state where the item "mode selection" is selected. The state in which the counter value is "1" corresponds to the state in which the item "display latest history image" is selected, and the state in which the cursor position counter value is "2" corresponds to the state in which "past history The state where the cursor position counter value is "3" corresponds to the state where the item "Generate history image" is selected. The state where the cursor position counter value is "4" corresponds to the state where the item "ranking display" is selected, and the state where the cursor position counter value is "5" corresponds to the state where the "history menu" is selected. This corresponds to the state in which the item "Close" is selected. When the history menu screen is displayed on the image display device 63, the selection of each item is confirmed by operating the center button 64a.

Next, the display operation corresponding processing executed by the effect side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. Note that display operation handling processing is executed in step S4806 for history image display (FIG. 82).

In the display operation corresponding process, first, it is determined whether or not the history operation valid flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5901). If a negative determination is made in step S5901, the processing corresponding to the display operation ends without executing the processing corresponding to the operation of the operation device 64 for presentation.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5901, it is determined whether or not the flag during menu display provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5902). The flag during menu display is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the history menu screen (FIG. 97) is being displayed on the image display device 63 . If an affirmative determination is made in step S5902, selection handling processing is executed (step S5903), and this display operation handling processing ends. FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing selection handling processing.

In the selection correspondence processing, cursor update processing is first executed (step S6001). In the cursor update process, when the operation of the upper button 64b or the lower button 64c of the production operating device 64 is detected, the value of the cursor position counter in the production side RAM 94 is updated, and the value of the cursor position counter after the update is updated. The display data set in the display setting area 113 is updated so that the cursor image G38 is displayed at the corresponding position.

After that, it is determined whether or not the operation of the center button 64a of the effect operating device 64 has been detected (step S6002). If an affirmative determination is made in step S6002, it means that the selection of any item on the history menu screen (FIG. 97) has been confirmed, so the history menu display termination process is executed (step S6003). In the termination process, the display data for displaying the history menu screen set in the display setting area 113 is cleared. As a result, the history menu screen is no longer displayed on the image display device 63 .

Thereafter, the menu display flag in the effect-side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S6004). As a result, the effect-side MPU 92 can grasp that the display of the history menu screen has ended. After that, when the value of the cursor position counter in the effect-side RAM 94 is "0" (step S6005: YES), mode selection start processing is executed (step S6006), and this selection processing ends.

In the mode selection start process (step S6006), a process for causing the image display device 63 to display a mode selection screen for selecting setting and canceling of the history storage mode is performed. Specifically, the display data for displaying the mode selection screen is set in the display setting area 113 . Thereby, the mode selection screen is displayed on the image display device 63 . On the mode selection screen, two items, "set history storage mode" and "cancel history storage mode", can be selected. Also, in the mode selection start process (step S6006), the mode selection flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1". As already described, the mode selection flag is a flag that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp that the mode selection screen is being displayed on the image display device 63 . By setting the mode selection flag to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S5904 of the display operation corresponding processing (FIG. 98), and the mode selection processing (step S5905) is executed. . FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing processing during mode selection.

In the mode selection process, cursor update processing is first executed (step S6101). In the cursor update process, similarly to the cursor update process in step S6001 of the selection correspondence process (FIG. 99), when the operation of the upper button 64b or the lower button 64c on the production operation device 64 is detected, the cursor position in the production side RAM 94 is changed. Along with updating the counter value, the display data set in the display setting area 113 is updated so that the cursor image G38 is displayed at the position corresponding to the updated cursor position counter value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not an operation to select the history storage mode has been performed (step S6102). When an affirmative determination is made in step S6102, "1" is set to the history storage flag 158 in the effect side RAM 94 (step S6103). As a result, the game history mode is set, and the game history data is stored in the history storage area 94b.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6102, it is determined whether or not an operation to cancel the history storage mode has been performed (step S6104). If an affirmative determination is made in step S6104, the history storage flag 158 is cleared to "0" (step S6105). As a result, the setting of the game history mode is cancelled, and no game history data is stored in the history storage area 94b.

Thereafter, game history data clear processing is executed (step S6106). In the game history data clearing process, similar to the game history data clearing process in step S5114 of the history configuration data generation process (FIG. 85), the 0th to 5th history storage areas RA0 to RA5 in the history storage area 94b are cleared. And the seventh to fifteenth history storage areas RA7 to RA15 are cleared. In this way, when the setting of the history storage mode is canceled, the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b is cleared except for the game history data indicating the number of occurrences of ART winning. be.

When the process of step S6103 or the process of step S6106 is performed, the end process of displaying the mode selection screen is executed (step S6107). In the termination process, the display data for displaying the mode selection screen set in the display setting area 113 is cleared. As a result, the mode selection screen is no longer displayed on the image display device 63 . After that, the mode selection flag in the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S6108), and this mode selection process is ended. As a result, the effect-side MPU 92 can grasp that the mode selection screen displayed on the image display device 63 has ended.

Returning to the description of the selection correspondence processing (FIG. 99), if a negative determination is made in step S6005, it is determined whether or not the value of the cursor position counter in the effect side RAM 94 is "1" (step S6007). . If an affirmative determination is made in step S6007, it means that the item "display latest history image" has been selected on the history menu screen (FIG. 97), and therefore the image is stored in the image reproduction storage area 94c. The latest history configuration data is grasped from among the 32 history configuration data (step S6008). In step S6008, the date and time data set in the history configuration data stored in each of the reproduction storage areas RD0 to RD31 are compared, and the reproduction storage area RDn (where n is 0 to 31 integers).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the display enable flag in the reproduction storage area RDn (n is an integer from 0 to 31) grasped in step S6008 is set to "1" (step S6009). As already explained, after the history configuration data is stored in the reproduction storage area RDn, the effect-side MPU 92 does not receive the game start command after the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal game state ST1. When minutes have passed and it is predicted that the player will leave the seat, the display enable flag of each reproduction storage area RDn is cleared to "0". If a negative determination is made in step S6009, the process for displaying the latest history image G23 on the image display device 63 (processes in steps S6010 to S6012) is not executed, and the selection process ends. do.

In this way, after the history configuration data is stored in the reproduction storage area RDn, the effect-side MPU 92 does not receive the game start command for 10 minutes after the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal game state ST1. , the player is expected to leave the seat, the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data stored in each reproduction storage area RDn is selected and displayed on the image display device 63. can no longer be displayed.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6009, display data for displaying the history image G23 on the image display device 63 is generated based on the history configuration data grasped in step S6008 (step S6010). ). Then, the generated display data is set in the display setting area 113 (step S6011). As a result, the history image G23 is displayed on the image display device 63. FIG. After that, the history image displaying flag in the effect-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6012), and this selection handling process ends. As a result, the effect-side MPU 92 can recognize that the history image G23 is being displayed on the image display device 63 .

When a negative determination is made in step S6007, it is determined whether or not the value of the cursor position counter in the effect side RAM 94 is "2" (step S6013). If an affirmative determination is made in step S6013, it means that the item "display past history image" has been selected on the history menu screen (FIG. 97), so processing for starting past history selection is executed. (step S6014).

In the past history selection start process (step S6014), headline list generation process is first executed. In this slot machine 10, when the item "Display past history images" is selected on the history menu screen (Fig. to be displayed. As already described, the history image G23 that can be displayed on the image display device 63 is the history configuration data generated in the past and stored in the reproduction storage areas RD0 to RD31 of the image reproduction storage area 94c. This is the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data whose possible flag is set to "1". The headline list is a list of the first wording and generation date/time in the history configuration data. In the headline list generation process, display data for displaying the headline list and the cursor image G38 for selecting a headline in the headline list on the image display device 63 is generated. After that, the generated display data for the headline list is set in the display setting area 113 . As a result, the index list and cursor image G38 are displayed on the image display device 63. FIG. After that, the headline list display flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1". As already described, the headline list display flag is a flag that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to recognize that the headline list is being displayed on the image display device 63 . By setting the heading list display flag to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S5906 of the display operation corresponding processing (FIG. 98), and the past history selection processing (step S5907) is executed. becomes. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing past history selection processing.

In the past history selection process, cursor update processing is first executed (step S6201). In the cursor update process, similarly to the cursor update process in step S6001 of the selection correspondence process (FIG. 99), when the operation of the upper button 64b or the lower button 64c on the production operation device 64 is detected, the cursor position in the production side RAM 94 is changed. Along with updating the counter value, the display data set in the display setting area 113 is updated so that the cursor image G38 is displayed at the position corresponding to the updated cursor position counter value.

After that, it is determined whether or not the operation of the center button 64a of the effect operating device 64 has been detected (step S6202). If an affirmative determination is made in step S6202, it means that an operation has been performed to confirm any selection on the image display device 63, and therefore, processing for ending display of the index list is executed (step S6203). In the termination process, the display data for displaying the index list and the display data for displaying the cursor image set in the display setting area 113 are deleted. As a result, the image display device 63 no longer displays the index list and the cursor image G38. After that, the headline list display flag in the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S6204). As a result, the production side MPU 92 can grasp that the headline list display has ended.

After that, it is determined whether or not any headline has been selected based on the value of the cursor position counter in the effect-side RAM 94 (step S6205). In step S6205, an affirmative determination is made if a headline corresponding to any past history constituent data is selected, and a negative determination is made if a selection is made to return to the history menu screen. If a negative determination is made in step S6205, the processing of steps S5913 to S5916 of the display operation handling processing (FIG. 98) is executed. The contents of the processing of steps S5913 to S5916 will be described later.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6205, the headline selected based on the value of the cursor position counter is ascertained (step S6206), and the history configuration data corresponding to the ascertained headline is ascertained (step S6206). step S6207). Specifically, in step S6207, the reproduction storage areas RD0 to RD31 in which the history configuration data corresponding to the header grasped in step S6206 are stored in the image reproduction storage area 94c are grasped.

Thereafter, display data for displaying the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data grasped in step S6207 on the image display device 63 is generated (step S6208). Then, the generated display data is set in the display setting area 113 (step S6209). As a result, the history image G23 corresponding to the past history configuration data selected this time is displayed on the image display device 63 .

After that, the history image displaying flag in the effect-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6210), and this past history selection process is terminated. As a result, the effect-side MPU 92 can recognize that the history image G23 is being displayed on the image display device 63 .

Returning to the description of the selection correspondence processing (FIG. 99), if a negative determination is made in step S6013, it is determined whether or not the value of the cursor position counter in the effect side RAM 94 is "3" (step S6015). . If an affirmative determination is made in step S6015, it means that the item "intermediate generation of history image" has been selected. S6016), this selection handling process is terminated. By setting "1" to the midway generation flag 177, an affirmative determination is made in step S5101 of the already-described history configuration data generation processing (FIG. 85), and history configuration data is generated. . As already described, in the history configuration data generation process (FIG. 85), when history configuration data is generated based on the midway generation flag 177 in the production side RAM 94 being set to "1", the process proceeds to step S5113. A negative determination is made at step S5115, and an affirmative determination is made at step S5115, and "1" is set to the intermediate generation end flag in the effect side RAM 94 (step S5116).

Returning to the description of the history image processing (FIG. 82), after executing the history configuration data generation processing in step S4807, it is determined whether or not the intermediate generation end flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1". (Step S4808). As already explained, the midway generation end flag enables the production-side MPU 92 to grasp that the generation of the history configuration data that started when the operation for midway generation of the history image G23 was performed has been completed. is a flag to If an affirmative determination is made in step S4808, intermediately generated history image display processing (processing of steps S4809 to S4813) is executed. Specifically, first, the history configuration data stored in the 31st reproduction storage area RD31 is grasped (step S4809). As already explained, the 31st reproduction storage area RD31 is an area in which the history configuration data generated based on the selection of the item "intermediate generation of history image" is set.

After that, display data for displaying the history image G23 on the image display device 63 is generated based on the history configuration data ascertained in step S4809 (step S4810). Then, the generated display data is set in the display setting area 113 (step S4811). Thereby, the history image G23 is displayed on the image display device 63. FIG. After that, "1" is set to the history image displaying flag in the production side RAM 94 (step S4812). As a result, the effect-side MPU 92 can recognize that the history image G23 is being displayed on the image display device 63 . Thereafter, the intermediate generation end flag in the effect-side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4813), and this history image processing ends.

Returning to the description of the selection correspondence processing (FIG. 99), if a negative determination is made in step S6015, it is determined whether or not the value of the cursor position counter in the effect side RAM 94 is "4" (step S6017). . If a negative determination is made in step S6017, it means that the value of the cursor position counter is "5" and the item "close history menu" has been selected on the history menu screen (FIG. 97). This selection handling process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6017, it means that the item "ranking display" has been selected on the history menu screen (FIG. 97), so ranking generation processing is executed (step S6018). In this slot machine 10, when the item "ranking display" is selected, a ranking screen is displayed in which the information of the 32 pieces of history configuration data stored in the image reproduction storage area 94c are arranged in descending order of history points. be done. The ranking screen displays the first wording of each piece of history constituent data, history points, rank, and generation date and time. In the ranking generation process (step S6018), display data for displaying the ranking screen on the image display device 63 is generated.

After that, ranking display start processing is executed (step S6019). In the start process, the display data generated in step S6018 is set in the display setting area 113. FIG. Thereby, the ranking screen is displayed on the image display device 63 . After that, the ranking display in-progress flag provided in the effect-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6020), and the selection process ends. As already explained, the ranking display flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the ranking screen is being displayed on the image display device 63 .

Returning to the description of the display operation corresponding processing (FIG. 98), after making a negative determination in step S5906, it is determined whether or not the flag during ranking display in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5908). . When an affirmative determination is made in step S5908, processing during ranking display is executed (step S5909). In the ranking display process, it is determined whether or not the operation of the central button 64a of the operating device 64 for effect has been detected. Execute the process for Specifically, the display data for displaying the ranking screen set in the display setting area 113 is cleared. As a result, the ranking screen is no longer displayed on the image display device 63 . After that, the flag during ranking display in the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0". As a result, the effect-side MPU 92 can grasp that the ranking display has ended.

When a negative determination is made in step S5908, it is determined whether or not the value of the pop display counter in the effect side RAM 94 is "1" or more (step S5910). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5910, that is, if the pop display is being performed on the image display device 63, it is determined whether or not the operation of the down button 64c on the operating device 64 for presentation has been detected. (step S5911).

If a negative determination is made in step S5910, or if a negative determination is made in step S5911, it is determined whether or not operation of the center button 64a of the effect operating device 64 has been detected (step S5912). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5912, processing (steps S5913 to S5916) for displaying the history menu screen (FIG. 97) on image display device 63 is executed. Further, as already described, even when a negative determination is made in step S6205 of the past history selection process (FIG. 101), the processes of steps S5913 to S5916 are executed.

Specifically, first, the value of the cursor position counter in the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S5913). After that, numerical value information of "5" is set in the cursor maximum value counter in the effect side RAM 94 (step S5914). As a result, the value of the cursor position counter becomes "5".

Thereafter, a history menu display start process is executed (step S5915). In the start process, the display data for displaying the history menu screen on the image display device 63 and the display data for displaying the cursor image G38 are read from the effect-side ROM 93 and set in the display setting area 113. . As a result, the history menu screen and the cursor image G38 are displayed on the image display device 63. FIG. After that, the menu display flag in the effect-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5916), and the present display operation corresponding processing is terminated. By setting the menu display flag to "1", the effect side MPU 92 can grasp that the history menu screen (FIG. 97) is being displayed on the image display device 63. FIG.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5911, that is, if an operation of the lower button 64c of the effect operating device 64 is detected while the pop display is being performed on the image display device 63 (step S5911: YES) , pop display end processing is executed (step S5917). In this termination process, the display data for popup display set in the display setting area 113 is cleared in the same manner as in step S5608 of the game start handling process (FIG. 94). As a result, the pop-up display performed by the image display device 63 ends.

Thereafter, the pop display counter in the effect-side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S5918), the process proceeds to step S6008 of the selection correspondence process (FIG. 99), and the processes of steps S6008 to S6012 are executed. As already explained, when the display enable flag in the reproduction storage area RDn (n is any integer from 0 to 31) in which the latest history configuration data is stored is set to "1" (step S6009: YES), the history image G<b>23 corresponding to the latest history configuration data is displayed on the image display device 63 . As already explained, the processing for clearing the displayable flag (step S5715 of the history image management processing (FIG. 95)) is executed when the effect-side MPU 92 receives the game start command after the start lever 41 is finally operated. This is done when 10 minutes have passed without any delay and it is predicted that the player will leave the seat. Therefore, after the down button 64c is operated while the image display device 63 is displaying a popup, the latest history configuration data is not displayed until the processing of steps S6008 to S6012 is executed. The displayable flag in the stored reproduction storage area RDn (n is any integer from 0 to 31) is never cleared to "0".

In this way, when the down button 64c is operated while the pop display is being performed on the image display device 63, the item "display the latest history image" is displayed on the history menu screen (FIG. 97). The latest history image G23 can be displayed on the image display device 63 by omitting the selection operation. Since the operation for checking the latest history image G23 is simplified, the possibility of checking the history image G23 is increased.

<Regarding game history management>
Next, the management processing executed by the main MPU 72 to manage the game history and notify the management result will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 102 . Note that the management process is executed at step S214 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

When one game is newly executed (step S6301: YES), the value of the total number of games counter 74a provided in the effect side RAM 94 is incremented by 1 (step S6302). The total number-of-games counter 74a is a counter for counting the number of games completed regardless of the game state and the game interval. The total number-of-games counter 74a consists of 3 bytes, and can count the number of games with a value obtained by subtracting 1 from 256 to the power of 3 as an upper limit. Also, the value of the total number of games counter 74a is not cleared to "0" unless the clearing process of step S105 is executed in the main process (FIG. 11). Therefore, it is possible to count the total number of games played on a plurality of business days in the gaming hall.

If one game is newly executed (step S6301: YES) and if it is in the advantageous section SC2 (step S6303: YES), not only is the value of the total number of games counter 74a increased by 1, 1 is added to the value of the number-of-advantage-games counter 74b provided in (step S6304). The advantageous game number counter 74b is provided separately from the advantageous continuation counter in the effect side RAM 94, and the advantageous game number counter 74b is not cleared to "0" even if the initialization processing of the advantageous section SC2 is executed. Therefore, when the advantageous section SC2 occurs a plurality of times with the normal section SC1 in between, the total number of games played in the plurality of advantageous sections SC2 can be counted by the advantageous game number counter 74b. . The number-of-advantage-games counter 74b consists of 3 bytes and can count the number of games with an upper limit of a value obtained by subtracting 1 from 256 to the third power. Also, the value of the number-of-advantage-games counter 74b is not cleared to "0" unless the clearing process of step S105 is executed in the main process (FIG. 11). Therefore, it is possible to count the total number of games in the advantageous section SC2 that have been played on a plurality of business days in the gaming hall.

If a negative determination is made in step S6301, if a negative determination is made in step S6303, or if the process of step S6304 is executed, it is determined whether or not the game history management result is being displayed ( step S6305). If the game history management result is not being displayed (step S6305: NO), it is determined whether or not an instruction to display the game history management result has been issued (step S6306). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the front door 12 is opened and the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54 is operated while the operating power of the slot machine 10 is being supplied. As already explained, when the supply of operating power to the slot machine 10 is started while operating the reset button 56, the clearing process of step S105 is executed in the main process (FIG. 11). When the reset button 56 is operated in the state where is supplied, an instruction to display the management result of the game history is generated.

If it is determined that an instruction to display the management result of the game history has been generated (step S6306: YES), the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 74b to the value of the total game number counter 74a is calculated (step S6307). That is, the calculation is executed so that the calculation result=“the value of the number-of-advantage-games counter 74b”/“the value of the number-of-total-games counter 74a”.

Thereafter, display start processing is executed (step S6308). In the display start processing, the display of the calculation result of step S6307 on the ratio display 85 (FIG. 9) is started. In this case, the identifier display section 86 displays the identifier "7U." indicating that the value displayed in the ratio display section 87 is the advantageous segment stay ratio. Specifically, "7" is displayed on the left 7-segment display 86a of the identifier display section 86, "U" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 86b of the identifier display section 86, and an auxiliary display for the identifier is displayed. The display of the identifier display section 86 is controlled so that the section 86c lights up. Further, of the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result of step S6307 by 100, the tens place is displayed on the left seven-segment display 87a of the ratio display section 87, and the ones place is displayed on the right seven-segment display 87b. The display of the ratio display section 87 is controlled as follows. The above calculation result is reported as a percentage display. Specifically, if the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "35", "3" is displayed on the left 7-segment display 87a of the ratio display section 87, and "3" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 87b. 5” is displayed.

However, in the case of the display by only the two 7-segment displays 87a and 87b in the ratio display section 87, the display on the ratio display section 87 is performed when the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "100" and when it is "0". The content will be the same. Therefore, when the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "100", "0" is not only displayed on each of the left 7-segment display 87a and the right 7-segment display 87b of the ratio display section 87. When the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "0", the left 7-segment display 87a and the right 7-segment display 87b in the ratio display section 87 are respectively displayed. Not only is "0" displayed, but the auxiliary display portion 87c is turned off.

On the other hand, if the game history management result is displayed (step S6305: YES), the start detection sensor 41a, the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, the credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a, and the settlement detection sensor 51a. (step S6309). When an ON signal indicating that the start lever 41 is being pressed is received from the start detection sensor 41a, an ON signal indicating that one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is being pressed is received from one of the stop buttons 42-44. If it is received from the detection sensors 42a to 44a, and if an ON signal indicating that medals have been inserted is received from the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, one of the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 is pressed. is received from any of the credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a, or if an ON signal indicating that the settlement button 51 has been pressed is received from the settlement detection sensor 51a, step An affirmative determination is made in S6309. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S6309 regardless of whether or not each ON signal is generated during the effective period.

In other words, regardless of whether reception of the ON signal from the start detection sensor 41a triggers the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, an affirmative determination is made in step S6309. Also, regardless of whether or not the reception of the ON signal from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a triggers the rotation stop of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, a positive determination is made in step S6309. Also, regardless of whether or not the reception of the ON signal from the inserted medal detection sensor 45a is the target of bet setting or credit increase, an affirmative determination is made in step S6309. Also, regardless of whether or not the reception of the ON signal from the credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a is the target of the bet setting, affirmative determination is made in step S6309. Also, regardless of whether or not the reception of the ON signal from the settlement detection sensor 51a serves as a settlement trigger for the credited virtual medals, an affirmative determination is made in step S6309.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S6309, display end processing is executed (step S6310). In the display end processing, the display of the calculation result on the ratio display 85 is ended.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the normal game state ST1, a plurality of effects are executed in parallel based on the occurrence of the first to sixth opportunities during one game. The number of combinations of the plurality of effects is enormous, and if the effect table corresponding to all the combinations of the plurality of effects is stored in advance in the effect side ROM 93, the effect for storing the effect table is provided. The storage capacity of the side ROM 93 will increase. On the other hand, when the first synthesized effect table and the second synthesized effect table are not generated, the various effect tables for executing various effects are individually placed in different layers LYn (n is any of 0 to 11) in the readout area 94a. (integer), and various effects are executed in parallel according to various effect tables. Further, when the first synthesized effect table or the second synthesized effect table is generated, the normal base effect executed according to the normal base effect table read to the 0th layer LY0 and the normal base effect read to the first layer LY1 It is executed according to the first synthesized effect table or the second synthesized effect table. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of combinations of executable effects while suppressing an increase in the storage capacity of the effect-side ROM 93 for storing the effect table.

When the first composite effect table is generated, the symbol variation effect table, the effective notification effect table, the left stop effect table, the right stop effect table, the reach notification effect table, the middle stop effect table, the first expected effect table and the second expected effect The effect data of the effect table is read out to one layer LYn (specifically, the first layer LY1). Further, when the second synthetic effect table is generated, the symbol variation effect table, the effective notification effect table, the left stop effect table, the right stop effect table, the long press notification effect table, the intermediate stop effect table, the first expected effect table, The effect data of the second expected effect table and the re-fluctuation effect table are read out to one layer LYn (specifically, the first layer LY1). As a result, the maximum number of effect tables read in one game is reduced, and the number of layers LYn in the readout area 94a is reduced.

There is one type of first synthetic effect table stored in the effect-side ROM 93, and the first synthetic effect table uses the one type of effect data set in each effect table to be executed in each game. It is created by setting it in the first synthesis table. There is only one type of second synthetic effect table stored in the effect-side ROM 93, and the second synthetic effect table stores effect data set in each effect table to be executed in each game. It is created by setting the type in the second synthesis table. Since the types of the first synthesis table and the second synthesis table, which are stored in advance in the effect side ROM 93 in order to generate the first synthesis effect table and the second synthesis effect table, are respectively one type, the synthesis table It is possible to reduce the storage capacity in the performance-side ROM 93 for storing.

The normal base effect table for executing the normal base effect is read out to the 0th layer LY0 different from the first layer LY1 from which the first synthesized effect table or the second synthesized effect table is read. Therefore, even if the pointer information to be referenced in the first layer LY1 jumps, it does not affect the pointer information to be referenced in the 0th layer LY0. As a result, the display of the background image G4 and the output of the normal bass music in the normal base effect can be continuously executed, and various effects can be started in response to the occurrence of the first to sixth triggers. It's becoming

By combining five types of first expected effect tables and five types of second expected effect tables stored in the effect-side ROM 93 to generate a second synthetic effect table, all combinations (specifically 25 types), while suppressing an increase in the storage capacity of the performance side ROM 93 for storing the performance table, compared with the configuration in which the performance table corresponding to the first expected performance is stored in advance. and the variation of the combination of the second expected effect can be increased.

The second expected performance is started based on both the condition that the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second) and the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs. be done. If the second expected performance is started only on the condition of the occurrence of the sixth opportunity, the second expected performance starts before the first expected performance when the sixth opportunity occurs during execution of the middle stop performance. It will be done. The first expectation performance and the second expectation performance in a configuration in which the expectation level of bonus winning is reported in the first expectation performance and the expectation level of BB winning in the case where the bonus winning occurs in the second expectation performance is reported. If the order of is reversed, the player may be confused. On the other hand, based on both the condition that the execution period of the first expected effect reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second) and the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs, the second By adopting a configuration in which two expected effects are started, it is possible to execute the first expected effect and the second expected effect in the order of the first expected effect → the second expected effect. This prevents the order of the second expected performance from being reversed.

When the period from the ON operation to the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop is short, and the sixth opportunity occurs at the timing before the execution period of the first expected effect reaches the predetermined period. Even if there is, a predetermined period (specifically, one second) can be secured as the execution period of the first expected effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution period of the first expected effect from becoming so short that the contents of the first expected effect cannot be understood.

The period from the ON operation to the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop is long, and at the timing after the execution period of the first expected effect reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second) When the 6 opportunity occurs, the second expectation effect can be started without delay based on the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42-44. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate by associating the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop with the start of the second expected effect in a manner that is easy for the player to understand. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

While securing the execution period of the first expected performance over a predetermined period (specifically, one second), the second expected performance is started without delay when the sixth opportunity occurs. As a result, the player can be made to feel that the second expected effect has started triggered by the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop. Therefore, after long pressing the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop, the player should turn off the stop buttons 42 to 44 while expecting the second expected effect to occur. Become. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In a game in which a second expected effect is performed, a first synthesized effect table or a second synthesized effect table including effect data for executing the first expected effect and effect data for executing the second expected effect. is generated, and the first synthetic effect table or the second synthetic effect table is read into one layer (specifically, the first layer LY1). If the first expected effect table and the second expected effect table are read in different layers LYn, when the second expected effect table is read based on the occurrence of the sixth opportunity, the execution period of the first expected effect is predetermined. period (specifically, one second) has been reached. On the other hand, a first synthesized effect table or a second synthesized effect table including effect data for executing the first expected effect and effect data for executing the second expected effect is placed on the first layer LY1. , the execution period of the first expected effect has reached a predetermined period (specifically, one second). To start a second expected performance when both the condition that the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second) and the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs are satisfied. can be done. As a result, it is possible to simplify the configuration for ensuring a predetermined period (specifically, one second) as the execution period of the first expected effect.

When both the condition that the execution period of the first expected effect reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second) and the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs, display for the second expected effect Data is set in the fourth effect area 113e of the display setting area 113. FIG. In this case, when the display data for the first expected effect remains in the fourth effect area 113e, the display data is deleted and the display data for the second expected effect is set. In the display setting area 113, as the area in which the display data for the second expected effect is set, the same area as the area in which the display data for the first expected effect is set (fourth effect area 113e) is provided. By being set, it is possible to start the second expected effect without requiring the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp the progress of the first expected effect.

The layer LYn from which the medium stop effect table is read out in the readout area 94a varies depending on whether or not there is a ready-to-win notification effect. In addition, the effect table including the effect data of the symbol variation effect table, the effect table including the effect data of the left stop effect table, the effect table including the effect data of the right stop effect table, and the effect data of the reach notification effect table Layer LYn ( n is any integer from 0 to 11) varies depending on whether or not the first synthetic effect table and the second synthetic effect table are generated. Setting destination information of the display data is set in these effect tables in association with the address information of the display data. As a result, even if the reading destination of these effect tables changes, it is possible to prevent the setting destination of the display data in the display setting area 113 from changing, and the data is displayed on the image display device 63. It is possible to prevent the anteroposterior relationship of the images from changing.

A blank area in which performance data is not set is provided at the beginning of the first expected performance table, and performance execution in which performance data for performing the first expected performance is set after the blank region. area is provided. Thus, in a game in which the second expected effect is not executed, the first expected effect is executed while the intermediate stop effect is being executed while the intermediate stop effect table and the first expected effect table are read based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity. You can prevent it from being broken. In the game in which the second expected effect is executed, the effect execution area excluding the blank area of the first expected effect table is set in the first synthesized effect table or the second synthesized effect table. As a result, it is possible to start the first expected effect without causing a delay at the end timing of the intermediate stop effect.

The main side MPU 72 does not set numerical information to the freeze counter in the main side RAM 74 at the start of the additional main effect and the additional sub effect. A player who is in a hurry in a situation such as the end of business hours is approaching can start the next game by operating the start lever 41 during the additional main performance and the additional sub performance. When the performance-side MPU 92 receives the game start command during the execution of the additional main performance and the additional sub performance, the additional main performance being executed is terminated, and the base performance for ART is based on the reception of the game start command. And the normal effect for ART is started. Further, the gauge increasing display in the additional sub effect is switched from the high speed display to the low speed display, and the display of the additional sub effect is continued. As a result, not only the result of the additional winning, but also the additional sub-performance corresponding to the additional winning can be confirmed, and based on the reception of the game start command, the base performance for ART and the normal performance for ART are generated without delay. can be started. After the base performance for ART and the normal performance for ART are started based on the operation of the start lever 41, the additional sub performance is continuously executed in parallel with these performances, thereby omitting the additional main performance. The entire additional sub performance can be displayed even for a player who hastened ahead. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The number of additional games is suggested by the fact that the animation display of the additional main effect is executed to the end without ending in the middle. When the gauge increase display is performed in a state in which the additional main effect is executed to the end and the additional game number is suggested, the gauge increase display is high speed display. As a result, it is possible to shorten the execution period of the gauge increase display that is performed after the number of games to be added is suggested, so that the player's interest can be quickly shifted to the next game. On the other hand, when the moving image display of the additional main effect ends without being executed to the end, the gauge increase display performed is slow display. When the gauge increase display is started without suggesting the number of games to be added, the player will notice that the number and color of the unit gauge images G22 displayed in the gauge display section G19a are updated to the number of games to be added, which is "100". You will see the increasing gauge display in anticipation of the corresponding aspect. By switching the gauge increase display from the high-speed display to the low-speed display, the display period of the gauge increase display, which is of high interest, can be extended, and the interest in the game can be improved.

When the performance-side MPU 92 receives the add-on command during ART in a situation in which the add-on sub-performance is being executed, the executed add-on sub-performance is terminated, and a new add-on main effect is performed based on the reception of the add-on command during ART. And the additional sub production is started. If the configuration is such that the start of the add-on main effect and the add-on sub effect based on the reception of the add-on command during ART is waited until the add-on sub effect being executed is completed, then the add-on main effect is received after receiving the add-on command during ART. And a delay occurs before the additional sub-effect is started. With this configuration, when additional winnings occur consecutively and delays accumulate, a situation arises in which the additional main effect and the additional sub effect corresponding to the additional winnings cannot be started during the game in which the additional winnings have occurred. There is a risk. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the additional main effect and the additional sub effect are started without delay based on the reception of the additional command during ART. To eliminate the possibility that an additional main performance and an additional sub performance corresponding to the additional winning cannot be started during a game in which the additional winning occurs even when the additional winning occurs continuously. can be done.

In the situation where the additional sub-effect is being executed, the additional sub-effect in the case where the effect-side MPU 92 receives the add-on command during ART is the total of the additional winnings that have occurred consecutively before the occurrence of the current additional winning. It is carried out in a mode corresponding to the number of additional games. Therefore, when the add-on command during ART is received, the gauge display section G19a blinks the unit gauge image G22 of the final number and color in the add-on sub effect being executed. As a result, it is possible to give continuity to the add-on sub performance, and to give a special feeling that the add-on wins are continuously occurring. Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. In addition, the final state of the additional sub-effect can be displayed to the player who was watching the additional sub-effect that was being executed. In this way, based on the fact that the add-on command during ART is received, the add-on sub effect being executed is ended without delay, and the add-on main effect and the add-on sub effect are started. The final state of the additional sub performance can be displayed to the player who was watching the additional sub performance.

When additional winnings occur continuously in a manner in which the additional sub effects are not interrupted, address information of the display data set in the additional sub effects table is replaced with address information before the occurrence of the current additional winnings. The address information of the display data is set for performing the gauge flashing display and the gauge increasing display in a manner corresponding to the total number of additional games for which the additional winning has occurred. Thus, it is possible to reduce the number of additional sub-performance tables stored in advance in the performance side ROM 93, and reduce the storage capacity of the performance side ROM 93 for storing the additional sub-performance tables.

When the additional wins do not occur consecutively, the update of the number-of-continued-games image G18 displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is performed at the end of the additional sub effect. By setting the state in which the number of additional games cannot be grasped based on the number-of-continued-games image G18 until the additional sub-effect is completed, the additional main effect indicating the number of additional games and the additional sub-effect indicating the number of additional games are realized. can raise interest.

When the additional winning is continuously generated in a state in which the additional sub performance is not interrupted, the display of the number of continuous games is updated at the end of the last additional winning in the continuously generated additional winning. By not updating the number-of-continued-games image G18 until the last winning addition sub-performance is completed, it is possible to increase interest in the addition main performance suggesting the number of addition games and the addition sub-performance showing the number of addition games. In addition, by setting the number of additional games to be added to the display counter 134 in the effect-side RAM 94 at a time to a large value, the impression that the number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 has increased greatly due to the additional winning that has occurred consecutively. can give

In the ART state ST6, the ART base effect, the ART normal effect, the added main effect and the added sub effect are executed. There are a plurality of types of these effects, and the number of combinations of these effects is enormous. These effects are read out on different layers LYn (0th layer LY0 to 3rd layer LY3) in the readout area 94a. , the effect execution control is executed by the effect side MPU 92 according to these effect tables. As a result, compared with the configuration in which the performance tables for all combinations of these performances are stored in advance in the performance side ROM 93, while suppressing the increase in the data capacity of the performance tables stored in advance in the performance side ROM 93, It is possible to increase the variations of combinations of these effects. Also, in a situation where the ART base effect and the ART normal effect are being executed, based on the fact that the effect side MPU 92 receives the ART add-on command, the ART base effect and the ART normal effect which are being executed are continued. However, the processing for starting the additional main effect and the additional sub effect is simplified.

There are four types of add-on main effect tables that are read when an add-on win with the number of add-on games of "50" occurs, and there are two types of add-on sub-effect tables (high-speed first add-on sub-effect table and low-speed first add-on effect table). There are two types of tables, namely, an additional sub-effect table. In addition, there are four types of add-on main effect tables that are read when an add-on win with the number of add-on games of "100" occurs, and there are two types of add-on sub effect tables (high-speed second add-on sub effect table and low-speed second add-on effect table). There are two types of tables, namely, the second additional sub-effect table. An add-on main effect table and an add-on sub effect table are stored in the effect-side ROM 93, and the add-on main effect and the add-on sub effect table are read in different layers LYn (n=2, 3) of the readout area 94a according to these effect tables. One effect table containing effect data for executing the additional main effect and effect data for executing the additional sub effect is stored in the effect side ROM 93 by the configuration in which the effect is executed. Compared with the configuration, the storage capacity of the production side ROM 93 for storing the production table for executing the additional main production and the additional sub production is reduced.

When bonus winning occurs in the role product error state or correction operation standby state, the performance side MPU 92 receives a prize winning result command in which information indicating that the bonus prize has been established is set. The operation standby state is canceled, and the correction operation of the accessory 75 is started. The correction action of the accessory 75 is started before the bonus start effect. Also, the time required for the correcting action of the accessory 75 is shorter than the execution period of the bonus start effect. Therefore, the first game in the bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) is started in a situation where the accessory error state and the correction operation waiting state are canceled and the spherical effect part 77b stays at the origin. be able to. Even when a bonus prize is won in a role product error state or a correction operation standby state, the role product operation presentation is canceled by making it possible to execute the performance of the role product operation from the first game after the start of the bonus state. By reducing the frequency, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The release of the accessory error state and the correction operation standby state is performed based on the fact that the effect side MPU 92 receives a winning command in which information indicating that the bonus winning has been established is set. The event that the effect-side MPU 92 receives the winning command is an event that occurs regardless of the presence or absence of the bonus notification effect and the presence or absence of the re-variation effect. Therefore, when the bonus prize is established, regardless of the presence or absence of the bonus notification effect and the presence or absence of the re-variation effect, the accessory error state or the correction operation standby state is canceled and the compensation operation of the accessory 75 is executed. can be done.

Triggered by the fact that the production-side MPU 92 receives a prize-winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus prize has been established is set, the accessory error state or the correction operation standby state is released. Even if a bonus win occurs in the winning lottery process (FIG. 14), the bonus state is not entered until the bonus win is established. When the performance-side MPU 92 receives a game start command in which information indicating that a bonus has been won is set as a trigger, the role product error state or the correction operation standby state is canceled. The value of the correction execution counter 141 is increased before the transition to the bonus state because it is determined that the spherical effect portion 77b is not staying at the origin in the origin detection performed from the time the standby state is canceled until the bonus winning is established. It is conceivable that the In this case, there is a high possibility that the correction operation standby state is set in the middle of the bonus state. On the other hand, when the production-side MPU 92 receives a prize-winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus prize has been established is used as a trigger, the accessory error state or the correction operation standby state is canceled. No origin detection is performed before transitioning to state. Therefore, the value of the correction execution counter 141 does not increase before transitioning to the bonus state, and the possibility of being set to the correction operation standby state during the bonus state is reduced.

A structure in which the performance-side MPU 92 receives a game start command in which information indicating the occurrence of a bonus winning is set, cancels the role product error state or the correction operation standby state, and executes the operation performance of the role product 75. Then, although it is possible to end the correction action before the start of the bonus start effect, even if the bonus notification effect is not won in the game in which the bonus is won, the accessory error state or the correction action standby state is canceled. Since the correcting action of the accessory 75 is performed at the same time, the player will be aware of the occurrence of the bonus winning based on the correcting action being performed. On the other hand, when the performance-side MPU 92 receives a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus prize has been established is set, the role product error state or the correction operation standby state is canceled and the role product 75 is corrected. With the configuration for executing the action, the player can prevent the player from grasping the occurrence of the bonus winning based on the correction action of the role object 75, and the role can be played from the first game in the bonus state. Object action production can be started.

In a configuration in which a trigger for starting a role product action effect occurs during execution of a bonus notification effect, a role product error state or a correction operation standby state is established when the effect side MPU 92 receives a prize winning result command corresponding to establishment of a bonus prize winning. can be released, it is possible to start the performance of the role product action during the execution of the bonus notification effect, and to cancel the error state of the role product or the standby state of the correction operation at the timing when the bonus prize is established. can be

When it is determined that the spherical effect part 77b does not stay at the origin in the origin detection of the role object 75, the condition for setting the correction operation standby state and the role object error state is not satisfied. is performed, and the spherical effect portion 77b returns to the origin. When it is determined that the spherical effect part 77b does not stay at the origin, the frequency of maintenance by the manager of the game hall is reduced compared to the configuration in which the correction operation standby state or the accessory error state is immediately set. It is possible to reduce the burden on the administrator.

Even if the spherical effect part 77b does not return to the origin in the correction operation of the role object 75, the correction operation standby state and the role object error state do not occur. In this case, it is determined that the spherical effect portion 77b is not staying at the origin again in the next origin detection. Reduce the frequency of occurrence of the role object error state compared to the configuration in which the correction operation standby state or the role object error state is immediately set when the spherical effect part 77b does not return to the origin in the correction operation of the role object 75. It is possible to reduce the frequency of maintenance by the manager of the game hall.

When it is determined that the spherical effect part 77b of the accessory 75 is not staying at the origin in the origin detection performed in a situation where the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "3", the origin detection and correction operation are not executed. The correction operation standby state is set. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the corrective action is frequently performed, and to enhance the safety of the performance of the character action.

In the corrective action standby state, when a predetermined period (specifically, five minutes) has passed since the start of the corrective action standby state, the number of games played after the start of the corrective action standby state has reached a predetermined number. Information indicating that the number of times (specifically, 30 times) has been reached, or that the production side MPU 92 has received a character product initialization command from the main side MPU 72, or that the production side MPU 92 has won a bonus prize from the main side MPU 72 is canceled when a winning result command in which is set is received. After entering the corrective action waiting state, the corrective action waiting state is canceled without maintenance by the manager of the game hall, and the correction action of the accessory 75 is returned to the executable state. can reduce the frequency of maintenance by administrators. As a result, the management burden on the administrator can be reduced.

If it is determined that the spherical effect part 77b of the role object 75 is not staying at the origin in the origin detection performed in a situation where the values of the standby execution counter 142 and the correction execution counter 141 are "3", a role error occurs. state. As a result, it is possible to inform the manager of the game hall that the positional displacement of the spherical effect portion 77b has occurred so frequently that the value of the standby execution counter 142 reaches "4". In addition, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a state requiring maintenance by an administrator continues for a long time.

The detection of the origin of the accessory 75 is triggered by the reception of the game start command by the production side MPU 92 . Due to the configuration in which origin detection is performed triggered by an event with a high frequency of occurrence, when a state in which the spherical effect portion 77b does not stay at the origin occurs in a situation where the drive control of the accessory 75 is not executed, early detection is performed. Immediately, the spherical effect portion 77b can be returned to the origin. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the performance of the role object action is canceled due to the spherical effect part 77b not staying at the origin.

If the spherical effect part 77b does not stay at the origin at the execution timing of detecting the origin of the role object 75, performing the correction operation of the role object 75 to return the spherical effect part 77b to the origin is prioritized. Execution of the performance of the character action is prohibited until the game next to the game in which the correction action is performed is started. As a result, it is possible to quickly create a state in which the spherical effect portion 77b stays at the origin. In addition, after the spherical effect portion 77b returns to the origin by the correcting action of the role object 75 and before the game next to the game in which the correcting action was executed starts, the role object action effect is started. It is possible to avoid the state where the spherical effect part 77b does not stay at the origin again when the execution timing of detecting the origin of the accessory 75 comes.

When a history configuration data generation trigger occurs, history configuration data is generated based on the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b. The history composition data is stored in the image reproduction storage area 94c, and when the history image G23 is displayed, the display data of the history image G23 is reproduced based on the history composition data stored in the image reproduction storage area 94c. is generated. Then, one frame of history image data for displaying the history image G23 on the image display device 63 is generated based on the display data of the history image G23. The history configuration data is stored, and the history image data for one frame is generated based on the history configuration data each time the history image G23 is displayed. Compared to the configuration in which the past history image G23 is stored, the storage capacity of the effect-side RAM 94 for enabling display of the past history image G23 can be reduced. Also, the game history data used to generate the history configuration data is stored, and history image data for one frame is generated based on the game history data each time the history image G23 is displayed. , the storage capacity of the effect-side RAM 94 for enabling display of the past history image G23 can be reduced, and the processing load for displaying the past history image G23 can be reduced.

In the first to third selection condition tables, if there are a plurality of wording designation data that satisfy the selection conditions and have a common display priority, the plurality of wording designation data are selected for display. A wording designation data lottery process (step S5211 of the wording selection process (FIG. 88)) is executed to select one wording designation data. Since the text designation data to be displayed is selected by lottery, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the contents of the history image G23 can be predicted before the history image G23 is displayed on the image display device 63.例文帳に追加As a result, the interest in the game is improved.

The history image G23 is provided with a character image range 154 in which a character image G28 corresponding to the first wording image G25 displayed in the first headline range 151 is displayed. By displaying the character image G28 corresponding to the game history, it is possible to display the history image G23 configured so that the content of the effect performed in the past can be easily remembered.

When the opportunity to generate the history composition data occurs after the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 is performed, the history image G23 corresponding to the history composition data always includes the ending image G29. Therefore, even if the player does not record the ending performance with a camera or the like during execution of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2, the player can confirm the record of the ending performance by displaying the history image later. As a result, it is possible to carefully show the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 to the player.

When a plurality of wording designation data are set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 as candidates for the wording designation data set in the first to third selection areas 165 to 167, among the plurality of wording designation data, Wording designation data different from the wording designation data included in the history configuration data generated and stored in the reproduction storage area RDn (n is any integer from 0 to 31) of the image reproduction storage area 94c is the first to the third selection areas 165 to 167 are preferentially set. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the contents of history configuration data that are successively generated are duplicated, and to improve the interest of the game.

Any one of the plate lottery tables PA1 to PA6, PB1 to PB6, PD1 to PD6 corresponding to the combination of the total number of games executed after the end of the previous ART state ST6 and the current setting value of the slot machine 10 is used. A plate lottery is performed, and background plate image designation data corresponding to the background plate image G24 suggesting the set value is set in the history configuration data. As a result, it is possible to predict the current set value based on the type of the background plate image G24 included in the history image G23, thereby improving the interest in the game.

When the item "generation of history image midway" is selected on the history menu screen, history configuration data is generated based on the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b at the selected timing. As a result, it is possible to select "intermediate generation of history image" at an arbitrary timing and perform history image display based on the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b by the timing. For example, when it is desired to display the history image without waiting for the end of the ART state ST6, such as when business hours are nearing the end, it is possible to display the history image based on the game history data up to that point.

When the history configuration data is generated based on the selection of the item "generation of history image in progress", the history configuration data includes background plate image designation data that designates the background plate image G24 suggesting the setting value. is not set. Therefore, the background plate image G24 suggesting the setting value is not included in the midway generated history image G23. As a result, it is possible to prevent the user from guessing the current set value by selecting "intermediate generation of history image" many times at short intervals and repeating confirmation of the type of the background plate image G24.

The game history data stored in the 0th to 5th history storage areas RA0 to PA5 and the 7th to 15th history storage areas RA7 to RA15 in the history storage area 94b are triggered by the end of the ART state ST6. Cleared when history configuration data is generated as Thus, history configuration data can be generated based on the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b from the end of the previous ART state ST6 to the end of the current ART state ST6.

Even if the player does not perform an operation to generate the history configuration data, the number of game media provided after the transition to the ART state ST6 is a predetermined division number (specifically, "1000", "2000", or "3000"), history configuration data is generated. If the player does not perform an operation for generating the history data, the history data is generated only at the end of the ART state ST6 and at the end of the ending effect in the advantageous section SC2. As the number of games executed in G increases, the history of games not reflected in the content of the history image G23 increases. On the other hand, since the history configuration data is generated each time the number of game media provided after the transition to the ART state ST6 reaches the predetermined number of divisions, the number of games executed in the ART state ST6 is increased. When the number increases, the number of history images G23 reflecting the game history in the ART state ST6 can be increased. This makes it possible to check the past game history in detail.

The image reproduction storage area 94c can store a plurality (specifically, 32) of history configuration data. The player selects one history configuration data from among the plurality of history configuration data stored in the image reproduction storage area 94c for which the displayable flag is set to "1" and displays the corresponding history configuration data. A history image G<b>23 corresponding to the history configuration data can be displayed on the image display device 63 . By enabling confirmation of a plurality of history images G23 in the past, it is possible to collectively confirm a plurality of history images G23 without displaying the history image G23 each time history configuration data is generated. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted in order to check the history image G23.

When the period in which the start lever 41 is not operated after the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal game state ST1 reaches 10 minutes, each of the reproduction storage areas RD0 to RD0 of the image reproduction storage area 94c All of the displayable flags set to "1" among the displayable flags provided in the RD 31 are cleared to "0". As a result, the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data that has been generated and stored in the 0th to 31st reproduction storage areas RD0 to RD31 cannot be selected and displayed on the image display device 63. In this way, when the player is expected to leave his seat, the history configuration data generated before the occurrence of the situation and stored in the 0th to 31st reproduction storage areas RD0 to RD31 It becomes impossible to select the history image G23 corresponding to and display it on the image display device 63. As a result, it is possible to prevent the action of guessing the set value by referring to the past history image G23 of a player other than the player himself/herself.

When the player is expected to leave the seat, the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data stored up to that point cannot be displayed, but is stored in the 0th to 31st reproduction storage areas RD0 to RD31. The stored historical configuration data remains without being deleted. In addition, since the image reproduction storage area 94c is a storage area to which backup power is supplied after the power supply of the slot machine 10 is turned off, operating power to the effect side MPU 92 is supplied to the effect side MPU 92 when the power supply of the slot machine 10 is in an OFF state. Information is stored in the image reproduction storage area 94c even when the supply is stopped. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the same wording designation data as the wording designation data included in the history composition data is selected when new history composition data is generated. This makes it possible to increase the possibility that the history image G23 including the never-before-seen word images G25 to G27 will be displayed.

When the history configuration data is generated when the ART state ST6 ends, when the history configuration data is generated when the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 ends, or after the transition to the ART state ST6 When history configuration data is generated when the number of provided game media reaches a predetermined number of divisions (specifically, “1000”, “2000”, or “3000”), the image display device 63 displays the latest A pop-up display is performed to indicate that the history image G23 of . As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the history composition data has been newly generated, and to prompt the player to perform the operation for displaying the history image G23 corresponding to the history composition data.

When an operation of the down button 64c of the production operation device 64 is detected while a pop image is being displayed on the image display device 63, the latest history image corresponding to the pop image is displayed directly without going through the history menu screen. G23 can be displayed. By simplifying the operation for displaying the latest history image G23 during the pop display, the history image G23 corresponding to the history composition data is displayed even though the history composition data is newly generated. You can reduce the chances of it not happening.

<Second embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the content of the effect that is executed based on the fact that the effect-side MPU 92 has received the add command during ART. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 103(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 in the ART base effect and the ART normal effect in this embodiment. The effect contents of the ART base effect and the ART normal effect are the same as those of the ART base effect and the ART normal effect in the first embodiment. As in the first embodiment, the number of continued games is displayed in the ART state ST6. 103(a), a continuous game number image G18 indicating the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 63. FIG. As shown in FIG. 103(a), in the present embodiment, the sub-display area 131 (FIG. 57) in the first embodiment is not provided, and the gauge flashing display and gauge increase display are not performed.

In the present embodiment, when the effect-side MPU 92 receives the add-on command during ART from the main-side MPU 72, the add-on effect is performed. 103(b) and 103(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 in the additional effect of the ART state ST6. In the add-on effect, the add-on moving image is displayed on the entire surface of the image display device 63 for a predetermined period (specifically, 4 seconds). In the added moving image, as shown in FIG. 103(b), moving images of the added character images G20 and G21 are displayed for three seconds. The moving image is a moving image that suggests the number of additional games. After that, as shown in FIG. 103(c), an additional game count image G41 is displayed for one second. These additional character images G20 and G21 and additional game count image G41 are displayed closer to the screen than the background image G16 and ART character image G17 (FIG. 103(a)). Therefore, the background image G<b>16 and the ART character image G<b>17 are invisible while the superimposed moving image is being displayed on the image display device 63 . On the other hand, the number-of-continued-games image G18 is displayed closer to the screen than the additional character images G20, G21, and the number-of-added-games image G41, so it is visible even while the additional moving image is being displayed.

As in the first embodiment, the main MPU 72 does not set numerical information to the freeze counter in the main RAM 74 at the start of the additional effect. A player who is in a hurry in a situation such as when business hours are about to end can start the next game by operating the start lever 41 in the middle of the additional performance. When the start lever 41 is operated to start the next game during the execution of the additional performance and the performance side MPU 92 receives the game start command, the additional performance being executed is terminated and the received game start command. A base effect for ART and a normal effect for ART corresponding to are started. Also, in parallel with the ART base effect and the ART normal effect, a reduced added effect corresponding to the added effect that ended partway through this time is started. FIGS. 104(a) and 104(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 in the reduction additional effect.

104(a) and 104(b), in the lower right display area 181 provided on the lower right side of the image display device 63, a reduced added moving image is displayed. The reduced added moving image of the reduced added effect is obtained by reducing the number of pixels of the image in the corresponding added moving image of the added effect and reducing the display size. The length (execution period) of the reduced additional video is the same as the length (execution period) of the corresponding additional video. The reduced added video is played from the continuation of the added video that ended in the middle.

In the display of reduced additional moving images, as shown in FIG. 104(a), after the moving images of the reduced additional character images G42 and G43 are displayed in the lower right display area 181, as shown in FIG. 104(b), A reduced number-of-additional-games image G44 is displayed throughout. These reduced additional character images G42, G43 and reduced additional game count image G44 are displayed closer to the screen than the background image G16, the ART character image G17, and the additional character images G20, G21.

As shown in FIG. 104(a), when the effect-side MPU 92 receives the ART-in-addition command in a situation where the reduction addition effect is being executed, the image display device 63 displays the corresponding command as shown in FIG. An add-on effect corresponding to the received ART add-on command is started. When the remaining execution period of the reduced additional effect that was being executed in the lower right display area 181 when the ART extra command was received is 1 second or less, that is, the display of the reduced additional game number image G44 has already started. In this case, the display of the reduced overlaid moving image is continued in the lower right display area 181 .

On the other hand, if the remaining execution period of the reduced add-on effect that was being executed in the lower right display area 181 when the add-on command during ART was received is longer than 1 second, that is, if the reduced add-on game number image G44 is displayed in the lower right display area 181, If display has not started, display of the last one second of the reduced overlaid moving image starts in the lower right display area 181 . Specifically, display of the reduced additional game number image G44 is started in the lower right display area 181 . As shown in FIG. 104(b), in the lower right display area 181, the reduced overlay moving image is displayed closer to the screen than the overlay character images G20 and G21.

Thus, when the next additional effect is started during execution of the reduced additional effect, only the result portion of the reduced additional effect (reduced additional game number image G44) is displayed, and the reduced additional effect ends. . As a result, after specifying the number of games to be added in the reduced additional effect, the reduced additional effect can be ended quickly. To raise attention to an additional performance started later by shortening a period in which the reduced additional performance and the additional performance started after the reduced additional performance are executed in parallel within one second. can be done.

The display time of the added moving image is 4 seconds, and the reduced added moving image is reproduced from the continuation of the corresponding added moving image. Therefore, when the start lever 41 is operated and display of the reduced added moving image is started, the display time of the reduced added moving image is less than 4 seconds. As already described in the first embodiment, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating in the previous game until the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can start rotating. The wait time for starting rotation of 32M and 32R is 4.1 seconds. Therefore, the number of games that can be newly started during execution of the reduced additional effect is "1" or "0", and the reduced added effect and the added effect started after the reduced added effect are executed in parallel. In this situation, there is no timing for executing a new additional effect.

The value of the number of continuous games displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after adding the number of additional games in the additional effect at the end of the additional effect when the additional effect is executed to the end. be. In addition, the value of the number of continuous games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is switched from the additional performance to the reduced additional performance in the middle of the additional performance, and a new additional performance is displayed during the execution of the reduced additional performance. When the reduced additional performance is executed to the end without starting, when the reduced additional performance ends, the value after addition of the number of additional games in the reduced additional performance is updated. Furthermore, the value of the number of continuous games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is the value of the additional effect or the reduced additional effect started with the last additional winning when a plurality of additional winnings occur consecutively. At the time of termination, the value is updated to the value after adding the total number of additional games in the consecutively generated additional winnings. In the present embodiment, the case where additional wins occur consecutively means the case where a new additional effect is started during execution of the reduced additional effect.

Even in a situation where additional wins are continuously occurring, the value of the number of continued games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is subtracted by 1 each time a game is started. When the value of the number of continuous games to be displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 63 becomes "0" or less until the total number of additional games in the consecutively generated additional winnings is added together at the end. is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 63 instead of the value less than or equal to "0". Therefore, the ART state ST6 will not continue while the number of continued games is displayed at the upper left portion of the image display device 63 and is equal to or less than "0". After the value of the number of continuous games to be displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 63 becomes "0" or less in a situation where additional winnings are continuously occurring, the additional sub performance of the last occurring additional winning is terminated. In this case, the total number of additional winning games that have been continuously generated is added to the value of "0" or less, and the value of the number of continued games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is added. It will be updated to the later value.

Next, the configuration of the effect-side ROM 93 and the effect-side RAM 94 for executing various effects in the ART state ST6 will be described. FIG. 105(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the effect-side ROM 93, and FIG. 105(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the effect-side RAM 94. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 105(a), in the effect-side ROM 93, in addition to the ART base effect table storage area 133a and the ART normal effect table storage area 133b already described in the first embodiment, an additional effect table is stored. A storage area 133h and a reduced additional effect table storage area 133i are provided. As in the first embodiment, there are "50" and "100" as the number of additional games for additional winnings occurring in the ART state ST6. There are eight types of additional effects executed in the ART state ST6, and four types of additional effects corresponding to the number of additional games of "50" are stored in the additional effect table storage area 133h of the effect-side ROM 93. An additional effect table and four types of additional effect tables for executing an additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games of "100" are stored. In addition, in the reduced additional effect table storage area 133i of the effect side ROM 93, 8 types of reduced added effect for executing 8 types of reduced added effect corresponding to these 8 types of added effect are stored. A reduced additional performance table is stored.

In the add effect table, a plurality of pieces of numerical value information are arranged in serial numbers as pointer information, and various data for effect are set for the pointer information. The add-on effect table contains address information and setting destination information of display data for displaying the add-on moving image on the image display device 63, and sound output control of the speaker 62 so that the sound corresponding to the add-on moving image is output. Sound data for performing is set. Information indicating the third effect area 113d of the display setting area 113 is set as the setting destination information of the display data for the additional effect. The add effect table is read out to the second layer LY2 in the readout area 94a.

The pointer information (numerical information) that is the same as the pointer information (serial number numerical information) set in the corresponding additional effect table is set in the reduced additional effect table. Data is set. Address information and setting destination information of display data for displaying a reduced added moving image in the lower right display area 181 of the image display device 63 and sound corresponding to the reduced moving image are output to the reduced added effect table. Sound data for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62 is set as follows. Information indicating the fourth effect area 113e of the display setting area 113 is set as the setting destination information of the display data for the reduced additional effect. The reduced additional effect table is read out to the third layer LY3 in the readout area 94a.

In this way, in the readout area 94a, the additional effect table and the reduced additional effect table are read out on different layers LYn (n=2, 3), so that the reduced additional effect is executed. When the side MPU 92 newly receives an add-on command during ART, it is possible to start a new add-on effect based on the reception of the add-on command during ART while continuing the reduced add-on effect that is being executed. there is

When the add-on effect based on the add-on effect table ends in the middle and the reduced add-on effect based on the corresponding reduced add-on effect table is started, the pointer information of the add-on effect table that was being executed is used as the pointer information of the reduced add-on effect table. Taken over. In addition, the number-of-frames information of the display data for the additional effect that has been executed is taken over as the number-of-frames information of the display data for the reduced additional effect. As a result, it is possible to start the reduction additional effect from the continuation of the additional effect being executed.

As shown in FIG. 105(b), the effect side RAM 94 is provided with a total added game number counter 182 and an added effect type counter 183 in addition to the display counter 134 already described in the first embodiment. It is The total number-of-additional-games counter 182 is a counter that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp the number of additional games that are waiting to be added to the display counter 134 . When additional wins occur consecutively, the total number of add-on games counter 182 for the consecutive add-on wins is set. The add-on effect type counter 183 is a counter that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp the type of add-on effect being executed. Any numerical value information of "1" to "8" is set in the add-on effect type counter 183 according to the type of add-on effect to be executed.

Next, a processing configuration in the effect side MPU 92 for executing various effects in the ART state ST6 will be described. FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing a game start process during ART executed by the MPU 92 on the effect side. The game start process during ART is executed in step S3015 of the non-normal effect control process (FIG. 62) when a game start command is received from the main MPU 72 in ART state ST6.

In the game start processing during ART, first, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the flag during addition effect provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S6401). The add-on effect flag is a flag that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp that the add-on effect is being executed.

When "1" is set to the flag during addition effect (step S6401: YES), progress information storage processing is executed (step S6402). In the progress information storage process, the value of the pointer counter PC2 of the second layer LY2 from which the addition effect table is read is set in the pointer storage counter provided in the effect side RAM94. The pointer storage counter is a counter that enables the effect side MPU 92 to grasp the pointer information of the add effect table at the switching timing from the add effect to the reduced add effect. Further, in the progress information storage process (step S6402), the frame number information of the display data for the additional effect set in the third effect area 113d of the display setting area 113 is set in the frame number storage counter. The frame number storage counter is a counter that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp the frame number information of the display data for the additional production at the switching timing from the additional production to the reduced additional production.

After that, end processing of the additional effect is executed (step S6403). In the end processing of the additional effect, the second layer LY2 of the reading area 94a from which the additional effect table is read is cleared, and the additional effect set in the third effect area 113d of the display setting area 113 is cleared. Clear the display data of . As a result, the additional effect being executed in the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 ends.

After that, based on the value of the add-on effect type counter 183 in the effect-side RAM 94, the type of add-on effect ended in step S6403 is grasped (step S6404), and a reduced add-on effect table corresponding to the grasped type of add-on effect is obtained. is read out from the reduced additional effect table storage area 133i of the effect side ROM 93 to the readout area 94a (step S6405). As already explained, the reduced additional effect table is read to the third layer LY3.

Thereafter, pointer setting processing is executed (step S6406). In the pointer setting process, the pointer information set in the pointer storage counter in the effect side RAM 94 in the progress information storage process (step S6402) is stored in the pointer counter PC3 of the third layer LY3 from which the reduced addition effect table was read out in step S6405. set to As a result, the pointer information of the add-on effect table in the add-on effect ended this time is taken over as the pointer information of the reduced add-on effect table in the reduced add-on effect started this time.

After that, in step S6406, based on the pointer information set in the pointer counter PC3 of the third layer LY3, the display data set in the reduction additional effect table is specified, and the specified display data is displayed in the display setting area. 113 is set in the fourth effect area 113e (step S6407). Specifically, in the reduction and addition effect table, the pointer information to which the display data is set first in the direction in which the pointer information decreases from the pointer information inherited in the pointer setting process (step S6406) is grasped. Then, the display data is set in the fourth effect area 113 e of the display setting area 113 . As a result, the display data for the reduced added moving image corresponding to the display data set in the third effect area 113d at the end of the add effect is set in the fourth effect area 113e.

Thereafter, frame number setting processing is executed (step S6408). In the frame number setting process, as the frame number information for starting the display of the display data for the reduced additional effect set in the fourth effect area 113e in step S6407, the progress information storage process (step S6402) is executed to the effect side RAM 94. Set the frame number information set in the frame number storage counter in . As a result, the display data for the reduced added moving image corresponding to the display data set in the third effect area 113d at the end of the additional effect is reduced from the same number of frames as the number of frames at the end of the added effect. A reduced added animation in the added effect can be started. Therefore, it is possible to reproduce the reduced added moving image from the continuation of the added moving image that ended in the middle.

Thereafter, the add-on effect type counter 183 in the effect-side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S6409), and the add-on effect flag in the effect-side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S6410). As a result, the performance-side MPU 92 can grasp that the additional performance has ended. Then, "1" is set to the flag during reduction and addition effect in the effect side RAM 94 (step S6411). As a result, the performance-side MPU 92 can grasp that the reduction-addition performance is being executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S6401, or if the process of step S6411 has been carried out, the process proceeds to step S6412. In steps S6412 to S6417, the same processing as steps S3204 to S3209 in the game start processing (FIG. 63(b)) in the ART of the first embodiment is executed, and the game start in the ART is executed. End the process.

Next, the effect adjustment processing executed by the effect side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 107(a). It should be noted that the effect adjustment process is executed in step S3017 of the non-normal effect control process (FIG. 62) when an ART extra command is received from the main MPU 72 in the ART state ST6.

In the effect adjustment process, first, it is determined whether or not the flag during reduction and addition effect in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6501), and if the flag during reduction and effect is set to "1" ( In step S6501: YES), based on the value of the pointer counter PC3 of the third layer LY3 from which the reduced additional effect table has been read, it is determined whether or not the remaining time of the reduced additional effect is 1 second or less. (Step S6502). If an affirmative determination is made in step S6502, it means that display of the reduced number-of-additional-games image G44 has already started in the lower right display area 181 of the image display device 63, so the main effect adjustment processing is performed as it is. exit.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6502, pointer adjustment processing for reduction and additional effect is executed (step S6503), and this effect adjustment processing ends. In the pointer adjustment processing of the reduction additional effect (step S6503), the value of the pointer counter PC3 is updated so that the last one second of the reduction additional effect is executed. Specifically, the address information and setting destination information of the display data for causing the image display device 63 to display the reduced number-of-additional-games image G44 (FIG. 104(b)) is the pointer information to be referred to in the reduced-addition effect table. is updated up to the pointer information that is set.

As described above, when the effect-side MPU 92 receives the add-in-ART command during execution of the reduced add-on effect, the reduced add-on game number image G44 is displayed in the lower right display area 181 . This makes it possible to show the result of the reduction additional effect in an easy-to-understand manner. The display of the reduced number-of-games image G44 ends within one second. As a result, the period in which the reduced additional performance and the additional performance started after the reduced additional performance are executed in parallel is set to be a short period, and the player's interest can be shifted to the added performance started later. .

Next, the processing for additional effect executed by the effect side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 107(b). It should be noted that the process for adding effect is executed in step S3018 of the effect control process for non-normal use (FIG. 62) when the adding command during ART is received.

In the add-on effect processing, first, the number of add-on games is grasped based on the information set in the add-on command during the ART received this time, and the grasped number of add-on games is set in the add-on game number counter 135 in the effect-side RAM 94 ( step S6601).

After that, an additional effect lottery process is executed (step S6602). In the add-on effect lottery process, first, the add-on effect lottery table for selecting the add-on effect is read from the effect-side ROM 93 . As already explained, in the add-on effect table storage area 133h (FIG. 105(a)) of the effect-side ROM 93, four kinds of add-on effect tables for executing the add-on effect corresponding to the number of games to be added to "50" and " 4 types of additional performance tables for executing the additional performance corresponding to the number of additional games of 100” are stored. In the first addition effect lottery table, type information of four types of addition effect tables is set, and a numerical range for judging whether each type of information is correct or not is set. Further, in the second addition effect lottery table, type information of four kinds of addition effect tables is set, and a numerical range for judging whether each type of information is correct or not is set. After that, the numerical information of the random number counter which is periodically updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information is collated with the read addition performance lottery table. As a result, the additional effect table to be read this time is specified. Specifically, the addition effect table in which the numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter is set is specified as the object to be read.

Thereafter, the add-on effect table specified in the add-on effect lottery process (step S6602) is read from the add-on effect table storage area 133h of the effect-side ROM 93 (step S6603). As described above, the add effect table is read out to the second layer LY2 in the readout area 94a. The addition effect is executed by the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the effect according to the additional effect table. After that, "1" is set to the flag during the addition effect in the effect side RAM 94 (step S6604). As a result, the performance-side MPU 92 can grasp that the additional performance is being executed.

After that, the information (numerical information of any of "1" to "8") of the winning addition effect table in the addition effect lottery process (step S6602) is set in the addition effect type counter 183 in the effect side RAM 94 ( step S6605). As a result, the effect-side MPU 92 can grasp the type of the additional effect being executed. After that, the number-of-games update standby flag provided in the effect-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6606), and the process for the additional effect is terminated. The addition update standby flag is a flag that allows the production side RAM 94 to grasp that the process of adding the number of addition games to the display counter 134 is in a standby state.

Next, the flag clearing process executed by the effect-side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the flag clear processing is executed in step S2006 of the pointer update processing (FIG. 48) when the pointer information to be referenced is updated to the final pointer information and repeat information is not set in the final pointer information. be done.

In the flag clearing process, if the value of the target layer counter 114 is "2" (step S6701: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the flag during the addition effect in the effect side RAM 94 (step S6702). ). If the affirmative determination is made in step S6702, it means that the data table at the end timing of this time is the add-on effect table, so the add-on effect flag in the effect-side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S6703 ). As a result, the performance-side MPU 92 can grasp that the additional performance that was being executed has ended.

After making a negative determination in step S6701, if the value of the target layer counter 114 is "3" (step S6704: YES), "1" is set to the reduction-addition effect flag in the effect-side RAM 94. It is determined whether or not there is (step S6705). If an affirmative determination is made in step S6705, it means that the data table at the end timing of this time is a reduced additional effect table, so the flag during reduced additional effect is cleared to "0" (step S6706). As a result, the MPU 92 on the effect side can grasp that the reduced additional effect that has been executed has ended.

After making a negative determination in step S6704, in steps S6707 and S6708, the same processing as steps S3507 and S3508 in the flag clear processing (FIG. 66(a)) in the first embodiment is executed, This flag clear processing ends.

Next, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 109, the game number update process executed by the effect side MPU 92 will be described. The number-of-games update process is executed at step S3022 in the non-normal effect control process (FIG. 62).

In the game number update processing, it is determined whether or not the game number update standby flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6801). When an affirmative determination is made in step S6801, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the flag during the addition effect in the effect side RAM 94 (step S6802). When a negative determination is made in step S6802, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the flag during reduction and addition effect in the effect side RAM 94 (step S6803).

If "1" is set in the game number update waiting flag (step S6801: YES), and "1" is not set in either the flag during the addition effect or the flag during the reduction and addition effect (step S6802: NO, In step S6803: NO), while the display counter 134 is waiting for the process of adding the number of additional games, it means that all the additional effects and reduced additional effects have been completed. A process (processes of steps S6804 to S6807) for updating the value of the number of continuous games displayed on the upper left side of 63 to the value after addition of the number of additional games is executed.

Specifically, first, addition processing of the display counter 134 is executed (step S6804). In the addition processing, the value of the total added game number counter 182 in the effect side RAM 94 is added to the display counter 134 . When the additional performance is started in a situation where the reduced additional performance is not executed and the additional performance is executed to the end, the number of games of the additional performance is set in the total number of added games counter 182.例文帳に追加An additional production is started in a situation where the reduced additional production is not executed, the reduced additional production is switched to the reduced additional production corresponding to the reduced additional production, and the reduced additional production is not started while the reduced additional production is being executed. is executed to the end, the total number of additional games counter 182 is set with the number of additional games of the reduced additional effect. When additional wins occur consecutively and the add-on effect or reduced add-on effect corresponding to the last add-on win is executed to the end, the total add-on game number counter 182 indicates the total number of add-on games of the continuously generated add-on wins. is set.

After that, update processing for the display of the number of continued games is executed (step S6805). In the process of updating the display of the number of continuous games, the value of the display counter 134 after addition processing is performed in step S6804 is grasped as the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST6, and the grasped number of continuous games is calculated. Display data for displaying the number-of-continued-games image G18 is set in the fifth effect area 113f of the display setting area 113. FIG. By controlling the display of the image display device 63 based on the display data, the value of the number of continuous games displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 63 is changed to the number of added games or the total number of added games. is updated to the value of

After that, the value of the total added game number counter 182 is cleared to "0" (step S6806), the game number update wait flag is cleared to "0" (step S6807), and this game number update processing ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in either step S6802 or step S6803, the value of the number of continuous games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after adding the number of additional games. (processing of steps S6804 to S6807), the process for updating the number of games ends.

As described above, when at least one of the additional effect and the reduced additional effect is executed, the value of the number of continuous games displayed on the upper left part of the image display device 63 is not updated to the value after the addition of the number of additional games. The value of the number of continuous games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is the value of the number of games to be continued set in the total number-of-additional-games counter 182 when neither the additional effect nor the reduced-additional effect is executed. It is updated to the value after adding the number of games or the total number of additional games.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 110, how the additional effect is executed in the ART state ST6 will be described. FIG. 110(a) shows the execution period of the additional effect, FIG. 110(b) shows the execution period of the reduced additional effect, and FIG. 110(c) is reduced so that the last one second of the reduced additional effect is executed. 110(d) shows the start timing of the ART base effect and the ART normal effect, FIG. 110(e) shows the update timing of the continuous game number display, FIG. 110(f) shows the timing at which the production side MPU 92 receives the add-on command during ART, and FIG. 110(g) shows the timing at which the production side MPU 92 receives the game start command.

First, the case where the effect side MPU 92 receives the game start command during execution of the additional effect will be described.

At the timing of t1, which is the ART state ST6, as shown in FIG. 110(f), when the effect side MPU 92 receives the add command during ART, as shown in FIG. be started.

After that, at the timing of t2 when the additional effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. , and when the additional effect ends, as shown in FIG. 110(b), a reduced additional effect corresponding to the ended additional effect is started. As already explained, the reduced additional effect is started from the continuation of the added effect that ended this time. Also, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 110(d), the ART base effect and the ART normal effect are started based on the game start command received this time, and with the start of a new game A process of subtracting 1 from the value of the display counter 134 is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 110(e), at the timing t2, the number of continuous games displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after subtracting 1.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 110(b), at the timing of t3, the execution period of the reduced additional effect ends, and a process of adding the number of additional games in the finished reduced additional effect to the display counter 134 is executed. be done. Then, as shown in FIG. 110(e), at the timing t3, the number of continued games displayed on the upper left portion of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after the addition.

Next, a case will be described in which the effect-side MPU 92 receives the ART-in-addition command during execution of the reduction addition effect.

At the timing of t4 when the reduction addition effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 110(f), the effect side MPU 92 receives the addition command during ART. If the remaining execution period of the reduced additional effect being executed is longer than 1 second, the reduced added effect table is changed so that the last 1 second of the reduced additional effect is executed as shown in FIG. 110(c). The read value of the pointer counter PC3 of the third layer LY3 is updated. Further, as shown in FIG. 110(a), at the timing of t4, the addition effect corresponding to the ART middle addition command received this time is started.

At the timing of t5 when one second has passed from the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 110(a), at the timing t5, the additional effect is being executed. Therefore, at the timing t5, as shown in FIG. Not done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110(a), when the additional effect ends at the timing of t6, the situation becomes such that the additional effect and the reduced additional effect are not executed. A process of adding the total number of games to be added to the winnings is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 110(e), at the timing t6, the number of continued games displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after the addition.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the game start command during execution of the additional effect, the additional effect being executed is terminated, and the base effect for ART and the normal effect for ART corresponding to the received game start command, A reduced additional effect corresponding to the ended additional effect is started. Thereby, when the start lever 41 is operated to start a new game, the ART base effect and the ART normal effect corresponding to the operation can be started without delay.

A freeze period for invalidating the operation of the start lever 41 during execution of the additional performance is not set, so that the additional performance is provided to the player who wants to hurry in a situation where the end of business hours is approaching. It is possible to start the next game in the middle of . Further, after the base effect for ART and the normal effect for ART are started based on the operation of the start lever 41, the reduced additional effect is executed in parallel with the base effect for ART and the normal effect for ART, whereby the additional effect is performed. Even for a player who has skipped the performance and hastened ahead, a reduced additional performance corresponding to the additional performance can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

When switching from the add-on effect to the reduced add-on effect is performed, the reduced add-on effect table corresponding to the added effect being executed is read, and the pointer information of the add-on effect table is transferred to the read reduced add-on effect table. Inherited as pointer information. Further, the display data for the reduced additional effect is set in the fourth effect area 113e of the display setting area 113, and the pointer information of the display data for the reduced additional effect is set to the display data for the reduced additional effect. Inherited as pointer information. As a result, it is possible to start the reduced additional performance from the continuation of the added performance that has ended in the middle, and the switching from the added performance to the reduced additional performance can be made continuous and easy to understand.

When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the ART-in-addition command during execution of the reduction-in-addition effect, the addition-in effect corresponding to the ART-in-addition command received this time is started. As a result, it is possible to start a new add-on performance without causing a delay after receiving the add-on command during ART. If the remaining display period of the reduced animation is longer than 1 second at the timing of receiving the ART middle animation command, the reference target in the reduced animation effect table is set so that the last 1 second of the reduced animation animation is executed. Pointer information is updated. As a result, after specifying the number of games to be added in the reduced additional effect, the reduced additional effect can be ended quickly. To raise attention to an additional performance started later by shortening a period in which the reduced additional performance and the additional performance started after the reduced additional performance are executed in parallel within one second. can be done.

In the ART state ST6, an ART base effect, an ART normal effect, an additional effect, and a reduced additional effect are executed. There are a plurality of types of these effects, and the number of combinations of these effects is enormous. As for these effects, the ART base effect table, the ART normal effect table, the additional effect table, and the reduced additional effect table are read out on different layers LYn (the 0th layer LY0 to the third layer LY3) in the readout area 94a, Execution control of the performance is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to these performance tables. As a result, compared with the configuration in which the performance tables for all combinations of these performances are stored in advance in the performance side ROM 93, while suppressing the increase in the data capacity of the performance tables stored in advance in the performance side ROM 93, It is possible to increase the variations of combinations of these effects. In addition, when the MPU 92 on the direction side receives a game start command in a situation where the base effect for ART, the normal effect for ART and the additional effect are being executed, the base effect for ART and the normal effect for ART which are being executed are continued. However, the processing configuration for ending the added performance that was being executed and starting the reduction added performance corresponding to the added performance is simplified. Furthermore, when the production-side MPU 92 receives a new ART medium-addition command in a situation in which the ART base production, the ART normal production, and the reduced additional production are being executed in the image display device 63, In addition to the base performance, the normal performance for ART and the reduced additional performance, the processing configuration for starting the additional performance based on the reception of the ART extra performance command in parallel with these performances is simplified. In addition, when the performance-side MPU 92 receives the ART-in-addition command in a situation where the execution period of the reduced additional performance remains longer than one second, the ART base performance and the ART normal performance that are being executed are continued. , the pointer information of the reduced additional effect table can be updated to the pointer information corresponding to the last second.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, it is predicted that the player will leave the seat after 10 minutes have passed without the production side MPU 92 receiving the game start command since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal game state ST1. The difference from the first embodiment is that the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data generated and stored before the occurrence of the situation can be displayed even after the occurrence of the situation. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

In this embodiment, the 0th to 30th reproduction storage areas RD0 to RD30 of the image reproduction storage area 94c are not provided with the display enable flags of the first embodiment. As already described in the first embodiment, when the item "display past history images" is selected on the history menu screen (FIG. 97), a list of headings is displayed on the image display device 63. FIG. In this embodiment, a headline list including all headlines of the history configuration data stored in the 0th to 31st reproduction storage areas RD0 to RD31 is displayed. The player operates the upper button 64b and the lower button 64c of the effect operation device 64 to select a headline, and operates the center button 64a to confirm the selection of the headline. A history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data stored in any one of the storage areas RD0 to RD31 can be displayed on the image display device 63 for confirmation.

As already described in the first embodiment, the current setting value of the slot machine 10 is suggested by the type of the background plate image G24 included in the history image G23. In the present embodiment, it is predicted that the player will leave the seat after 10 minutes have passed without the production side MPU 92 receiving the game start command since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal game state ST1. After the occurrence of the event, if the header of the history configuration data generated before the occurrence of the situation is selected in the header list, the history image corresponding to the history configuration data is displayed in a manner in which setting values are not suggested. G23 is displayed on the image display device 63 . Specifically, regardless of the value of the background plate counter 161g in the reproduction storage area RDn (n is any integer from 0 to 31), the history image G23 including the common background plate image is displayed instead of the background plate image G24. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the setting value of the day will be guessed by referring to the type of the background plate image G24 of the history image G23 generated based on the game history of others.

In the history image management process (FIG. 95) in the present embodiment, when the affirmative determination is made in step S5714, that is, after the start lever 41 is finally operated in the normal game state ST1, the effect side MPU 92 starts the game. If 10 minutes have passed without receiving the start command, the date and time data acquired in step S5713 is set in the leaving time counter provided in the production side RAM94. The out-of-seat time counter predicts that the player will leave the seat after 10 minutes have elapsed since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal game state ST1 without receiving the game start command by the effect-side MPU 92. This is a counter that enables the effecting side MPU 92 to grasp the date and time when the state was entered.

Next, the past history selection process executed by the effect-side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the past history selection process is executed in step S5907 of the display operation handling process (FIG. 98).

In steps S6901 to S6907, the same processes as steps S6201 to S6207 of the past history selection process (FIG. 101) in the first embodiment are executed. After that, the date and time data stored in the leaving counter in the production side RAM 94 is grasped (step S6908), and after the history configuration data corresponding to the headline selected this time is generated, the start lever 41 is finally activated in the normal game state ST1. After 10 minutes have passed without receiving the game start command from the performance side MPU 92, it is determined whether or not a situation has occurred in which the player is expected to leave the seat (step S6909). In step S6909, the date and time data ascertained in step S6908 and the date and time data corresponding to the headline selected this time are collated, and the date and time data ascertained in step S6908 is used as the history configuration data corresponding to the headline selected this time. If it is newer than the included date and time data, affirmative determination is made.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S6909, the plate adjustment flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6910). The plate adjustment flag is a flag that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the common background plate image should be displayed regardless of the value of the background plate counter 161g in the reproduction storage area RDn. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6909, the process proceeds to step S6911 without setting the plate adjustment flag to "1".

If a negative determination is made in step S6909, or if the processing of step S6910 is performed, the display data for displaying the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data selected this time on the image display device 63 is generated. Generate (step S6911). In step S6911, if the plate adjustment flag is set to "1", the background plate of the reproduction storage area RDn (n is any integer from 0 to 31) in which the history configuration data selected this time is stored. Even if the value of the counter 161g is "1" or more and any of the background plate images G24 is won, the history image G23 including the common background plate image is displayed on the image display device instead of the background plate image G24. Display data for display on 63 is generated.

After that, the display data generated in step S6911 is set in the display setting area 113 (step S6912). As a result, the history image G23 corresponding to the past history configuration data selected this time is displayed on the image display device 63 . After that, the plate adjustment flag in the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S6913), the history image display flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6914), and this past history selection process is terminated. do. As a result, the effect-side MPU 92 can recognize that the history image G23 is being displayed on the image display device 63 .

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the normal game state ST1, even after 10 minutes have passed without the production side MPU 92 receiving the game start command since the last operation of the start lever 41 and the player is expected to leave the seat. A history image G23 corresponding to history configuration data generated and stored before the situation occurred can be displayed. Since the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data generated based on the game history of another person can be displayed on the image display device 63, the history image G23 of the player himself/herself and the history image G23 of the other person can be compared. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the normal game state ST1, after 10 minutes have passed without the production-side MPU 92 receiving a game start command since the last operation of the start lever 41, and the player is expected to leave the seat, When an operation is performed to display a history image G23 corresponding to history configuration data generated before the occurrence of the situation, the background of the reproduction storage area RDn (n is any integer from 0 to 31) is displayed. A history image G23 including a common background plate image is displayed instead of the background plate image G24 regardless of the value of the plate counter 161g. Since the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data is displayed in a manner in which setting values are not suggested, it is possible to prevent setting values from being guessed with reference to the game history of others. The number of history images G23 that can be displayed on the image display device 63 can be increased.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of each embodiment described above, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually to the configurations of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination. In addition, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, and the configurations of the following other forms may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration in which the configurations of the above embodiments are combined with each other. good.

(1) The layer LYn (n is an integer from 0 to 11) from which each data table is read is specified in the read area 94a. The data table to be read may be read in the highest layer LYn. In this configuration, when sound data is set for pointer information of various data tables read to the read area 94a, sound priority data is set for the pointer information. Sound data and sound priority data are set in various areas 112a to 112c (FIG. 42(b)) of the sound output setting area 112. FIG. In the data setting process (step S1906 of the effect execution process (FIG. 47)), when sound data and sound priority data are set for the pointer information to be referenced, the effect side MPU 92 sets the sound output setting area 112 It is determined whether sound data and sound priority data have already been set in the corresponding areas 112a to 112c. When the sound data and sound priority data are not set, the sound data and sound priority data set for the pointer information to be referenced are set in the corresponding areas 112a to 112c. On the other hand, if sound data and sound priority data have already been set, whether the sound priority data set for the pointer information to be referenced is greater than the sound priority data already set (whether the priority is high or not), and if an affirmative determination is made, the sound data and sound priority data set for the pointer information to be referenced are set in the corresponding areas 112a to 112c. do. As a result, the sound data set in the corresponding areas 112a to 112c are changed to sound data with a higher priority. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made, the sound data and sound priority data are not changed. In this way, sound data with a high priority is preferentially set in the various areas 112a to 112c of the sound output setting area 112 based on the sound priority data. Even if the layer LYn (n is an integer from 0 to 11) from which the effect table is read varies, the sound data with the higher priority can be preferentially output from the speaker 62 .

In this configuration, when light emission data is set for pointer information of various data tables read out to the readout area 94a, light emission priority data is set for the pointer information. Further, light emission data and light emission priority data are set in the light emission setting area 111 (FIG. 41(a)). In the data setting process (step S1906 of the effect execution process (FIG. 47)), when the light emission data and the light emission priority data are set for the pointer information to be referenced, the effect side MPU 92 sets the light emission setting area 111 to It is determined whether or not the light emission data and the light emission priority data have already been set. If the light emission data and the light emission priority data are not set, the light emission data and the light emission priority data set for the pointer information to be referenced are set in the light emission setting area 111 . On the other hand, if the light emission data and the light emission priority data have already been set, whether or not the light emission priority data set for the pointer information to be referenced is higher than the light emission priority data already set. (whether the priority is high or not), and if an affirmative determination is made, the light emission data and light emission priority data set for the pointer information to be referenced are set in the light emission setting area 111. . As a result, the light emission data set in the light emission setting area 111 is changed to light emission data with a higher priority. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made, the light emission data and the light emission priority data are not changed. In this way, the light emission data having a high priority is preferentially set in the light emission setting area 111 based on the light emission priority data. (n is any integer from 0 to 11) can vary, light emission control of the upper lamp 61 can be executed based on high priority light emission data.

In this way, when the data table is read out, the data table to be read out is read out to the highest layer LYn that is vacant in the readout area 94a, so that the number of layers LYn in the readout area 94a can be reduced. can.

(2) A multi-use layer capable of reading a plurality of data tables at one time is provided in the effect-side RAM 94, and various effect tables are read into one multi-use layer in the game in which the second expected effect is executed. may be By switching the data table to be executed in the multiple layer, the effect to be executed can be switched. Specifically, in a game in which the second expected effect is executed and the re-variation effect is not executed, the symbol change effect table, the effective notification effect table, the left stop effect table, and the right stop effect are displayed based on the occurrence of the first opportunity. A table, a long-press notification effect table, a middle stop effect table, a first expected effect table, and a second expected effect table are read out to a plurality of layers. Then, the symbol variation effect table is set as an object to be executed. After that, the effective notification effect table is set to be executed based on the occurrence of the second opportunity, the left stop effect table is set to be executed based on the occurrence of the third opportunity, and the right stop effect table is set to be executed based on the occurrence of the fourth opportunity. A performance table and a long press notification performance table are set as objects to be executed, and a medium stop performance table and a first expected performance table are set as objects to be executed based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity. After that, a second expected effect is obtained based on the condition that both the condition that the pointer information to be referred to in the first expected effect table reaches a predetermined value and the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs are satisfied. Set the table for execution. As a result, it is possible to secure at least a predetermined period (specifically, one second) as the execution period of the first expected effect while eliminating the need for the configuration for generating the first synthetic effect table.

In addition, in the game in which the second expected effect and the re-variation effect are executed, based on the occurrence of the first opportunity, the symbol change effect table, the effective notification effect table, the left stop effect table, the right stop effect table, the long press notification effect A table, a medium stop effect table, a first expected effect table, a second expected effect table and a re-variation effect table are read out to a plurality of layers. Then, the symbol variation effect table is set as an object to be executed. After that, the effective notification effect table is set to be executed based on the occurrence of the second opportunity, the left stop effect table is set to be executed based on the occurrence of the third opportunity, and the right stop effect table is set to be executed based on the occurrence of the fourth opportunity. A performance table and a long press notification performance table are set as objects to be executed, and a medium stop performance table and a first expected performance table are set as objects to be executed based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity. After that, a second expected effect is obtained based on the condition that both the condition that the pointer information to be referred to in the first expected effect table reaches a predetermined value and the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs are satisfied. Set the table and the re-fluctuation effect table as objects to be executed. As a result, it is possible to secure at least a predetermined period (specifically, one second) as the execution period of the first expected effect while eliminating the need for the configuration for generating the second synthetic effect table.

(3) In a game in which the second expected effect is executed and the re-variation effect is not executed, if the effect data in the first expected effect table and the second expected effect table are set in the first combined effect table , part or all of the symbol variation effect table, the effective notification effect table, the left stop effect table, the right stop effect table, the long press notification effect table and the middle stop effect table are read out to a layer LYn different from the first synthetic effect table. may be configured. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a first combined effect table in which effect data for a middle stop effect table, a first expected effect table and a second expected effect table are set is generated. In this configuration, when the first opportunity occurs, the normal base performance table is read to the 0th layer LY0, the symbol variation performance table is read to the first layer LY1, and the effective notification performance table is read when the second opportunity occurs. Read out to the second layer LY2, read out the left stop effect table to the third layer LY3 when the third trigger occurs, read out the right stop effect table to the fourth layer LY4 when the fourth trigger occurs, and notify long press. The performance table is read to the fifth layer LY5, and the first composite performance table is read when the fifth opportunity occurs. As a result, the data amount of the performance data set in the first synthetic performance table is reduced in a configuration in which the execution period of the first expected performance is secured over at least a predetermined time (specifically, one second). can be done. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the first synthesis table stored in advance in the synthesis table storage area 93n (FIG. 41(a)) of the effect-side ROM 93, and to generate the first synthesis effect table. processing load can be reduced.

(4) In a game in which the second expected effect and the re-varying effect are executed, the effect data in the first expected effect table, the second expected effect table and the re-fluctuating effect table are set in the second synthetic effect table. If there is, part or all of the symbol variation effect table, the effective notification effect table, the left stop effect table, the right stop effect table, the long press notification effect table and the middle stop effect table are in the layer LYn different from the second synthetic effect table. It is good also as a structure read. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a second combined effect table in which effect data for the intermediate stop effect table, the first expected effect table, the second expected effect table and the re-fluctuation effect table are set is generated. In this configuration, when the first opportunity occurs, the normal base performance table is read to the 0th layer LY0, the symbol variation performance table is read to the first layer LY1, and the effective notification performance table is read when the second opportunity occurs. Read out to the second layer LY2, read out the left stop effect table to the third layer LY3 when the third trigger occurs, read out the right stop effect table to the fourth layer LY4 when the fourth trigger occurs, and notify long press. The performance table is read to the fifth layer LY5, and the second composite performance table is read when the fifth opportunity occurs. As a result, the data amount of the performance data set in the second synthetic performance table is reduced in a configuration in which the execution period of the first expected performance is secured for at least a predetermined time (specifically, one second). can be done. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the data volume of the second synthesis table stored in advance in the synthesis table storage area 93n (FIG. 41(a)) of the effect-side ROM 93, and to generate the second synthesis effect table. processing load can be reduced.

(5) In a game in which the second expected effect is executed and the re-variation effect is not executed, the effect-side MPU 92 satisfies both the condition that the middle stop effect ends and the condition that the effect-side MPU 92 receives the game start command. A configuration may be adopted in which various effects being executed are terminated and the next game effect is started based on the fulfilled state. In this configuration, an OFF operation command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 in the stop operation corresponding process (FIG. 25) (step S717), and it is determined that the second expected effect flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". If so (step S718: YES), the main MPU 72 proceeds to step S720 without executing the freeze setting process for the second expected effect (step S719), clears the second expected effect flag to "0" ( Step S720), the stop operation handling process is terminated. By clearing the second expected effect flag to "0", an affirmative determination is made in step S312 of the normal process (FIG. 13). Also, since the freeze setting process for the second expected effect is not executed, the affirmative determination is also made in step S314 of the normal process (FIG. 13). As a result, a game start command is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 based on the operation of the start lever 41 even during execution of the middle stop effect, the first expected effect or the second expected effect. becomes. After the master side MPU 72 transmits the OFF operation command to the effect side MPU 92, it becomes possible to transmit the game start command based on the operation of the start lever 41. Even if the start lever 41 is operated before the switch 44 is turned off, the game start command is not transmitted based on the operation of the start lever 41 .

Even if only one of the condition that the middle stop effect ends and the condition that the effect side MPU 92 receives the game start command is satisfied, both of these two conditions are satisfied. The processing for terminating the production is not executed until it becomes. Specifically, when the game start command is received during execution of the middle stop effect, the effect side MPU 92 ends the effect based on the end of the execution period (specifically, one second) of the middle stop effect. process. Also, when a game start command is received during the execution of the first expected effect or the second expected effect, the effect side MPU 92 executes processing for ending the effect based on the reception of the game start command. In the processing for ending the effect, the 0th layer LY0 and the first layer LY1 in the reading area 94a are cleared. As a result, the sound output control of the speaker 62 and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61 in the first expected effect or the second expected effect that have been executed are terminated. Also, the effect-side MPU 92 clears the background area 113a and the first to fifth effect areas 113b to 113f in the display setting area 113. FIG. A background image G4, a left pattern image G5, a right pattern image G6, a middle pattern image G7, and an expected effect image (bubble image G8, water flow image G9, swirl image G10, fish school image G11, or giant character image G12) are displayed on the image display device 63. By clearing the display data for displaying , these images are no longer displayed on the image display device 63, and the effect of the game being executed is terminated.

Thereafter, the effect-side MPU 92 starts the effect of the next game based on the reception of the game start command. Specifically, when the second expected effect is not executed in the next game, based on the reception of the game start command, the normal base effect table is read out to the 0th layer LY0 in the readout area 94a, The symbol variation effect table is read out to the first layer LY1. Further, when the second expected effect is executed in the next game and the re-variation effect is not executed, the first synthetic effect table is generated based on the reception of the game start command, and the The normal base effect table is read to the 0th layer LY0, and the generated first composite effect table is read to the first layer LY1. Furthermore, when the second expected effect and the re-varying effect are executed in the next game, the second synthetic effect table is generated based on the reception of the game start command, and the 0th The normal base effect table is read to the layer LY0, and the generated second synthetic effect table is read to the first layer LY1.

In this way, in the game in which the second expected effect is executed and the re-variation effect is not executed, both the condition that the intermediate stop effect ends and the condition that the effect side MPU 92 receives the game start command are satisfied. By terminating the various effects being executed and starting the next game effect, the player who is in a hurry until the execution period of the second expected effect ends. It is possible to avoid a situation where the next game cannot be started.

(6) In the above-described first embodiment, when the moving image display of the additional main effect is performed to the end without ending in the middle, instead of the high-speed display of the gauge increase display, the low-speed display of the gauge increase display is performed. Alternatively, when the moving image display of the additional main effect ends in the middle, instead of the low speed display of the gauge increase display, the high speed display of the gauge increase display may be performed. Specifically, in step S3405 of the add-on effect processing (FIG. 65), when the number of add-on games set in the add-on game counter 135 in step S3401 is "50", the low speed first add-on sub effect table is displayed. When the number of add-on games set in the add-on game number counter 135 in step S3401 is "100", the low speed second add-on sub effect table is specified. After that, in step S3406, it is determined whether or not the continuous addition flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S3406, the additional sub effect table for low-speed display specified in step S3405 is read out to the third layer LY3 of the readout area 94a (step S3407). By controlling the execution of effects according to the additional sub-effect table for low speed display, the additional sub-effect including low speed gauge increase display is executed on the image display device 63 .

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3406, table rewrite processing is executed (step S3408). In the table rewriting process, similarly to the first embodiment, the gauge flashing display and the gauge increase display are performed in a mode corresponding to the total number of additional games for which the additional winning occurred consecutively prior to the current additional winning. The address information of the display data set for each pointer information of the additional sub effect table for low speed display is rewritten as follows. Thereafter, the additional sub effect table for low-speed display after execution of the table rewriting process (step S3408) is read out to the third layer LY3 of the readout area 94a (step S3409). By performing execution control of the performance according to the rewritten additional sub-performance table for low speed display, the additional sub-performance including the low speed gauge increase display is executed on the image display device 63 .

In the processing for updating the additional sub-effect table executed in step S3203 of the game start processing (FIG. 63(b)) during ART, the low-speed display readout to the third layer LY3 of the readout area 94a is performed. Instead of the add-on sub effect table, the corresponding add-on sub effect table for high-speed display is read out to the third layer LY3. Specifically, when the low speed first addition sub effect table is read in the third layer LY3, the high speed first addition sub effect table is read out, and the low speed second addition sub effect table is read in the third layer LY3. If read, the high-speed second addition sub-effect table is read. In the update processing of the addition sub effect table (step S3203), the value of the pointer counter PC4 in the third layer LY3 is inherited without being cleared. In addition, in the process of updating the additional sub-effect table (step S3203), the fifth effect area 113f of the display setting area 113 in which the display data for the additional sub-effect is set is not cleared. Therefore, the continuation of the blinking gauge display is displayed in the gauge display section G19a. In the update processing of the add-on sub effect table (step S3203), if the data of the add-on sub effect table for low-speed display read out to the fourth layer LY4 has been rewritten, the add-on sub effect table for low-speed display is executed. The rewritten data set for each pointer information in the table is set for the corresponding pointer information in the superimposition sub effect table for high-speed display read out to the fourth layer LY4. As a result, in a situation where additional winnings are continuously occurring in a state where the additional sub-effect is not interrupted, the total number of games of additional winnings that occurred consecutively before the occurrence of this additional winning will be reduced. Gauge flashing display and gauge increase display in the additional sub effect can be executed in a corresponding manner.

In this way, when the moving image display of the additional main effect ends in the middle, the high-speed display of the gauge increase display is performed, so that the moving image display of the added main effect is ended in the middle and the next game is started. It is possible to allow the player who selects to confirm the gauge increase display in a short time. In addition, the base effect for ART and the normal effect for ART in the game started by operating the start lever 41 performed during the video display of the additional main effect and the additional sub effect in the game immediately before the current game are performed in parallel. can shorten the execution period. When the moving image display of the additional main effect is performed to the end without ending in the middle, the low-speed display of the gauge increase display is performed, so that the moving image display of the added main effect is completed without ending in the middle. It is possible to make it possible for the player who sees it to carefully check the gauge increase display.

(7) In the above-described first embodiment, the additional main effect is executed in a pattern in which an additional game number is added when an additional winning occurs in the ART state ST6, and an additional winning does not occur in the ART state ST6. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which an additional main effect is executed in a pattern in which an additional number of games does not occur with a predetermined probability. In step S1202 of the add-on process (FIG. 31), as already described in the first embodiment, the lottery process for the current combination (FIG. 14) is "4" to "8", "15", "16". ” has been set. When the affirmative determination is made in step S1202, as already described in the first embodiment, the additional lottery process (step S1203) results in an additional winning (step S1204: YES), and the game state is the ART state ST6. (step S1205: YES), the addition setting process during ART is executed (step S1206), and the addition flag during ART in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1207).

On the other hand, in this configuration, when a negative determination is made in step S1202, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute a pattern of adding effects in which the number of games is not increased. The winning probability in the lottery is 1/10. If the lottery is won and the game state is the ART state ST6, the false ART extra flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". The false ART extra flag is a flag that allows the main side MPU 72 to specify that the game is an execution target game for an extra effect with a pattern in which no extra game is generated in the ART state ST6.

In the ART state process (FIG. 33), as already described in the first embodiment, when the ART middle addition flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1401: YES), the effect side MPU 92 In response, an ART medium addition command is transmitted (step S1402). When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the add-on command during ART, as in the first embodiment, the effect-side MPU 92 executes the add-on main effect and the add-on sub effect of the pattern in which the number of games is increased. In the moving image display in the addition main effect of the pattern in which the number of games is increased, an image indicating that the number of games is increased is displayed at the end of the moving image displayed on the image display device 63 . The number of additional games is not reported in the moving image display of the additional main effect, but is reported in the gauge increase display of the additional sub effect.

In the ART state processing (FIG. 33) in this configuration, when the false ART add-on flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", a false ART add-on command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92. FIG. When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the add-on command during the false ART, it executes the add-on main effect and the add-on sub effect of a pattern in which the number of games is not increased. In the moving image display in the addition main effect of the pattern in which the number of games is not increased, an image indicating that the number of games is not increased is displayed at the end of the moving image displayed on the image display device 63 . In the additional sub effect, only the flashing gauge display is executed, and the increasing gauge display is not executed.

In this way, by adopting a configuration in which an effect indicating whether or not an additional number of games occurs in the additional main effect is performed, even if the moving image display of the additional main effect is started, the number of games will be displayed at the end of the moving image display. By making it unclear whether or not the number of games has been increased until an image indicating that the addition has occurred is displayed, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the additional main effect. In addition, the number of additional games is not notified in the additional main effect, but is notified in the additional sub effect gauge increase display, so that the gauge increase display is performed even when the additional main effect video display is executed to the end. By making the number of additional games unknown until the game ends, attention can be paid to the gauge increase display.

(8) When the effect-side MPU 92 receives a game start command in which information indicating that a bonus has been won is set, the accessory error state and the correction operation standby state are cancelled, and the compensation operation of the accessory 75 is performed. may be configured. Receipt of a game start command in which information indicating that a bonus win has occurred is an event that always occurs before transition to the bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4), so that the bonus win has occurred. When the effect-side MPU 92 receives a game start command in which information indicating is set, the accessory error state and the correction operation standby state are canceled and the compensation operation of the accessory 75 is performed. It is possible to increase the possibility that the role object error state and the correction action waiting state are canceled at the start of the game that is executed for the first time. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility of executing the performance of the character action from the first game.

(9) The values of the correction execution counter 141 and the standby execution counter 142 may be cleared to "0" when the state in which no correction operation is performed continues for a predetermined period of time. Specifically, in the normal game state ST1, it is predicted that the player will leave the seat after 10 minutes have passed without the effect-side MPU 92 receiving the game start command since the last operation of the start lever 41. In this case, the setting of the history storage mode may be canceled and the values of the correction execution counter 141 and the standby execution counter 142 may be cleared to "0". As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the correction action waiting state or the accessory error state will occur immediately after the player changes.

(10) A structure may be adopted in which the character action effect is executed from the beginning of the bonus start effect. As already explained in the first embodiment, when the production-side MPU 92 receives a prize-winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus prize has been established is in the accessory error state or the correction operation standby state, , the role product error state or the correction operation standby state is canceled and the correction operation of the role product 75 is executed. As already explained in the first embodiment, the maximum time required for the correcting action of the character object 75 is 1.4 seconds, and the correcting action ends before the start of the bonus start effect. . For this reason, even when the bonus prize is established, even if it is in the accessory error state or the correction operation standby state, it is possible to start the bonus start effect while the spherical effect part 77b stays at the origin. It is possible to execute the character action performance from the beginning of the bonus start performance. When the performance-side MPU 92 receives the bonus start command, the role product error state or the correction operation standby state is canceled and the correction operation of the role product 75 is started, the role product operation production is started from the beginning of the bonus start production. can no longer be executed. On the other hand, when the performance-side MPU 92 receives a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus prize has been established is set, the role product error state or the correction operation standby state is canceled and the role product 75 is corrected. By being configured to execute an action, it is possible to start the performance of the role action from the beginning of the bonus start presentation. A structure in which the performance-side MPU 92 receives a game start command in which information indicating the occurrence of a bonus winning is set, cancels the role product error state or the correction operation standby state, and executes the compensation performance of the role product 75. Then, although the correcting action can be finished before the start of the bonus start effect, the accessory error state or the correcting action standby state is canceled even if the bonus notification effect indicating that the bonus has been won is not performed. Since the correcting action of the accessory 75 is executed as a result, the player will be aware of the occurrence of the bonus winning based on the correcting action being executed. On the other hand, when the performance-side MPU 92 receives a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus prize has been established is set, the role product error state or the correction operation standby state is canceled and the role product 75 is corrected. Since the configuration is such that the action is executed, the role product is displayed from the beginning of the bonus start performance while preventing the player from grasping the occurrence of the bonus winning based on the performance of the correcting action of the role product 75.例文帳に追加Action production can be started.

(11) A structure in which a role object light emitter is built in the spherical effect part 77b, and when the role object action effect is executed, the role object light emitter flashes and emits light in a manner that can be visually recognized from the outside. good. Specifically, inside the spherical effect portion 77b of the role object 75, an LED is installed as a role object light emitter. The role product 75 has a light emission control board for controlling light emission of the role product light emitter. The light emission control board is electrically connected to the effect control device 90, and performs light emission control of the character object light emitter based on the signal received from the effect side MPU92. The spherical effect portion 77b is transparent or translucent, and all or part of the light emitted from the role object light emitter provided inside the spherical effect portion 77b is transmitted through the spherical effect portion 77b. becomes visible from the outside of the In this configuration, the performance-side ROM 93 stores a role product action performance table. In the role product action rendering table, a plurality of numerical information are arranged in serial numbers as pointer information. and light emission data for performing light emission control of the role object light emitter in accordance with the operation of the spherical effect section 77b. When it is time to start the performance of the performance, the performance-side MPU 92 reads out the performance-side performance table from the performance-side ROM 93 to the eleventh layer LY11 of the readout area 94a.

In the role product action rendering table, as light emission data, first light emission data for turning on the role product light emitters and second light emission data for turning off the role product light emitters are set. When the first light emission data is set in the reference target pointer information in the role product operation production table, the effect side MPU 92 transmits the first light emission data to the light emission control board, and sets the reference target pointer information to the light emission control board. When the second light emission data is set, the second light emission data is transmitted to the light emission control board. The light emission control board turns on the character object light emitter when receiving the first light emission data, and turns off the character object light emitter when receiving the second light emission data.

The performance side MPU 92 executes the drive control of the role product 75 and the light emission control of the role product light emitter in accordance with the role product operation presentation table read out to the eleventh layer LY11, so that the role product light emitter flashes and emits a spherical shape. The effect part 77b can perform a character action effect that moves up and down. As a result, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the performance of the performance of the action of the accessory, and improve the interest of the game.

(12) In place of the configuration in which the performance of the performance of the performance of the role product is performed according to the performance of the performance of the performance of the performance of the performance of the performance of the role product 75, the driving data of the performance of the role product 75 and the sound data for the performance of the performance of the performance of the performance of the performance of the performance of the performance of the performance of the performance are set. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the role product motion presentation is executed in accordance with the stored role product motion presentation table. In the role product action rendering table, a plurality of numerical information are arranged in serial numbers as pointer information. , and sound data for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62 in accordance with the operation of the spherical effect portion 77b. By adopting a configuration in which the sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed in accordance with the vertical movement of the spherical effect portion 77b in the character action effect, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

When it is time to start the performance of the performance, the performance-side MPU 92 reads out the performance-side performance table from the performance-side ROM 93 to the eleventh layer LY11 of the readout area 94a. If sound data for character product action effect is set for the pointer information to be referenced in the read character product action effect table, the effect-side MPU 92 stores the sound data in the sound output setting area 112. It is set in the effect area 112b (FIG. 42(b)). The sound data set in the character object action rendering table read out on the eleventh layer LY11 are set in various rendering tables read out on the first layer LY1 to the eighth layer LY8 of the readout area 94a. It is set in the effect area 112b of the sound output setting area 112 with priority over the sound data. By giving priority to the sound output control for the performance of the performance of the role product over the sound output control for other performances, the performance of the performance of the performance of the performance of the performance with a high degree of attention can be executed in a manner without lack of sound.

(13) Instead of performing a role product action effect in all games in the bonus state, a role product action lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute a role product action effect in each game in the bonus state, A configuration may be adopted in which the role product action presentation is executed in the game in which the role product action presentation is won in the role product action lottery. When a game start command is received from the main side MPU 72 in the bonus state, the effect side MPU 92 performs a lottery for the action of the accessory. In the role product action lottery, first, the role product action lottery table is read from the performance-side ROM 93 . In the role action lottery table, each result is set so that the probability of winning the action effect is 1/2 and the probability of not winning the action effect is 1/2. Numerical ranges are set for After that, the numerical information of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the production side RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information is collated with the read accessory action lottery table. Then, it is determined that the result of setting the numerical range including the numerical value information read from the random number counter (the result of winning the performance of the role product action or the result of not winning the performance of the role product action) is winning. When winning the role product action performance in the role product motion lottery, the performance side MPU 92 reads the performance table in which the address information of the drive table of the role product 75 is set to the reading area 94a. Thus, in the bonus state, the role product action presentation can be executed only in the game in which the player has won the role product action presentation.

(14) There is a bonus performance that indicates to the player that a bonus win has occurred or that a bonus win has been established, and either the bonus win has occurred or the bonus win has been established. A configuration may be adopted in which a bonus performance is executed. The bonus character effect is an effect in which the spherical effect portion 77b of the character object 75 moves up and down, like the character action effect in the first embodiment. As already described in the first embodiment, in the normal game state ST1, in a game in which a bonus win has occurred in the role lottery process (FIG. 14), the notification lottery process (effect content determination process (FIG. 51) step S2311) is executed. When the player wins the bonus notification performance in the notification lottery process, the bonus notification performance is executed in the current game in which the bonus winning occurs. On the other hand, when the re-variation performance is won in the notification lottery process, the re-variation performance is executed in the game started after 5 games are completed without the bonus award being established. The performance-side ROM 93 in this configuration stores a bonus performance drive table for executing the bonus performance. When the bonus notification effect is won in the game in which the bonus is won, the effect-side MPU 92, similarly to the first embodiment, displays the 5th trigger in the readout area 94a based on the occurrence of the 5th trigger in the game. A medium stop effect table is read out on the sixth layer LY6, a first expected effect table is read out on the seventh layer LY7, and a bonus notification effect table is read out on the eighth layer LY8. In this configuration, after reading the bonus notification effect table to the eighth layer LY8, it is determined whether or not the drive table for the role object 75 is ready to be read to the eleventh layer LY11. Specifically, a role product error flag, a correction operation standby flag, a role product initialization flag, a correction operation flag, a correction operation completion flag, a recovery operation flag, and a role product in operation flag in the role product management area 94d is not set to "1", it is determined to be in a readable state. When it is determined that it is in a readable state, the character product effect execution flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1". The character performance execution flag is a flag that enables the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the bonus character performance has been executed. Address information of the bonus accessory driving table is set in the bonus notification effect table. In the current game in which the bonus notification effect table is read out on the eighth layer LY8, if the bonus prize is not established, the eleventh layer LY11 is displayed based on the address information set in the bonus notification effect table. A bonus character drive table is read. The effect-side MPU 92 executes a bonus character product effect by executing drive control of the character product 75 according to the bonus character product driving table. In this way, when the bonus character effect is executed in the bonus notification effect, the character product effect execution flag is cleared to "0" when the effect side MPU 92 receives the bonus start command from the main side MPU 72 .

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not in a readable state after reading the bonus notification effect table to the eighth layer LY8, the bonus character product driving table is read to the eleventh layer LY11 even if the bonus notification effect table is read. Processing will be canceled. Therefore, when it is determined that the reading is not possible, the production side MPU 92 does not set the character product production execution flag in the production side RAM 94 to "1". This enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp that the bonus accessory effect is not being executed.

Also, after reading the bonus notification effect table in the eighth layer LY8 and setting the character object effect execution flag to "1", the effect side MPU 92 receives the winning result command in which the information indicating that the bonus winning has been established is set. If so, the process of canceling the bonus notification effect is executed in the same manner as in step S2803 of the winning result handling process (FIG. 56(a)) in the first embodiment. In the process of canceling the bonus notification effect, the eighth layer LY8 from which the bonus notification effect table is read in the reading area 94a is cleared, and the bonus notification effect flag 122 is cleared to "0". As a result, the bonus notification effect is canceled. Further, in this configuration, the performance execution flag in the performance-side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" in the process of canceling the bonus notification performance. Thus, when the bonus character effect is also canceled due to the cancellation of the bonus notification effect, the character product effect execution flag is cleared to "0". As a result, the performance-side MPU 92 can grasp that the bonus performance is not being executed.

When the re-variation effect is won in the game in which the bonus win is generated, and the game to be executed for the re-variation effect is started after 5 games have been completed without the bonus winning being established, the same as in the first embodiment. , the effect-side MPU 92 generates a second composite effect table based on the reception of the game start command, reads the normal base effect table to the 0th layer LY0 of the readout area 94a, and reads out the normal base effect table to the first layer LY1. Read out the second synthetic effect table. In this configuration, after reading the second synthetic effect table to the first layer LY1, it is determined whether or not the driving table of the role object 75 is ready to be read to the eleventh layer LY11. Specifically, a role product error flag, a correction operation standby flag, a role product initialization flag, a correction operation flag, a correction operation completion flag, a recovery operation flag, and a role product in operation flag in the role product management area 94d is not set to "1", it is determined to be in a readable state. When it is determined that it is in a readable state, the character product effect execution flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1". As already explained, the performance execution flag is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the bonus performance is executed. Address information of the bonus accessory driving table is set in the effect data of the re-variable effect table set in the second synthetic effect table. The bonus character product driving table read in the re-variation effect is the same as the bonus character product driving table read in the above-described bonus notification effect. In the current game in which the second synthetic effect table is read out to the first layer LY1, if the bonus prize is not established, the eleventh layer is displayed based on the address information set in the second synthetic effect table. A bonus character product driving table is read in LY11. The effect-side MPU 92 executes a bonus character effect in a re-variation effect by executing drive control of the character object 75 according to the bonus character object driving table. When the bonus accessory effect is executed in the re-variation effect, the role product effect execution flag in the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" when the effect side MPU 92 receives the bonus start command from the main side MPU 72 .

On the other hand, if it is determined that the second synthesized effect table is not in a readable state after being read out to the first layer LY1, even if the second synthesized effect table has been read out to the first layer LY1, The process of reading the bonus accessory driving table is canceled. For this reason, when it is determined that it is not in a readable state, the character product effect execution flag in the effect side RAM 94 is not set to "1". This enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp that the bonus accessory effect is not being executed.

In addition, after reading the second composite effect table to the first layer LY1 and setting the character object effect execution flag to "1", the effect side MPU 92 issues a prize winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus prize has been established is set. If received, the re-variation effect stop processing is executed in the same manner as in step S2805 of the winning result handling processing (FIG. 56(a)) in the first embodiment. In the re-variation effect stop processing, the effect data for the re-variation effect is deleted from the effect data set in the second synthetic effect table read out to the first layer LY1 of the read-out area 94a. As a result, the re-variation effect is canceled and the bonus character product effect is cancelled. In addition, in this configuration, the performance-side RAM 94 clears the performance-executing-flag to "0" in the process of canceling the re-variation performance. In this way, in the game targeted for execution of the re-fluctuation effect, when the bonus award corresponding to the bonus winning carried over is established and the re-variation effect is canceled and the bonus accessory effect is canceled, the role The performance execution flag is cleared to "0". As a result, the performance-side MPU 92 can grasp that the bonus performance is not being executed.

Next, a description will be given of the accessory setting process at the time of winning a bonus, which is executed by the effect-side MPU 92 in this configuration. As in the first embodiment, the character item setting process at the time of bonus winning is performed based on the fact that the effect-side MPU 92 receives a winning result command in which information indicating that the bonus winning has been established is set. This is executed in step S2806 of the result handling process (FIG. 56(a)).

In the bonus award setting process, first, the same processes as steps S4701 to S4705 of the bonus award setting process (FIG. 78) in the first embodiment are executed. Specifically, when the role product error flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4701: YES), the error cancellation flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1". (Step S4702). As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S4102 of the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72), and the process (steps S4104 to S4106 and steps S4109 to S4111) for canceling the accessory error state is performed. will be executed.

If the role product error flag is not set to "1" (step S4701: NO), it is determined whether or not the correction operation standby flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4703). When the correction action standby flag is set to "1" (step S4703: YES), the standby release flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4704). As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S4102 of the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72), and the process (steps S4104 to S4108) for canceling the correction operation waiting state is executed. . Thereafter, the value of the standby execution counter 142 in the role product management area 94d is cleared to "0" (step S4705). As a result, the number of times set in the correction operation standby state counted by the standby execution counter 142 is cleared.

When the process of step S4702 is performed or when the process of step S4705 is performed, in this configuration, "1" is set to the bonus winning flag provided in the character product management area 94d. The bonus winning time flag is a flag that allows the effect side MPU 92 to grasp whether or not the correcting action of the accessory 75 is triggered by the establishment of the bonus winning. The bonus winning flag is set by the first clearing process of the role product management information (step S4107 of the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72)) and the second clearing process of the role product management information (correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72). ) is not cleared to "0" in step S4110). The production side MPU 92 determines that the compensation operation of the accessory 75 is a trigger of the establishment of the bonus award based on the fact that the compensation operation flag is set to "1" and the bonus award flag is set to "1". Grasp that it was started as In the bonus prize setting process, after setting the bonus prize flag to "1", correction is performed in the same manner as in step S4706 of the bonus prize setting process (FIG. 78) in the first embodiment. The operation start setting process (FIG. 72) is executed, and the role setting process at the time of this bonus winning ends.

In the bonus prize setting process, if neither the role error flag nor the correction operation standby flag is set to "1" (step S4701: NO, step S4703: NO), the above-described first embodiment The same processing as steps S4707 to S4709 of the accessory setting processing (FIG. 78) at the time of bonus winning is executed. Specifically, the eleventh layer LY11 in the reading area 94a is cleared (step S4707). As a result, even if the drive table of the role product 75 has been read to the eleventh layer LY11, the drive data is not output to the role product driving unit 78. FIG. Specifically, when the correcting operation is being executed, the correcting operation ends in the middle.

After that, the third clearing process of the role product management information is executed (step S4708). In the third clearing process of the role product management information (step S4708), various counters 141 to 144 excluding the origin displacement flag and various flags (specifically, the role product initialization flag, initialization End flag, accessory error flag, error cancellation flag, correction operation standby flag, standby cancellation flag, correction operation flag, correction operation completion flag, accessory operation flag, first origin standby flag, second origin standby flag and return operation flag) are cleared to "0". As a result, the management information of the accessory 75 except for the origin displacement flag information is cleared.

After that, it is determined whether or not the spherical effect portion 77b of the accessory 75 is staying at the origin (step S4709). In this configuration, when the spherical effect part 77b stays at the origin (step S4709: YES), the bonus character effect start setting process is executed, and the bonus character setting process at the time of winning the bonus is ended. In the start setting process of the bonus performance, it is first determined whether or not the performance execution flag in the performance-side RAM 94 is set to "1". If "1" is set in the performance execution flag, it means that the bonus performance has already been executed, so the processing for setting the performance at the time of winning the bonus is directly terminated. In this way, when the bonus character effect has already been executed before the bonus start effect is executed, the bonus character effect is not executed. On the other hand, if the performance execution flag is not set to "1", it means that the bonus performance is not yet executed. 11th layer LY11, sets "1" to the character product in-operation flag in the character product management area 94d, and ends this bonus character effect start setting process. The effect-side MPU 92 executes a bonus character effect by executing drive control of the character object 75 according to the read bonus character object driving table. In this way, the winning result command indicating that the bonus prize has been won is received in a state in which the bonus performance is not yet executed, and the spherical performance unit 77b is not in the performance error state and the correction operation waiting state, and the spherical performance unit 77b is at the origin. If the player is staying, the bonus character presentation is started.

On the other hand, after executing the third clearing process of the role product management information in step S708, if it is determined that the spherical effect section 77b is not staying at the origin (step S4709: NO), the role product management area 94d is displayed. "1" is set to the flag at the time of bonus winning in . After that, the same processes as steps S4710 and S4711 of the role setting process (FIG. 78) at the time of bonus winning in the first embodiment are executed. Specifically, readout processing for correction operation is executed (step S4710). In step S4710, of the initial position drive table and the displacement position drive table already described in the first embodiment, the drive table corresponding to the current origin is read out from the effect-side ROM 93 to the readout area 94a. The performance-side MPU 92 drives and controls the accessory 75 according to the initial position drive table or the displacement position drive table read out to the eleventh layer LY11, so that the spherical performance portion 77b moves to the origin (initial position or displacement position). ).

After that, "1" is set to the correcting operation flag in the role management area 94d (step S4711), and the process of setting the role at the time of winning the bonus is completed. In this way, the effect-side MPU 92 receives the prize winning result command indicating that the bonus prize has been won in a state in which the bonus character effect has not yet been executed, and the spherical effect part is not in the error state or the correction operation standby state. When 77b is not staying at the origin, the correcting action of the accessory 75 is executed in such a manner that the effecting side MPU 92 can recognize that the correcting action is started when the bonus prize is established. .

Next, a description will be given of the accessory flag setting process executed by the effect-side MPU 92 in this configuration. As in the first embodiment, the role item flag setting process is executed in step S3508 of the flag clearing process (FIG. 66(a)).

In the role product flag setting process, first, the same processes as steps S4601 to S4604 of the role product flag setting process (FIG. 77) in the first embodiment are executed. Specifically, when the character product initialization flag in the character product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4601: YES), the initialization operation of the character product 75 based on the character product initialization table is executed. Since this means that the process has ended, the initialization end flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4602), and the main role product flag setting process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S4601, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the correction operation flag in the role product management area 94d (step S4603). If the correcting action in progress flag is set to "1" (step S4603: YES), it means that the correcting action of the accessory 75 based on the correcting action driving table has ended, so the correcting action in progress flag is set. is cleared to "0" (step S4604).

In this configuration, after the correction operation flag is cleared to "0" in step S4604, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1". If the bonus winning time flag is set to "1", it means that the correcting operation of the accessory 75 that was started when the bonus winning was established has ended. Determine whether "1" is set. Then, when "1" is not set to the performance execution flag for the performance, the same processing as the start setting processing for the bonus performance is executed. As a result, the bonus character product driving table is read out to the eleventh layer LY11, and the production side MPU 92 executes the driving control of the character product 75 according to the read bonus character product driving table. is executed. In this way, when the correction operation of the role product 75 is started with the establishment of the bonus winning in a state in which the bonus performance is not yet executed, the bonus is obtained based on the completion of the correction operation. The role performance begins.

On the other hand, even if it is determined that the bonus winning flag in the character product management area 94d is set to "1" after the correcting operation flag is cleared to "0" in step S4604, the performance side RAM 94 If "1" is set in the performance execution flag in , it means that the bonus performance has already been executed. End the object flag setting process. In this way, when the compensation action of the role object 75 is started when the bonus award is established after the bonus role production is executed, the bonus role production is started even if the correction operation is finished. not. As a result, it is possible to prevent double execution of the bonus accessory presentation before the bonus start presentation.

In the role item flag setting process, after the correction operation flag is cleared to "0" in step S4604, if the bonus winning flag in the production side RAM 94 is not set to "1", the above-described first implementation is performed. Similarly to step S4605 of the role product flag setting process (FIG. 77) in the form, the correction operation completion flag in the role product management area 94d is set to "1", and this role product flag setting process is terminated.

In the role object flag setting process, if it is determined in step S4603 that the correction operation flag is not set to "1", step S4606 of the role object flag setting process (FIG. 77) in the first embodiment is performed. to execute the same processing as in step S4608.

As described above, when the bonus notification effect is executed in the readable state, the bonus function effect is executed in the bonus notification effect, and when the re-variation effect is executed in the readable state, the re- In the configuration in which the bonus character production is executed in the variable production, when the bonus prize is established without the bonus character production being executed, the bonus prize production is executed with the establishment of the bonus prize as a trigger. be. Further, when the bonus prize is won without execution of the bonus performance, if the spherical performance part 77b does not stay at the origin, the correction operation of the performance 75 is executed, and the correction operation ends. A bonus character effect is started based on what has been done. As a result, it is possible to show the player that the bonus performance has been executed at the timing before the bonus start performance is executed and that the bonus prize has been won or that the bonus winning has been established. Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Based on the fact that the production-side MPU 92 receives a prize-winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus prize has been established is set, the role product error state or the correction operation standby state is canceled, and the correction operation of the role product 75 is executed. be done. A configuration in which the performance-side MPU 92 receives a game start command in which information indicating that a bonus has been won is set, cancels the role product error state or the correction operation standby state, and executes the compensation operation of the role product 75. As a result, even if the bonus notification effect is not won in the game in which the bonus is won, the role product error state or the correction operation standby state is canceled and the correction operation of the role product 75 is performed, so the correction operation is performed. The player will grasp the occurrence of the bonus winning based on the fact that the bonus is won. On the other hand, when the performance-side MPU 92 receives a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus prize has been established is set, the role product error state or the correction operation standby state is canceled and the role product 75 is corrected. With the configuration for executing the action, while preventing the player from recognizing the occurrence of the bonus winning based on the correction action of the accessory 75, before the transition to the bonus state is made. It is possible to secure an opportunity to cancel the accessory error state or the correction operation standby state at the timing of .

Further, in the above configuration (14), when the performance-side MPU 92 receives a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus winning has been established is performed, correction operation of the accessory 75 is executed. The time required for the action is measured, and depending on the length of time required for the correction action, the operation time of the spherical effect part 77b is shortened compared to when the bonus character effect is executed and the bonus character effect is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which there are cases where the shortened bonus character effect is executed and cases where the bonus character effect is not executed. Specifically, in the performance-side ROM 93, a bonus performance driving table in which driving data (first driving data and second driving data) of the performance 75 for executing the bonus performance is set, and a shortened A shortened bonus accessory driving table in which the driving data (first driving data and second driving data) of the accessory 75 for executing the bonus accessory performance is set is stored. In the bonus performance, the spherical performance section 77b moves up and down for 1.5 seconds, and in the shortened bonus performance, the spherical performance section 77b moves up and down for 1 second.

When "1" is set to the bonus winning time flag in the production side RAM 94 in the bonus award setting process (step S2806 of the winning result correspondence process (FIG. 56)), the role provided in the production side RAM 94 Numerical information corresponding to 1.5 seconds is set in the performance timer counter. The value of the timer counter for performance is decremented by 1 and updated each time the performance side MPU 92 executes the performance management process (FIG. 68) at a 4 millisecond cycle. The effect-side MPU 92 sets the bonus winning flag in the effect-side RAM 94 to "1" in the character product drive control process (step S1915 of the effect execution process (FIG. 47)) in this configuration, and the eleventh layer LY11. When the spherical effect portion 77b returns to the initial position in a state in which the drive table for the initial position is read out, or when the bonus winning flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" and the eleventh layer LY11 When the spherical effect portion 77b returns to the displacement position while the displacement position driving table is being read, it is determined that the correction operation of the accessory 75 is finished. When the effect-side MPU 92 detects that the detection signal received from the initial position sensor 75a rises from the LOW state to the HI state, the effect-side MPU 92 recognizes that the spherical effect portion 77b is staying at the initial position, and the displacement position sensor 75b. When detecting the rise from the LOW state to the HI state of the detection signal received from , it is grasped that the spherical effect portion 77b is staying at the displaced position.

When the effect-side MPU 92 grasps that the correcting operation of the character object 75, which was started when the bonus prize was established, has ended, it determines whether or not the character object effect execution flag is set to "1". do. If "1" is not set in the performance execution flag, it means that the bonus performance is not yet executed. The time required for the correction operation of the accessory 75 is grasped. If the time required for the correction operation is less than 0.5 seconds, the performance-side MPU 92 reads out the bonus character product driving table from the performance-side ROM 93 to the eleventh layer LY11 of the readout area 94a, and stores it in the character product management area. "1" is set to the role product operating flag in 94d. The performance-side MPU 92 executes the driving control of the role 75 according to the bonus role driving table read out to the eleventh layer LY11, thereby executing the bonus role performance.

If the time required for correcting the character object 75 is 0.5 seconds or longer and less than 1 second, the effect-side MPU 92 reads out the shortened bonus character object driving table from the effect-side ROM 93 and stores it in the eleventh place of the readout area 94a. It reads out to the layer LY11 and sets "1" to the character product running flag in the character product management area 94d. The production-side MPU 92 executes drive control of the character 75 according to the shortened bonus character product driving table read out to the eleventh layer LY11, whereby the shortened bonus character product effect is executed. On the other hand, the effect-side MPU 92 reads neither the bonus character product driving table nor the shortened bonus character product driving table when the time required for the correction operation is 1 second or longer. In this case, neither the bonus character effect nor the shortened bonus character effect is executed.

In this way, when the bonus award is established without execution of the bonus performance, and the compensation operation of the performance 75 is executed, the time required for the compensation operation is measured. If the corrective action is not performed or if the time required for the corrective action is short (if the time required for the corrective action is less than 0.5 seconds), the bonus performance is executed, and the corrective action is performed. When the time required is moderate (when the time required for the correction action is 0.5 seconds or more and less than 1 second), the shortened bonus performance is executed, and the time required for the correction action is long. (When the time required for the correction action is 1 second or more), neither the bonus character effect nor the shortened bonus character effect is executed. By adopting a configuration in which presence/absence of the action of the action of the role object and the length of the effect are changed according to the time required for the correction action of the role object 75, the correction action of the role object 75 is executed and the correction action is performed. Using the time remaining after the end of , an effect (bonus accessory effect or reduced bonus accessory effect) for operating the accessory 75 can be executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(15) Instead of storing the game history data in the history storage area 94b on condition that the history storage mode is set, the game history data is always stored in the history storage area 94b. is performed, and the processing for clearing the game history data may be executed when the player performs an operation. Specifically, in the history image processing (FIG. 82), without determining whether or not the history storage flag 158 is set to "1", the history storage processing in step S4802 (FIG. 83) is performed unconditionally. to run. The history menu screen (FIG. 97) is provided with an item "delete history" in place of the item "select mode". When the item "delete history" is selected on the history menu screen, the effect-side MPU 92 executes processing for clearing the game history data. In the game history data clearing process, the 0th to 5th history storage areas RA0 to RA5 in the history storage area 94b are cleared in the same manner as in step S5114 of the history configuration data generation process (FIG. 85) in the first embodiment. And the seventh to fifteenth history storage areas RA7 to RA15 are cleared. After the player selects the item "delete history" on the history menu screen and erases the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b except for the game history data indicating the number of occurrences of ART winning, By starting the game, it is possible to prevent the history of the game played before the player started the game from being reflected in the history image G23.

As in the first embodiment, in the history image management process (FIG. 95), when it is determined that 10 minutes have passed since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal game state ST1 (step S5712). : YES, step S5714: YES), clear processing of game history data is executed (step S5716). In the clearing process, the 0th to 5th history storage areas RA0 to RA5 and the 7th to 15th history storage areas RA7 to RA15 in the history storage area 94b are cleared. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game history data of the next player to be seated from being mixed with the game history data of the player who was seated before the player.

In this way, the game history data is always stored in the history storage area 94b, thereby eliminating the need for the player to make settings for storing the game history data in the history storage area 94b. Generation of history configuration data based on history data and display of history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data can be executed. Thus, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the history image G23 cannot be displayed due to forgetting the setting for storing the game history data in the history storage area 94b when starting the game.

(16) Based on the history configuration data stored in the image reproduction storage area 94c, the frequency of use of each wording designation data is grasped, and if the frequency of use exceeds a predetermined reference value, the wording designation data may not be set in the selection areas 165-167. Further, in the wording designation data lottery process executed in step S5211 of the wording selection processing (FIG. 88), the winning probability of wording designation data with high frequency of use may be set low. As a result, it is possible to prevent frequent generation of history configuration data in which the same wording designation data is set.

(17) The wording designation data selected in the wording designation data lottery process (step S5211 of the wording selection process (FIG. 88)) is stored in the reproduction storage area RDn (n is any one of 0 to 31) of the image reproduction storage area 94c. is included in the history configuration data stored in ), has the same display priority as the wording designation data, and satisfies the selection condition Alternatively, the wording designation data set in the selection areas 165 to 167 may be selected from the wording designation data having a lower display priority than the wording designation data selected in the wording designation data lottery process (step S5211). good. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of setting the same wording designation data as history configuration data generated and stored in the past.

(18) Instead of the configuration in which the history image G23, which is a still image, is displayed on the image display device 63 based on the history configuration data, a configuration in which a history moving image, which is a moving image, is played back based on the history configuration data may be employed. . As a result, it is possible to look back on the game history in the form of moving images, thereby improving the interest in the game.

(19) A plurality of layout data with different layouts of the first to third heading ranges 151 to 153, the character image range 154 and the ending image range 155 are stored in the effect-side ROM 93, and one of the plurality of layout data is stored. A layout lottery may be executed to select the layout data. This makes it possible to increase the variation of the history image G23 and reduce the possibility of generating the same history configuration data.

(20) In the first embodiment, the set value of the slot machine 10 is suggested by the type of background plate image G24 displayed, but the image that suggests the set value is limited to the background plate image G24. do not have. A setting value of the slot machine 10 may be suggested by the type of the text images G25 to G27, the character image G28, or the ending image G29.

(21) In the normal game state ST1, 10 minutes have elapsed since the last operation of the start lever 41 without receiving the game start command by the effect-side MPU 92, and the player is expected to leave the seat. In addition to or instead of the configuration for determining that the It is also possible to adopt a configuration for grasping that the has changed. Specifically, the change button is electrically connected to the effect control device 90 . The production side MPU 92 clears the 0th to 5th history storage areas RA0 to RA5 and the 7th to 15th history storage areas RA7 to RA15 in the history storage area 94b based on the detection of the operation of the change button. do. As a result, the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b is cleared to "0" except for the game history data indicating the number of occurrences of ART wins. When the effect-side MPU 92 detects the operation of the change button while the history storage flag 158 is already set to "1", the state is maintained. Further, when the operation of the change button is detected while the history storage flag 158 is not set to "1", the history storage flag 158 is set to "1". As a result, game history data is stored in the history storage area 94b. In this configuration, when the player changes in a game state other than the normal game state ST1, and when the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, there is a period until the next player takes a seat and starts the game. Even if the time is less than 10 minutes, the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b is excluded from the game history data indicating the number of occurrences of ART winning based on the detection of the operation of the change button. is cleared to "0" and new game history data is stored in the history storage area 94b.

(22) In the normal game state ST1, 10 minutes have passed since the last operation of the start lever 41 without receiving the game start command by the effect-side MPU 92, and the player is expected to leave the seat. In addition to or instead of the configuration that determines that the player has changed, an imaging device that can recognize the player may be provided, and it may be configured to grasp that the player has changed based on the imaging result. Specifically, the imaging device is electrically connected to the effect control device 90 . The imaging range of the imaging device is set to a range in which the face of the player sitting in front of the slot machine 10 can be imaged in such a manner as to be identifiable. The imaging device takes images at predetermined time intervals (for example, every three minutes). When the effect-side MPU 92 grasps the change of the player based on the imaging result, the 0th to 5th history storage areas RA0 to RA5 and the 7th to 15th history storage areas RA7 to RA15 in the history storage area 94b. to clear. As a result, the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b is cleared to "0" except for the game history data indicating the number of occurrences of ART wins. When the performance side MPU 92 grasps that the player has changed based on the imaging result of the imaging device while the history storage flag 158 has already been set to "1", the state is maintained. In addition, when the history storage flag 158 is not set to "1" and it is determined that the player has changed based on the imaging result of the imaging device, the history storage flag 158 is set to "1". As a result, game history data is stored in the history storage area 94b. In this configuration, when the player changes in a game state other than the normal game state ST1, and when the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, there is a period until the next player takes a seat and starts the game. Even if the time is less than 10 minutes, if the player's change is recognized based on the imaging result of the imaging device, the game history data except for the game history data indicating the number of occurrences of ART winning is stored in the history storage area 94b. The stored game history data can be cleared to "0" and new game history data can be stored in the history storage area 94b.

(23) A configuration may be adopted in which a player can log in by inputting a password or the like, and a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether or not there is a player change based on the login information. In this configuration, only the history image G23 of the logged-in player can be selected as a display target. As a result, it is possible to display the history image G23 based on the past game history of the player, while preventing the action of guessing the set value of the slot machine 10 by displaying the history image G23 based on the game history of another player. can.

(24) As a configuration for execution of a premium effect that may give a large profit to the player, it is determined that the history image G23 has always executed the premium effect based on the execution of the premium effect. A configuration may be adopted in which the shown premium effect image is displayed. Specifically, in the ART state ST6, there is a special extra win that gives an extra game number of 100 games or more. When a special addition winning occurs, a premium performance lottery is performed in the performance side MPU 92, and when the premium performance lottery wins the premium performance, the premium performance is executed. A premium effect flag is provided in the history storage area 94b. The premium effect flag is a flag that allows the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp that the premium effect has been executed. The premium effect flag is set to "1" when winning the premium effect in the premium effect lottery. The configuration data storage area 161 is provided with a premium flag that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp that a premium effect image is to be displayed. If the premium effect flag is set to "1" at the timing of generation of history configuration data, the premium effect flag is always set to "1". As a result, the history image G23 including the premium performance image can be displayed at an arbitrary timing while the player does not need to record his/her own photograph or the like during the execution of the premium performance, and the history of the performance of the premium performance is left. can be made possible.

(25) In the first embodiment, if the setting value is changed in the winning probability setting process (step S106 of the main process (FIG. 11)), the image reproduction storage area 94c (FIG. 41(a)) may be configured to set "1" to the displayable flag of the reproduction storage area RDn (n is any integer from 0 to 31) in which the history configuration data is stored. By setting the display enable flag to "1", the history configuration data that could not be selected as a display target before the setting value was changed can be made selectable as a display target. While preventing the action of guessing the set value of the slot machine 10 by displaying a history image G23 based on the game history of others, increasing the number of history configuration data selectable as a display object is intended to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

(26) Instead of providing both the tenth history storage area and the eleventh history storage area RA11 in the history storage area 94b, the tenth history storage area and the eleventh history storage area RA11 A configuration in which only one of them is provided may be adopted. As already described in the first embodiment, the tenth history storage area RA10 is a counter that enables the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp the number of game media provided after the transition to the ART state ST6. 11. The history storage area RA11 is a counter that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp the net increase in the number of game media after the transition to the ART state ST6. In a configuration in which the tenth history storage area RA10 is provided in the history storage area 94b but the eleventh history storage area RA11 is not provided, similarly to the first embodiment, the ART state ST6 can be entered. It is possible to generate history configuration data including wording designation data corresponding to the number of given game media after the transition. In this configuration, as in the first embodiment, the number of given game media after the transition to the ART state ST6 is a predetermined division number (specifically, "1000", "2000", or "3000"). Historical configuration data can be generated based on reaching Further, in a configuration in which the 11th history storage area RA11 is provided in the history storage area 94b but the 10th history storage area RA10 is not provided, as in the first embodiment, the ART state ST6 It is possible to generate history configuration data including wording designation data corresponding to the net increase in the number of game media after the shift to . In this configuration, when the net increase in the number of game media after the transition to the ART state ST6 reaches a predetermined number of divisions (specifically, "400", "800", or "1200"), the history configuration data can be generated.

(27) In the second embodiment, the image display device 63 is configured to have one display area (only the lower right display area 181) in which the reduced moving image display in the reduction additional effect is performed. A configuration in which two or more display areas are provided may be used. With this configuration, the image display device 63 can simultaneously display two or more reduced moving images in the reduced additional effect. As a result, even when it is time to execute a new reduction-addition effect during execution of the reduction-addition effect, the reduction-addition effect that is being executed is not ended in the middle, and the reduction-addition effect that is being executed is not terminated. , and a newly started reduction additional effect can be executed at the same time.

(28) When the number of games continuously played in the advantageous section SC2 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 games), after shifting to the advantageous section SC2, the lottery process (Fig. 14) Regardless of whether or not the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, in which winning numbers of "1" to "3" are set and which enables establishment of the first bell prize, is notified, the advantageous section SC2 is It is good also as a structure which ends. Specifically, in the second control process of the game section (FIG. 29), when the value of the advantageous continuation counter reaches a predetermined number of games, the initialization process of the advantageous section SC2 is performed regardless of the state of the unnotified flag. Execute (step S1014). This ends the advantageous section SC2. Thereafter, the advantageous section display extinguishing process is executed (step S1015). This makes it easy to understand the end of the advantageous section SC2.

(29) Even if it is the advantageous section SC2, if the ART state is not ST6, it is possible to establish a winning that is advantageous to the player if a winning combination that is established according to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is won in a different combination. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be enabled may not be notified. Specifically, in the notification control process (step S420) of the winning lottery process (FIG. 14), when the advantageous interval flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", the winning lottery process (FIG. 14) , the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable the establishment of the first bell prize under the condition that the game state is the ART state ST6 when any winning number of "1" to "3" is set. Execute processing for notifying the stop order of the As a result, the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of a prize advantageous to the player is notified only in the ART state ST6. can be collected.

(30) The ratio indicator 85 may be configured to display the instructed accessory ratio. The main-side RAM 74 stores a first awarded number counter for adding the number of awarded game media when the game medium is awarded in the game in which the stop order notification is performed, and A second awarded number counter to which the number of awarded game media is added when a medium is awarded, and a total awarded number to which the number of awarded game media is added when a game medium is awarded regardless of the game state. A counter is provided. When game media are awarded in a game in which the stop order notification is performed, the number of game media awarded is added to both the first awarded number counter and the total awarded number counter. Further, when game media are awarded in a game executed in the bonus state, the number of game media to be awarded is added to both the second awarded number counter and the total awarded number counter.

The ratio indicator 85 calculates the ratio of the sum of the value of the first award number counter and the value of the second award number counter to the value of the total award number counter when an instruction to display the management result of the game history is generated. That is, the calculation is performed so that the calculation result=(“value of the first given number counter”+“value of the second given number counter”)/“value of the total given number counter”.

After that, display start processing is executed. In the display start processing, the display of the calculation result on the ratio display 85 is started. In this case, the identifier display section 86 displays the identifier "7P." indicating that the value displayed on the ratio display section 87 is the instructed accessory ratio. Specifically, "7" is displayed on the left 7-segment display 86a of the identifier display section 86, "P" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 86b of the identifier display section 86, and an auxiliary display for the identifier is displayed. The display of the identifier display section 86 is controlled so that the section 86c lights up. In addition, of the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result by 100, the tens place is displayed on the left seven-segment display 87a in the ratio display unit 87, and the ones place is displayed on the right seven-segment display 87b. Display control of the display unit 87 is performed. As a result, it is possible to confirm the instructed accessory ratio.

The values of the first grant number counter, the second grant number counter, and the total grant number counter are not cleared to "0" unless the clearing process in step S105 of the main process (FIG. 11) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to measure the instructed accessory ratio for games executed on a plurality of business days in the game hall.

(31) When a transition to the advantageous section SC2 occurs in the normal game state ST1, the game ends each time the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R enabling establishment of the first bell prize in the advantageous section SC2 is announced. A lottery process may be executed, and a transition to the normal section SC1 may be caused by winning the final lottery process in the end lottery process. In this case, it is possible to notify the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable the establishment of the first bell prize even in the advantageous section SC2 shifted to in the normal game state ST1 multiple times. becomes.

(32) The number of notification times of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize necessary for generating the opportunity to end the advantageous section SC2 is not limited to one, and is not limited to two. Multiple times, such as times, 3 times, or 4 times or more, may be sufficient.

(33) Instead of notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the 1st bell prize as a trigger for the end of the advantageous section SC2, instead of the 1st bell prize If there is a specific winning that is a winning that has a large number of game media to be awarded and the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is in a predetermined order, the specific winning is established. The advantageous section SC2 may not end until the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice). That is, in this configuration, the reel 32L that enables the establishment of the winning with the largest number of game media among the winnings established when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a predetermined order. , 32M, and 32R are notified of the stop order a predetermined number of times, the advantageous section SC2 does not end. In this case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not notified of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which enables establishment of a specific prize, even in the advantageous section SC2 to which the normal game state ST1 is shifted, a predetermined number of times. If a winning combination that enables the first bell to be won is won according to the stop order, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell to be won may be notified.

(34) When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize in the normal game state ST1 and in the advantageous section SC2 is notified, the notification is displayed on the combined display unit 66. It may be configured such that the image display device 63 does not perform the operation while the image display device 63 performs the operation. In this case, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize that triggers the end of the advantageous section SC2 can be inconspicuously notified.

(35) In the advantageous section SC2, the advantageous section display section 67 is in a light-emitting state (that is, in a display state), and the advantageous section display section 67 is turned off when a predetermined abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 10. (that is, non-display state). Further, in this case, the combined display unit 66 may be configured to display information corresponding to the type of abnormal state. In such a configuration in which the shared display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67 are collectively provided in the common display area 68, when a predetermined abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 10, the advantageous section display section 67 is turned off, and the display corresponding to the type of abnormal condition is displayed on the dual-use display unit 66, so that even when the same abnormal condition occurs, the Since the event that the display mode of the display area 68 changes does not occur, it becomes easier to identify the type of abnormal state.

(36) The freezing period at the end of the ending may be longer in the case where the BB presentation is started after the ending presentation is completed than in the case where the BB presentation is not started after the ending presentation is completed. In this case, when the ending performance is finished and the BB performance is started, the extended period can be used to execute the BB start performance after executing the end performance of the ending performance.

(37) The ending effect may be executed under the condition that the total number of game media provided in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ending effect from being executed even though the amount of game media is not given to the player's satisfaction.

(38) When the ending effect is executed, a moving image effect is performed in increments of 5 games, and at the end, the end screen showing the number of game media acquired in the current ART state ST6 and the number of games executed in the current ART state ST6. may be displayed.

(39) When the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 during the bonus state is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the ending, the bonus effect may be terminated and the ending effect may be started. The ending effect may be started after the state is terminated, or the ending effect may be started when the transition from the preparation state ST5 to the ART state ST6 occurs after the bonus state is terminated. .

In the configuration in which the ending effect is started after the bonus state ends, the start of the ending effect is delayed with respect to the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2. In this case, in the ending effect, the moving image effect is basically performed in units of 5 games, whereas by performing the moving image effect in units of 3 games, all the effect contents can be displayed before the ending effect ends. You may do so. Further, when all the contents of the effect cannot be displayed by the final game of the ending effect, all the contents of the effect may be displayed by utilizing a freeze period that occurs when the ending effect ends.

As the ending effect, a plurality of types of effects such as effects for 30 games, effects for 40 games, and effects for 50 games are prepared, and the ending effects for the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 are started. A configuration may be adopted in which an effect corresponding to the timing is selected.

(40) The number of games played in the bonus state may be excluded from counting the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 from reaching the maximum number of games in the middle of the bonus state, and to prevent the ending effect from being started in the middle of the bonus state. becomes.

(41) The configuration of the offset table 97 for associating each index value IV of the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table with the winning number is limited to the configuration in the first embodiment. not. For example, instead of setting in the order of small role group→bonus role group→replay role group, the configuration may be set in the order of bonus role group→replay role group→small role group. .

(42) The offset table 97 is not commonly set for the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, but the offset table is individually set corresponding to each lottery table. It is good also as a structure provided. For example, in the lottery table for the normal mode, a group of hands whose winning probability varies according to the set value and a group of hands whose winning probability does not vary according to the set value are grouped together. An offset table may be provided for grouping small wins, bonus wins, and replay wins. For the same purpose, an offset table may be provided for the lottery table for the first RT mode, and an offset table may be provided for the lottery table for the second RT mode. In this case, the winning number of each offset table may be set so as not to overlap between the offset tables. Even with this configuration, the index value IV is set in each lottery table in a manner that facilitates design, and the winning numbers are set in each offset table in a manner that facilitates the handling of information on the winning hand in subsequent processing. can be set.

(43) In the bonus internal state ST2, the symbol corresponding to the bonus combination may be prioritized in the stop control over the symbol corresponding to the combination that generates the award of the game medium. In this case, when the winning numbers "1" to "3" are set in the bonus internal state ST2, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize is notified, A configuration may be adopted in which a symbol combination corresponding to a winning bonus combination is notified. When the notification is executed in this manner, the stop operation is performed at the timing of the stop operation that does not allow the establishment of the bonus prize and in the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell prize. Instead, it is possible to establish the first bell prize.

(44) Limited to a configuration in which a normal section SC1 in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified as a game section and an advantageous section SC2 in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified is set. Alternatively, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be notified in any of them, but a plurality of sections may be set in which the types of winning data to be notified of the stop order are different. Although the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be notified, a plurality of sections may be set in which the frequency of notification of the stop order is different. Even in this case, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the transition of the game section by giving a difference in the degree of advantage regarding the notification of the stop order in a plurality of sections.

(45) A configuration may be adopted in which notification for making the player aware of which game section is performed in a place other than the advantageous section display section 67 . For example, at least one of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 may be configured to execute an effect that allows the player to recognize which game section is which. In addition to or in place of these configurations, information indicating which game section is being output may be configured to be output to the hall computer of the game hall.

(46) When calculating the ratio of the total number of games in the advantageous interval SC2 to the total number of games, the number of games executed in the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 may not be added to the total number of games in the advantageous interval SC2. good.

(47) The ratio of the total number of games in the advantageous section SC2 to the total number of games may be calculated for each set value. In this case, even if the setting value is changed, the calculation should be continued without initializing the information of the ratio performed for each setting value. According to this configuration, it is possible to grasp the ratio for each set value.

(48) The total number of games played and the number of advantageous games, which is the total number of games played in the advantageous section SC2, are stored as history information, and the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is calculated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times a predetermined combination is won and the total number of games to be drawn in the combination lottery process are stored as history information, and the winning probability of the predetermined combination is calculated. good too. In this case, there are a first predetermined combination and a second predetermined combination as target predetermined combinations, and the number of wins for each of the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination is individually stored as history information, and the first predetermined combination is stored as history information. The winning probability may be calculated for each of the predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination. Further, the number of wins for each combination may be individually stored as history information, and the probability of winning may be calculated for each combination. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the gaming hall of the winning probability of the combination to be managed.

Further, the total number of awarded game media and the total number of games may be stored as history information, and the number of awarded game media per unit number of games may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the gaming hall of the number of game media provided per unit number of games. In addition, the combination of the total number of game media provided and the total number of games is stored as history information for each game state and the advantageous section SC2 individually, and the number of game media provided per unit number of games is calculated for each game. The configuration may be such that the calculation is performed separately for each of the state and the advantageous section SC2.

Further, the number of transitions to the bonus state and the total number of games played in the non-bonus state may be stored as history information, and the probability of transition to the bonus state may be calculated.

(49) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the advantageous section SC2 ends when the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the result of the ending lottery process executed in the advantageous section SC2 is It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the advantageous section SC2 ends and shifts to the normal section SC1 in the case of an end winning result. The timing for executing this end lottery process is arbitrary, but for example, it may be configured such that the end lottery process is executed in each game. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the end lottery process is executed at the end. On the condition that the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of games, the end lottery process is executed each time a lottery opportunity occurs, and when the result of the end lottery process is the end winning result. A configuration may be adopted in which the advantageous section SC2 ends and the normal section SC1 is entered.

(50) In the advantageous section SC2, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, so that the advantageous section SC2 is more advantageous than the normal section SC1. The advantageous section SC2 may be more advantageous than the normal section SC1 by increasing the number of game media provided when is established, and the number of game media required to start one game may be reduced. Thus, the advantageous section SC2 may be more advantageous than the normal section SC1.

(51) The notification of the calculation result using the game history is not limited to the configuration in which the combination display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67 are used. Alternatively, the credit display section 65 and the combined display section 66 may be used. Further, when there are a plurality of types of calculation results to be notified, the configuration may be such that each type of event to be notified is sequentially switched and displayed. When the display is sequentially switched in this way, for example, the type of event to be notified is displayed on the credit display section 65, and the calculation result of the event to be notified or the content of the calculation result is displayed on the combined display section 66. A configuration in which corresponding information is displayed may be adopted. As a result, even when there are a plurality of types of events to be notified, it is possible to notify the plurality of types of events to be notified using a small number of display units.

(52) A configuration may also be adopted in which the upper limit number of continuous games is set for the normal section SC1 as well. In this case, when the number of games continuously executed in the normal section SC1 reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section SC2 is set. As a result, it is possible to compensate for the fact that the normal section SC1 continues until the maximum number of games is reached. In addition, by setting the upper limit number of games in the normal section SC1 to be the same among the set values of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", the setting value for the upper limit number of games is not advantageous or disadvantageous. becomes possible.

(53) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the effective line is only one main line ML, and the configuration may be such that the effective line is two, three, or four or more. In this case, the number of activated lines may increase as the number of betted game media increases, or the maximum number of activated lines may be set regardless of the number of betted game media.

(54) In each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration is such that the privilege of paying out medals is given when a small winning combination is won, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and a configuration in which some kind of privilege is given to the player. If it is For example, it may be configured such that prizes other than medals are paid out when a minor win is established. In addition, in a slot machine that does not have actual medal insertion and medal payout functions and that manages the medals owned by the player as credits, an increase in the number of credited medals corresponds to the granting of benefits.

(55) The present invention may be applied to a so-called B-type slot machine, a C-type, a combination of A and C types, a combination of B and C types, as well as RT games, CT games or AT machines. The present invention may be applied to any slot machine, such as a type equipped with games.

(56) The symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not limited to pictures, numbers, letters, etc., and may be geometric lines, graphics, and the like. Also, it is possible to compose a pattern with light, color, etc., and a pattern can be configured with a three-dimensional shape, etc., or a composite of these can compose a pattern. In other words, the pattern may be anything as long as it functions as identifiable information.

(57) In each of the above-described embodiments, a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, but the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which games are played using game balls as game media. You may apply it to the game machine of the form which fused with the machine.

<Invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. In a game machine provided with a production control means (production side MPU 92) that controls the execution of production,
The production control means is
Based on the occurrence of the first execution opportunity (fifth opportunity) during the execution of the production, the first production control means (steps S2712 and S2714 in the production side MPU 92) for starting the first production (first expected production) function to perform processing) and
When the second execution opportunity (sixth opportunity) occurs during the execution of the production, the second production ( Second expected effect) to start the second effect control means (function of executing the processing of steps S2009 to S2014 in the effect side MPU 92, the function of executing the processing of steps S2415 and S2419 in the effect side MPU 92),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature A1, the first effect can be started based on the occurrence of the first execution opportunity during execution of the effect. When the second execution opportunity occurs during execution of the performance, the second performance is started based on the subsequent occurrence of the predetermined start opportunity. Therefore, while providing the condition that the second execution opportunity occurs as one of the conditions for starting the second performance, the second performance is not started until a predetermined start opportunity occurs after the second execution opportunity occurs. can wait. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second effect from being executed before the predetermined start opportunity occurs.

Feature A2. The effect control means controls the execution of the effect according to the effect information (data for effect in the effect table) read into the execution target area (layers LY0 to LY11 in the readout area 94a),
A plurality of execution target areas are set,
The first effect control means reads the effect information corresponding to the effect being executed when the first execution opportunity occurs in the execution target area of a type different from the execution target area from which the effect information is read. Execution control of the first effect is performed according to first effect information (data for effect in the first expected effect table) corresponding to the first effect that has been issued,
The second effect control means controls that predetermined effect information corresponding to the effect being executed when the second execution opportunity occurs (data for effect in either the first expected effect table or the intermediate stop effect table) is Second effect information (of the second expected effect table) corresponding to the second effect read out to an area different from the area from which the predetermined effect information is read in the read execution target area The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein execution control of the second effect is performed according to effect data).

According to the feature A2, the execution control of the first effect is executed in a different type of execution target region from the execution target region from which the effect information corresponding to the effect being executed when the first execution opportunity occurs. is performed according to the first effect information corresponding to the first effect read out. Thus, when the first execution opportunity occurs, the first performance can be started in parallel with the performance being executed without affecting the progress of the performance being executed.

In the execution control of the second effect, the predetermined effect information corresponding to the effect being executed when the second execution opportunity occurs is read out in the execution target area where the predetermined effect information is read. It is performed according to the second effect information corresponding to the second effect read out to the area different from the area. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for continuing the performance being executed until the predetermined start opportunity occurs and switching from the performance being executed to the second performance when the predetermined start opportunity occurs. .

Feature A3. The plurality of execution target areas include a first execution target area (eg, first layer LY1) and a second execution target area (eg, second layer LY2),
When the effect information is read to each of the first execution target area and the second execution target area, the effect is executed according to the effect information of the second execution target area at least for specific effect contents. The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein the control is given priority over execution control of the effect according to the effect information of the first execution target area.

According to feature A3, at least with regard to the specific effect content, the execution control of the effect according to the effect information of the second execution target area is prioritized over the execution control of the effect according to the effect information of the first execution target area. Thus, an effect according to the effect information of the second execution target area and an effect according to the effect information of the first execution target area can be executed in parallel. Since the execution control of the effect according to the effect information of the second execution target area is prioritized over the execution control of the effect according to the effect information of the first execution target area, these effects can be achieved in the manner intended at the design stage. A combination of renditions can be performed. Thereby, it is possible to make it easy to understand the contents of these effects that are executed in parallel.

Feature A4. A configuration in which the effect information can be read into each of the first execution target area and the second execution target area in a situation where the first execution opportunity can occur,
In a situation where the second execution opportunity can occur, the predetermined effect information and the second effect information are read out to either the first execution target area or the second execution target area. The gaming machine according to feature A3.

According to feature A4, in a situation where the first execution opportunity can occur, a plurality of effects can be executed in parallel according to the effect information read out to each of the first execution target area and the second execution target area. . In a situation where the second execution opportunity can occur, the predetermined effect information and the second effect information are read out to one execution target area (one of the first execution target area and the second execution target area). As a result, it is possible to execute the second effect according to the second effect information while eliminating the need for a configuration for grasping the progress of the predetermined effect according to the predetermined effect information.

Feature A5. Provided with predetermined operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated by the player,
The first execution opportunity occurs based on the start of the operation of the predetermined operation means,
The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the second execution opportunity is generated based on completion of the operation of the predetermined operation means.

According to the feature A5, the first execution opportunity is generated based on the start of the operation of the predetermined operation means during execution of the performance, and the first performance is started based on the occurrence of the first execution opportunity. be able to. Further, a second execution opportunity occurs based on the end of the operation of the predetermined operation means during execution of the effect, and when the second execution opportunity occurs, based on the occurrence of the predetermined start opportunity after that A second production can be started. In a configuration in which the period from the occurrence of the first execution opportunity to the occurrence of the second execution opportunity varies depending on the operation mode of the predetermined operation means by the player, the predetermined start opportunity is generated when the operation of the predetermined operation means is terminated. By being configured to start the second effect on the condition that it occurs, it is possible to secure the execution period of the first effect over the period from the occurrence of the first execution opportunity to the occurrence of the predetermined start opportunity. can. Thus, even if the period from the occurrence of the first execution opportunity to the occurrence of the second execution opportunity is shortened, the execution period of the first performance is prevented from becoming so short that the content of the performance cannot be understood. be able to.

Feature A6. The second effect control means determines that the execution status of the predetermined effect (one of the first expected effect and the middle stop effect), which is one of the first effect and a different effect, is in a predetermined state (execution of the first expected effect). When the second execution opportunity occurs in a situation where the period is less than one second, the second performance is started based on the end of the prescribed situation as the occurrence of the prescribed start opportunity. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, characterized in that

According to feature A6, when the execution situation of the predetermined effect is the predetermined situation and the second execution opportunity occurs, the start of the second effect can be made to wait until the predetermined situation ends. As a result, even if the second execution opportunity occurs at a timing earlier than the end of the prescribed situation, the execution period of the prescribed performance is secured until the prescribed situation ends, assuming that the start of the second performance is on standby. be able to. Then, the second effect can be started based on the end of the predetermined situation.

Feature A7. Characteristic feature A6, characterized in that the predetermined situation is a situation in which a predetermined period of time (in the first embodiment, one second after the first expected effect is started) has not elapsed since the predetermined effect was started. game machine.

According to feature A7, the predetermined situation does not end until a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of the predetermined effect. With the configuration of feature A6, when the execution situation of the predetermined effect is the predetermined situation and the second execution opportunity occurs, the start of the second effect is waited until the predetermined situation ends. Therefore, when the second execution opportunity occurs before the predetermined period elapses after the start of the predetermined performance, the start of the second performance can be made to wait until the predetermined period elapses after the start of the predetermined performance. . As a result, it is possible to secure a period during which the predetermined effect is executed over a predetermined period in a state where the second effect is not executed. Therefore, even if the second execution opportunity occurs before the predetermined period elapses after the start of the predetermined performance, the execution period of the predetermined performance is prevented from being so short that the contents of the predetermined performance cannot be understood. can do.

Feature A8. If the second execution opportunity occurs when the execution situation of the predetermined effect is not the predetermined situation, the means for starting the second effect (the function of executing the processing of steps S2009 to S2014 in the effect side MPU 92) The gaming machine according to feature A6 or A7, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature A8, when the execution situation of the predetermined effect is the predetermined situation, when the second trigger occurs, the start of the second effect waits until the predetermined situation ends, and the execution of the predetermined effect. When the situation is not the predetermined situation, the second performance can be started without delay when the second execution opportunity occurs. As a result, it is possible to give an impression that the second effect has been started based on the occurrence of the second execution opportunity, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, with respect to the configuration of features A1 to A8, any one or a plurality of configurations among features A1 to A8, features B1 to B9, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D17, features E1 to E9, and features F1 to F7 may apply. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. In a game machine provided with a production control means (production side MPU 92) that controls the execution of production,
The production control means is
Based on the occurrence of the production start opportunity (reception of the game start command by the production side MPU 92 in the ART state ST6), a predetermined unit production (ART base production and ART normal production) is started, and the predetermined unit production is started. When the production start opportunity occurs in the situation where the production is being executed, the production start means (in the first embodiment, the step in the production side MPU 92) that terminates the predetermined unit production being executed and newly starts the prescribed unit production A function of executing the processing of S3204 to step S3207, a function of executing the processing of step S6412 to step S6415 in the production side MPU 92 in the second embodiment),
In a situation where a specific effect (an additional main effect and an additional sub effect in the first embodiment, an additional effect in the second embodiment) is being executed in the predetermined unit effect, the effect start opportunity is generated, and the predetermined effect is generated. When the unit performance is newly started, a specific corresponding performance (additional sub performance in the first embodiment, reduced additional performance in the second embodiment) corresponding to the specific performance is executed in the predetermined unit performance. Specific corresponding means (function to execute the processing of steps S3201 to S3203 in the production side MPU 92 in the first embodiment, the function to execute the processing of steps S6401 to S6411 in the production side MPU 92 in the second embodiment) When,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature B1, when the specified unit production is newly started by the occurrence of the production start opportunity in the situation where the specific production is being executed, by executing the specific corresponding production corresponding to the specific production, the specific To newly start a predetermined unit performance without causing a delay based on the occurrence of a performance start opportunity while making it possible to grasp the performance contents corresponding to a specific performance based on the corresponding performance.

Feature B2. When the specified unit effect is newly started due to the occurrence of the effect start opportunity in a situation where the specific effect is executed in the predetermined unit effect, the specified unit effect is newly executed. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the specific corresponding effect is started in a mode corresponding to the execution content of the specific effect immediately before starting.

According to the feature B2, the content of the specific effect and the specific effect are corresponded by the configuration in which the specific corresponding effect is started in a manner corresponding to the execution content of the specific effect immediately before the predetermined unit effect is newly started. It is possible to make the content of the specific correspondence effect to be continuous. As a result, it is possible to grasp the continuation of the performance content of the specific performance by confirming the content of the performance corresponding to the specific performance.

Feature B3. When the specific effect is being executed, at least both the first specific effect (additional main effect in the first embodiment) and the second specific effect (additional sub effect in the first embodiment) are executed. can be,
The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, wherein the second specific effect is executed as the specific corresponding effect, and the first specific effect is not executed.

According to the characteristic B3, when the configuration of the characteristic B1 is provided and the predetermined unit production is newly started by the occurrence of the production start opportunity in the situation where the specific production is being executed, the specific correspondence corresponding to the specific production is performed. In the configuration in which the performance is executed, the second specific performance is executed without executing the first specific performance as the specific corresponding performance. By ending the first specific effect, the player's interest can be shifted to the predetermined unit effect newly started from the first specific effect. Also, it is possible to make it possible to confirm the second specific effect in parallel with the newly started predetermined unit effect, so that it is possible to grasp the effect contents corresponding to the specific effect.

Feature B4. When the specified unit production is newly started due to the occurrence of the production start opportunity in a situation where the specific production is being executed in the predetermined unit production, the specific handling means is configured to newly start the specified production. The gaming machine according to feature B3, wherein the second specific effect is continued from the start of the predetermined unit effect.

According to feature B4, the second specific performance is prevented from being interrupted by continuing the second specific performance from the start of the predetermined unit performance newly started based on the occurrence of the performance start opportunity. As a result, the content of the second specific effect can be made continuous and easy to grasp.

Feature B5. The specific response means is configured to provide the specific response performance as the specific response performance when the performance start opportunity is generated and the predetermined unit performance is newly started in a situation where the specific performance is being executed in the predetermined unit performance. The gaming machine according to feature B3 or B4, characterized in that when executing the specific performance, the progress speed of the second specific performance is changed from the progress speed of the second specific performance up to that point.

According to feature B5, when the second specific effect is executed as the specific corresponding effect, by setting the progress speed of the second specific effect to be slower than the previous progress speed, the predetermined unit effect is newly started. By making it possible to carefully check the specific correspondence performance executed in parallel with the above, it is possible to easily grasp the content of the specific correspondence performance. Further, when the second specific performance is executed as the specific correspondence performance, the progress speed of the second specific performance is set to be faster than the previous progress speed, thereby newly starting the predetermined unit performance and the specific correspondence performance. By shortening the period in which and are executed in parallel, the player's interest can be shifted early to the newly started predetermined unit performance.

Feature B6. The effect control means controls the execution of the effect according to the effect information (data for effect in the effect table),
Any one of features B3 to B5, wherein the effect information for executing the second specific effect is set as effect information different from the effect information for executing the first specific effect. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to feature B6, the effect information for executing the second specific effect is set as effect information different from the effect information for executing the first specific effect, whereby the first specific effect and the second It is possible to simplify the processing configuration for ending the first specific performance and continuing the second specific performance from the situation where both of the specific performances are being executed. In addition, when there are a plurality of types of the first specific effect and the second specific effect, respectively, the first specific effect and the second specific effect are stored in advance in comparison with the configuration in which the first specific effect and the second specific effect are executed based on one effect information. While suppressing an increase in the amount of data of performance information to be stored, the variety of combinations of the first specific performance and the second specific performance can be increased to improve the interest of the game.

Feature B7. The effect control means controls the execution of the effect according to the effect information read in the execution target area (layers LY0 to LY11 in the readout area 94a),
A plurality of execution target areas are set,
The effect information for executing the second specific effect is read out to the execution target area different from the execution target area from which the effect information for executing the first specific effect is read. The gaming machine according to feature B6.

According to feature B7, the execution target area from which the effect information for executing the first specific effect is read is different from the execution target area from which the effect information for executing the second specific effect is read, A processing configuration for ending the first specific effect and continuing the second specific effect from a situation where both the first specific effect and the second specific effect are being executed can be simplified.

Feature B8. The effect control means, when an execution trigger for the specific effect (when the effect-side MPU 92 receives an additional command during ART) occurs in a situation where the specific corresponding effect is being executed in the predetermined unit effect, the specific effect Specific effect starting means for starting the specific effect in a manner corresponding to the execution content of the corresponding effect (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S3301 to S3305 in the effect side MPU 92, step S3401 in the effect side MPU 92 to The function of executing the processing of step S3412, the function of executing the processing of steps S6501 to S6503 in the production side MPU 92 in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S6601 to S6606 in the production side MPU 92) The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, characterized in that

According to feature B8, when an execution opportunity for a specific effect occurs in a situation where a specific effect is being executed, the content of execution of the specific effect that was executed before the execution opportunity for the specific effect It is possible to have a correspondence relationship with the execution content of the specific performance that is started based on the occurrence of the performance execution opportunity. As a result, it is possible to continuously switch the performances in an easy-to-understand manner when an opportunity to execute the specific performance is generated.

Feature B9. The trigger for executing the specific effect is a configuration that occurs when it is decided to give a predetermined profit to the player (adding the number of games to be continued in the ART state ST6),
A player can recognize the content of the predetermined profit (the number of games added) that triggered the execution of the specific effect by executing the specific effect,
When the specific effect starting means starts the specific effect due to the occurrence of an execution opportunity of the specific effect in a situation where the specific corresponding effect is being executed in the predetermined unit effect, the specific effect being executed The gaming machine according to feature B8, characterized in that the specific effect is started in a state in which the player can recognize the content of the predetermined profit that triggered the execution of the effect.

According to the feature B9, when the execution trigger of the specific effect occurs in a situation where the specific corresponding effect is being executed in the predetermined unit effect, the specific corresponding effect is executed for the player who was watching the specific corresponding effect. It is possible to prevent the specific performance from being started based on the occurrence of the execution opportunity of the specific performance without indicating the contents of the predetermined profit that has triggered it. Thus, when an opportunity to execute the specific performance is generated in a situation where the performance corresponding to the specific performance is executed in the prescribed unit performance, the content of the performance can be switched in such a manner that the content of the prescribed profit can be grasped.

In addition, with respect to the configuration of features B1 to B9, any one or more of features A1 to A8, features B1 to B9, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D17, features E1 to E9, and features F1 to F7 may apply. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The following problems can be solved according to the inventions of the feature group A and the feature group B.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that a lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the lottery. In addition, it is common that an effect is performed to make the player predict or recognize the result of the lottery. These game machines are equipped with display devices, speakers, light emitting devices, movable objects, etc., and depending on the progress of the game, effects such as visual effects, sound effects, light effects, and movable objects are executed. be.

Specifically for the slot machine, the effect selected by lottery is executed by operating the start lever. An opening effect is executed when a predetermined game state is started, and an ending effect is executed when a predetermined end opportunity occurs.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately control the execution of effects, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. a movable object (the spherical effect portion 77b of the accessory 75);
Operation control means for controlling the operation of the movable object (function for executing the processing of steps S4501 to S4507 in the production side MPU 92);
Transition means (main a function of executing the processing of steps S1502 and S1506 in the side MPU 72);
Prohibition setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4201 to S4209 in the production side MPU 92) for setting an operation prohibition state (correction operation standby state, accessory error state) in which the operation of the movable object is prohibited;
The operation is prohibited based on the establishment of the predetermined transition condition (the establishment of the bonus winning) or the occurrence of the transition to the predetermined game state (the game state has shifted to the bonus state) in the operation prohibited state. Prohibition release means for releasing the state (function of executing the processing of steps S4101 to S4111 in the production side MPU 92, function of executing the processing of steps S4701 to S4705 in the production side MPU 92),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic C1, by setting the operation prohibited state, it is possible to set the movable object to a state in which the operation is prohibited. In addition, by canceling the operation prohibition state based on the establishment of the predetermined transition condition or the occurrence of the transition to the predetermined game state, when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the operation prohibition state or the transition to the predetermined game state occurs, it is possible to operate the movable object after the transition to the predetermined game state.

Feature C2. Equipped with winning lottery means for executing the winning lottery process (function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S413 in the main side MPU 72),
Winning a prescribed role (1st to 4th BB winnings and 1st to 2nd RB winnings) while winning a prescribed role (either 1st to 4th BB winnings or 1st to 2nd RB winnings) in the lottery process for said role either) is satisfied, the predetermined transition condition is satisfied,
The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the prohibition releasing means releases the operation prohibition state based on the winning of the predetermined winning combination in the operation prohibition state.

According to the characteristic C2, even if the operation is prohibited when the predetermined winning combination is established, the operation prohibited state can be canceled based on the establishment of the predetermined winning combination. As a result, it is possible to secure an opportunity to release the operation prohibition state before transitioning to the predetermined game state, and to operate the movable object after transition to the predetermined game state.

Feature C3. The operation control means operates the winning response control means (step S2503 in the production side MPU 92, step A function of executing the processing of S2516 to S2518, a function of executing the processing of step S2607 in the production side MPU 92, a function of executing the processing of step S2715 in the production side MPU 92, and a processing of steps S4401 to S4405 in the production side MPU 92. and a function of executing the processing of steps S4501 to S4507 in the effect-side MPU 92).

According to the feature C3, when the predetermined combination is won in a situation where the action is not prohibited, the action of the movable object is performed based on the fact that the predetermined combination is won. Further, it has the configuration of the feature C2, and is configured such that the operation prohibition state is released based on the establishment of a predetermined winning combination in the operation prohibition state. If the operation prohibition state is canceled based on the occurrence of the opportunity to execute the action of the movable object performed based on the winning of the predetermined combination, the predetermined game will not be played if the action of the movable object is canceled. The opportunity to release the operation prohibition state before the transition to the state is lost. On the other hand, it is possible to secure an opportunity to release the operation prohibition state before shifting to the predetermined game state by the configuration that the operation prohibition state is released based on the establishment of the predetermined winning combination. Thereby, it is possible to increase the possibility that the movable object can be operated in the predetermined game state.

Feature C4. When the operation prohibition state is canceled by the prohibition release means, the means for operating the movable object (the function of executing the processing of steps S4104 and S4105 in the production side MPU 92, the processing of steps S4501 to S4507 in the production side MPU 92 A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, characterized in that it has a function of executing

According to the characteristic C4, by operating the movable object when the operation prohibition state is canceled, it is possible to secure an opportunity to operate the movable object before transition to the predetermined game state. In addition, it is possible to make a state in which it is possible to execute an effect of moving the movable object after the transition to the predetermined game state.

Feature C5. The game machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein the prohibition setting means sets the operation prohibition state based on repetition of an event in which the movable object does not operate normally.

According to the feature C5, the operation prohibition state is set based on repeated events in which the movable object does not operate normally. Compared to the configuration in which the operation-prohibited state is immediately set, the frequency of setting to the operation-prohibited state can be reduced. As a result, when a phenomenon in which the movable object does not operate normally is repeated, the number of times the operation of the movable object is canceled is reduced while setting the operation prohibited state, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be done.

In addition, for the configuration of the features C1 to C5, any one or more of the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B9, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D17, the features E1 to E9, and the features F1 to F7 may apply. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention of the characteristic group C, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that a lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the lottery. In addition, it is common that an effect is performed to make the player predict or recognize the result of the lottery. These game machines are equipped with display devices, speakers, light emitting devices, movable objects, etc., and depending on the progress of the game, effects such as visual effects, sound effects, light effects, and movable objects are executed. be.

Specifically for the slot machine, the effect selected by lottery is executed by operating the start lever. An opening effect is executed when a predetermined game state is started, and an ending effect is executed when a predetermined end opportunity occurs.

Here, in game machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately control movable objects, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. History storage execution means (function for executing the processing of steps S4901 to S4917 in the production side MPU 92, step S5001 in the production side MPU 92 ~ a function to execute the processing of step S5015);
When a predetermined generation opportunity (the end of the ART state ST6, the end of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2, and the number of given game media reaching a predetermined number of divisions after the transition to the ART state ST6) occurs and history correspondence information (history configuration data) that enables display means (image display device 63) to display a history correspondence image (history image G23) based on the history information stored in the history storage means. Generation means (function for executing the processing of steps S5101 to S5111 in the production side MPU 92),
a storage executing means (a function of executing the process of step S5112 in the production-side MPU 92) for storing the history correspondence information generated by the generating means in the correspondence information storage means (image reproduction storage area 94c);
Predetermined display opportunity (selection of the item "Display the latest history image" on the history menu screen, selection of a headline in the headline list display, history display control means (production side MPU 92) for causing the display means to display the history corresponding image based on the history corresponding information stored in the corresponding information storage means based on occurrence of , the function of executing the processing of steps S6008 to S6012 in the production side MPU 92, the function of executing the processing of steps S6205 to S6210 in the production side MPU 92),
with
The history-corresponding information that has become a display target of the history-corresponding image due to the occurrence of the predetermined display opportunity can become a display target of the history-corresponding image again based on the subsequent occurrence of the predetermined display opportunity. Amusement machine.

According to the feature D1, game history information is stored in the history storage means, and when a predetermined generation trigger occurs, the history corresponding image is displayed on the display means based on the history information stored in the history storage means. History correspondence information is generated that enables Then, based on the occurrence of the predetermined display opportunity, the history corresponding image is displayed on the display means based on the history corresponding information stored in the corresponding information storing means. Therefore, while the player does not need to take action to record the game with a camera or the like while the game is in progress, the history corresponding image can be displayed later to enable confirmation of the game history. . Thereby, it is possible for the player to concentrate on the effect performed during the progress of the game.

By storing the generated history correspondence information in the correspondence information storage means, the history correspondence information that has become the display target of the history correspondence image based on the occurrence of the predetermined display opportunity is history correspondence based on the subsequent occurrence of the predetermined display opportunity. When the image becomes a display object again, the history corresponding image can be displayed again on the display means based on the history correspondence information of the display object stored in the correspondence information storage means. In contrast to a configuration in which game history information is stored and history correspondence information is generated based on the history information each time a predetermined display opportunity occurs, a history correspondence image is stored to cause the display means to display the history correspondence image again. It is possible to reduce the data volume of the data to be stored, and reduce the processing load for causing the display means to display the history-corresponding image again.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the correspondence information storage means stores a plurality of history correspondence information with different timings at which the predetermined generation opportunity occurs.

According to feature D2, it is possible to repeatedly display a plurality of history-corresponding images on the display means based on a plurality of history-corresponding information stored in the correspondence information storage means. By making it possible to display a history-corresponding image on the display means based on the history-corresponding information generated and stored in the past, it is possible to check the past game history and improve the interest in the game. .

Feature D3. The predetermined display opportunity occurs when the player performs a display selection operation (operation of the operation device 64 for presentation),
The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the history display control means sets the history correspondence information corresponding to the display selection operation as a display target of the history correspondence image.

According to feature D3, the player can arbitrarily select history correspondence information to be displayed as a history correspondence image from a plurality of history correspondence information generated and stored in the past, and cause the display means to display the history correspondence information. can be made possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Feature D4. The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the history display control means sets one piece of history correspondence information as a display target of the history correspondence image for one display selection operation.

According to feature D4, one history-corresponding image is displayed on the display unit at one time because one history-corresponding image is displayed for one display selection operation. , the history-corresponding image can be carefully checked. In addition, it is possible to prevent unnecessary history corresponding images that have not been selected from being displayed together.

Feature D5. The generation means is a content adjusting means (a function of the effect-side MPU 92) that adjusts the contents of the history correspondence information so that the contents of the history correspondence information already stored in the correspondence information storage means and the contents of the history correspondence image are not the same. A gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D4, characterized in that it has a function of executing the process of step S5213 and a function of executing the process of step S5303 in the effect-side MPU 92 .

According to feature D5, it is possible to reduce the possibility of generating history correspondence information in which the content of the history correspondence image is the same as that of the history correspondence information already stored in the correspondence information storage means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the history-corresponding images from decreasing due to frequent generation of history-corresponding information in which the contents of the history-corresponding images are the same.

Feature D6. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein there are a plurality of types of the predetermined generation trigger.

According to feature D6, the possibility that the history information stored in the history storage means differs at the timing when the predetermined generation trigger occurs is increased compared to the configuration in which there is only one type of predetermined generation trigger. In addition, it is possible to increase the possibility that the history correspondence information generated based on the history information will be different. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the history-corresponding images displayed on the display means, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Feature D7. A setting means (a function for executing the processing of step S106 in the main side MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage,
Any one of features D1 to D6, characterized in that the history-corresponding image may include a suggestive image (background plate image G24 in the first embodiment) that suggests the setting value of the object to be used. The game machine described.

According to the feature D7, based on the suggestive image included in the history-corresponding image, it is possible to estimate the setting value of the use object that is the information corresponding to the player's advantage and is of high interest to the player. It is possible to increase the interest of the person in the history-corresponding image.

Feature D8. Based on the occurrence of the limitation opportunity (10 minutes have passed without the production side MPU 92 receiving the game start command since the start lever 41 was last operated in the normal game state ST1), at least the suggestion Limiting means for preventing the image from being displayed (function for executing the processing of steps S5712 to S5715 in the production side MPU 92 in the first embodiment, step S6908 to step S6910 in the production side MPU 92 in the third embodiment function to execute).

According to the feature D8, it is possible to prevent the set value from being predicted based on the suggestive image included in the history-corresponding image based on the history-corresponding information generated and stored before the restriction trigger occurred. .

Feature D9. The gaming machine according to feature D8, wherein the restriction means prevents the history correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means from being displayed on the basis of occurrence of the limitation opportunity.

According to the feature D9, based on the occurrence of the restriction opportunity, the display of the history corresponding image based on the history corresponding information stored in the corresponding information storage means is disabled, and based on the suggestive image included in the history corresponding image. It is possible to prevent the set value from being guessed by

Feature D10. The limiting means, based on the occurrence of the limiting opportunity, sets information for displaying the suggestive image among the history corresponding information stored in the corresponding information storing means, and sets the setting value of the use object. The gaming machine according to feature D8, wherein the information is changed to display an image that does not suggest (common background plate image).

According to the characteristic D10, history correspondence based on the history correspondence information generated and stored before the occurrence of the limitation opportunity is enabled while the history correspondence image can be displayed based on the history correspondence information even when the limitation opportunity occurs. It is possible to prevent the setting value from being guessed based on the image.

Feature D11. The restriction opportunity is based on the occurrence of a change operation indicating that the player has changed, or the continuation of a situation in which no game is played for a predetermined period (10 minutes in the first embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features D8 to D10, wherein

According to the feature D11, at least the suggestion image is not displayed based on the occurrence of the change operation indicating that the player has been changed. It is possible to prevent an act of guessing the set value to be used based on the game history of the player before the change. Further, by preventing at least the suggestive image from being displayed based on the continuation of a situation in which the game is not played for a predetermined period of time, if a situation where there is a high possibility that the player has been changed occurs, it is possible to It is possible to prevent the player from guessing the set value to be used based on the game history of the player before the change.

Feature D12. A data storage means (character ROM in the effect control board 91) for pre-storing image data for displaying an image on the display means,
The history display control means is
By reading the image data corresponding to the history correspondence information from the data storage means and setting the image data in the display setting means (frame area in the video RAM 96), the display setting means corresponds to the history correspondence information. Display data generation means for generating display data to be displayed (function for executing the processing of steps S2101 to S2114, steps S2119 and S2120 in the production side MPU 92);
Means for displaying the history corresponding image corresponding to the display data on the display means based on outputting the image signal corresponding to the display data to the display means (the function of executing the processing of step S2116 in the production side MPU 92) )When,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D11, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature D12, the display data corresponding to the history correspondence information is generated by reading the image data corresponding to the history correspondence information from the data storage means and setting it in the display setting means. For this reason, in contrast to the configuration in which display data for all patterns of combinations of image data that can be displayed as history-corresponding images are stored in advance, the history-corresponding images are stored in advance so that they can be displayed. The data volume of data can be reduced. Further, the configuration of the characteristic D1 is provided, and the history correspondence image is displayed on the display means based on the history correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means based on the occurrence of the predetermined display opportunity. For this reason, compared to the configuration in which once generated display data is stored and the history-corresponding image is displayed again based on the display data, the amount of data to be stored in order to enable the history-corresponding image to be displayed is reduced. Data capacity can be reduced, and a configuration for storing display data can be eliminated. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration for displaying the history-corresponding image on the display means.

Feature D13. The history correspondence information includes a plurality of element correspondence information (background plate image designation data, base plate image designation data, first word designation data, second word designation data, third word designation data, rank image designation data, ending image Data indicating the presence or absence of G29 and data indicating history points) are included,
The display data generation means reads the image data corresponding to each of the plurality of element correspondence information included in the history correspondence information from the data storage means and sets the image data in the display setting means. The gaming machine according to feature D12, wherein the display data corresponding to the history correspondence information is generated in the display setting means.

According to the feature D13, the history correspondence information includes a plurality of element correspondence information, and the history correspondence image is set with image data corresponding to each of the plurality of element correspondence information. It is possible to increase the variations of combinations of image data corresponding to the element correspondence information included in the corresponding images. Further, the display data corresponding to the history correspondence information is set in the display setting means by reading the image data corresponding to each of the plurality of element correspondence information included in the history correspondence information from the data storage means. Generated by For this reason, compared to a configuration in which display data for all combination patterns of a plurality of element correspondence information that can be displayed are stored in advance, data to be stored in advance to enable display of history correspondence images is reduced. Data capacity can be reduced.

Feature D14. The plurality of element correspondence information includes predetermined element correspondence information (e.g. wording designation data) and specific element correspondence information (e.g. background plate image designation data),
A plurality of selection candidate information that can be selected as the predetermined element correspondence information are set,
The gaming machine according to characteristic D13, wherein a plurality of selection candidate information that can be selected as the specific element corresponding information are set.

According to the feature D14, a plurality of selection candidate information that can be selected as the predetermined element correspondence information are set, and a plurality of selection candidate information that can be selected as the specific element correspondence information are set. It is possible to increase the variation of combinations of specific element correspondence information. As a result, it is possible to increase the variety of history-corresponding images that can be displayed on the display means, and increase interest in the history-corresponding images. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D15. The generation means has already stored in the correspondence information storage means the adjustment target information (first word designation data, second word designation data, and third word designation data), which is a part of the plurality of element correspondence information. content adjustment means for adjusting the content of the adjustment target information in the history correspondence information to be newly generated so as not to be the same as the history correspondence information that has been previously generated function of executing the process of step S5303 in the MPU 92).

According to the feature D15, it is possible to reduce the possibility of generating history correspondence information having the same content of adjustment target information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the history-corresponding images from decreasing due to frequent generation of history-corresponding information in which the contents of the history-corresponding images are the same. Since part of the plurality of element correspondence information is adjustment target information, it is possible to generate history correspondence information with little duplication as a whole history correspondence information in a mode including element correspondence information that is not adjustment target information.

Feature D16. If an in-progress display operation (an operation of selecting "intermediate generation of history image" on the history menu screen) is performed before the predetermined generation opportunity occurs, the generation means generates a timing at which the in-progress display operation is performed. midway generation means for generating the history correspondence information based on the history information set in the history storage means (function for executing the processing of steps S5101 to S5111 in the production side MPU 92, steps S6015 in the production side MPU 92 and A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D15, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S6016.

According to feature D16, by performing an intermediate display operation, history correspondence information can be generated based on the history information stored in the history storage means at an arbitrary timing by the player, and based on the history correspondence information. It is possible to cause the display means to display the history-corresponding image. As a result, the history-corresponding image can be displayed to the player who wants to confirm the history-corresponding image before the predetermined generation opportunity occurs in a situation where the closing time is approaching.

Feature D17. A setting means (a function for executing the process of step S106 in the production side MPU 92) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage,
A suggestive image suggesting the set value to be used for the history-corresponding image corresponding to the history-corresponding information generated based on the occurrence of the predetermined generation opportunity (background plate image G24 in the first embodiment) is a configuration that can include
The gaming machine according to feature D16, wherein the intermediate generation means generates the history correspondence information so that the history correspondence image does not include the suggestive image.

According to the feature D17, based on the suggestive image included in the history-corresponding image, it is possible to estimate the setting value of the use object that is the information corresponding to the player's advantage and is of high interest to the player. It is possible to increase the interest of the person in the history-corresponding image. By adopting a configuration in which a suggestive image is not set in the history-corresponding information generated based on the execution of the intermediate display operation, it is possible to repeatedly execute the intermediate display operation in a short period of time to obtain the plurality of history-corresponding images included in the plurality of history-corresponding images. is confirmed, and setting values to be used can be prevented from being incorrectly guessed based on the types of the plurality of suggestive images.

In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D17, one or more of the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B9, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D17, the features E1 to E9, and the features F1 to F7 may apply. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. History storage execution means (function for executing the processing of steps S4901 to S4917 in the production side MPU 92, step S5001 in the production side MPU 92 ~ a function to execute the processing of step S5015);
When a predetermined generation opportunity (the end of the ART state ST6, the end of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2, and the number of given game media reaching a predetermined number of divisions after the transition to the ART state ST6) occurs and history correspondence information (history configuration data) that enables display means (image display device 63) to display a history correspondence image (history image G23) based on the history information stored in the history storage means. Generation means (function for executing the processing of steps S5101 to S5111 in the production side MPU 92),
a storage executing means (a function of executing the process of step S5112 in the production-side MPU 92) for storing the history correspondence information generated by the generating means in the correspondence information storage means (image reproduction storage area 94c);
Data storage means (character ROM in production control board 91) for pre-storing image data for displaying an image on the display means;
Predetermined display opportunity (selection of the item "Display the latest history image" on the history menu screen, selection of a headline in the headline list display, operation is performed), the image data corresponding to the history correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means is read out from the data storage means, and the image data is set by the display setting means. (frame area in video RAM 96) to generate display data corresponding to the history correspondence information in the display setting means (steps S2101 to S2114, steps S2119 and S2120 in production side MPU 92). function to execute the processing of
Means for displaying the history corresponding image corresponding to the display data on the display means based on outputting the image signal corresponding to the display data to the display means (the function of executing the processing of step S2116 in the production side MPU 92) )When,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature E1, game history information is stored in the history storage means, and when a predetermined generation trigger occurs, the display means displays a history corresponding image based on the history information stored in the history storage means. History correspondence information is generated that enables Then, based on the occurrence of the predetermined display opportunity, the history corresponding image is displayed on the display means based on the history corresponding information stored in the corresponding information storing means. Therefore, while the player does not need to take action to record the game with a camera or the like while the game is in progress, the history corresponding image can be displayed later to enable confirmation of the game history. .

By storing the generated history correspondence information in the correspondence information storage means, a history correspondence image is displayed on the display means based on the history correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means when a predetermined display opportunity occurs. be able to. Compared to a configuration in which game history information is stored and history correspondence information is generated based on the history information when a predetermined display opportunity occurs, a history correspondence image is stored for displaying a history correspondence image on a display means. It is possible to reduce the data volume of the data to be stored, and reduce the processing load for displaying the history-corresponding image on the display means.

A history corresponding image can be displayed by combining the image data stored in the data storage means. The display data corresponding to the history correspondence information is generated by reading the image data corresponding to the history correspondence information from the data storage means and setting it in the display setting means. For this reason, compared to a configuration in which display data for all combination patterns of image data that can be displayed as history-corresponding images are stored in advance, data to be stored in advance to enable display of history-corresponding images. data capacity can be reduced.

Feature E2. The history correspondence information includes a plurality of element correspondence information (background plate image designation data, base plate image designation data, first word designation data, second word designation data, third word designation data, rank image designation data, ending image Data indicating the presence or absence of G29 and data indicating history points) are included,
The display data generation means reads the image data corresponding to each of the plurality of element correspondence information included in the history correspondence information from the data storage means and sets the image data in the display setting means. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the display data corresponding to the history correspondence information is generated in the display setting means.

According to feature E2, the history correspondence information includes a plurality of element correspondence information, and the history correspondence image is set with image data corresponding to each of the plurality of element correspondence information. It is possible to increase the variations of combinations of image data corresponding to the element correspondence information included in the corresponding images. Further, the display data corresponding to the history correspondence information is set in the display setting means by reading the image data corresponding to each of the plurality of element correspondence information included in the history correspondence information from the data storage means. Generated by For this reason, compared to a configuration in which display data for all combination patterns of a plurality of element correspondence information that can be displayed are stored in advance, data to be stored in advance to enable display of history correspondence images is reduced. Data capacity can be reduced.

Feature E3. The plurality of element correspondence information includes predetermined element correspondence information (e.g. wording designation data) and specific element correspondence information (e.g. background plate image designation data),
A plurality of selection candidate information that can be selected as the predetermined element correspondence information are set,
The gaming machine according to feature E2, wherein a plurality of selection candidate information that can be selected as the specific element correspondence information are set.

According to feature E3, a plurality of selection candidate information that can be selected as the predetermined element correspondence information are set, and a plurality of selection candidate information that can be selected as the specific element correspondence information are set. It is possible to increase the variation of combinations of specific element correspondence information. As a result, it is possible to increase the variety of history-corresponding images that can be displayed on the display means, and increase interest in the history-corresponding images. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature E4. The generation means has already stored in the correspondence information storage means the adjustment target information (first word designation data, second word designation data, and third word designation data), which is a part of the plurality of element correspondence information. content adjustment means for adjusting the content of the adjustment target information in the history correspondence information to be newly generated so as not to be the same as the history correspondence information that has been previously generated A gaming machine according to feature E2 or E3, characterized by comprising a function of executing the process of step S5303 in the MPU 92.

According to feature E4, it is possible to reduce the possibility of generating history correspondence information having the same content of adjustment target information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the history-corresponding images from decreasing due to frequent generation of history-corresponding information in which the contents of the history-corresponding images are the same. Since part of the plurality of element correspondence information is adjustment target information, it is possible to generate history correspondence information with little duplication as a whole history correspondence information in a mode including element correspondence information that is not adjustment target information.

Feature E5. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the correspondence information storage means stores a plurality of history correspondence information with different timings at which the predetermined generation opportunity occurs.

According to feature E5, it is possible to repeatedly display a plurality of history-corresponding images on the display means based on a plurality of history-corresponding information stored in the correspondence information storage means. By making it possible to display a history-corresponding image on the display means based on the history-corresponding information generated and stored in the past, it is possible to check the past game history and improve the interest in the game. .

Feature E6. The predetermined display opportunity occurs when the player performs a display selection operation (operation of the operation device 64 for presentation),
The gaming machine according to feature E5, wherein the display data generating means sets the history correspondence information corresponding to the display selection operation as a display target of the history correspondence image.

According to feature E6, the player can arbitrarily select history correspondence information to be displayed as a history correspondence image from a plurality of history correspondence information generated and stored in the past, and cause the display means to display the history correspondence information. can be made possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Feature E7. The gaming machine according to feature E6, wherein the display data generating means sets one piece of history correspondence information as a display target of the history correspondence image for one display selection operation.

According to the feature E7, one history-corresponding image is displayed on the display unit at one time because one history-corresponding image is displayed for one display selection operation. , the history-corresponding image can be carefully checked. In addition, it is possible to prevent unnecessary history corresponding images that have not been selected from being displayed together.

Feature E8. The generation means is a content adjusting means (a function of the effect-side MPU 92) that adjusts the contents of the history correspondence information so that the contents of the history correspondence information already stored in the correspondence information storage means and the contents of the history correspondence image are not the same. The gaming machine according to any one of features E5 to E7, characterized in that it has a function of executing the process of step S5213 and a function of executing the process of step S5303 in the effect-side MPU 92 .

According to feature E8, it is possible to reduce the possibility of generating history correspondence information in which the content of the history correspondence image is the same as the history correspondence information already stored in the correspondence information storage means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the history-corresponding images from decreasing due to frequent generation of history-corresponding information in which the contents of the history-corresponding images are the same.

Feature E9. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E8, wherein there are a plurality of types of the predetermined generation trigger.

According to feature E9, compared to a configuration in which there is only one type of predetermined generation trigger, the possibility that the history information stored in the history storage means differs at the timing when the predetermined generation trigger occurs is increased. In addition, it is possible to increase the possibility that the history correspondence information generated based on the history information will be different. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the history-corresponding images displayed on the display means, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, for the configuration of the features E1 to E9, any one or a plurality of configurations among the features A1 to A8, the features B1 to B9, the features C1 to C5, the features D1 to D17, the features E1 to E9, and the features F1 to F7 may apply. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. setting means (function for executing the process of step S106 in the main side MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage;
History storage execution means (function for executing the processing of steps S4901 to S4917 in the production side MPU 92, step S5001 in the production side MPU 92 ~ a function to execute the processing of step S5015);
When a predetermined generation opportunity (the end of the ART state ST6, the end of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2, and the number of given game media reaching a predetermined number of divisions after the transition to the ART state ST6) occurs and history correspondence information (history configuration data) that enables display means (image display device 63) to display a history correspondence image (history image G23) based on the history information stored in the history storage means. Generation means (function for executing the processing of steps S5101 to S5111 in the production side MPU 92),
a storage executing means (a function of executing the process of step S5112 in the production-side MPU 92) for storing the history correspondence information generated by the generating means in the correspondence information storage means (image reproduction storage area 94c);
Predetermined display opportunity (selection of the item "Display the latest history image" on the history menu screen, selection of a headline in the headline list display, history display control means (production side MPU 92) for causing the display means to display the history corresponding image based on the history corresponding information stored in the corresponding information storage means based on occurrence of A function of executing the processing of steps S6008, S6010 and S6011 in the above, a function of executing the processing of steps S6205 to S6209 in the production side MPU 92),
with
A gaming machine characterized in that the history-corresponding image can include a suggestive image (background plate image G24 in the first embodiment) that suggests the set value to be used.

According to the feature F1, game history information is stored in the history storage means, and when a predetermined generation opportunity occurs, the history corresponding image is displayed on the display means based on the history information stored in the history storage means. History correspondence information is generated that enables Then, based on the occurrence of the predetermined display opportunity, the history corresponding image is displayed on the display means based on the history corresponding information stored in the corresponding information storing means. Therefore, while the player does not need to take action to record the game with a camera or the like while the game is in progress, the history corresponding image can be displayed later to enable confirmation of the game history. .

By storing the generated history correspondence information in the correspondence information storage means, a history correspondence image is displayed on the display means based on the history correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means when a predetermined display opportunity occurs. be able to. Compared to a configuration in which game history information is stored and history correspondence information is generated based on the history information when a predetermined display opportunity occurs, a history correspondence image is stored for displaying a history correspondence image on a display means. It is possible to reduce the data volume of the data to be stored, and reduce the processing load for displaying the history-corresponding image on the display means.

Based on the suggestive image included in the history-corresponding image, it is possible to estimate the setting value of the use object, which is the information corresponding to the player's advantage and is of high interest to the player, so that the history-corresponding image of the player can be obtained. can increase the interest of

Feature F2. Based on the occurrence of the limitation opportunity (10 minutes have passed without the production side MPU 92 receiving the game start command since the start lever 41 was last operated in the normal game state ST1), at least the suggestion Limiting means for preventing the image from being displayed (function for executing the processing of steps S5712 to S5715 in the production side MPU 92 in the first embodiment, step S6908 to step S6910 in the production side MPU 92 in the third embodiment function to execute).

According to the feature F2, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being predicted based on the suggestive image included in the history-corresponding image based on the history-corresponding information that was generated and stored before the restriction trigger occurred. .

Feature F3. The gaming machine according to feature F2, wherein the restriction means prevents the history correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means from being displayed based on the occurrence of the limitation opportunity.

According to the feature F3, based on the occurrence of the restriction trigger, the display of the history corresponding image based on the history corresponding information stored in the corresponding information storage means is disabled, and based on the suggestive image included in the history corresponding image. It is possible to prevent the set value from being guessed by

Feature F4. The limiting means, based on the occurrence of the limiting opportunity, sets information for displaying the suggestive image among the history corresponding information stored in the corresponding information storing means, and sets the setting value of the use object. The gaming machine according to feature F2, wherein the information is changed to display an image that does not suggest anything.

According to the feature F4, even when a limitation opportunity occurs, a history correspondence image can be displayed based on the history correspondence information, while the history correspondence is performed based on the history correspondence information generated and stored before the limitation opportunity occurs. It is possible to prevent the setting value from being guessed based on the image.

Feature F5. The restriction opportunity is based on the occurrence of a change operation indicating that the player has changed, or the continuation of a situation in which no game is played for a predetermined period (10 minutes in the first embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features F2 to F4, wherein

According to the feature F5, at least the suggestion image is not displayed based on the occurrence of the change operation indicating that the player has been changed, so that when the player is changed, the player after the change is displayed. It is possible to prevent an act of guessing the set value to be used based on the game history of the player before the change. Further, by preventing at least the suggestive image from being displayed based on the continuation of a situation in which the game is not played for a predetermined period of time, if a situation where there is a high possibility that the player has been changed occurs, it is possible to It is possible to prevent the player from guessing the set value to be used based on the game history of the player before the change.

Feature F6. If an in-progress display operation (an operation of selecting "intermediate generation of history image" on the history menu screen) is performed before the predetermined generation opportunity occurs, the generation means generates a timing at which the in-progress display operation is performed. midway generation means for generating the history correspondence information based on the history information set in the history storage means (function for executing the processing of steps S5101 to S5111 in the production side MPU 92, step S6016 in the production side MPU 92 A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing.

According to the feature F6, by performing the midway display operation, the history corresponding information based on the history information stored in the history storage means can be generated at an arbitrary timing by the player, and based on the history corresponding information It is possible to cause the display means to display the history-corresponding image. As a result, the history-corresponding image can be displayed to the player who wants to confirm the history-corresponding image before the predetermined generation opportunity occurs in a situation where the closing time is approaching.

Feature F7. The gaming machine according to feature F6, wherein the intermediate generation means generates the history correspondence information so that the history correspondence image does not include the suggestive image.

According to the feature F7, based on the suggestive image included in the history-corresponding image, it is possible to estimate the setting value of the use object that is the information corresponding to the player's advantage and is of high interest to the player. It is possible to increase the interest of the person in the history-corresponding image. By adopting a configuration in which a suggestive image is not set in the history-corresponding information generated based on the execution of the intermediate display operation, it is possible to repeatedly execute the intermediate display operation in a short period of time to obtain the plurality of history-corresponding images included in the plurality of history-corresponding images. is confirmed, and setting values to be used can be prevented from being incorrectly guessed based on the types of the plurality of suggestive images.

In addition, with respect to the configuration of features F1 to F7, any one or a plurality of configurations among features A1 to A8, features B1 to B9, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D17, features E1 to E9, and features F1 to F7 may apply. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The following problems can be solved by the inventions of the feature group D, the feature group E, and the feature group F.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that a lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the lottery. In addition, it is common that an effect is performed to make the player predict or recognize the result of the lottery. These game machines are equipped with display devices, speakers, light emitting devices, movable objects, etc., and depending on the progress of the game, effects such as visual effects, sound effects, light effects, and movable objects are executed. be.

Specifically for the slot machine, the effect selected by lottery is executed by operating the start lever. An opening effect is executed when a predetermined game state is started, and an ending effect is executed when a predetermined end opportunity occurs.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: The rotation of the rotating body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the rotation of the rotating body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player responds to the pattern after the stop. A game machine that gives benefits to

10... Slot machine, 41... Start lever, 42 to 44... Stop button, 63... Image display device, 64... Operating device for effect, 64c... Lower button, 72... Main side MPU, 75... Accessory, 77b... Spherical effect Part 91... Production control board 92... Production side MPU 94a... Reading area 94b... History storage area 94c... Image reproduction storage area 96... Video RAM G23... History image G24... Background plate image , G29...Ending image, LY0 to LY11...0th to 11th layers, SC2...Advantageous section, ST1...Normal game state, ST3...BB state, ST4...RB state, ST6...ART state.

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine equipped with production control means for controlling the execution of production,
The production control means is
A predetermined unit performance is started based on the occurrence of a performance start opportunity, and when the performance start opportunity occurs in a situation where the predetermined unit performance is being executed, the predetermined unit performance being executed is terminated and the predetermined unit performance is performed. production start means for newly starting a unit production;
When the predetermined unit performance is newly started by the occurrence of the performance start opportunity in a situation where the specific performance is executed in the predetermined unit performance, a specific corresponding performance corresponding to the specific performance in the predetermined unit performance. a specific response measure that causes the
with
When the specific effect is being executed, at least both the first specific effect and the second specific effect are executed,
The second specific effect is executed as the specific corresponding effect, and the first specific effect is not executed,
The specific response means is configured to provide the specific response performance as the specific response performance when the performance start opportunity is generated and the predetermined unit performance is newly started in a situation where the specific performance is being executed in the predetermined unit performance. This game machine is characterized by changing the progress speed of the second specified performance from the previous progress speed of the second specified performance when executing the specified performance .

Images